AutoCAD 2009
AutoCAD Command Reference
January 2008
©
2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Published by: Autodesk, Inc. 111 Mclnnis Parkway San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1
3D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3DALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3DARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3DCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Adjust Clipping Planes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Performance Tuner Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Manual Performance Tuning Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 -3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3DCORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3DDISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3DDWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3D DWF Publish Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3DFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3DFLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3DFORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3DMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
iii
3DMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DOrbit Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DSIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box . . 3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DWALK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animation Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Position Locator Window . . . . . . . . . . . Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings Balloon . 3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 41 . 42 . 43 . 46 . 47 . 47 . 48 . 49 . 50 . 53 . 53 . 54 . 55 . 55 . 57
A Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACISIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTRECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action Recorder Preferences Dialog Box . ACTSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action Macro Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . -ACTSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTUSERINPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTUSERMESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert User Message Dialog Box . . . . . . -ACTUSERMESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . ADCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . . . Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADCNAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANIPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Path Animation Dialog Box . . . Animation Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . ANNOUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNORESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box . . Startup Suite Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv | Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 59 . 59 . 60 . 60 . 61 . 61 . 62 . 64 . 65 . 66 . 66 . 67 . 67 . 68 . 68 . 73 . 76 . 77 . 79 . 80 . 80 . 83 . 84 . 85 . 85 . 85 . 86 . 88 . 89
ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Archive - Set Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 -ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 -ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ARX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ATTACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 -ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Edit Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 -ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Attribute Extraction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 -ATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ATTIPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ATTREDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 AUTOPUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Auto Publish Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Chapter 3
B Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACTIONSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACTIONTOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Attribute Manager . . . . . . . Edit Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . Block Attribute Settings Dialog Box . BATTORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attribute Order Dialog Box . . . . . BAUTHORPALETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE . . . . . . . . . BCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCYCLEORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Cycling Order Dialog Box .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 139 . 139 . 145 . 147 . 153 . 154 . 154 . 155 . 157 . 160 . 161 . 162 . 162 . 163 . 163 . 164 . 164
Contents | v
BEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Edit Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 -BEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 BGRIPSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 -BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 BLOCKICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 BLOOKUPTABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Property Lookup Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Boundary Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 -BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 BPARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 BREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 B S AV E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 2 BSAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Save Block As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 BVHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 BVSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 BVSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Visibility States Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 New Visibility State Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 -BVSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Chapter 4
C Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand Syntax of Expressions . . Format Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . Format Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . Use AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . Use System Variables in Calculations . Convert Units of Measurement . . . . Use Standard Numeric Functions . . . Calculate a Vector from Two Points . . Calculate the Length of a Vector . . .
vi | Contents
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. 219 . 219 . 221 . 222 . 223 . 224 . 225 . 226 . 226 . 227 . 229
Obtain a Point by Cursor . . . . . . . . . . Obtain the Last-Specified Point . . . . . . . Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions . Convert Points Between UCS and WCS . . . Calculate a Point on a Line . . . . . . . . . Rotate a Point About an Axis . . . . . . . . Obtain an Intersection Point . . . . . . . . Calculate a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtain a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtain an Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculate a Normal Vector . . . . . . . . . . Use Shortcut Functions . . . . . . . . . . . CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKSTANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . CHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLASSICLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEANSCREENON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEANSCREENOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . -COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMANDLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMANDLINEHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERTCTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERTOLDLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERTOLDMATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERTPSTYLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOSURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYTOLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 229 . 230 . 230 . 232 . 233 . 233 . 234 . 235 . 236 . 236 . 238 . 240 . 240 . 242 . 243 . 247 . 251 . 252 . 253 . 255 . 256 . 258 . 259 . 259 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 261 . 265 . 266 . 267 . 267 . 267 . 274 . 275 . 276 . 276 . 277 . 278 . 279 . 280 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 283 . 284
Contents | vii
Copy To Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . -COPYTOLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize User Interface Dialog Box . . . Button Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Find and Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . Shortcut Keys Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Long String Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . Tag Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . Select Help ID Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Edit Object Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . CUIEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUIIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUILOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box . CUIUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 285 . 285 . 286 . 287 . 294 . 296 . 299 . 300 . 300 . 301 . 302 . 303 . 304 . 304 . 305 . 305 . 306 . 306 . 307 . 308
D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 DATAEXTRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Extraction Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Folder Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . Data Extraction - Additional Settings Dialog Box . New Drawings Found Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Link External Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . Sort Columns Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Formula Column Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Set Cell Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Formula Column Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Filter Column Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Extraction - Out of Date Table Dialog Box . . -DATAEXTRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATALINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New and Modify Excel Link Dialog Box . . . . . . DATALINKUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DBCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dbConnect Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Query Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Column Values Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure a Data Source Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Data View and Query Options Dialog Box . . . .
viii | Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 315 . 316 . 326 . 327 . 328 . 329 . 331 . 332 . 333 . 336 . 337 . 338 . 338 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 343 . 344 . 346 . 350 . 360 . 367 . 367 . 368
Export Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Export Query Set Dialog Box . . . . . Export Template Set Dialog Box . . . . Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . Import Query Set Dialog Box . . . . . Import Template Set Dialog Box . . . . Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . Label Template Properties Dialog Box . Link Conversion Dialog Box . . . . . . Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . Link Template Properties Dialog Box . New Label Template Dialog Box . . . . New Link Template Dialog Box . . . . New Query Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . Select a Database Object Dialog Box . . Select Data Object Dialog Box . . . . . Sort Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box . DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . DDVPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box . . . . . DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box . . . -DGNATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export DGN Settings Dialog Box . . . DGNEXPORT Conversion Table . . . . -DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import DGN Settings Dialog Box . . . DGNIMPORT Conversion Table . . . . DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table . . -DGNIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 370 . 371 . 371 . 371 . 372 . 373 . 373 . 374 . 379 . 380 . 382 . 383 . 386 . 388 . 388 . 389 . 390 . 391 . 391 . 392 . 392 . 393 . 394 . 395 . 396 . 396 . 397 . 397 . 398 . 398 . 400 . 400 . 400 . 401 . 402 . 404 . 405 . 407 . 408 . 412 . 415 . 416 . 417 . 420 . 423 . 425
Contents | ix
DGNLAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 DGN Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 DGNMAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 DGN Mapping Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 New Mapping Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 DIM and DIM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 DIMANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 DIMARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 DIMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 DIMINSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Inspection Dimension Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 -DIMINSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 DIMJOGGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 DIMJOGLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 DIMOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 DIMREASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 DIMREGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 DIMSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Dimension Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes . . . . 483 Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 -DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 DISTANTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 DONUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 DRAWINGRECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Drawing Recovery Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 DRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
x | Contents
DSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drafting Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box . . . Dimension Input Settings Dialog Box . Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box . . . . DSVIEWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aerial View Window . . . . . . . . . . DVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWFADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWFATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach DWF Underlay Dialog Box . . . Substitute DWF Name Dialog Box . . . -DWFATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWFCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWFFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWFLAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWF Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . DWGPROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Properties Dialog Box . . . . Add Custom Property Dialog Box . . . DXBIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 523 . 523 . 535 . 536 . 537 . 538 . 539 . 541 . 550 . 551 . 552 . 554 . 555 . 556 . 557 . 558 . 558 . 559 . 559 . 564 . 564
E Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -EATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDGESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Transmittal Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmittal Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Transmittal Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . -ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORTLAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Layout to Model Space Drawing Dialog Box . EXPORTTOAUTOCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNALREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 565 . 566 . 569 . 569 . 570 . 572 . 573 . 573 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 583 . 584 . 586 . 590 . 591 . 591 . 593 . 594 . 595 . 595 . 597 . 601
Contents | xi
External References Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Chapter 7
F Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Object Selection Filters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Find and Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 FLATSHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Flatshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 FOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 FREESPOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 FREEWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Chapter 8
G Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 GEOGRAPHICLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Geographic Location Dialog Box . . . . . Location Already Exists Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box . Geographic Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Location Picker Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTOURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRADIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRAPHSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Grouping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Order Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 643 . 644 . 644 . 645 . 645 . 649 . 649 . 650 . 650 . 651 . 652 . 653 . 656 . 657
H Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box . . Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box . -HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . -HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii | Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. 661 . 662 . 674 . 675 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 687
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIDEPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HLSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . . Select Place in Document Dialog Box . -HYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HYPERLINKOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 10
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. 689 . 689 . 691 . 691 . 691 . 692 . 695 . 696 . 696 . 698
I Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Adjust Dialog Box . . . . . . -IMAGEADJUST . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPRESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export to Impression Dialog Box . IMPRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . -INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERTOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Object Dialog Box . . . . . . INTERFERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference Settings Dialog Box . . Interference Checking Dialog Box . -INTERFERE . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 11
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 699 . 699 . 700 . 703 . 703 . 705 . 705 . 706 . 709 . 710 . 711 . 712 . 713 . 713 . 715 . 716 . 717 . 719 . 722 . 723 . 724 . 725 . 726 . 727 . 729 . 730
J Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 JOGSECTION . JOIN . . . . . JPGOUT . . . JUSTIFYTEXT .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. 733 . 733 . 735 . 736
Contents | xiii
Chapter 12
L Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 LAYCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 LAYDEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 Delete Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 -LAYDEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 Layer Properties Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 Select Linetype Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Lineweight Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754 Layer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 Customize Layer Columns Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 -LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 LAYERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 LAYERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Layer States Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 New Layer State to Save Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 Edit Layer State Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Select Layers to Add to Layer State Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 770 Select Layer States Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 LAYFRZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 LAYISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 LAYLCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 Change to Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 -LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 LAYMCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 LAYMRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 Merge Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 Merge to Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779 -LAYMRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779 LAYOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 LAYON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 LAYOUTWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 Layout Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 LAYTHW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 LAYTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Layer Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Edit/New Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 LAYULK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 LAYUNISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 LAYVPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
xiv | Contents
LAYWALK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 LayerWalk Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 LEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 LENGTHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 LIGHTLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Lights in Model Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 LIGHTLISTCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 Linetype Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 -LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 LIVESECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 LOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Loft Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 Lineweight Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 -LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Chapter 13
M Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 MARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Markup Set Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MARKUPCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MASSPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATCHCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Attachment Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Tool Property Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Material and Edit Name and Description Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Preview Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 825 . 825 . 831 . 832 . 836 . 837 . 837 . 840 . 840 . 840 . 843 . 843 . 873 . 874
. . . .
. 875 . 875 . 876 . 876
Contents | xv
MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877 MENULOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878 MENUUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878 MINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 MIRROR3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887 MLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 MLEADERALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 MLEADERCOLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893 MLEADEREDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893 MLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 Multileader Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 MLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 -MLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 MLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 Multiline Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 Create New Multiline Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 New, Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920 MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920 MREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 MSLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922 MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922 MTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 MTEXT Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924 In-Place Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 Paragraph Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 Columns Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 Column Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 Background Mask Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 Find and Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 Stack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 -MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Symbols and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 MVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 MVSETUP on the Model Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 MVSETUP on a Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
xvi | Contents
Chapter 14
N Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 NAVVCUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViewCube Settings Dialog Box . . . . NAVSMOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NAVSMOTIONCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . NAVSWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SteeringWheels Settings Dialog Box . NETLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Drawing Dialog Box . . Quick Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . Advanced Setup Wizard . . . . . . . NEW Command Prompt . . . . . . . NEWSHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEWSHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 967 . 968 . 971 . 971 . 971 . 972 . 974 . 974 . 975 . 978 . 980 . 982 . 982 . 983 . 983
O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986 Add Scales to Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 -OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 OLELINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990 Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Convert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Change Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 OLESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 OLE Text Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 Log In to Buzzsaw Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 Create a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 1002 Edit a Buzzsaw Location Shortcut Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 1002 Select a Buzzsaw Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005 Partial Open Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 OPEN Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 OPENDWFMARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 OPENSHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Contents | xvii
Alternate Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048 Drawing Window Colors Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 Command Line Window Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051 Light Glyph Appearance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052 Camera Glyph Appearance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052 Thumbnail Preview Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 Right-Click Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056 Field Update Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 Visual Effect Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 Advanced Preview Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059 Add Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060 Change Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 Transparency Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 Hidden Message Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062 ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Chapter 16
P Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 Page Setup Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 New Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068 Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069 Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077 Import Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077 PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079 Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079 -PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080 Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 PARTIALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 Partial Load Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082 -PARTIALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084 PARTIALOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 PASTEASHYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 PASTEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 PASTEORIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089 PASTESPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 Paste Special Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 PCINWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 PLANESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
xviii | Contents
PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117 Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118 Add Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128 Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Plot) . . . 1128 Plot Job Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129 Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 1129 -PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135 Plot Stamp Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135 User Defined Fields Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137 Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137 -PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140 PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142 Current Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142 Select Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143 -PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144 PLOTTERMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Add-a-Plotter Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Plotter Configuration Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146 Configure LPT Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158 Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158 Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 1159 PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160 POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161 POINTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162 POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167 POLYSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169 PRESSPULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173 PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174 PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177 General Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179 Cell Border Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 Add Distance or Angle Value Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 Lighting Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 -PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 Publish Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 Publish Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196 Publish Block Template Dialog Box (Publish) . . . . . . . . . . 1199 Block Template Options Dialog Box (Publish) . . . . . . . . . . 1201 Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Publish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Contents | xix
DWF Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 Confirm DWF Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 Publish Job Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 PUBLISH Command Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 PUBLISHTOWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 Publish to Web Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 Purge Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 -PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 PYRAMID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
Chapter 17
Q Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211 QCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211 QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211 QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212 Leader Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214 QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 QSELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Quick Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220 QTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222 QUICKCALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222 QuickCalc Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223 Variable Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 Category Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231 QUICKCUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 QVDRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 QVDRAWINGCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233 QVLAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233 QVLAYOUTCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Chapter 18
R Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235 RAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECOVERALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECTANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab . Reference Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . .
xx | Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. 1235 . 1236 . 1236 . 1237 . 1240 . 1240 . 1240 . 1241 . 1241 . 1243 . 1243 . 1244
-REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246 REFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247 REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 REGENALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 REGENAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 REGION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 REINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251 Re-initialization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251 RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252 Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252 -RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253 RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253 Render Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254 Missing Texture Maps Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258 Render Output File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 -RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 RENDERCROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268 RENDERENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268 Render Environment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269 RENDEREXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 Adjust Rendered Exposure Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 RENDERPRESETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 Render Presets Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 Copy Render Preset Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280 RENDERWIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280 RENDSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 RESETBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287 RIBBON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 RIBBONCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 RMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 ROTATE3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291 RPREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296 Advanced Render Settings Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296 Output Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304 RPREFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305 RSCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
Chapter 19
S Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Contents | xxi
Template Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 Saveas Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 SAVEAS Command Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 SAVEIMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 SCALELISTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316 Edit Scale List Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316 Add Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317 Edit Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318 -SCALELISTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319 SCALETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320 SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 SECTIONPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324 Section Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 Generate Section / Elevation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 SECURITYOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 Security Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330 Confirm Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332 Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332 SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332 SETBYLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 SetByLayer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 SETIDROPHANDLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 Set Default i-drop Content Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 i-drop Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 SETUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 -SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 SHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 Sheet Set Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 Subset Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350 Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 1351 New Sheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352 Rename & Renumber Sheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353 Rename & Renumber View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354 Import Layouts as Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355 Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 Edit Sheet List Table Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359 Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360 Add Custom Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361 Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362 Sheet Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
xxii | Contents
New Sheet Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 Sheet Selections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364 View Category Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364 List of Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 Select Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366 SHEETSETHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 SHOWMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 SHOWPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 SIGVALIDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369 Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370 SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372 SLICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373 SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378 SOLDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 SOLIDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 SOLPROF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 SOLVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 SPACETRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 Check Spelling Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408 Check Spelling Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410 Dictionaries Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411 Manage Custom Dictionaries Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412 SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413 SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415 SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418 SPOTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424 STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429 Configure Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433 STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435 STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436 STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437 Text Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438 -STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 STYLESMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 Plot Style Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Edit Lineweights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451 SUNPROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452 Sun Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
Contents | xxiii
SUNPROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 SYSWINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Chapter 20
T Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 Insert Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462 Table Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465 -TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468 Manage Cell Content Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472 TABLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473 TABLEEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473 TABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473 Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474 Create New Table Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475 New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476 Create New Cell Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481 Manage Cell Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481 Table Cell Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482 Additional Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 TABLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485 TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490 TARGETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 TASKBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495 TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496 Text Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 Special Unicode Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 Control Codes and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503 TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 TEXTSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 TEXTTOFRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 THICKEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 TIFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506 TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506 TINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508 TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508 Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512 Material Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 -TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515 TOOLPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 View Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519 Tool Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520 Add Actions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
xxiv | Contents
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 TPNAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524 TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524 TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525 TRAYSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525 Tray Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526 TREESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526 TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
Chapter 21
U Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533 U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533 UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534 UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542 UCS Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545 UCS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546 Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550 UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551 UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552 UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552 UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555 UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556 Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556 Direction Control Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558 -UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559 UPDATEFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560 UPDATETHUMBSNOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Chapter 22
V Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 VBAIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 VBALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 1564 VBAMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565 VBA Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566 VBARUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567 Macros Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567 Select Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568 VBA Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 -VBARUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 VBASTMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570 VBAUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570 VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571 View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571 New View / Shot Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
Contents | xxv
Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583 Adjust Sun & Sky Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585 Adjust Background Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589 -VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591 VIEWGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593 VIEWPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594 VIEWPLOTDETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594 Plot and Publish Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594 Plot and Publish Status Bar Icon Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . 1596 VIEWRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597 VISUALSTYLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598 Visual Styles Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598 Create New Visual Style and Edit Name and Description Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604 -VISUALSTYLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604 VISUALSTYLESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 VLISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 VPCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606 VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 VPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 VPMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612 VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613 Viewports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614 -VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 VSCURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620 VSLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 VSSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 VTOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 View Transitions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
Chapter 23
W Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625 WALKFLYSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . Walk and Fly Settings Dialog Box . WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . -WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEBLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WHOHAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WIPEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMFOPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMF In Options Dialog Box . . . . WMFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvi | Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 1625 . 1625 . 1627 . 1627 . 1629 . 1630 . 1633 . 1636 . 1636 . 1637 . 1642 . 1642 . 1642 . 1643
WSSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workspace Settings Dialog Box . WSSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Workspace Dialog Box . .
Chapter 24
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. 1643 . 1644 . 1644 . 1645
X Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647 XATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647 External Reference Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647 XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651 Xbind Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651 -XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652 XCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653 XEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655 XLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656 XOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659 XPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659 XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661 Bind Xrefs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661 -XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
Chapter 25
Z Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 Zoom Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671
Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673 Chapter 26
Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675 Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) . . . Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) . FROM (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . MTP (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . . TRACKING (Command Modifier) . . . . . . Object Snaps (Command Modifier) . . . . . Selection Modes (Command Modifier) . . . .
Chapter 27
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. 1675 . 1675 . 1676 . 1677 . 1677 . 1678 . 1679
System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681 3D System Variables . . . . . . 3DDWFPREC . . . . . . . 3DCONVERSIONMODE . 3DSELECTIONMODE . . . A System Variables . . . . . . . ACADLSPASDOC . . . . . ACADPREFIX . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. 1681 . 1681 . 1682 . 1683 . 1683 . 1683 . 1684
Contents | xxvii
ACADVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684 ACISOUTVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684 ACTPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685 ACTRECORDERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685 ACTRECPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686 ACTUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686 ADCSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686 AFLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687 ANGBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688 ANGDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688 ANNOALLVISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688 ANNOAUTOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689 ANNOTATIVEDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690 APBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690 APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691 APSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691 AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692 ATTDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692 ATTIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693 ATTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693 ATTMULTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1694 ATTREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1694 AUDITCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1694 AUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695 AUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695 AUTODWFPUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696 AUTOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696 B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697 BACKGROUNDPLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697 BACKZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698 BACTIONCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698 BDEPENDENCYHIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699 BGRIPOBJCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699 BGRIPOBJSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700 BINDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700 BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700 BLOCKEDITLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701 BLOCKEDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701 BPARAMETERCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702 BPARAMETERFONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702 BPARAMETERSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702 BTMARKDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703 BVMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703 C System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704 CALCINPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704 CAMERADISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
xxviii | Contents
CAMERAHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705 CANNOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705 CANNOSCALEVALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705 CAPTURETHUMBNAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706 CDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706 CECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707 CELTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707 CELTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707 CELWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708 CENTERMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708 CHAMFERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 CHAMFERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 CHAMFERC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 CHAMFERD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710 CHAMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710 CIRCLERAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710 CLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711 CLEANSCREENSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711 CLISTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711 CMATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712 CMDACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712 CMDDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713 CMDECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713 CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714 CMDNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714 CMLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715 CMLJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715 CMLSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715 CMLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716 COMPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716 COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716 COPYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717 CPLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717 CPROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718 CROSSINGAREACOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718 CSHADOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719 CTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719 CTABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720 CURSORSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720 CVPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720 D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721 DATALINKNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721 DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721 DBCSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722 DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723 DBMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
Contents | xxix
DCTCUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724 DCTMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724 DEFAULTLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725 DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726 DEFLPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726 DEFPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727 DELOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727 DEMANDLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728 DGNFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729 DGNIMPORTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729 DGNMAPPINGPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730 DGNOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730 DIASTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731 DIMADEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731 DIMALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1732 DIMALTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1732 DIMALTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1732 DIMALTRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 DIMALTTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 DIMALTTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 DIMALTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734 DIMALTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735 DIMANNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736 DIMAPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736 DIMARCSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736 DIMASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737 DIMASZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738 DIMATFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738 DIMAUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739 DIMAZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740 DIMBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740 DIMBLK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742 DIMBLK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742 DIMCEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743 DIMCLRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743 DIMCLRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1744 DIMCLRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1744 DIMDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1744 DIMDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 DIMDLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 DIMDSEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 DIMEXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746 DIMEXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746 DIMFRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747 DIMFXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747 DIMFXLON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747
xxx | Contents
DIMGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748 DIMJOGANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748 DIMJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748 DIMLDRBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749 DIMLFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749 DIMLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 DIMLTEX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 DIMLTEX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 DIMLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 DIMLUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 DIMLWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752 DIMLWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752 DIMPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753 DIMRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753 DIMSAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754 DIMSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754 DIMSD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755 DIMSD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755 DIMSE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756 DIMSE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756 DIMSOXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 DIMTAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 DIMTDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 DIMTFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 DIMTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759 DIMTFILLCLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759 DIMTIH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1760 DIMTIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1760 DIMTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761 DIMTMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761 DIMTOFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1762 DIMTOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1762 DIMTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763 DIMTOLJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763 DIMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763 DIMTSZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764 DIMTVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764 DIMTXSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765 DIMTXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765 DIMTZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765 DIMUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766 DIMZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767 DISPSILH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767 DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768 DONUTID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768
Contents | xxxi
DONUTOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768 DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769 DRAGP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769 DRAGP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770 DRAGVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770 DRAWORDERCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770 DRSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771 DTEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772 DWFFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772 DWFOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 DWGCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 DWGCODEPAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774 DWGNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774 DWGPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775 DWGTITLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775 DXEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775 DYNDIGRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776 DYNDIVIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777 DYNMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777 DYNPICOORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1778 DYNPIFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779 DYNPIVIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779 DYNPROMPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780 DYNTOOLTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780 E System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 EDGEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 ENTERPRISEMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782 ERRNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782 ERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782 EXPERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783 EXPLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784 EXTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784 EXTMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785 EXTNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785 F System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786 FACETRATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786 FACETRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786 FIELDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787 FIELDEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787 FILEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 FILLETRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 FILLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 FONTALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789 FONTMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789 FRONTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790
xxxii | Contents
FULLOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790 FULLPLOTPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1791 G System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1791 GEOLATLONGFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1791 GEOMARKERVISIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792 GRIDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792 GRIDMAJOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793 GRIDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793 GRIDUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1794 GRIPBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1794 GRIPCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1794 GRIPDYNCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795 GRIPHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795 GRIPHOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795 GRIPOBJLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795 GRIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1796 GRIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1796 GRIPTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797 GTAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797 GTDEFAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797 GTLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1798 H System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 HALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 HANDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 HIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 HIDETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 HPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801 HPASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801 HPBOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801 HPDOUBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802 HPDRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802 HPGAPTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 HPMAXLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 HPINHERIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 HPNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 HPOBJWARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 HPORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 HPORIGINMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805 HPSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805 HPSEPARATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 HPSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 HYPERLINKBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 I System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 IMAGEHLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 IMPLIEDFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807
Contents | xxxiii
INDEXCTL . . . . . . . . INETLOCATION . . . . . INPUTHISTORYMODE . . INSBASE . . . . . . . . . . INSNAME . . . . . . . . . INSUNITS . . . . . . . . . INSUNITSDEFSOURCE . . INSUNITSDEFTARGET . . INTELLIGENTUPDATE . . INTERFERECOLOR . . . . INTERFEREOBJVS . . . . . INTERFEREVPVS . . . . . INTERSECTIONCOLOR . . INTERSECTIONDISPLAY . ISAVEBAK . . . . . . . . . ISAVEPERCENT . . . . . . ISOLINES . . . . . . . . . L System Variables . . . . . . . LASTANGLE . . . . . . . . LASTPOINT . . . . . . . . LASTPROMPT . . . . . . . LATITUDE . . . . . . . . . LAYEREVAL . . . . . . . . LAYEREVALCTL . . . . . . LAYERFILTERALERT . . . LAYERMANAGERSTATE . LAYERNOTIFY . . . . . . LAYLOCKFADECTL . . . . LAYOUTREGENCTL . . . LEGACYCTRLPICK . . . . LENSLENGTH . . . . . . . LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY . . LIGHTINGUNITS . . . . . LIGHTLISTSTATE . . . . . LIGHTSINBLOCKS . . . . LIMCHECK . . . . . . . . LIMMAX . . . . . . . . . LIMMIN . . . . . . . . . . LINEARBRIGHTNESS . . . LINEARCONTRAST . . . . LOCALE . . . . . . . . . . LOCALROOTPREFIX . . . LOCKUI . . . . . . . . . . LOFTANG1 . . . . . . . . LOFTANG2 . . . . . . . . LOFTMAG1 . . . . . . . .
xxxiv | Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 1808 . 1808 . 1808 . 1809 . 1810 . 1810 . 1811 . 1813 . 1814 . 1815 . 1815 . 1816 . 1816 . 1816 . 1817 . 1817 . 1818 . 1818 . 1818 . 1818 . 1819 . 1819 . 1819 . 1820 . 1821 . 1822 . 1822 . 1823 . 1824 . 1825 . 1825 . 1826 . 1826 . 1827 . 1827 . 1828 . 1828 . 1828 . 1829 . 1829 . 1829 . 1830 . 1830 . 1831 . 1831 . 1832
LOFTMAG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1832 LOFTNORMALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1832 LOFTPARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833 LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834 LOGEXPCONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834 LOGEXPDAYLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834 LOGEXPMIDTONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835 LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835 LOGFILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836 LOGFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836 LOGFILEPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836 LOGINNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1837 LONGITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1837 LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838 LUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838 LUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838 LWDEFAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839 LWDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839 LWUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1840 M System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1840 MATSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1840 MAXACTVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1841 MAXSORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1841 MBUTTONPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1841 MEASUREINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1842 MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1842 MENUBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843 MENUCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843 MENUECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843 MENUNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844 MIRRTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844 MLEADERSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1845 MODEMACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1845 MSMSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846 MSOLESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846 MSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846 MTEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847 MTEXTFIXED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847 MTEXTTOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848 MTJIGSTRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849 MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849 N System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1850 NAVVCUBEDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1850 NAVVCUBELOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1850 NAVVCUBEOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851 NAVVCUBEORIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851
Contents | xxxv
NAVVCUBESIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851 NAVSWHEELMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852 NAVSWHEELOPACITYBIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853 NAVSWHEELOPACITYMINI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853 NAVSWHEELSIZEBIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853 NAVSWHEELSIZEMINI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854 NOMUTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854 NORTHDIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855 O System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855 OBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855 OBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856 OFFSETDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857 OFFSETGAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1858 OLEFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1858 OLEHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1859 OLEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1859 OLESTARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860 OPENPARTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860 OPMSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861 ORTHOMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861 OSMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1862 OSNAPCOORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1863 OSNAPNODELEGACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1864 OSNAPZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1864 OSOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1865 P System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1865 PALETTEOPAQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1865 PAPERUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866 PDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867 PDSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867 PEDITACCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867 PELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868 PERIMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868 PERSPECTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869 PERSPECTIVECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869 PFACEVMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1870 PICKADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1870 PICKAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1870 PICKBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871 PICKDRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871 PICKFIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1872 PICKSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1872 PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873 PLINEGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873 PLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873 PLINEWID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1874
xxxvi | Contents
PLOTOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1874 PLOTROTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 PLQUIET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 POLARADDANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1876 POLARANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1876 POLARDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877 POLARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877 POLYSIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878 POPUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878 PREVIEWEFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879 PREVIEWFILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879 PREVIEWTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880 PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880 PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880 PROJECTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1881 PROJMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1881 PROXYGRAPHICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882 PROXYNOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882 PROXYSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883 PROXYWEBSEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883 PSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884 PSOLHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884 PSOLWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885 PSTYLEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885 PSTYLEPOLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885 PSVPSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1886 PUBLISHALLSHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1886 PUBLISHCOLLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887 PUBLISHHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887 PUCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888 Q System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888 QCSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888 QPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889 QPLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889 QTEXTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1890 QVDRAWINGPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1890 QVLAYOUTPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891 R System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891 RASTERDPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891 RASTERPERCENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892 RASTERPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892 RASTERTHRESHOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892 RECOVERYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893 REFEDITNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893 REGENMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894 RE-INIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894
Contents | xxxvii
REMEMBERFOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895 RENDERPREFSSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895 RENDERUSERLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896 REPORTERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896 RIBBONSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897 ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897 ROLLOVERTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898 RTDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898 S System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899 SAVEFIDELITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899 SAVEFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899 SAVEFILEPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899 SAVENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 SAVETIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 SCREENBOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901 SCREENMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901 SCREENSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901 SELECTIONANNODISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902 SELECTIONAREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902 SELECTIONAREAOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903 SELECTIONPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903 SETBYLAYERMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904 SHADEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904 SHADEDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905 SHADOWPLANELOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905 SHORTCUTMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906 SHOWHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906 SHOWLAYERUSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907 SHOWMOTIONPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907 SHPNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908 SIGWARN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908 SKETCHINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1909 SKPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1909 SNAPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1909 SNAPBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 SNAPISOPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 SNAPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 SNAPSTYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1911 SNAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1911 SNAPUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1912 SOLIDCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1912 SOLIDHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1912 SORTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1913 SPLFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1914 SPLINESEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1914 SPLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1915
xxxviii | Contents
SSFOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1915 SSLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1915 SSMAUTOOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1916 SSMPOLLTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1916 SSMSHEETSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1917 SSMSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1917 STANDARDSVIOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918 STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918 STATUSBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1919 STEPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1919 STEPSPERSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920 SUNPROPERTIESSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920 SUNSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920 SURFTAB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 SURFTAB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 SURFTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 SURFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922 SURFV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922 SYSCODEPAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 T System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 TABLEINDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 TABLETOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 TABMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1924 TARGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1924 TBCUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1925 TDCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1925 TDINDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1925 TDUCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926 TDUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926 TDUSRTIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926 TDUUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1927 TEMPOVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1927 TEMPPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1927 TEXTEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928 TEXTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928 TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929 TEXTQLTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929 TEXTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930 TEXTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930 THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930 THUMBSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930 TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931 TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931 TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1936 TOOLTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1936 TPSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937
Contents | xxxix
TRACEWID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937 TRACKPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937 TRAYICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1938 TRAYNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1938 TRAYTIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939 TREEDEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939 TREEMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1940 TRIMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1941 TSPACEFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1941 TSPACETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1941 TSTACKALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1942 TSTACKSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1942 U System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 UCSAXISANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 UCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 UCSDETECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 UCSFOLLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 UCSNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1945 UCSORG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1945 UCSORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946 UCSVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946 UCSVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946 UCSXDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1947 UCSYDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1947 UNDOCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948 UNDOMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948 UNITMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949 UPDATETHUMBNAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949 USERI1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950 USERR1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950 USERS1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950 V System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951 VIEWCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951 VIEWDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951 VIEWMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951 VIEWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952 VIEWTWIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952 VISRETAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1953 VPLAYEROVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1953 VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1954 VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1954 VSBACKGROUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955 VSEDGECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955 VSEDGEJITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1956 VSEDGEOVERHANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1957
xl | Contents
VSEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1957 VSEDGESMOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958 VSFACECOLORMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958 VSFACEHIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959 VSFACEOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959 VSFACESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959 VSHALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1960 VSHIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1960 VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1961 VSINTERSECTIONEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1962 VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1962 VSISOONTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1963 VSLIGHTINGQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1964 VSMATERIALMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1964 VSMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1965 VSMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1965 VSMONOCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1966 VSOBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1966 VSOBSCUREDEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967 VSOBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967 VSSHADOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968 VSSILHEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1969 VSSILHWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1969 VSSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1970 VTDURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1970 VTENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1970 VTFPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971 W System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971 WHIPARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971 WHIPTHREAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1972 WINDOWAREACOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973 WMFBKGND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973 WMFFOREGND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1974 WORLDUCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1974 WORLDVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1975 WRITESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1975 WSCURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976 X System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976 XCLIPFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976 XEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976 XFADECTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1977 XLOADCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1977 XLOADPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1978 XREFCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1978 XREFNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979 XREFTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979
Contents | xli
Z System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1980 ZOOMFACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1980 ZOOMWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1980
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1981 Chapter 28
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983 Attach Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . . . Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box . Search Folders Dialog Box . . . . . . Batch Standards Checker . . . . . . . . . . Batch Standards Checker Window . . SLIDELIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. 1983 . 1983 . 1985 . 1986 . 1986 . 1991
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993
xlii | Contents
Commands
You can start a command by using one of the following methods: ■
Click the command name on a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut menu.
■
Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press ENTER or SPACEBAR.
The acad.pgp file lists the command aliases. To access the acad.pgp, on the Tools menu, click Customize ➤ Edit Program Parameters (acad.pgp). In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description is a command access section that lists the specific ways you can start that command.
1
2
3D Commands
1
3D Quick Reference Creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects in common geometric shapes that can be hidden, shaded, or rendered Command entry: 3d Enter an option [Box on page 3/Cone on page 5/DIsh on page 7/DOme on page 8/Mesh on page 8/Pyramid on page 9/Sphere on page 11/Torus on page 12/Wedge on page 14]:
Box Creates a 3D box polygon mesh. Specify corner point of box: Specify length of box: Specify a distance Specify width of box or [Cube]: Specify a distance or enter c
3
Width Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box.
Specify height of box: Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. If you enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes. Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an angle, or press ENTER You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone determines the rotation of the box. Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point relative to the base point. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates by the angle between the reference angle and the new angle. If you want to align the box with another object, specify two points on the target object to define the new angle of rotation for the box. If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner of the box.
Cube Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box.
4 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r Rotation Angle Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes. Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an angle, or press ENTER You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone determines the rotation of the box. Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point relative to the base point. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates the angular distance between the reference angle and the new angle. If you want to align the box with another object, specify two points on the target object to define the new angle of rotation for the box. If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner point of the box.
Cone Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.
Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1)
3D | 5
Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius for Base Defines the base of the cone by its radius. Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or press ENTER
Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Diameter for Base Defines the base of the cone by its diameter. Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or press ENTER
6 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Dish Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh. Specify center point of dish: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dish by its radius. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter. Specify diameter of dish: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
3D | 7
Dome Creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh. Specify center point of dome: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dome by its radius. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter. Specify diameter of dome: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Mesh Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines drawn in each direction along the mesh. The M and N directions are similar to the X and Y axes of an XY plane. Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point of mesh: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point of mesh: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify a point (4)
8 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Enter mesh size in the M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256 Enter mesh size in the N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Pyramid Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron. Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point (4) or enter t
Fourth Corner Point Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid. Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an option The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramid's apex, top, or ridge line. Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex).
3D | 9
Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. The two endpoints must lie in the same direction as the base points to prevent a self-intersecting wireframe. Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (2)
Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh. Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point
Tetrahedron Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh. Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex). Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a triangle. If the top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh. Specify first corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (3)
10 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Sphere Creates a spherical polygon mesh. Specify center point of sphere: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Defines the sphere by its radius. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter. Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
3D | 11
Torus Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. Specify center point of torus: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
The radius of the torus is measured from its center point to its outside edge, not to the center of the tube.
Radius Defines the torus by its radius.
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to the outside edge of the tube. Radius Defines the tube by its radius. Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or pressENTER
12 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or pressENTER Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter. Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or pressENTER Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or pressENTER
Diameter Defines the torus by its diameter.
Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to the outside edge of the tube. Radius Defines the tube by its radius. Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or pressENTER Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or pressENTER Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter. Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or pressENTER Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
3D | 13
Wedge Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face tapering along the X axis. Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1) Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter 0, the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane.
3DALIGN Quick Reference Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
Ribbon: Standard tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ 3D Align.
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Align Command entry: 3dalign Select objects: Select the objects to align and press ENTER Specify source plane and orientation . . . You can specify one, two, or three points for the source object. Then, you can specify one, two, or three points for the destination.
14 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
The selected object is moved and rotated so that the base points, and the X and Y axes of the source and destination align in 3D space. 3DALIGN works with dynamic UCS (DUCS), so you can dynamically drag the selected objects and align them with the face of a solid object. Specify base point or [Copy]: Specify a point or entercto create a copy The base point of the source object will be moved to the base point of the destination. Specify second point or [Continue]
: Specify a point on the object’s X axis, or press ENTER to skip forward to specifying destination points The second point specifies a new X axis direction within a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press ENTER instead of specifying a second point, the X and Y axes are assumed to be parallel with the X and Y axes of the current UCS. Specify third point or [Continue] : Specify a point on the object’s positive XY plane, or press ENTER to skip forward to specifying destination points The third point fully specifies the orientation of the X and Y axes of the source object that will be aligned with the destination plane. Specify destination plane and orientation . . . Specify first destination point: Specify a point This point defines the destination of the base point of the source object. Specify second source point or [eXit] <X>: Specify a point for the X axis of the destination or press ENTER The second point specifies a new X axis direction for the destination within a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press ENTER instead of specifying a second point, the X and Y axes of the destination are assumed to be parallel with the X and Y axes of the current UCS. Specify third destination point or [eXit] <X>: Specify a point for the destination’s positive XY plane, or press ENTER The third point fully specifies the orientation of the X and Y axes of the destination plane. NOTE If the destination is a plane on an existing solid object, you can define the destination plane with a single point by turning on dynamic UCS.
3DALIGN | 15
3DARRAY Quick Reference Creates a 3D array
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Array. Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Array Command entry: 3darray Select objects: Use an object selection method
The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array. Enter type of array [Rectangular on page 16/Polar on page 17] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Rectangular Array Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y axis), and levels (Z axis). An array must have at least two rows or two columns or two levels. Enter the number of rows (—) <1>: Enter a positive value or press ENTER Enter the number of columns ( | | | ) <1>: Enter a positive value or press ENTER Enter the number of levels ( . . . ) <1>: Enter a positive value or press ENTER Specifying one row requires that more than one column be specified, and vice versa. Specifying one level creates a two-dimensional array. If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Specify the distance between rows (—): Specify a distance
16 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
If you specify more than one column, the following prompt is displayed: Specify the distance between columns ( | | | ): Specify a distance If you specify more than one level, the following prompt is displayed: Specify the distance between levels ( . . . ): Specify a distance Positive values generate the array along the positive X, Y, and Z axes. Negative values generate the array along the negative X, Y, and Z axes. Polar Array Copies objects about an axis of rotation. Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive value Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Specify an angle or press ENTER The specified angle determines how far the objects are arrayed about the axis of rotation. A positive number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. A negative number produces a clockwise array rotation. Rotate arrayed objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER Entering y or pressing ENTER rotates each array element. Specify center point of array: Specify a point (1) Specify second point on axis of rotation: Specify a point (2)
3DCLIP Quick Reference Starts an interactive 3D view and opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window Command entry: 3dclip The Adjust Clipping Planes window on page 18 is displayed.
3DCLIP | 17
Adjust Clipping Planes Window Quick Reference Command entry: 3dclip Sets clipping planes for the display in 3D Orbit view. Use the Adjust Clipping Planes toolbar, or right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window and select an option from the shortcut menu on page 18. Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the window to see the effect of the clipping planes. As you rotate the view, different portions of the objects are clipped as they pass in and out of the clipping planes. To turn clipping planes off, right-click in the drawing area or the Adjust Clipping Planes window, and check or clear Front Clipping On and Back Clipping On.
Adjust Clipping Planes Shortcut Menu To choose any of the following options, right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window.
Adjusts only the front clipping plane. The Adjust Front Clipping line near the bottom of the window adjusts the front clipping plane. If a check mark is displayed next to Front Clipping On, you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move the line up or down.
18 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Adjust Back Clipping Adjusts only the back clipping plane. The line near the top of the window adjusts the back clipping plane. If a check mark is displayed next to Back Clipping On, you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move the line up or down.
Causes the back and front clipping planes to move Create Slice together, which shows you a “slice” of the objects in the 3D Orbit view. Adjust the front and back clipping planes, and then choose Create Slice. You can then move the front and back clipping planes as one unit.
Displays the pan cursor, a hand cursor that you can use to pan Pan the clipping plane. Hold down the pick button and drag the cursor in any direction. The pan cursor stays active until you click another button.
Zoom Displays the zoom cursor, a magnifying-glass cursor that you can use to enlarge or reduce the clipping plane. To enlarge the image, hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the top of Adjust Clipping Planes window. To reduce the image, hold down the pick button and drag the cursor toward the bottom of the window.
Turns the front clipping plane on or off. A check Front Clipping On mark indicates that the front clipping plane is on, and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the front clipping plane. Choose this option again to turn the front clipping plane off and remove the check mark.
Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. A check mark indicates that the back clipping plane is on, and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the back clipping plane. Choose this option again to turn the back clipping plane off and remove the check mark. Reset Resets the the window and clipping plane to the extents of the drawing.
Adjust Clipping Planes Window | 19
3DCONFIG Quick Reference Provides 3D graphics system configuration settings Command entry: 3dconfig The Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box on page 20 is displayed. If you enter -3dconfig at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 28.
Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning Dialog Box Quick Reference Controls 3D display performance. (This dialog box can also be accessed from the Performance Settings button on the System tab of the Options dialog box.)
Turns adaptive degradation on and off. With adaptive degradation on, if performance goes below the level you specify, effects are turned off or turned down in a certain order until performance returns to an acceptable level.
20 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Degrade When FPS Is Below Sets the level at which adaptive degradation begins in frames per second (FPS). The default speed is 5 FPS. Enter a number or choose a number from the list. Degradation Chain Order Specifies the order in which effects are degraded. Items at the top are degraded first. Items that are not checked are not degraded. Click Move Up or Move Down to move a selected item up or down in the chain. Move Up Moves the selected item up in the chain. Move Down Moves the selected item down in the chain.
Hardware and Performance Tuning Specifies hardware settings and performance tuning. The performance tuner reads your system and decides whether to use software or hardware implementation for features that support both. Features that work with your system are turned on, and features that cannot work with your system are turned off. A log file displays the results. You can make manual changes. View Tune Log Displays the Performance Tuner log on page 22. Manual Tune Displays the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box on page 23. Check for Updates Checks for updated versions of the graphics card and driver database that is used for performance tuning. Get Download Info This button is displayed after you have checked for updates and when a new driver is available and recommended. Displays a Web page that describes the certification program for graphics cards and display drivers. You can download the latest list of certified cards and drivers at any time. Graphics hardware certification indicates which graphics card and driver combinations that Autodesk has tested to ensure that it supports real-time 3D shading, shadows, smooth-line display, and texture compression features of AutoCAD 2007 (and later) based products. Autodesk certified graphics hardware is better suited for the 3D display features of AutoCAD 2007 and later releases, and non-certified graphics hardware may not support these features or may cause problems during use. Graphics card information for the current system is available in the Performance Tuner Log, which you can view by clicking the View Tune Log button in this dialog box.
Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning Dialog Box | 21
Remind Me When a New Driver Is Available Specifies that a notification bubble is displayed when a new driver is available.
Performance Tuner Log Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, System tab) Command entry: options Lists the features that have been disabled, if any. Information includes the system configuration, 3D graphics device, and driver. If your 3D device is certified, Autodesk has tested it with the performance tuner.
Save Log As Displays a standard file selection dialog box on page 996.
22 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Manual Performance Tuning Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, System tab) Command entry: options Sets options that affect 3D display performance. These options are set automatically by the performance tuner. You can set them manually in this dialog box.
Sets a driver for the graphics card and sets options for hardware acceleration.
Manual Performance Tuning Dialog Box | 23
Enable Hardware Acceleration Uses hardware acceleration. When this check box is cleared, hardware acceleration is not used, and all the items in this dialog box are unavailable. For information on why hardware acceleration might not be available, see Hardware Acceleration Troubleshooting in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. ■
Green check mark indicates a graphics card that is certified and can run all features.
■
Yellow warning indicates a graphics card that is certified and cannot run all features. If the graphics card is unknown, the performance tuner displays the yellow warning, and you can use hardware acceleration at your own risk.
■
Red alert indicates a graphics card that is not certified. The check box is cleared, and Enable Hardware Acceleration is unavailable.
Driver Name Sets a driver for the graphics card. (OpenGL, Direct 3D, or other custom drivers that might be installed). If no drivers are certified for the graphics card, “no certified drivers” is displayed. Changes to the driver may affect the Hardware Effects List. Hardware Effects List Lists features available for the current driver and indicates their status. A green check mark indicates a feature that is supported; you can turn it on or off. A yellow warning indicates that the feature is not recommended; you can turn it on or off. A red alert indicates that the feature is not supported and cannot be turned on. ■
Enhanced 3D performance (formerly known as Geometry Acceleration). Enables a more efficient use of the graphic card when working with 3D objects. NOTE If you experience problems with precision, turn this option off.
■
Smooth line display. Enables the use of anti-aliasing. With this option on the jagged effect from the display of diagonal lines and curved edges will be removed. NOTE This option is only available if the OpenGL driver is selected.
■
Gooch hardware shader. Enables the use of Gooch shading. With this option on the details of a 3D object are shown by softening the contrast between lighted areas and shadowed areas by using warm and cool colors as a substitute to light and dark colors.
24 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
■
Per-pixel lighting. Enables the computation of colors for individual pixels. With this option on the 3D objects and lighting effects appear smoother in the viewport. NOTE This option is only available if the Direct3D driver is selected.
■
Full shadow display. Enables shadows to be displayed in the viewport. NOTE Enhanced 3D performance effect must be turned on.
■
Texture compression. Enables the use of texture compression to reduce the amount of video memory required to open and display a drawing that contains materials with images or has attached images. NOTE With this option turned on, the time it takes to load the images might increase the first time that they are accessed, and there is a reduction in the quality of the images when they are displayed in the viewport or plotted.
■
Enhanced 2D precision. Enables the Enhanced 2D precision effect. With this option turned on, the precision artifacts that can be seen at extreme zoom levels are removed. NOTE This option is only available if the Direct3D driver is selected and you are working on a Windows Vista platform. Turn on this option only if you experience problems with precision because it will decrease the graphic card performance.
Emulate Unsupported Hardware Effects in Software When Plotting Controls whether software emulation is used for unsupported hardware effects when plotting shaded viewports with shadows and other effects that are not supported by your graphics card. WARNING It is recommended that you not use any type of remote access application, such as NetMeeting, Remote Desktop, or VMWare in conjunction with hardware acceleration. Most remote access applications do not support hardware acceleration, and as a result, can cause general display failure and instability. Prior to using a remote access application with AutoCAD, check with the software vendor to see if it supports hardware acceleration and if not, disable hardware acceleration prior to starting the remote access software or use the /NOHARDWARE command line switch to start AutoCAD in Software mode.
Manual Performance Tuning Dialog Box | 25
General Settings Sets performance-related options that are not hardware dependent. Discard Back Faces When selected, the back faces of objects are not drawn. Smooth Faces by Default When selected, the facets in a polyface mesh object are made smooth when displayed in the viewport and in a rendering. This is useful when using objects that were imported through 3DSIN or when using PFACE objects. Note that when you select this option, all objects in the drawing are made smooth. If you don’t want all objects to be smooth, recreate the model using a different object type. Transparency Quality Adjusts the transparency quality used when viewing or rendering a model. The transparency quality used is dependent on if software or hardware acceleration are used, or if a model is being rendered. The default quality is Medium. Software acceleration ■
Low quality produces a screen-door effect to achieve transparency without sacrificing speed.
■
Medium quality uses a combination of the screen-door effect and alpha blending.
■
High quality uses simple alpha blending, which can cause graphical artifacts to appear based on the current draw order.
Hardware acceleration ■
Low quality uses simple alpha blending, which can cause graphical artifacts to appear based on the current draw order.
■
Medium quality uses a two-pass algorithm to draw all opaque objects, followed by all transparent objects. The transparent objects are drawn using simple alpha blending, which can cause graphical artifacts to appear based on the current draw order. The graphical artifacts are less noticeable due to the opaque objects being drawn prior to the transparent objects.
■
High quality improves on medium quality by sorting transparent objects to decrease the appearance of graphical artifacts. However, the sorting does not completely eliminate all graphical artifacts.
26 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Rendering ■
Low quality disables the use of transparency for all materials, and the materials are rendered as opaque instead.
■
Medium quality enables transparency for materials, but the actual material opacity used is the square root of the specified material opacity.
■
High quality enables transparency and the opacity assigned to a material is mapped directly to Mental Ray rendering engine.
Drawing Settings Sets performance values on a drawing level. Dynamic Tessellation Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing. Objects are drawn using many short lines (or triangles when drawing spheres). These lines are called tessellation lines. Objects in your drawing appear smoother when you use more tessellation lines. Surface Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your drawing. The low end of the slider provides fewer tessellation lines and uses less memory. Curve Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for curves in your drawing. The low end of the slider provides fewer tessellation lines and uses less memory. Number of Tessellations to Cache Configures your system according to memory and performance requirements. The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation. When this option is set to 1, the tessellation for all viewports is the same; some objects in the drawing may be regenerated as you zoom in and out. Setting this option to 2 or more is useful when you have more than one viewport with different views. Increasing the number requires more memory.
Reset to Recommended Values Resets the values to the defaults based on the performance tuner’s evaluation of the graphics card.
Manual Performance Tuning Dialog Box | 27
-3DCONFIG Quick Reference If you enter -3dconfig at the command prompt, the following 3DCONFIG command prompts are displayed. Enter option: [Adaptive degradation on page 28/Dynamic tessellation on page 28/General options on page 29/acceLeration on page 29/Plot emulation on page 31/eXit on page 31] : The prompt is redisplayed until you enter x (Exit) or press ESC.
Adaptive Degradation Turns off or minimizes display effects when performance drops below the minimum you specify. Enter mode [ON/OFF] : If Adaptive Degradation is on, the following prompt is displayed. Enter speed to maintain (1-60 fps) <5>: The main prompt is redisplayed.
Dynamic Tessellation Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing. Objects are drawn using many short lines (or triangles when drawing spheres). These lines are called tessellation lines. Objects in your drawing appear smoother when you use more tessellation lines. Enter mode [ON/OFF] : If dynamic tessellation is on, the following prompt is displayed. Enter option [Surface tessellation/Curve tessellation/Tessellations to cache/eXit] <Surface tessellation>: The prompt is redisplayed. Surface Tessellation Enter tolerance <92>: Enter a value between 0 and 100 Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. The Dynamic Tessellation prompt is redisplayed.
28 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Curve Tessellation Enter tolerance <87>: Enter a value between 0 and 100 Determines the amount of detail for curves in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. The Dynamic Tessellation prompt is redisplayed. Number of Tessellations to Cache Enter number of tessellations to cache <6>: Enter a value between 1 and 10 Configures your system according to memory and performance requirements. The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation. When this option is set to 1, the tessellation for all viewports is the same; some objects in the drawing may be regenerated as you zoom in and out. Setting this option to 2 or more is useful when you have more than one viewport with different views. Increasing the number requires more memory. The Dynamic Tessellation prompt is redisplayed.
General Options Sets performance-related options that are not hardware dependent. Configure: General options Enter option [Discard backfaces/Transparency quality/eXit] : Discard Back Faces Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Enter on to discard back faces Discards back faces when drawing objects. You cannot see the effect of discarding back faces on some objects, such as spheres, because you cannot see the back face even when it is present. The effect of discarding back faces is visible on objects such as those that don't have a top. Discarding back faces enhances performance. The General Options prompt is redisplayed. Transparency Quality Adjusts the transparency quality. At the Low setting, a screen-door effect achieves transparency without sacrificing speed. At the Medium setting, the default in software mode, blending improves image quality. The High setting, the default in hardware mode, produces an image free of visual artifacts at the cost of drawing speed. Materials must also be turned on for transparency to be visible. The General Options prompt is redisplayed.
Acceleration Specifies whether to use software or hardware acceleration in 3D. Enter option [Hardware/Software/eXit] :
-3DCONFIG | 29
Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Specify whether you want anti-alias lines turned on or off If you select Hardware, you can also specify whether geometry acceleration and anti-alias lines are turned on or off. Hardware Enter option [Driver name/Geometry acceleration/Antialias lines/Shadows enabled/Texture compression/eXit] : Specifies hardware acceleration. The hardware graphics card performs most of the drawing tasks in 3D to increase performance. Enter driver name <wopengl9.hdi>: The available drivers are wopengl9.hdi and direct3d9.hdi. When you select Hardware, the default driver is set to the wopengl9.hdi driver that is included with the program. If you select the Driver Name option, you can select a driver from a list of available hardware-accelerated drivers found in the Drv directory. If you want to use a hardware driver from another vendor, it must be supported by the Heidi® Graphics System. For information on why hardware acceleration might not be available, see Hardware Acceleration Troubleshooting in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. Software Specifies software acceleration. The software graphics system performs all of the drawing tasks in 3D. Geometry Acceleration Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Using geometry acceleration makes more efficient use of the graphics card when working with 3D objects. Antialias Lines Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Enables the use of anti-aliasing. With this option on the jagged effect from the display of diagonal lines and curved edges will be removed. NOTE You can set this option only if the OpenGL driver is selected. Per-pixel lighting Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Enables the computation of colors for individual pixels. With this option on the 3D objects and lighting effects appear smoother in the viewport. NOTE When Geometry Acceleration is turned off, per-pixel lighting cannot be displayed in the viewport. Shadows Enabled Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Enables the display of shadows.
30 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
NOTE When Geometry Acceleration is turned off, full shadows cannot be displayed in the viewport. Texture Compression Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Enables the use of texture compression to reduce the amount of video memory required to open and display a drawing that contains materials with images or has attached images. NOTE With this option on the time it takes to load the images may increase the first time that they are accessed and there is a reduction in the quality of the images when they are displayed in the viewport or plotted.
Plot Emulation Turns on or off the use of software emulation for unsupported hardware effects during the plotting of a drawing with shaded viewports. The use of software emulation happens when it is turned on, and hardware acceleration is disabled or is enabled, but does not support Shadows. Enter mode [ON/OFF] : The main prompt is redisplayed.
Exit Exits the command.
3DCORBIT Quick Reference Starts an interactive 3D view and sets the objects into continuous motion
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Navigation panel ➤ Continuous Orbit.
Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Continuous Orbit Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Continuous Orbit (3).
3DCORBIT | 31
Command entry: 3dcorbit You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command. Click in a drawing area and drag the pointing device in any direction to start the objects moving in the direction that you're dragging. Release the button on the pointing device and the objects continue their orbit in the direction that you specified. The speed set for the cursor movement determines the speed at which the objects spin. You can change the direction of the continuous orbit by clicking and dragging again. You can also change the display of the continuous orbit by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing an option from the shortcut menu. For example, you can choose Visual Aids ➤ Grid to add a grid to the view without exiting Continuous Orbit.
3DDISTANCE Quick Reference Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Navigation panel ➤ Adjust Distance.
Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Adjust Distance Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Adjust Distance (4). Command entry: 3ddistance 3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one pointing down. Click and drag the cursor vertically toward the top of the screen to move the camera closer to the objects, making them appear larger. Click and drag the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen to move the camera away from the objects, making them appear smaller.
32 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
3DDWF Quick Reference Creates a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file of your three-dimensional model and displays it in the DWF Viewer
Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Publish panel ➤ 3D DWF. Toolbar: Standard Command entry: 3ddwf The Export 3D DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. After you enter a file name and click Save, the DWF file viewer is launched and your DWF file is displayed. You can also change publishing settings from the 3D DWF Publish dialog box on page 33. NOTE The File Type control on the Export 3D DWF dialog box lists 3D DWF (*.dwf) and 3D DWFx (*.dwfx) when you use the 3DDWF command.
3D DWF Publish Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Issue the 3DDWF command and click Tools ➤ Options from the Export 3D DWF dialog box. Command entry: 3ddwf Allows you to publish a three-dimensional model as a DWF or DWFx file. 3D DWF Publishing, a technology preview in AutoCAD® 2006, is now a standard AutoCAD feature.
3DDWF | 33
Objects to Publish Specifies whether all model space objects or selected model space objects are published to the DWF file. All Model Space Objects All model space objects are published to the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file. Select Model Space Objects Allows you to create a selection set of model space objects, including external references, which are published to the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file after you click OK. Select Objects Active only when Select Model Space Objects is enabled. Clicking this button minimizes the dialog boxes and lets you select objects in the drawing workspace. When object selection is completed, press ENTER and the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx Publish dialog box reappears reporting the number of objects selected for publishing.
3D DWF Organization Specifies how to group objects in the DWF or DWFx file for viewing in Autodesk® DWF™ Viewer. Group by Xref Hierarchy Arrange objects by xref hierarchy in the viewer. If unchecked, externally referenced files are listed in the viewer like any other objects.
Options These options let you specify if materials are published in the DWF file. Publish with Materials Most materials that you have assigned to your model will not be published to the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file. Materials with procedural maps and some material properties will not export to the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file. If your material contains texture mapping, only the Diffuse Map gets published along with its scale and orientation data. Including materials will not significantly affect the size of your 3D DWF or 3D DWFx files. Default=active. NOTE Materials that are not supported in 3D DWF or 3D DWFx include Bump, Opacity, and Reflection mapping, as well as all forms of procedural materials, which include Checker, Marble, Noise, Speckle, Tile, Waves and Wood.
34 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
3DDWFPUBLISH Quick Reference Obsolete Command entry: 3ddwfpublish The Export 3D DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Refer to the 3DDWF command.
3DFACE Quick Reference Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface anywhere in 3D space
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ 3D Face. Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ 3D Face Command entry: 3dface Specify first point on page 35 or [Invisible on page 35]: Specify a point (1) or enter i First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering the first point, enter the remaining points in a natural clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal 3D face. If you locate all four points on the same plane, a planar face is created that is similar to a region object. When you shade or render the object, planar faces are filled. Invisible Controls which edges of a 3D face are visible, allowing for accurate modeling of objects with holes. Entering i or invisible before the first point of an edge makes the edge invisible. The invisible specification must precede any object snap modes, XYZ filters, or coordinate input for that edge. You can create a 3D face in which all edges are invisible. Such a face is a phantom; it does not appear in wireframe presentations but can hide material in line drawings. 3D faces do appear in shaded renderings. You can combine 3D faces to model complex 3D surfaces.
3DDWFPUBLISH | 35
Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i Specify third point or [Invisible] <exit>: Specify a point (3), enter i, or pressENTER Specify fourth point or [Invisible] : Specify a point (4), enter i, or press ENTER The Third Point and Fourth Point prompts are repeated until you press ENTER. Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish entering points, press ENTER.
3DFLY Quick Reference Interactively changes your view of a 3D drawings so that you appear to be flying through the model
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Fly.
Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Walk & Fly ➤ Fly
36 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigations Modes ➤ Fly (7). Command entry: 3dfly 3DFLY activates a fly mode in the current viewport. You can leave the XY plane as though you're flying through or around the model. On the keyboard, use the four arrow keys, the W (forward), A (left), S (back), and D (right) keys, and the mouse to determine the direction of your fly. For more information, see Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings Balloon on page 55. By default, the Position Locator window on page 55 opens and displays your position in the drawing from a top view. To control walk and fly settings, use the Walk and Fly Settings dialog box. on page 1625To specify settings for animating a 3D walk or fly, see Animation Settings Dialog Box on page 54.
3DFORBIT Quick Reference Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D, using an unconstrained orbit
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Navigation panel ➤ Free Orbit.
Toolbar: 3D Navigate Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Free Orbit Pointing device: Press SHIFT+CTRL and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter 3DFORBIT mode. Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigations Modes Free Orbit (2). Command entry: 3dforbit 3DFORBIT activates a 3D Free Orbit view in the current viewport. If the user coordinate system (UCS) icon is on, a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS appears in the 3D Orbit view. You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command. The 3D Free Orbit view displays an arcball, which is a circle divided into four quadrants by smaller circles. When the Enable Orbit Auto Target option is
3DFORBIT | 37
deselected in the shortcut menu, the target of the view stays stationary. The camera location, or point of view, moves around the target. The center of the arcball, not the center of the objects you’re viewing, is the target point. Unlike 3DORBIT, 3DFORBIT does not constrain the change in view along the XY axis or Z direction. NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DFORBIT command is active. Moving your cursor over different parts of the arcball changes the cursor icon, indicating the direction in which the view rotates. See 3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons on page 38. While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing buttons on the 3D Navigation toolbar. See 3DOrbit Shortcut Menu on page 43. TIP While in 3D Orbit mode, you can temporarily enter 3D Free Orbit mode by pressing and holding the SHIFT key.
3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons Quick Reference View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor as follows: Sphere Encircled by Two Lines When you move the cursor inside the arcball, it changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely around the objects. It works as if your cursor is grabbing a sphere surrounding the objects and dragging it around the target point. You can drag horizontally, vertically, and diagonally using this method.
Circular Arrow When you move the cursor outside the arcball, it becomes a circular arrow. Clicking outside the arcball and dragging the cursor around
38 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
the arcball causes the view to move around an axis that extends through the center of the arcball, perpendicular to the screen. This is called a roll.
Horizontal Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on the left or right side of the arcball, it becomes a horizontal ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the vertical or Y axis through the middle of the arcball.
Vertical Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on the top or bottom of the arcball, it becomes a vertical ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the horizontal or X axis through the middle of the arcball.
3DMESH Quick Reference Creates a free-form polygon mesh
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ 3D Mesh. Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ 3D mesh Command entry: 3dmesh Enter size of mesh in M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
3DMESH | 39
Enter size of mesh in N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256 NOTE 3DMESH is designed primarily for programmers. Other users should use the 3D command. A polygon mesh is defined by a matrix, the size of which is determined by M and N size values. M times N equals the number of vertices that you must specify.
Specify location for vertex (0, 0): Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate The location of each vertex in the mesh is defined by m and n, the row and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0). You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before specifying vertices in row m + 1. Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a mesh depends on the position of its vertices.
3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You can close a mesh with PEDIT.
40 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
3DMOVE Quick Reference Displays the move grip tool in a 3D view and moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Move Command entry: 3dmove Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point or [Displacement on page 42] : Specify a base point or enter d Specify second point or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DMOVE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command. With the move grip tool, you can move previously selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the movement to an axis or plane. The move grip tool is displayed at the specified base point. For more information about using the move grip tool, see Use the Move Grip Tool to Modify Objects. Click an axis handle to constrain the movement to an axis. The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the objects move 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position.
Realigning the UCS You can press CTRL+D to turn on the dynamic UCS to realign the grip tool as you move the pointer over faces, line segments, and polyline segments. The grip tool orients the workplane depending on which edge of the face the
3DMOVE | 41
pointer crosses. You can click to place the grip tool (which will constrain the direction of the move operation). Specified coordinates are relative to this workplane.
Pressing CTRL+D again to turn off dynamic UCS before placing the grip tool reverts the grip tool’s orientation to match the static UCS.
Displacement Specify displacement : Enter coordinates to represent a vector Places the move grip tool at the origin (0,0,0). The coordinate values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction.
3DORBIT Quick Reference Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Navigation panel ➤ Constrained Orbit.
Toolbar: 3D Navigate Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Constrained Orbit Pointing device: Press SHIFT and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter 3D Orbit mode. Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigations Modes Constrained Orbit (1). Command entry: 3dorbit 3DORBIT activates a 3D Orbit view in the current viewport. You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command.
42 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
When 3DORBIT is active, the target of the view stays stationary and the camera location, or point of view, moves around the target. However, it appears as if the 3D model is turning as the mouse cursor is dragged In this way, you can specify any view of the model. The 3D Orbit cursor icon appears. If you drag the cursor horizontally, the camera moves parallel to the XY plane of the world coordinate system (WCS). If you drag the cursor vertically, the camera moves along the Z axis. NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active. While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options and modes from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing buttons on the 3D Navigation toolbar. See 3DOrbit Shortcut Menu on page 43.
3DOrbit Shortcut Menu Quick Reference When the 3DORBIT command (or any 3D navigation command or mode) is active, you can access the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. To access the 3D Orbit shortcut menu, right-click in the 3D Orbit view.
Current Mode: Current Displays the current mode.
Other Navigation Modes Choose one of the following 3D navigation modes: ■
Constrained Orbit (1). Constrains orbiting to the XY plane or the Z direction.
■
Free Orbit (2). Allows orbiting in any direction, without being constrained to the XY plane or the Z direction. See 3DFORBIT.
■
Continuous Orbit (3). Changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous lines encircling it and enables you to set the objects into continuous motion. See 3DCORBIT.
3DOrbit Shortcut Menu | 43
■
Adjust Distance (4). Simulates moving the camera closer to the object or farther away. See 3DDISTANCE.
■
Swivel (5). Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of swiveling the camera. See 3DSWIVEL.
■
Walk (6). Changes the cursor to a plus sign and enables you to "walk through" a model at a fixed height above the XY plane, by dynamically controlling the location and target of the camera. See 3DWALK.
■
Fly (7). Changes the cursor to a plus sign and enables you to "fly through" a model without being restricted to a fixed height above the XY plane. See 3DFLY.
■
Zoom (8). Changes the cursor to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) sign and simulates moving the camera closer to an object or farther away. Works like the Adjust Distance option. See 3DZOOM.
■
Pan (9). Changes the cursor to a hand cursor and moves the view in the direction that you drag. See 3DPAN. TIP You can switch to any mode by using the shortcut menu or by entering the number displayed after its name.
Enable Orbit Auto Target Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing rather than on the center of the viewport. This feature is turned on by default.
Animation Settings Opens the Animation Settings dialog box on page 54, where you can specify settings for saving an animation file.
Zoom Window Changes the cursor to a window icon so that you can select a specific area to zoom in on. When the cursor changes, click a starting point and end point to define the zoom window. The drawing is zoomed in and focused on the area you selected.
Zoom Extents Centers the view and sizes it to display all objects.
44 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Zoom Previous Displays the previous view.
Parallel Displays objects so that two parallel lines in a drawing never converge. The shapes in your drawing always remain the same and do not appear distorted when they are closer.
Perspective Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines converge at one point. Objects appear to recede into the distance, and parts of the objects appear larger and closer to you. The shapes are somewhat distorted when the object is very close. This view correlates more closely to what your eyes see. See PERSPECTIVE.
Reset View Resets the view back to the view that was current when you first started 3DORBIT.
Preset Views Displays a list of predefined views such as Top, Bottom, and SW Isometric. Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model.
Named Views Displays a list of named views in the drawing. Choose a named view from the list to change the current view of your model.
Visual Styles Provides methods for shading objects. For more information about visual styles, see Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model. ■
3D Hidden. Displays the objects using 3D wireframe representation and hides lines representing back faces.
■
3D Wireframe. Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries.
3DOrbit Shortcut Menu | 45
■
Conceptual. Shades the objects and smooths the edges between polygon faces. The effect is less realistic, but it can make the details of the model easier to see.
■
Realistic. Shades the objects and smooths the edges between polygon faces.
Visual Aids Provides aids to visualizing the objects. ■
Compass. Draws a 3D sphere composed of three lines representing the X, Y, and Z axes.
■
Grid. Displays a two-dimensional array of lines similar to graph paper. This grid is oriented along the X and Y axes. NOTE Before starting 3DORBIT, you can use the GRID command to set system variables that control the grid display. The number of major grid lines corresponds to the value you set using the Grid Spacing option of the GRID command, which is stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable. Ten horizontal lines and ten vertical lines are drawn between the major lines.
■
UCS Icon. Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. Each axis is labeled X, Y, or Z. The X axis is red, the Y axis is green, and the Z axis is blue.
3DORBITCTR Quick Reference Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view Command entry: 3dorbitctr Starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you specify with your pointing device. If you specify a point outside the current view, 3DORBITCTR ignores the specified point and uses the default center of rotation. 3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget option in the 3DORBIT command.
46 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
3DPAN Quick Reference When a drawing is in a Perspective view, starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically
Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Pan Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Pan (9). Command entry: 3dpan Moves in the direction that you drag. You can drag the view vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. 3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor. You can view your entire drawing or select objects before entering 3DPAN.
3DPOLY Quick Reference Creates a 3D polyline
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 3D Polyline. Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Polyline Command entry: 3dpoly Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1) Specify endpoint of line on page 47 or [Undo on page 48]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Close on page 48/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you press ENTER to end the command.
3DPAN | 47
Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing from the previous point.
Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then ends the command. To be closed, a 3D polyline must contain at least two lines.
A 3D polyline is a connected sequence of straight line segments created as a single object. 3D polylines can be non-coplanar; however, they cannot include arc segments.
3DROTATE Quick Reference Displays the rotate grip tool in a 3D view and revolves objects around a base point
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Rotate Command entry: 3drotate Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point: Specify a base point
48 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DROTATE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command. With the rotate grip tool, you can rotate previously selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the rotation to an axis. The rotate grip tool is displayed at the specified base point. For more information about using the rotate grip tool, see Use the Rotate Grip Tool to Modify Objects. Pick a rotation axis: Click an axis handle to select the rotation axis Enter a value for the rotation or specify the angle start point and endpoint. Specify angle start point: Specify a point Specify angle endpoint: Specify a point
Realigning the UCS You can press CTRL+D to turn on the dynamic UCS to realign the grip tool as you move the pointer over faces, line segments, and polyline segments. The grip tool orients the workplane depending on which edge of the face the pointer crosses. You can click to place the grip tool (which will constrain the direction of the move operation). Specified coordinates are relative to this workplane.
Pressing CTRL+D again to turn off dynamic UCS before placing the grip tool reverts the grip tool’s orientation to match the static UCS.
3DSIN Quick Reference Imports a 3D Studio (3DS) file
3DSIN | 49
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Import panel ➤ 3DS File. Menu: Insert ➤ 3D Studio Command entry: 3dsin The 3D Studio File Import dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. After you choose a file to import, the 3D Studio File Import Options dialog box on page 50 is displayed.
3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Insert ➤ 3D Studio Command entry: 3dsin Lists available and selected 3D objects, saves 3D objects to layers, and handles objects that use multiple materials.
Available Objects Displays the names of all objects in the 3D Studio® (3DS) file. You can select up to 70 objects. Object Name and Type Displays the type and assigned name of each object. Add All Adds all of the objects in the Available Objects list to the Selected Objects list.
50 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Add Adds the objects currently selected in the Available Objects list to the Selected Objects list.
Selected Objects Displays the selected 3D Studio objects to import. Object Name and Type Displays the type and assigned name of each object. Remove Removes objects selected in the Selected Objects list and returns them to the Available Objects list. Remove All Removes all objects from the Selected Objects list and returns them to the Available Objects list.
Save to Layers Controls how 3D Studio objects are assigned to layers in the drawing. By Object Creates a layer for each object in the 3D Studio file and places the object on that layer. The name of the layer is the same as the name of the object. By Material Creates a layer for each material in the 3D Studio file and places objects to which that material is attached on that layer. The name of the layer is the same as the name of the material. By Object Color Creates a layer for each object color in the 3D Studio file. Each 3D Studio object is placed on the layer corresponding to its color. The name of the layer is COLORnn, where nn is the 3D Studio color index. If the 3D Studio file contains objects with no color, these objects are placed on a layer called COLORNONE. Single Layer Creates a single layer called AVLAYER and places all objects on that layer.
Multiple Material Objects 3D Studio assigns materials by face, element, or object. AutoCAD assigns materials by object only. When AutoCAD encounters a 3D Studio object assigned multiple materials, AutoCAD must find a way to handle the assignment.
3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box | 51
Always Prompt Displays the Material Assignment Alert dialog box for each object with multiple materials. The dialog box displays the name of the object. The options you select determine how 3DSIN handles the assignment. The options are as follows: Split Object by Materials Splits the object into multiple objects, one for each material. This preserves the material assignments that were made in the 3D Studio file. It also increases the complexity of the drawing geometry. Assign First Material Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-material object to the entire object. See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how the first-assigned material is determined. Select a Material Assigns one of the materials that was assigned to the object in the 3D Studio file to the entire object. Select the material from the list below this option, or choose NONE to revert to the AutoCAD default material.
Split by Material Splits all objects with multiple materials into multiple objects, one for each material. This preserves the material assignments that were made in the 3D Studio file. It also increases the complexity of the drawing geometry.
Assign First Material Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-material object to the entire object. See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how the first-assigned material is determined.
Don't Assign a Material Assigns no material to each multiple-material object. This option loses all material assignment information but preserves the 3D Studio geometry. The object reverts to the AutoCAD default material.
3DSOUT Quick Reference Obsolete
52 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
For best results, it is recommended that you import DWG files into 3D Studio Max instead. Command entry: 3dsout
3DSWIVEL Quick Reference Changes the target of the view in the direction that you drag
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Navigation panel ➤ Swivel.
Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Swivel Pointing device: Press CTRL and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter 3DSWIVEL mode. Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigations Modes Swivel (5). Command entry: 3dswivel Simulates panning with a camera in the direction that you drag. The target of the view changes. You can swivel the view along the XY plane or along the Z axis.
3DWALK Quick Reference Interactively changes the view of a 3D drawing so that you appear to be walking through the model
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Navigation panel ➤ Walk.
Toolbar: 3D Navigation
3DSWIVEL | 53
Menu: View ➤ Walk and Fly ➤ Walk Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Walk (6). Command entry: 3dwalk 3DWALK activates a walk mode in the current viewport. On the keyboard, use the four arrow keys or the W (forward), A (left), S (back), and D (right) keys to determine the direction of your walk. To specify the direction of the view, you drag the mouse in the direction you want to look. For more information, see Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings Balloon on page 55. By default, the Position Locator window on page 55 opens and displays your position in the drawing from a top view. To control walk and fly settings, use the Walk and Fly Settings dialog box. on page 1625To specify settings for animating a 3D walk or fly, see Animation Settings Dialog Box on page 54.
Animation Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Specifies settings for recording an animation of 3D navigation.
Settings Determines the settings for an animation file. Visual Style Displays a list of visual styles and render presets that you can apply to an animation file. Resolution Displays a list of resolutions. The default value is 320 x 240. Frame Rate (FPS) Specifies a frame rate (in seconds). Values are between 1 and 60. The default value is 30.
54 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
Format Specifies a list of animation output formats. Available formats are AVI, MPG, WMV, and MOV.
Position Locator Window Quick Reference Displays the top-view position of a 3D model when in a walk or fly navigation. Zoom In Zooms in to the display in the Position Locator window. Zoom Out Zooms out from the display in the Position Locator window. Zoom Extents Zooms to the extents of the display in the Position Locator window. Preview Displays your current location in the model. You can drag the position indicator to change your position. You can also drag the target indicator to change the direction of the view. Position Indicator Color Sets the color of the dot that shows your current position. Position Indicator Size Sets the size of the indicator. You can choose Small, Medium, or Large. Position Indicator Blink Turns the blinking effect on or off. Target Indicator Displays an indicator that shows the target of the view. Target Indicator Color Sets the color of the target indicator. Preview Transparency Sets the transparency of the preview window. You can choose a value from 0 to 95. Preview Visual Style Sets the visual style of the preview.
Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings Balloon Quick Reference The Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings balloon displays the keyboard and mouse controls that control walk and fly modes.
Position Locator Window | 55
Press TAB to turn the display of the balloon on and off. You can specify whether to display the instructions, and how often, in the Walk and Fly Settings dialog box on page 1625. The controls are as follows: ■
Up arrow/W key. Moves the camera forward so that you appear to be walking (or flying) forward.
■
Down arrow/S key. Moves the camera backward.
■
Left arrow/A key. Moves the camera to the left, so that you appear to be moving to the left.
■
Right arrow/D key. Moves the camera to the right.
■
Drag mouse. Sets the target so that you look or turn.
■
F key. Toggles between fly (3DFLY) and walk (3DWALK) modes.
56 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
3DZOOM Quick Reference Zooms in and out in a perspective view
Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Zoom Pointing device: Scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in and out. Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Zoom (8). Command entry: 3dzoom In a parallel view, 3DZOOM displays the following prompt: Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display shortcut-menu. Zooming in a perspective view simulates moving the camera closer to the target or farther away. Objects appear closer or farther away, but the position of the camera does not change. Enter option [All on page 57/Extents on page 57/Window on page 57/Previous on page 57] : All Zooms to display the entire drawing. Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible display of all the objects Window Zooms to display an area specified by two points of a rectangular window. Previous Zooms to display the previous view. Real Time Using the pointing device, zooms interactively.
3DZOOM | 57
58
A Commands
2
ABOUT Quick Reference Displays information about AutoCAD Menu: Help ➤ About Command entry: about (or 'about for transparent use) Copyright information and product information is displayed. Product information includes the version number and service pack, serial number, license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You can save the product information as a text file.
ACISIN Quick Reference Imports an ACIS file and creates a body object, solid, or region in the drawing
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Import panel ➤ ACIS File. Menu: Insert ➤ ACIS File Command entry: acisin The Select ACIS File box is displayed. Select the file to import in the File Name list. The SAT (ASCII) ACIS file is imported into the drawing.
59
NOTE ACISIN imports SAT files up to ACIS version 7.0.
ACISOUT Quick Reference Exports a body object, solid, or region to an ACIS file Command entry: acisout NOTE When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD, you need to set the ACISOUTVER system variable to the ACIS version used for that release. For example, to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14, set ACISOUTVER to 16. Select objects: Use an object selection method Selected objects that are not solids or regions are ignored, and the Create ACIS File dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the file you want to create. The selected objects are exported to an ASCII file.
ACTRECORD Quick Reference Starts the Action Recorder
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Record. Menu: Tools ➤ Action Recorder ➤ Record Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and choose Action Recorder ➤ Record. Command entry: actrecord (or 'actrecord for transparent use) The Action Recorder Preferences dialog box on page 61 controls the behavior of the Action Recorder panel when playing back or recording an action macro. You can create an action macro by recording most of the commands that you are already familiar with.
60 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Action Recorder Preferences Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Preference. Customizes the settings used for the Action Recorder.
Action Recorder Panel Controls if the Action Recorder panel expands when recording or playing back an action macro, and if you are prompted to provide a command and file name for the action macro when recording is stopped. Expand on Playback Expands the Action Recorder panel during play back. Expand on Recording Expands the Action Recorder panel during recording. Prompt for Action Macro Name Displays the Action Macro dialog box when recording is stopped.
ACTSTOP Quick Reference Stops the Action Recorder and provides the option of saving the recorded actions to an action macro file
Action Recorder Preferences Dialog Box | 61
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Stop. Menu: Tools ➤ Action Recorder ➤ Stop Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and choose Action Recorder ➤ Stop. Command entry: actstop (or 'actstop for transparent use) The Action Macro dialog box on page 62 is displayed. If you enter -actstop at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 64. You can stop the recording or playback of an action macro based on the current state of the Action Recorder. When the recording of an action macro is stopped, the recorded actions are saved to an action macro file.
Action Macro Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Stop. Menu: Tools ➤ Action Recorder ➤ Stop Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and choose Action Recorder ➤ Stop. Command entry: actstop (or 'actstop for transparent use) Saves or renames the current action macro and defines the playback behavior for the action macro.
62 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Action Macro Command Name Specifies the command name for the current action macro.
File Name Displays the file name for the current action macro.
Folder Path Displays the location where the current action macro file is stored or will be saved to.
Description Specifies a description for the current action macro. The description is displayed in a tooltip when the cursor hovers over the top node of the action macro in the Action tree.
Action Macro Dialog Box | 63
Restore Pre-Plackback View Defines how the view, prior to the playback of an action macro, is restored. When Requesting User Input Restores the view prior to the playback of an action macro when a request for user input occurs. Once Playback Completes Restores the view prior to the playback of an action macro when playback is complete.
Check for Inconsistencies When Playback Begins Specifies if the action macro should be scanned for inconsistencies between the current drawing state and the drawing state when the macro was recorded.
More Options Controls the display of additional options in the Action Macro dialog box. ■
Restore Pre-Playback View
■
Check for Inconsistencies When Playback Begins
-ACTSTOP Quick Reference Stops the Action Recorder and provides the option of saving the recorded actions to an action macro file Command entry: -actstop (or '-actstop for transparent use) If you enter -actstop at the command prompt, the following prompts are displayed: Enter action macro name : Press ENTER, or enter a name for the action macro Enter an option [Description on page 64/Settings on page 65/Exit] <Exit>: Enter an option and press ENTER
Description Specifies a description for the current action macro.
64 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Description: Enter a description and press ENTER
Settings Defines the behavior of the action macro during playback. Restore the original view before a request for input [Yes/No] : Press ENTER, or enter an option Restores the view prior to the playback of an action macro when a request for user input occurs. Restore the original view after playback is complete [Yes/No] : Press ENTER, or enter an option Restores the view prior to the playback of an action macro when playback is complete. Prompt during playback if inconsistencies are found [Yes/No] : Press ENTER, or enter an option Specifies if the action macro should be scanned for inconsistencies between the current drawing state and the drawing state when the macro was recorded.
Exit Saves the action macro with the specified name.
ACTUSERINPUT Quick Reference Inserts a request for user input into an action macro
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Request User Input. Command entry: actuserinput (or 'actuserinput for transparent use) The next recorded action is set to request user input when the action macro is played back. When a request for user input is added to an action, the icon for the action in the Action tree displays a small black silhouette of a person in the lower-right corner and the text assigned to the action node is displayed in italic font.
ACTUSERINPUT | 65
You can insert a request for user input by selecting the value node in the Action tree that you want to provide input for during playback.
ACTUSERMESSAGE Quick Reference Inserts a user message into an action macro
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Insert Message. Command entry: actusermessage (or 'actusermessage for transparent use) The Insert User Message dialog box on page 66 is displayed. If you enter -actusermessage at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 67. You can insert a message into an action macro by selecting an action in the Action tree, and then entering the text that you want displayed during playback.
Insert User Message Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Insert Message. Command entry: actusermessage (or 'actusermessage for transparent use) Inserts a user message that is displayed when the action macro is played back.
66 | Chapter 2 A Commands
-ACTUSERMESSAGE Quick Reference Inserts a user message into an action macro Command entry: -actusermessage (or '-actusermessage for transparent use) Enter a message to display during playback <exit>: Enter a message and press ENTER, or press ENTER to exit the command Inserts a user message that is displayed when the action macro is played back. Click Yes to continue or No to end the playback. NOTE You can enter a maximum of 256 characters for the user message.
ADCCLOSE Quick Reference Closes DesignCenter Command entry: adcclose Closes the DesignCenter™ window.
-ACTUSERMESSAGE | 67
ADCENTER Quick Reference Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter Command entry: adcenter DesignCenter on page 68is displayed.
DesignCenter Window Quick Reference
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ DesignCenter.
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter Command entry: adcenter Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which includes blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs). Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and access options. When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab, the following two panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content: ■
Content area (right pane) on page 69
■
Tree view (left pane) on page 72
68 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Content Area (DesignCenter) Displays the content of the "container" currently selected in the tree view. A container is a network, computer, disk, folder, file, or web address (URL) containing information accessible by DesignCenter. Depending on the container selected in tree view, the content area typically displays the following: ■
Folders containing drawings or other files
■
Drawings
■
Named objects contained in drawings (named objects include blocks, xrefs, layouts, layers, dimension styles, table styles, multileader styles, and text styles)
■
Images or icons representing blocks or hatch patterns
■
Web-based content
■
Custom content developed by third-party applications
From the content area, you can insert blocks or hatch patterns or attach external references in a drawing by dragging, by double-clicking, or by right-clicking and choosing Insert Block, Attach Xref, or Copy. You can drag or right-click to add other content to drawings, such as layers, dimension
DesignCenter Window | 69
styles, and layouts. You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to tool palettes. NOTE You can access relevant content area and tree view options on a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the tree view or the content area.
Load Displays the Load dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). Use Load to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web, and then to select content to load in the content area.
Back Returns to the most recent location in the history list.
Forward Returns to the next later location in the history list.
Up Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container.
Stop (DC Online tab) Stops the current transfer.
Reload (DC Online tab) Reloads the current page.
70 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Search Displays the Search dialog box on page 73, where you can specify search criteria to locate drawings, blocks, and nongraphical objects within drawings. Search also displays custom content saved on your desktop.
Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder in the content area. The Favorites folder contains shortcuts to items you access often. You can add items to Favorites either by right-clicking the content area or right-clicking an item in the tree view, and then clicking Add to Favorites. To delete an item from Favorites, use the Organize Favorites option on the shortcut menu and then use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu. NOTE The DesignCenter folder is automatically added to Favorites. This folder contains drawings with discipline-specific blocks that you can insert in drawings.
Home Returns DesignCenter to your home folder. On installation, the home folder is set to ...\Sample\DesignCenter. Change the home folder using the shortcut menu in the tree view.
Tree View Toggle Displays and hides the tree view. Hide the tree view if you need more space in your drawing area. When the tree view is hidden, you can use the content area to navigate to containers and to load content. The Tree View Toggle button is not available while you're using the History list in the tree view.
DesignCenter Window | 71
Preview Displays and hides a preview of the selected item in a pane below the content area. If there is no preview image saved with the selected item, the Preview area is empty.
Description Displays and hides a text description of the selected item in a pane below the content area. If a preview image is also displayed, the description is displayed below it. If there is no description saved with the selected item, the Description area is empty.
Views Provides different display formats for the content that is loaded in the content area. You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button repeatedly to cycle through the display formats. The default view varies for the type of content currently loaded in the content area. Large Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in large icon format. Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon format. List View Displays the names of the loaded content in a list. Detail View Displays additional information about the loaded content. You can sort the items by name, size, type, and other properties, depending on the type of content that is loaded in the content area.
Refresh (Shortcut Menu Only) Refreshes the display in the content area to reflect any changes you have made. Right-click the content area background and click Refresh on the shortcut menu.
Tree View (DesignCenter) Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives, a list of open drawings, custom content, and a history of the last
72 | Chapter 2 A Commands
locations you accessed. Select an item in the tree view to display its contents in the content area. NOTE In the sample\designcenter folder are drawings containing discipline-specific blocks that you can insert in drawings. These drawings are called symbol library drawings. Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view options. Folders Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives, including My Computer and Network Neighborhood. You can use ADCNAVIGATE to navigate to a specific file name, directory location, or network path in the DesignCenter tree view. See ADCNAVIGATE. Open Drawings Displays all drawings open in the current work session, including drawings that are minimized. History Displays a list of the files that you opened most recently in DesignCenter. With the history displayed, right-click a file to display information about the file or to delete the file from the History list. DC Online Accesses the DesignCenter Online web page. When you establish a web connection, two panes are viewed on the Welcome page. The left side displays folders containing symbol libraries, manufacturer sites, and additional content libraries. When a symbol is selected, it is displayed on the right side and can be downloaded into your drawing.
Search Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter Command entry: adcenter Searches for content such as drawings, hatch patterns, and blocks.
Search Dialog Box | 73
Look For Specifies the type of content to search for. The content type you specify determines which tabs are displayed in the Search dialog box and the search fields it provides. The Date Modified and Advanced tabs are displayed only when the Drawings option is selected in Look For. In Specifies a search path name. To enter multiple paths, separate them with semicolons. Use Browse to select a path from a tree view list. Browse Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you can specify the drives and folders to search. Search Subfolders Includes subfolders in the search path. Search Now Starts the search based on criteria you specify. Stop Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in the Search Results panel. New Search Clears the Search For the Word(s) box and places the cursor in the box. Search Results Panel Displays the results of the search in resizable columns at the bottom of the window. Double-click an item to load it into DesignCenter.
Search Tabs (Search Dialog Box) Display search fields relevant to the type of content specified in the Look For list. The name of the tab reflects the content type. You can use wild-card characters to extend or limit your search patterns.
74 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Search for the Word(s) Specifies the text string to look for in the field you specify. Use the asterisk and question mark wild-card characters to broaden your search. ■
* (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search string.
■
? (Question mark): Matches any single character; for example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on.
This option is available on the Drawings tab and, when available, the Custom Content tab. In the Field(s) Specifies the property fields to search. For drawings, all fields other than File Name are derived from the information entered in the Drawing Properties dialog box (DWGPROPS). This option is available on the Drawings tab and the Custom Content tab. NOTE Custom content developed by third-party applications may not provide fields for searches using the Search dialog box. Search for the Name Specifies the name of the drawing, block, layer, xref, or other content type that you want to find. This option is available on all tabs except Drawings and Custom Content.
Date Modified Tab (Search Dialog Box) Finds content that was created or modified during a certain time period. All Files Finds all the files that match the criteria you specify on other tabs, regardless of creation date or date modified. This is the default setting. Find All Files Created or Modified Finds files created or modified during a specific time period. The search locates files that match the criteria you specify on this and other tabs. Between Searches for files created or modified between the dates you specify. During the Previous Month(s) Searches for files created or modified within the number of months you specify. During the Previous Day(s) Searches for files created or modified within the number of days you specify.
Search Dialog Box | 75
Advanced Tab (Search Dialog Box) Finds content within drawings; this tab is available only when you select Drawings in Look For. Containing Specifies the type of text in a drawing that you want to search for. For example, you can search for text contained within a block attribute, such as a manufacturer's catalog number. Containing Text Specifies the text you want to search for. Size Is Specifies a minimum or maximum file size. Select At Least or At Most, and enter a value in KB.
ADCNAVIGATE Quick Reference Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path Command entry: adcnavigate Enter pathname <current>: The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the DesignCenter Folders tab. At the prompt, you can enter a path in any of the following formats: ■
Folder path: c:\project files\electrical
■
Folder path and a file name: c:\project files\electrical\circuit2.dwg
■
UNC (universal naming convention) network path: \\server1\campus_project
DesignCenter is displayed, with the Folder tab active, and the path or drawing file that you specified is loaded. ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter.
76 | Chapter 2 A Commands
ALIGN Quick Reference Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Align Command entry: align Select objects: Select the objects to align and press ENTER ALIGN Using One Pair of Points Specify first source point: Specify a point (1) Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2) Specify second source point: Press ENTER When you select only one source point and destination point pair, the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from the source point (1) to the destination point (2).
ALIGN Using Two Pairs of Points Specify first source point: Specify a point (1) Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2) Specify second source point: Specify a point (3) Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4) Specify third source point: Press ENTER Scale objects based on alignment points [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER
ALIGN | 77
When you select two point pairs, you can move, rotate, and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other objects. The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4). After you enter the second set of points, you are prompted to scale the object. The distance between the first and second destination points (2, 4) is used as the reference length to which the object is scaled. Scaling is available only when you are aligning objects using two point pairs. NOTE If you use two source and destination points to perform a 3D alignment on nonperpendicular working planes, you get unpredictable results. ALIGN Using Three Pairs of Points Specify first source point: Specify a point (1) Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2) Specify second source point: Specify a point (3) Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4) Specify third source point: Specify a point (5) Specify third destination point: Specify a point (6)
78 | Chapter 2 A Commands
When you select three point pairs, you can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects. The selected objects move from the source point (1) to the destination point (2). The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns with the destination object (2 and 4). The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6).
AMECONVERT Quick Reference Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects Command entry: ameconvert Select objects: Use an object selection method The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release 2 or 2.1 regions or solids. All other objects are ignored.
Because of increased accuracy in the new solid modeler, AME models may look slightly different after conversion. This difference is noticeable where the previous version of the solid modeler identified the surfaces of two different shapes as so close as to be considered in the same plane. The new solid modeler's finer tolerance may interpret these surfaces as being slightly offset. This phenomenon is most apparent with aligned features such as fillets, chamfers, and through-holes. Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler, with its much finer approximation capability, interprets what was once a through-hole as being slightly less wide than the solid. Typically, the length of the remaining solid material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and that of the new modeler.
AMECONVERT | 79
Likewise, updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly below the surface, creating a hole through the solid, leaving the original shape unaltered. Also, drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original surface creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or chamfer.
ANIPATH Quick Reference Saves an animation along a path in a 3D model
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Motion Path. Menu: View ➤ Motion Path Animations Command entry: anipath The Motion Path Animation dialog box on page 80 is displayed.
Motion Path Animation Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Motion Path. Menu: View ➤ Motion Path Animations Command entry: anipath Specifies settings for a motion path animation and creates an animation file.
80 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Camera Link Camera To Links a camera to a static point or a motion path in a drawing. Point Links a camera to a static point in a drawing. Path Links a camera to a motion path in the drawing. Pick Point/Select Path Selects either the point where a camera is located or the path along which a camera travels, depending on whether Point or Path was selected. Point/Path List Displays a list of named points or paths to which you can link a camera. To create a path, you can link a camera to a line, arc, elliptical arc, circle, polyline, 3D polyline, or spline. NOTE When you create a motion path, a camera is automatically created. If you delete an object that you specified as a motion path, the named motion path is also deleted.
Target Link Target To Links a target to a point or a path. If the camera is linked to a point, the target must be linked to a path. If the camera is linked to a path, you can link the target to either a point or a path.
Motion Path Animation Dialog Box | 81
Point If the camera is linked to a path, links the target to a static point in the drawing. Path Links the target to a motion path in the drawing. Pick Point/Select Path Selects either the point or a path for the target, depending on whether Point or Path was selected. Point/Path List Displays a list of named points or paths to which you can link the target. To create a path, you can link a target to a line, arc, elliptical arc, circle, polyline, 3D polyline, or spline.
Animation Settings Controls the output of the animation file. Frame Rate (FPS) The speed at which the animation will run, measured in frames per second. Specify a value from 1 to 60. The default value is 30. Number of Frames Specifies the total number of frames in the animation. With the frame rate, this value determines the length of the animation. When you change this number, the Duration value is automatically recalculated. Duration (seconds) Specifies the duration (in sections) of the animation. When you change this number, the Number of Frames value is automatically recalculated. Visual Style Displays a list of visual styles and render presets that you can apply to an animation file. See VISUALSTYLES and RENDERPRESETS for more information. Format Specifies the file format for the animation. You can save an animation to an AVI, MOV, MPG, or WMV file format for future playback. The MOV format is available only if Apple QuickTime Player is installed. The WMV format is available and is the default selection only if Microsoft Windows Media Player 9 or later is installed. Otherwise, AVI is the default selection. Resolution Defines the width and height of the resulting animation in screen display units. The default value is 320 x 240. Corner Deceleration Moves a camera at a slower rate as it turns a corner. Reverse Reverses the direction of an animation.
82 | Chapter 2 A Commands
When Previewing Show Camera Preview Enables the display of the Animation Preview dialog box so you can preview the animation before you save it. Preview Displays the movement of the camera for the animation in the viewport. If “When Previewing Show Camera Preview” is checked, the Animation Preview dialog box on page 83 also displays a preview of the animation.
Animation Preview Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Motion Path. Menu: View ➤ Motion Path Animations Command entry: anipath Previews a motion path animation that you created with a motion path or 3D navigation.
Preview Displays a preview of the animation you set up either in the Motion Path Animation dialog box or when walking or flying through an animation and recording it from the ribbon.
Animation Preview Dialog Box | 83
Play Plays the animation preview. The Play button is disabled when an animation is already playing. Record Records the animation, starting from the current frame displayed in the Preview region. All frames following the current frame are overwritten. The Overwrite Confirmation warning is displayed to confirm that you intend to overwrite the existing frames. The Record button is disabled when an animation is playing. Pause Pauses the animation at the current frame displayed in the Preview region. After pausing an animation, the Pause button is disabled. Save Opens the Save As dialog box. You can save an animation to an AVI, MOV, MPG, or WMV file format for future playback. Once you save the animation, you are returned to the drawing. The Save button is disabled when an animation is playing. Visual Style Specifies the visual style displayed in the Preview region. The visual style is initially set to Current, which is the visual style defined in the active viewport. Choose from a list of preset and user-defined visual styles. Slider Moves frame-by-frame through the animation preview. You can move the slider to a specific frame in the animation. A tooltip displays the current frame and total number of frames in the animation.
ANNOUPDATE Quick Reference Updates existing objects to match the current properties of their styles Command entry: annoupdate When a non-annotative text object is updated to an annotative text style, the object becomes annotative and supports the current . If the text style has a fixed Paper Height, the object is set to that height. If the text style’s Paper Height is set to 0, the size of the text does not change. The Paper Height value is inferred by dividing the model height by the current annotation scale. If an annotative object is updated to a non-annotative style, the object becomes non-annotative and any alternate are removed. Select objects: Use an object selection method
84 | Chapter 2 A Commands
ANNORESET Quick Reference Resets the location of all for an object to that of the current scale representation Command entry: annoreset Select objects: Use an object selection method
APERTURE Quick Reference Controls the size of the object snap target box Command entry: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use) Object snap target height (1-50 pixels) <current>: Enter a value (1-50) or press ENTER Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target box. The APBOX system variable controls whether the object snap target box is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box. You can also change this setting in the Options dialog box, Drafting tab.
APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the PICKBOX system variable.
APPLOAD Quick Reference Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup
ANNORESET | 85
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Load Application. Menu: Tools ➤ Load Application Command entry: appload The Load/Unload Applications dialog box is displayed on page 86.
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Load Application Command entry: appload Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at startup.
86 | Chapter 2 A Commands
The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file selection dialog box on page 996. Following are descriptions of the additional options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box: Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently selected either in the files list or on the History List tab. Load is unavailable until you select a file that you can load. ObjectARX, VBA, and DBX applications are loaded immediately, but LSP, VLX, and FAS applications are queued and then loaded when you close the Load/Unload Applications dialog box. If you select a file that is already loaded, Load reloads the application when applicable. You cannot reload ObjectARX applications. In this case, you must first unload the ObjectARX application and then load it again. The Load option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking a file on the History List tab. Loaded Applications Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of currently loaded applications. LISP routines are displayed in this list only if you loaded them in the Load/Unload Applications dialog box. You can drag files into this list from the files list or from any application with dragging capabilities, such as Microsoft® Windows® Explorer. If you use the AutoCAD web browser to load an application, the web browser downloads the application to a temporary location on your machine. This is the location from which AutoCAD loads the application, as displayed in this list. You can also unload certain applications from this list. See the Unload option for details. Files that you cannot unload are not available for selection. History List Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of applications that you previously loaded with Add To History selected. You can drag files into this list from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities, such as Windows Explorer. If Add To History is not selected when you drag files into this list, the dragged files are loaded but not added to the history list. You can load and remove applications from this list, but to unload applications, you must use the Loaded Applications tab. See the Load, Unload, and Remove options. Add to History Adds any applications that you load to the history list. You may prefer to clear this option when loading applications with the AutoCAD web browser, because these applications are unavailable once the cache for the application's temporary location is emptied. Unload/Remove Unloads the selected applications or removes them from the History List. Unload is available only when a file is selected on the Loaded
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box | 87
Applications tab. Remove is available only when you select a file on the History List tab. LISP applications cannot be unloaded, nor can ObjectARX applications that are not registered for unloading. Note that Remove does not unload the selected application. The Remove option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking an application on the History List tab. Startup Suite Contains a list of applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD. You can drag application files from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities such as Windows Explorer, into the Startup Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite. You cannot add applications that you load with the AutoCAD web browser to the Startup Suite. Contents Displays the Startup Suite dialog box on page 88. You can also add files to the Startup Suite by clicking the Startup Suite icon or by right-clicking an application on the History List tab and clicking Add to Startup Suite on the shortcut menu. Status Line Displays messages that indicate the status of loading and unloading operations.
Startup Suite Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Load Application Command entry: appload Adds and removes application files from the Startup Suite. These are the applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD.
88 | Chapter 2 A Commands
List of Applications Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the application files to load at startup. Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You can use this dialog box to select files to add to the startup suite. Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite.
ARC Quick Reference Creates an arc
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 3-Point.
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Arc Command entry: arc Specify start point on page 90 of arc or [Center on page 92]: Specify a point, enter c, or press ENTER to start tangent to last line, arc, or polyline on page 93 To create an arc, you can also specify combinations of center, endpoint, start point, radius, angle, chord length, and direction values.
ARC | 89
Start Point Specifies the starting point of the arc. NOTE If you press ENTER without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline. Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]:
Second Point Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3). The second point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc. Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)
You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part. Specify center point of arc: Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: End Point Using the center point (2), draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the third point (3).
The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point, as shown in the illustration. Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) using a center point (2) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn.
90 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Specify included angle: Specify an angle
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord: Specify a length
End Specifies the endpoint of the arc. Specify end point of arc: Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (3) through the second point specified (2).
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint (2), with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify an angle by moving the pointing device counterclockwise
ARC | 91
Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc, major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise, beginning with the start point (1), and ending at an endpoint (2). The direction is determined from the start point. Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc:
Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is negative, the major arc is drawn. Specify radius of arc:
Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part. Specify center point of arc: Specify start point of arc: Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (1) through a specified point (3).
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center point (1) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle:
92 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord:
Tangent to Last Line,Arc, or Polyline Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press ENTER at the first prompt.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (1)
ARCHIVE Quick Reference Packages the current sheet set files to be archived Command entry: archive The Archive a Sheet Set dialog box on page 93 is displayed. If you enter -archive at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 101.
Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: archive
ARCHIVE | 93
Packages the files associated with the current sheet set so that they can be archived. The Sheets tab lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet order and according to subset organization. The Files Tree tab lists the files to be included in the package in a hierarchical tree format. The Files Table tab displays the files to be included in the package in a table format. All files to be included in the archive package are indicated by a check mark next to the file name. To remove a file from the archive package, select the check box. Right-click in the file display area to display a shortcut menu, from which you can clear all check marks or apply check marks to all files. NOTE Make sure that the files to be archived are not currently open in any application.
Sheets Tab Lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet order and according to subset organization. A sheet set must be open in the Sheet Set Manager. Archive can be selected from the shortcut menu displayed when the top-level sheet set node is right-clicked, or archive can be entered at the command prompt.
Files Tree Tab Lists the files to be included in the archive package in a hierarchical tree format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package
94 | Chapter 2 A Commands
or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the archive package. Included Reports the number of files included in the package and the size of the package.
Files Table Tab Displays the files to be included in the archive package in a table format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the archive package. Included Reports the number of files included in the package and the size of the package.
Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box | 95
Add a File Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an additional file to include in the archive package. This button is available on both the Files Tree tab and the Files Table tab.
Enter Notes to Be Included with This Archive Provides a space where you can enter notes related to the archive package. The notes are included in the archive report. You can specify a template of default notes to be included with all your archive packages by creating an ASCII text file called archive.txt. This file must be saved to a location specified by the Support File Search Path option on the Files tab on page 1013 in the Options dialog box.
View Report Displays report information that is included with the archive package. Includes any archive notes that you entered. If you have created a text file of default notes, the notes are also included in the report. Save As Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify a location in which to save a report file. Note that a report file is automatically included with all archive packages that you generate; by choosing Save As, you can save an additional copy of a report file for reference purposes.
96 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Modify Archive Setup Displays the Modify Archive Setup dialog box on page 97, in which you can specify options for the archive package.
Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: archive
Archive Type and Location Specifies the type and location of archive package created. Archive Package Type Specifies the type of archive package created. Archive Package Type
Description
Folder
Creates an archive package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder.
Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box | 97
Archive Package Type
Description
Self-Extracting Executable
Creates an archive package of files as a compressed, self-extracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting EXE file decompresses the archive package and restores the files.
Zip
Creates an archive package of files as a compressed ZIP file. To restore the files, you need a decompression utility such as the shareware application PKZIP or WinZip.
File Format Specifies the file format to which all drawings included in the archive package will be converted. You can select a drawing file format from the drop-down list. Archive File Folder Specifies the location in which the archive package is created. Lists the last nine locations in which archive packages were created. To specify a new location, click Browse and navigate to the location you want. If this field is left blank, the archive file is created in the folder containing the sheet set data (DST) file. Archive File Name Specifies the method for naming the archive package. Displays the default file name for the archive package. This option is not available if the archive package type is set to Folder. Archive File Name Type
Description
Prompt for a File Name
Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the name of the archive package.
Overwrite if Necessary
Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already exists, the existing file is automatically overwritten.
Increment File Name if Necessary
Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already exists, a number is added to
98 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Archive File Name Type
Description the end. This number is incremented each time a new archive package is saved.
Path Options Provides options for the archive. Use Organized Folder Structure Duplicates the folder structure for the files being transmitted. The root folder is the top-level folder within a hierarchical folder tree. The following considerations apply: ■
Relative paths remain unchanged. Relative paths outside the source root folder retain up to one level of the folder path above them, and are placed in the root folder.
■
Absolute paths within the root folder tree are converted to relative paths. Absolute paths retain up to one level of the folder path above them, and are placed in the root folder.
■
Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are converted to No Path and are moved to the root folder or to a folder within the root folder tree.
■
A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.
■
A PlotCfgs folder is created, if necessary.
■
A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files for sheet sets, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder.
This option is not available if you're saving an archive package to an Internet location. Source Root Folder Defines the source root folder for relative paths of drawing-dependent files, such as xrefs. This option determines the source root folder for the Use Organized Folder Structure option. The source root folder also contains the sheet set data (DST) file when a sheet set is archived. Place All Files in One Folder All files are installed to a single, specified target folder when the archive package is created.
Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box | 99
Keep Files and Folders As Is Preserves the folder structure of all files in the archive package. This option is not available if you're saving an archive package to an Internet location.
Actions Specifies the actions applicable to the archive package. Set Default Plotter to 'None' Changes the printer/plotter setting in the archive package to None. Prompt for Password Opens the Archive—Set Password dialog box on page 100, where you can specify a password for your archive package. Purge Drawings Does a complete purge of all the drawings in the archive. NOTE As the purge is done in silent mode, you will not receive any notifications when the drawings have been removed.
Include Options Specifies the various options available with the archive package. Include Fonts Includes any associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the archive package. Include Files from Data Links Adds external files referenced by a data link to the transmittal package. Include Textures from Materials Includes textures with materials that are attached to objects or faces. Include Photometric Web Files Includes photometric web files that are associated with web lights in the drawing. Include Sheet Set Data and Files Includes the sheet set data (DST) file, label block drawing files, callout block drawing files, and drawing template (DWT) files with the archive package.
Archive - Set Password Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: archive
100 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Password for Compressed Archive Package Provides a space for an optional password for the archive package. When others attempt to open the archive package, they must provide this password to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder archive packages.
Password Confirmation Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to reenter them.
-ARCHIVE Quick Reference If you enter -archive at the command prompt, the following ARCHIVE command prompts are displayed. Sheet Set name or [?] <current>: Enter a predefined sheet set name, enter ? to display a list of sheet sets, or press ENTER The sheet set name specifies a sheet set to use for the archive package. This option is available only when a sheet set is open. Enter an option [Create archive package/Report only] : Enter an option or press ENTER Password (press ENTER for none): Enter a password or press ENTER You are only prompted for a password if you selected Prompt for Password in the archive setup.
AREA Quick Reference Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas
-ARCHIVE | 101
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Area.
Toolbar: Inquiry Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Area Command entry: area Specify first corner point on page 102 or [Object on page 102/Add on page 103/Subtract on page 104]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option
First Corner Point Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points. All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total: Specify a point (2)
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to complete the definition of the perimeter. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that line length is added.
Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. You can calculate the area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids. NOTE 2D solids (created with the SOLID command) do not have an area reported.
102 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Select objects: If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored.
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or length) calculations.
Add Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas. The Add option calculates the individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined areas and objects. You can use the Subtract option to subtract specified areas from the total area. Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option
AREA | 103
First Corner Point Calculates the area and perimeter you define by selecting points. All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total (ADD mode): Specify a point (2) Specify points to define a polygon (3). Press ENTER. AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that line length is added. Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. (ADD mode) Select objects: AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored. The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter calculations. Subtract Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you subtract specified areas.
Subtract Similar to the Add option, but subtracts areas and perimeters.
ARRAY Quick Reference Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern
104 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Array Command entry: array You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular or polar array.
The Array dialog box on page 105 is displayed. You can create rectangular or polar arrays by choosing the appropriate option. Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. If you select multiple objects, the objects are treated as one item to be copied and arrayed. If you enter -array at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 111.
Array Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Array Command entry: array Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern. Use the Rectangular Array on page 106 option to create an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object. Use the Polar Array on page 108 option to create an array by copying the selected objects around a center point.
Array Dialog Box | 105
Rectangular Array Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.
Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array. If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Columns Specifies the number of columns in the array.
106 | Chapter 2 A Commands
If you specify one column, you must specify more than one row. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Offset Distance and Direction Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the array's offset. Row Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. To add rows downward, specify a negative value. To specify row spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button. Column Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. To add columns to the left, specify a negative value. To specify column spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset button. Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays. Pick Both Offsets Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to set the row and column spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a rectangle. Pick Row Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows. ARRAY prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Row Offset. Pick Column Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between columns. ARRAY prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Column Offset. Pick Angle of Array Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can specify the angle of rotation by entering a value or using the pointing device to specify two points. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays.
Array Dialog Box | 107
Polar Array Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point.
Center Point Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location.
Pick Center Point Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the center point in the drawing area.
Method and Values Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array. Method Sets the method used to position objects. This setting controls which of the Method and Value fields are available for specifying values. For example, if the method is Total Number of Items & Angle to Fill, the related fields are available for specifying values; the Angle Between Items field is not available. Total Number of Items Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant array. The default value is 4. Angle to Fill Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. A positive value specifies counterclockwise rotation. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation. The default value is 360. A value of 0 is not permitted.
108 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Angle Between Items Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. Enter a positive value. The default direction value is 90. NOTE You can choose the Pick buttons and use the pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and Angle Between Items. Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. ARRAY prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the drawing area. Pick Angle Between Items Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. ARRAY prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the drawing area.
Rotate Items as Copied Rotates the items in the array, as shown in the preview area.
More/Less Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off. When you choose More, additional options are displayed, and the name of this button changes to Less.
Object Base Point Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. To construct a polar array, ARRAY determines the distance from the array's center point to a reference (base) point on the last object selected. The point used depends on the type of object, as shown in the following table.
Base point settings by object Object type
Default base point
Arc, circle, ellipse
Center point
Polygon, rectangle
First corner
Array Dialog Box | 109
Base point settings by object Object type
Default base point
Donut, line, polyline, 3D polyline, ray, spline
Starting point
Block, paragraph text, single-line text
Insertion point
Construction lines
Midpoint
Region
Grip point
Set to Object's Default Uses the default base point of the object to position the arrayed object. To manually set the base point, clear this option. Base Point Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate. Choose Pick Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and specify a point. After you specify a point, the Array dialog box is redisplayed. NOTE To avoid unexpected results, set the base point manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not want to rotate the objects.
Select Objects Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects before or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array dialog box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily closes. When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER. The Array dialog box is redisplayed, and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select Objects button.
NOTE If you select multiple objects, the base point of the last selected object is used to construct the array.
110 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Preview Area Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the dialog box. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to another field after changing a setting.
Preview Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing. Pick or press ESC to return to dialog box or : Click anywhere in the drawing area or press escape to return to the Array dialog box or right-click to accept the array.
-ARRAY Quick Reference If you enter -array at the command prompt, the following ARRAY command prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter the type of array [Rectangular on page 111/Polar on page 112] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Rectangular Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.
Enter the number of rows (---) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
-ARRAY | 111
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice versa. The selected object, or cornerstone element, is assumed to be in the lower-left corner, and generates the array up and to the right. The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corresponding lengths of the object to be arrayed. Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between rows. ARRAY skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite corners of a rectangle. Specify the distance between columns (|||): To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between columns. Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option of the SNAP command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. The SNAPANG system variable stores the snap rotation angle. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Polar Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point.
112 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new base point Center Point Creates an array defined by a center point. Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. Specify the base point of objects: Specify a point Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press ENTER If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the angle to fill or the angle between items. If you press ENTER (and do not provide the number of items), you must specify both. Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation You can enter 0 for the angle to fill only if you specify the number of items. If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press ENTER, the following prompt is displayed: Angle between items: Specify an angle If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or pressed ENTER, ARRAY prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate the direction of the array: Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation ARRAY determines the distance from the array's center point to a reference point on the last object selected. The reference point used is the center point of a circle or arc, the insertion base point of a block or shape, the start point of text, and one endpoint of a line or trace. Rotate arrayed objects? : Enter y or n, or press ENTER In a polar array, the reference point of the last object in the selection set is used for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window or crossing selection, the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing an object from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be the last object selected. You can also make the selection set into a block and replicate it.
-ARRAY | 113
ARX Quick Reference Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications Command entry: arx Enter an option [? on page 114/Load on page 114/Unload on page 114/Commands on page 114/Options on page 114]:
? - List Applications Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications, which can be third-party programs or internal applications such as Render.
Load Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application.
Unload Unloads the specified ObjectARX application. Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload:
Commands Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are described in the ObjectARX Developer's Guide).
Options Presents developer-related ObjectARX application options. These options are explained in greater detail in the ObjectARX Developer's Guide. Enter an option [Group/CLasses/Services]: Enter an option or press ENTER Group Causes the specified group of commands to be the first group searched when resolving the names of AutoCAD commands. Classes Displays a class hierarchy of C++ classes derived from objects registered in the system. Services Lists the names of all registered services.
114 | Chapter 2 A Commands
ATTACHURL Quick Reference Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing Command entry: attachurl Enter hyperlink insert option [Area on page 115/Object on page 115] : Enter a or press ENTER
Area Creates the URLLAYER layer, draws a polyline on that layer, and attaches a URL to the polyline. First corner: Click in the drawing to indicate the lower-left corner of the area Other corner: Click to indicate the upper-right corner of the area Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL The polyline that represents the area is displayed in the color assigned to URLLAYER. The default color is red. When you move the cursor over the area in the drawing, the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the area.
Object Attaches a URL to the selected object. Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing, the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the object.
ATTDEF Quick Reference Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Define Attributes.
ATTACHURL | 115
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes Command entry: attdef The Attribute Definition dialog box on page 116 is displayed. If you enter -attdef at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 119. An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition. Attributes can store data such as part numbers, product names, and so on.
Attribute Definition Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Define Attributes. Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes Command entry: attdef Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text settings for an attribute.
116 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Mode Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the block in a drawing. The default values are stored in the AFLAGS system variable. Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or printed when you insert the block. ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode. Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized. Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute. NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be included in an action's selection set.
Attribute Sets attribute data. Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. Enter the attribute tag using any combination of characters except spaces. Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase. Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you do not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as a prompt. If you select Constant in the Mode area, the Prompt option is not available. Default Specifies the default attribute value. Insert Field Button Displays the Field dialog box on page 617. You can insert a field as all or part of the value for an attribute.
Attribute Definition Dialog Box | 117
Multiline Editor Button When Multiple Line mode is selected, displays an in-place text editor with a text formatting toolbar and ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version. For more information, see the In-Place Text Editor on page 929. NOTE Several options in the full In-Place Text Editor are grayed out to preserve compatibility with single-line attributes.
Insertion Point Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or select Specify On-screen and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with. Specify On-Screen Displays a Start Point prompt when the dialog box closes. Use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with. X Specifies the X coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. Y Specifies the Y coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. Z Specifies the Z coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.
Text Settings Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text. Justification Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT for a description of the justification options. Text Style Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text styles are displayed. To load or create a text style, see STYLE. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . If the block is annotative, the attribute will match the orientation of the block. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Text Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing device. The height is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select a text style that has fixed height (anything other than 0.0), or if you select Align in the Justification list, the Height option is not available. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device. The
118 | Chapter 2 A Commands
rotation angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select Align or Fit in the Justification list, the Rotation option is not available. Boundary Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available for single-line attributes.
Align Below Previous Attribute Definition Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute. If you have not previously created an attribute definition, this option is not available.
-ATTDEF Quick Reference If you enter -attdef at the command prompt, the following ATTDEF command prompts are displayed. Current attribute modes on page 119: Invisible=current Constant=current Verify=current Preset=current Lock position=current Annotative =current Multiple line =current Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset/Lock position/Annotative/Multiple lines] <done>: Enter attribute tag name on page 120: Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation points Enter attribute value on page 121: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Constant mode) Enter attribute prompt on page 120: Enter the text for the prompt line or press ENTER (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Enter default attribute value on page 121: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Specify location of multiline attribute on page 121: Specify a point (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Multiple line mode) Specify opposite corner on page 122: Specify a point or enter an option (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Multiple line mode)
Attribute Modes The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode (either Y for on or N for off). Entering i, c, v, p, l, a, or m toggles the modes
-ATTDEF | 119
on or off. Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings. The AFLAGS system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to set the default modes. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you insert the block. ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode. Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized. NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be included in an action's selection set. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute.
Attribute Tag Name Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase.
Attribute Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you press ENTER, the attribute tag is used as the prompt. If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt is not displayed. NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two backslashes.
120 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Default Attribute Value Specifies the default attribute value. The default attribute value appears when a block is inserted into your drawing. A default value is not required. If you turn on Constant mode, the Attribute Value prompt is displayed instead. When Multiple Line mode is off, -ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000 Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER Specify paper text height <current>: Specify a height, or press ENTER The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is . For a description of each option, see TEXT. NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two backslashes. When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT on page 923.
Attribute Value (Constant Mode) Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if you turn on Constant mode. ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000 Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER For a description of each option, see TEXT. When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT on page 923.
Location of Multiline Attribute (Multiple Line Mode) Specifies the first corner of the bounding box for the multiple-line text. This location is used as the starting point for the attribute.
-ATTDEF | 121
Opposite Corner (Multiple Line Mode) As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is displayed to show the location and width of the multiple-line text. The arrow within the rectangle indicates the direction of the text flow.
ATTDISP Quick Reference Retains current visibility setting of each attribute
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Display Attributes. Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Attribute Display Command entry: attdisp (or 'attdisp for transparent use) Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal on page 122/ON on page 122/OFF on page 122] <current>: The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility unless REGENAUTO, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. The current visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE system variable. Normal Retains the current visibility of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed. Invisible attributes are not displayed. On Makes all attributes visible. Off Makes all attributes invisible.
122 | Chapter 2 A Commands
ATTEDIT Quick Reference Changes attribute information in a block Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Attributes. Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Command entry: attedit Select block reference: Select a block with attributes The Edit Attributes dialog box on page 123 is displayed to edit attribute values for a specific block. Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Global Command entry: -attedit If you enter -attedit at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 125 to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block.
Edit Attributes Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Command entry: attedit Changes attribute information in a block.
ATTEDIT | 123
To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT. Block Name Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained in the block is displayed in this dialog box. List of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block. Edit the attribute values. If the block contains additional attributes, use Previous and Next to navigate through the list. You cannot edit attribute values on locked layers. Multiple-line attributes display the In-Place Text Editor on page 929 with the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version. To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box on page 617. Previous Displays the previous eight attribute values. Previous is available only if the selected block contains more than eight attributes and you used Next to display the additional attributes. Next Displays the next eight attribute values. If the block contains no additional attributes, Next is unavailable.
124 | Chapter 2 A Commands
-ATTEDIT Quick Reference If you enter -attedit at the command prompt, the following ATTEDIT command prompts are displayed. Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes on page 125/No on page 128] : Enter y or press ENTER to edit attributes one at a time, or enter n to edit attributes globally
Yes Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be visible and parallel to the current UCS. Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER, or enter a block name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific blocks Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER, or enter a tag or a partial tag with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attributes Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER, or specify a value or a value name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute values Attribute values are case sensitive. Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the current UCS
The first attribute in the selection set is marked with an X. You can change any properties of the attribute you select. Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] : Enter the property to change, or press ENTER for the next attribute If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of the options except Next, ATTEDIT prompts for a new value. The X remains on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute.
-ATTEDIT | 125
Value Changes or replaces an attribute value. Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press ENTER Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value. Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press ENTER Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER Either string can be null. The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters. Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute value. Enter new attribute value: Enter a new attribute value or press ENTER If you press ENTER, the attribute value is empty (null).
Position Changes the text insertion point.
Specify new text insertion point: Specify a point or press ENTER If the attribute is aligned, ATTEDIT prompts for both ends of a new text baseline.
126 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Height Changes the text height.
Specify new height <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press ENTER When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the specified point and the start point of the text.
Angle Changes the rotation angle.
Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press ENTER If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the specified point and the start point of the text.
Style Changes the style setting.
Enter new text style: Enter a style name or press ENTER
-ATTEDIT | 127
Layer Changes the layer. Enter new layer name <current>: Enter a layer name or press ENTER
Color Changes the color. You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]: Enter a color, enter t, enter co, or press ENTER You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer or byblock. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as PANTONE® If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book, such as PANTONE® 573
Next Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more attributes, ATTEDIT ends.
No Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible and invisible attributes. Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with another text string. If you edit attributes one at a time, you can edit any or all of the attributes.
128 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Performing global editing of attribute values. Edit only attributes visible on screen? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER to edit only visible attributes, or enter n to edit all attributes Yes Edits only visible attributes. Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER, or specify a block name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific blocks Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER, or specify a tag or a partial tag with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attributes Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER, or specify a value or a partial value with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute values Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which normally are not visible and cannot be selected, enter a backslash (\). Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the current UCS Select the attribute you want to change. Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press ENTER Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters. No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes to attributes are not reflected immediately. The drawing is regenerated at the end of the command unless REGENAUTO, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. Enter block name specification <*>: Enter a full block name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *), or press ENTER to select attributes in all blocks Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Enter a full attribute tag name or a partial name with wild-card characters (? or *), or press ENTER to select attributes in all attribute tags Enter attribute value specification <*>: Enter a full attribute value or a partial value with wild-card characters (? or *), or press ENTER to select all attributes Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which normally are not visible, enter a backslash (\). The attributes that match the specified block name, attribute tag, and attribute value are selected. Enter string to change: Enter the attribute value you want to change, or press ENTER to append a new value to the existing value(s) Enter new string: Enter the new value to replace the specified value or to append to selected values
-ATTEDIT | 129
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters.
ATTEXT Quick Reference Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file Command entry: attext The Attribute Extraction dialog box on page 130 is displayed. If you enter -attext at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 132.
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: attext Specifies the file format for the attribute information, the objects from which you want to extract information, and the template and output file names for the information.
File Format Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data.
130 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Comma Delimited File (CDF) Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file. Commas separate the fields of each record. Single quotation marks enclose the character fields. Space Delimited File (SDF) Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file. The fields of each record have a fixed width; therefore, field separators or character string delimiters are not appropriate. DXF Format Extract File (DXX) Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF™ format extraction requires no template. The file name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.
Select Objects Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with attributes. When the Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens, Number Found shows the number of objects you selected.
Number Found Indicates the number of objects you selected using Select Objects.
Template File Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. Enter the file name in the box, or choose Template File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. The default file extension is .txt. If you select DXF under File Format, the Template File option is not available. For information about creating a template file, see Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) in the User's Guide.
Output File Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data. Enter the path and file name for the extracted attribute data, or choose Output File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. The .txt file name extension is appended for CDF or SDF files and the .dxx file name extension for DXF files.
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box | 131
-ATTEXT Quick Reference If you enter -attext at the command prompt, the following ATTEXT command prompts are displayed. Enter extraction type or enable object selection [Cdf on page 132/Sdf on page 132/Dxf on page 132/Objects on page 132] : Enter an option or press ENTER CDF: Comma-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing. Commas separate the fields of each record. Single quotation marks enclose the character fields. In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute extraction template file. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format. SDF: Space-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing. The fields of each record have a fixed width; therefore, field separators or character string delimiters are not used. In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute extraction template file. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format. DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction requires no template. The file name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .dxx for DXF format. Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract. Select object: Use an object selection method Enter attribute extraction type [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf] : Enter an option or press ENTER
132 | Chapter 2 A Commands
ATTIPEDIT Quick Reference Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block Command entry: attipedit Select attribute to edit: Select an attribute within a block If you select a single-line attribute, displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 929 without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Right-click to display options. If you select a multiple-line attribute, displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 929 with the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version shown, or the full version.
Use the abbreviated version for compatibility with previous AutoCAD releases and editing operations. Use the full version for additional text formatting options. NOTE Not all MTEXT formatting options are available for multiline attributes even with the full In-Place Editor.
Mask the Objects Behind Attribute Text If the text in a multiple-line attribute overlaps other objects within the block, you can hide those objects that interfere with the text with a background mask. Click the Options button in the Text Formatting toolbar and click Background Mask to display the Background Mask dialog box on page 940.
ATTIPEDIT | 133
ATTREDEF Quick Reference Redefines a block and updates associated attributes Command entry: attredef Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine: Select objects for new block: Select objects: Insertion base point of new block: Specify a point New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values. Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. Any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition are deleted. WARNING ATTREDEF removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party applications.
ATTSYNC Quick Reference Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Synchronize Attributes.
Toolbar: Modify II Command entry: attsync Enter an option [?/Name/Select] <Select>: You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current attributes defined for the blocks.
134 | Chapter 2 A Commands
Use this command to update all instances of a block containing attributes that was redefined using the BLOCK or BEDIT commands. ATTSYNC does not change any values assigned to attributes in existing blocks. NOTE Use the ATTREDEF command to redefine and update blocks in one command. Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. Enter the name of the block you want to update. Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block whose attributes you want to update. If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist, an error message is displayed, and you are prompted to specify another block. WARNING ATTSYNC removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party applications.
AUDIT Quick Reference Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Audit. Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Audit Command entry: audit Fix any errors detected? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set. However, editing commands affect only the objects that belong to the current paper space or model space. If you set the AUDITCTL system variable to 1, AUDIT creates an ASCII file describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the same directory as the current drawing, with the file extension .adt. If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER to retrieve the drawing and correct its errors.
AUDIT | 135
AUTOPUBLISH Quick Reference Publishes drawings to DWF or DWFx files automatically to the location specified Command entry: autopublish AutoPublish DWF or specify override [Location] : Press ENTER or enter l Location Specify a directory where the published drawings are stored from the Select a Folder for Generated Files dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). Specify the settings for publishing drawings automatically to DWF or DWFx files in the Auto Publish Options Dialog Box on page 136. To view information on the published drawings, click the Plotting Details Report Available icon in the tray on the right side of the status bar. Clicking this icon opens the Plot and Publish Details dialog box on page 1594, which provides information about your completed plot and publish jobs. This information is also saved to the Plot and Publish log file. The shortcut menu for this icon also provides an option to view the most recently published DWF or DWFx file.
Auto Publish Options Dialog Box Quick Reference Specifies options for publishing drawings to DWF or DWFx files automatically.
Auto-Publish Options Specifies the output folder location where Design Web Format (DWF) files are saved when you publish drawing sheets. Publish On Specifies when the publishing take place: ■
Save (Publishes when the drawing is saved)
■
Close (Publishes when the drawing is closed)
■
Prompt on save (Publishes when the drawing is prompted to save)
136 | Chapter 2 A Commands
■
Prompt on close (Publishes when the drawing is prompted to close)
Location Specifies a directory where DWF (DWFx) files are saved when you publish drawings by selecting the following options in the list: ■
Drawing folder
■
.\DWF (sub-folder relative to Drawing folder)
■
Previously selected location
Click the [...] button to specify a new location to save the published drawings. Include Specifies whether the Model, layouts or both the model and layouts are saved when you publish drawings.
General DWF Options Specifies options for creating a single-sheet DWF (DWFx) file. DWF Format Specifies whether the file should be published as DWF or DWFx. DWF Type Specifies that a single-sheet DWF file or a single multisheet DWF file is generated for all the sheets listed in the Publish dialog box on page 1191. Password Protection Specifies options for protecting DWF files with passwords.
DWF Data Options Lists and allows you to specify the data that you can optionally include in the published file. Layer Information Specifies whether layer information is included in the published DWF file. NOTE Layer information for 3D DWF entries does not get published. View Information Publishes view information to DWF or DWFx files. Geographic Location Information Publishes Geographic location information to 3D DWF or 3D DWFx models. Block Information Specifies whether block property and attribute information is included in the published DWF files. NOTE You must set block information to Include in order for block template file information to be available.
Auto Publish Options Dialog Box | 137
Block Template File Allows you to create a new block template (BLK) file, edit an existing block template file, or use the settings of a previously created block template file. Create opens the Publish Block Template dialog box on page 1199, in which you can create a new block template. Edit opens the Select Block Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996), in which you can select an existing block template to modify.
138 | Chapter 2 A Commands
B Commands
3
BACKGROUND Quick Reference Sets up the background for your view. Command entry: background The Background dialog box on page 1583 is displayed
BACTION Quick Reference Adds an action to a dynamic block definition
Toolbar: Block Editor Command entry: bedit ➤ baction You can only use the BACTION command in the Block Editor on page 169. Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference will move or change when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition with which to associate the action
139
Select action type [Array on page 140/Move on page 140/Scale on page 141/Stretch on page 143/Polar Stretch on page 144]: Select an action type to associate with the parameter (the available actions types depend on the type of parameter selected) If you select a rotation parameter, a rotate on page 144 action is automatically added to the dynamic block definition and associated with the selected parameter. If you select a flip parameter, a flip on page 145 action is automatically added to the dynamic block definition and associated with the selected parameter. If you select a lookup parameter, a lookup on page 145 action is automatically added to the dynamic block definition and associated with the selected parameter.
Array Adds an array action to the current dynamic block definition. An array action can be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will array when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Enter the distance between columns (|||): Enter a value for the distance between the columns of arrayed objects Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value for the distance between the rows or enter two values separated by a comma for each of the two points for a unit cell for the arrayed objects Enter the distance between columns (|||): Enter a value for the distance between the columns of arrayed objects Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action
Move Adds a move action to the current dynamic block definition. A move action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. If you selected a point parameter, the following prompts are displayed:
140 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset/XY]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action Multiplier Changes the associated parameter value by a specified factor when the action is triggered. Enter distance multiplier <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 1.0000 Offset Increases or decreases by a specified number the angle of the associated parameter when the action is triggered. Enter angle offset <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 0 XY Specifies whether the distance that is applied to the action is the XY parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Enter XY distance type [X/Y/XY] <XY>: Enter the distance type or press ENTER to select XY
Scale Adds a scale action to the current dynamic block definition. A scale action can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will scale relative to the base point defined by the scale action when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed:
BACTION | 141
Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Base type]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action or enter base type to specify the type of base point If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Base type/XY]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action, enter base type to specify the type of base point, or enter xy to specify the distance type
Base Type Specifies the type of base point to use for the action. Enter base point type [Dependent/Independent] : Enter the type of base point for the action or press ENTER to use a dependent base point Dependent Specifies that the dynamic block reference is scaled relative to the base point of the parameter with which the scale action is associated. An offset can be specified for the base point, which is maintained relative to the parameter. Specify base point location <0,0>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select 0,0 Independent Specifies that the dynamic block reference is scaled relative to an independent base point you specify. An independent base point is shown in the Block Editor as an X marker. Specify base point location <XY location of associated parameter's base point>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the location of the associated parameter's base point
XY Specifies whether the distance applied to the action is the XY parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Enter XY distance type [X/Y/XY] <XY>: Enter the distance type or press ENTER to select XY
142 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Stretch Adds a stretch action to the current dynamic block definition. A stretch action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point/Xcorner/Ycorner] <Xcorner>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the X corner Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset/XY]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action. Multiplier Changes the associated parameter value by a specified factor when the action is triggered. Enter distance multiplier <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 1.0000 Offset Increases or decreases the angle of the associated parameter, by a specified number, when the action is triggered. Enter angle offset <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 0 XY Specifies whether the distance that is applied to the action is the XY parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Enter XY distance type [X/Y/XY] <XY>: Enter the distance type or press ENTER to select XY
BACTION | 143
Polar Stretch Adds a polar stretch action to the current dynamic block definition. A polar stretch action can only be associated with a polar parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects to add to the action's selection set for the stretch action Specify objects to rotate only Select objects: Select objects that will rotate only and not stretch Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action Multiplier Changes the associated parameter value by a specified factor when the action is triggered. Enter distance multiplier <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 1.0000 Offset Increases or decreases the angle of the associated parameter, by a specified number, when the action is triggered. Enter angle offset <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 0
Rotate Adds a rotate action to the current dynamic block definition. A rotate action can only be associated with a rotation parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will rotate when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Base type]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action or enter base type to specify the type of base point
Base Type Specifies the type of base point to use for the action. Enter base point type [Dependent/Independent] : Enter the type of base point for the action or press ENTER to use a dependent base point
144 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Dependent Specifies that the dynamic block reference rotates about the associated parameter's base point. Specify base point location <current>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the current location of the parameter's base point Independent Specifies that the dynamic block reference rotates about a specified base point. Specify base point location <XY location of associated parameter's base point>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the location of the associated parameter's base point
Flip Adds a flip action to the current dynamic block definition. A flip action can only be associated with a flip parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will flip around the reflection line of the flip parameter when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action
Lookup Adds a lookup action to the current dynamic block definition. A lookup action can only be associated with a lookup parameter. When you add a lookup action to the block definition, the Property Lookup Table dialog box on page 186 is displayed Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action
BACTIONSET Quick Reference Specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action in a dynamic block definition Shortcut menu: Select an action in the block definition. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Action Selection Set, and then click an option. Command entry: bedit ➤ bactionset
BACTIONSET | 145
Re-specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action by creating a new selection set or by adding to or removing objects from the existing selection set. You can only use the BACTIONSET command in the Block Editor on page 169. Select action: Select an action in the current dynamic block definition Specify selection set for action object [New on page 146/Modify on page 146] : Enter modify to modify the existing selection set or press ENTER to create a new selection set
New If you selected a move, scale, rotate, flip, or array action, the following prompt is displayed: Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the new selection set and then press ENTER If you selected a stretch action, the following prompts are displayed: Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Select objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects for the new selection set and then press ENTER If you selected a polar stretch action, the following prompts are displayed: Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects to stretch Specify objects to rotate only Select objects: Select objects that will rotate only and not stretch
Modify If you selected a move, scale, rotate, flip, or array action, the following prompt is displayed: Select objects to add to action set or [Remove]: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set that will rotate only and not stretch If you selected a stretch action, the following prompts are displayed: Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame
146 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Select objects to stretch Select objects to add to action set or [Remove]: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set If you selected a polar stretch action, the following prompts are displayed: Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects to add to action set or [Remove]: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set Specify objects to rotate only Select objects to add to action set or [Remove]: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set that will rotate only and not stretch
BACTIONTOOL Quick Reference Adds an action to a dynamic block definition Command entry: bedit ➤ bactiontool The BACTIONTOOL command is used in the Block Editor on page 169 by action tools on the Actions tab of the Block Authoring Palettes. Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference will move or change when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters. Select action type [Array on page 147/Lookup on page 148/Flip on page 148/Move on page 148/Rotate on page 150/Scale on page 150/sTretch on page 151/Polar stretch on page 153]:
Array Adds an array action to the current dynamic block definition. An array action can be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will array when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action
BACTIONTOOL | 147
Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Enter the distance between columns (|||): Enter a value for the distance between the columns of arrayed objects Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value for the distance between the rows or enter two values separated by a comma for each of the two points for a unit cell for the arrayed objects Enter the distance between columns (|||): Enter a value for the distance between the columns of arrayed objects Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action
Lookup Adds a lookup action to the current dynamic block definition. A lookup action can only be associated with a lookup parameter. When you add a lookup action to the block definition, the Property Lookup Table dialog box on page 186 is displayed Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action
Flip Adds a flip action to the current dynamic block definition. A flip action can only be associated with a flip parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will flip when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location: Specify a location in the block definition for the action
Move Adds a move action to the current dynamic block definition. A move action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that
148 | Chapter 3 B Commands
the selection set of objects will move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action If you selected a point parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset/XY]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action Multiplier Changes the associated parameter value by a specified factor when the action is triggered. Enter distance multiplier <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 1.0000 Offset Increases or decreases the angle of the associated parameter, by a specified number, when the action is triggered. Enter angle offset <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 0 XY Specifies whether the distance applied to the action is the XY parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Enter XY distance type [X/Y/XY] <XY>: Enter the distance type or press ENTER to select XY
BACTIONTOOL | 149
Rotate Adds a rotate action to the current dynamic block definition. A rotate action can only be associated with a rotation parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will rotate when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Base type]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action or enter base type to specify the type of base point
Base Type Specifies the type of base point to use for the action. Enter base point type [Dependent/Independent] : Enter the type of base point for the action or press ENTER to use a dependent base point Dependent Specifies that the dynamic block reference rotates about the associated parameter's base point. Specify base point location <current>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the current location of the parameter's base point Independent Specifies that the dynamic block reference rotates about a specified base point. Specify base point location <XY location of associated parameter's base point>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the location of the associated parameter's base point
Scale Adds a scale action to the current dynamic block definition. A scale action can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will scale when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set
150 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Specify action location or [Base type]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action or enter base type to specify the type of base point If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify selection set for action Select objects: Select objects for the action's selection set Specify action location or [Base type/XY]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action, enter base type to specify the type of base point, or enter xy to specify the distance type
Base Type Specifies the type of base point to use for the action. Enter base point type [Dependent/Independent] : Enter the type of base point for the action or press ENTER to use a dependent base point Dependent Specifies that the dynamic block reference is scaled relative to the base point of the parameter with which the scale action is associated. An offset can be specified for the base point, which is maintained relative to the parameter. Specify base point location <0,0>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select 0,0 Independent Specifies that the dynamic block reference is scaled relative to an independent base point you specify. An independent base point is shown in the Block Editor as an X marker. Specify base point location <XY location of associated parameter's base point>: Enter two values separated by a comma or press ENTER to select the location of the associated parameter's base point
XY Specifies whether the distance that is applied to the action is the XY parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Enter XY distance type [X/Y/XY] <XY>: Enter the distance type or press ENTER to select XY
Stretch Adds a stretch action to the current dynamic block definition. A stretch action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter. Specifies that
BACTIONTOOL | 151
the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action If you selected a linear or polar parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action If you selected an XY parameter, the following prompts are displayed: Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point/Xcorner/Ycorner] <Xcorner>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the X corner Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset/XY]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action. Multiplier Changes the associated parameter value by a specified factor when the action is triggered. Enter distance multiplier <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 1.0000 Offset Increases or decreases the angle of the associated parameter, by a specified number, when the action is triggered. Enter angle offset <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 0 XY Specifies whether the distance applied to the action is the XY parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Enter XY distance type [X/Y/XY] <XY>: Enter the distance type or press ENTER to select XY
152 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Polar Stretch Adds a polar stretch action to the current dynamic block definition. A polar stretch action can only be associated with a polar parameter. Specifies that the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the block definition to associate with the action Specify parameter point to associate with action or enter [sTart point/Second point] <Second>: Specify a parameter point to associate with the action or press ENTER to associate the action with the second point Specify first corner of stretch frame or [CPolygon]: Specify the first corner of the stretch frame or enter cpolygon to create a polygon of any shape as the stretch frame Specify opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the stretch frame Specify objects to stretch Select objects: Select objects to add to or remove from the action's selection set Specify objects to rotate only Select objects: Select objects that will rotate only and not stretch Specify action location or [Multiplier/Offset]: Specify a location in the block definition for the action Multiplier Changes the associated parameter value by a specified factor when the action is triggered. Enter distance multiplier <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 1.0000 Offset Increases or decreases the angle of the associated parameter, by a specified number, when the action is triggered. Enter angle offset <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER to select 0
BASE Quick Reference Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Set Base Point. Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Base Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use) Enter base point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
BASE | 153
The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS. When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings, this base point is used as the insertion base point.
BASSOCIATE Quick Reference Associates an action with a parameter in a dynamic block definition Command entry: bedit ➤ bassociate Associates an orphaned action with a parameter. You can only use the BASSOCIATE command in the Block Editor on page 169. An action becomes orphaned when the parameter with which it is associated is removed from the block definition. Select action object: Select an action in the current block definition that is not associated with a parameter Select parameter to associate with action: Select a parameter to associate with the action (if you selected a lookup action, you can select one or more lookup parameters) If you selected an action and parameter combination that requires that the action be associated with a key point on the parameter, prompts are displayed to select the parameter point to associate with the action.
BATTMAN Quick Reference Manages the attributes for a selected block definition
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes.
Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Command entry: battman
154 | Chapter 3 B Commands
The Block Attribute Manager on page 155 is displayed. If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message is displayed. This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in the block references.
Block Attribute Manager Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Manage Attributes. Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Command entry: battman Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing. You can edit the attribute definitions in blocks, remove attributes from blocks, and change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when inserting a block.
Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default, Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed in the attribute list. You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by choosing Settings. For each selected block, a description below the attribute list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout.
Block Attribute Manager | 155
Select Block Allows you to use your pointing device to select a block from the drawing area. When you choose Select Block, the dialog box closes until you select a block from the drawing or cancel by pressing ESC. If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you save the attribute changes you made, you are prompted to save the changes before selecting another block. Block Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that have attributes. Select the block whose attributes you want to modify. List of Attributes Displays the properties of each attribute in the selected block. Blocks Found in Drawing The number of instances of the selected block in the current drawing. Blocks Found in Current Space The number of instances of the selected block in the current model space or layout. Sync Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties currently defined. This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in each block. Move Up Moves the selected attribute tag earlier in the prompt sequence. The Move Up button is not available when a constant attribute is selected. Move Down Moves the selected attribute tag later in the prompt sequence. The Move Down button is not available when a constant attribute is selected. Edit Opens the Edit Attribute dialog box on page 157, where you can modify attribute properties. Remove Removes the selected attribute from the block definition. If Apply Changes to Existing References is selected in the Settings dialog box before you choose Remove, the attribute is removed from all instances of the block in the current drawing. The Remove button is not available for blocks with only one attribute. Settings Opens theBlock Attribute Settings dialog box on page 160, where you can customize how attribute information is listed in the Block Attribute Manager. Apply Applies the changes you made, but leaves the dialog box open.
156 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Edit Attribute Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Command entry: battman Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition. Block Name Displays the name of the block whose attributes are to be edited. Auto Preview Changes Controls whether or not the drawing area is immediately updated to display any visible attribute changes you make. If Auto Preview Changes is selected, changes are immediately visible. If Auto Preview Changes is cleared, changes are not immediately visible. Clearing Auto Preview Changes results in a small improvement in performance. Auto Preview Changes is not available if Apply Changes to Existing References is not selected. The Edit Attribute dialog box contains the following tabs: ■
Attribute on page 157
■
Text Options on page 159
■
Properties on page 159
Attribute Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the assigned value is visible in the drawing area, and sets the string that prompts users to enter a value. The Attribute tab also displays the tag name that identifies the attribute.
Edit Attribute Dialog Box | 157
Mode Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears. Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected, hides the attribute value in the drawing area. If cleared, displays the attribute value. Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. You cannot change this property. If a check mark is shown in the check box, the attribute is set to its default value and cannot be changed. If the check box is empty, you can assign a value to the attribute. Verify Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts you to verify the values you assign to the attribute when inserting a new instance of the block. If this option is cleared, verification is not performed. Preset Turns default value assignment on and off. If selected, sets the attribute to its default value when the block is inserted. If cleared, ignores the attribute's default value and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the block. Multiple Lines Indicates whether the attribute was defined as a Multiple Lines attribute and can contain multiple lines of text.
Data Data options set the attribute text that is displayed. Tag Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute. Prompt Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block. Default Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block.
158 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Text Options Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.
Text Style Specifies the text style for attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Justification Specifies how attribute text is justified. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Backwards Specifies whether or not the text is displayed backwards. Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis.
Properties Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and linetype for the attribute's line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.
Edit Attribute Dialog Box | 159
Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. Linetype Specifies the linetype of attribute text. Color Specifies the attribute's text color. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of attribute text. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY system variable is off.
Block Attribute Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Command entry: battman Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager.
160 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Display in List Specifies the properties to be displayed in the attribute list. Only the selected properties are displayed in the list. The Tag property is always selected. Select All Selects all properties. Clear All Clears all properties. Emphasize Duplicate Tags Turns duplicate tag emphasis on and off. If this option is selected, duplicate attribute tags are displayed in red type in the attribute list. If this option is cleared, duplicate tags are not emphasized in the attribute list. Apply Changes to Existing References Specifies whether or not to update all existing instances of the block whose attributes you are modifying. If selected, updates all instances of the block with the new attribute definitions. If cleared, updates only new instances of the block with the new attribute definitions. You can choose Sync in the Block Attribute Manager to apply changes immediately to existing block instances. This temporarily overrides the Apply Changes to Existing References option.
BATTORDER Quick Reference Specifies the order of attributes for a block Command entry: bedit ➤ battorder
BATTORDER | 161
Displays the Attribute Order dialog box on page 162, which controls the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference. You can only use the BATTORDER command in the Block Editor on page 169.
Attribute Order Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: bedit ➤ battorder Specifies the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference.
Attribute Definitions Lists the attribute definitions in the current block. Move Up Moves the selected attribute definition up in the list. Move Down Moves the selected attribute definition down in the list.
BAUTHORPALETTE Quick Reference Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.
162 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Toolbar: Block Editor Command entry: bedit ➤ bauthorpalette Displays the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor on page 169. You can open the Block Authoring Palettes window only from the Block Editor. If you enter bauthorpalette at the command prompt while the Block Editor is closed, the following message is displayed, “BAUTHORPALETTE command only allowed in Block Editor.” The Block Authoring Palettes window contains the following tabs: ■
Parameters tab
■
Actions tab
■
Parameter Sets tab
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE Quick Reference Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor
Toolbar: Block Editor Command entry: bedit ➤ bauthorpaletteclose You can close the Block Authoring Palettes window only from the Block Editor on page 169. If you enter bauthorpaletteclose at the command prompt while you are not in the Block Editor, the following message is displayed, “BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE command only allowed in Block Editor.”
BCLOSE Quick Reference Closes the Block Editor
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE | 163
Shortcut menu: In the Block Editor, right-click in the drawing area. Click Close Block Editor Command entry: bedit ➤ bclose Closes the Block Editor on page 169. If you have modified the block definition since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.
BCYCLEORDER Quick Reference Changes the cycling order of grips for a dynamic block reference Command entry: bedit ➤ bcycleorder Displays the Insertion Cycling Order dialog box on page 164. You can only use the BCYCLORDER command in the Block Editor on page 169.
Insertion Cycling Order Dialog Box Quick Reference Specifies the grip-cycling order for the insertion point of a dynamic block reference. When you insert a dynamic block reference in a drawing, you can use the CTRL key to cycle through the grips that have cycling turned on in the block definition. The grip you select as you cycle is used as the insertion point for the block reference.
164 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Grip Cycling List Lists the grips in the dynamic block definition. A check mark in the cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip. Move Up Moves the selected grip up in the cycling order for the dynamic block reference. Move Down Moves the selected grip down in the cycling order for the dynamic block reference. Cycling Turns cycling on or off for the selected grip. A check mark in the cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip.
BEDIT Quick Reference Opens the block definition in the Block Editor
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor. Command entry: bedit The Edit Block Definition dialog box on page 166 is displayed. Select a block definition to edit or entering a name for a new block definition to create, then click OK to display the Block Editor ribbon contextual tab on page 167 (if the ribbon is active). If the ribbon is not active, click OK to open the Block Editor on page 169. When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened. The Block Editor is a separate environment for creating and changing block definitions for the current drawing. You can also use it to add dynamic behavior to blocks.
BEDIT | 165
Edit Block Definition Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Command entry: bedit In the Edit Block Definition dialog box, you can select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in the Block Editor. You can also enter a name for a new block definition to create in the Block Editor. When you click OK, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and the Block Editor is displayed. If you selected a block definition from the list in the Edit Block Definition dialog box, that block definition is displayed and is available for editing in the Block Editor. If you entered a name for a new block definition, the Block Editor is displayed, and you can start adding objects to the block definition.
Name Specifies the name of the block to edit or create in the Block Editor. If you select , the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor. After you add dynamic elements to the drawing, you can then save it and insert it as a dynamic block reference in a drawing. Name List (Unlabeled) Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. When you select a block definition from the list, the
166 | Chapter 3 B Commands
name is displayed in the Name box. When you click OK, this block definition is opened in the Block Editor. When you select , the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition. A lightning bolt icon indicates that the block is a dynamic block. Description Displays the block definition description specified in the Block area of the Properties palette in the Block Editor. OK Opens the selected or new block definition in the Block Editor.
Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Command entry: bedit Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor.
Manage Panel Save
Saves the current Block Definition.
Save As
Displays the Save Block As dialog box on page 213, in which you can save a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
Block Editor
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. The Block Editor is a separate environment for creating and changing block definitions for the current drawing. You can also use it to add dynamic behavior to blocks.
Block Name
Displays the name of the block that is currently being edited.
Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab | 167
Tools Panel Authoring Palettes
Displays or hides the Block Authoring palettes, which provide tools for adding parameters and actions to the dynamic block definition.
Parameter
Runs the BPARAMETER command, which adds a parameter to the dynamic block definition.
Action
Runs the BACTION command, which adds an action to the dynamic block definition.
Define Attribute
Displays the Attribute Definition dialog box on page 116, in which you can define the mode, attribute tag, prompt, value, insertion point, and text options for an attribute.
Update
Runs the REGEN command, which regenerates the display in the Block Editor and updates the text, arrowhead, icon, and grips sizes of parameters and actions. When you zoom in and out in the Block Editor, the text, arrowhead, icon, and grip size changes relative to the zoom factor. When you regenerate the display in the Block Editor, text, arrowheads, icons, and grips display at their specified values.
Learn
Displays demonstrations in the New Features Workshop for creating dynamic blocks.
Visibility Panel Visibility Mode
Sets the BVMODE system variable, which dims or hides objects made invisible for the current visibility state.
Make Visible
Runs the BVSHOW command, so that you can make objects visible for the current visibility state or for all visibility states.
Make Invisible
Runs the BVHIDE command, so that you can make objects invisible for the current visibility state or for all visibility states.
168 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Manage Visibility States
Displays the Visibility States dialog box on page 215, in which you can create, delete, rename, and make current visibility states.
Visibilities
Specifies the current visibility state displayed in the Block Editor.
Close Panel Close
Ends the BEDIT command and closes the Block Editor ribbon contextual tab.
Block Editor Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor.
Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor. Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Command entry: bedit You use the Block Editor to define dynamic behavior for a block definition. In the Block Editor, you add parameters and actions, which define custom properties and dynamic behavior. The Block Editor contains a special authoring area in which you can draw and edit geometry as you would in the drawing area.
Block Editor | 169
The following commands are used for creating dynamic blocks and are available only in the Block Editor: ■
BACTION
■
BACTIONSET
■
BACTIONTOOL
■
BASSOCIATE
■
BATTORDER
■
BAUTHORPALETTE
■
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE
■
BCLOSE
■
BCYCLEORDER
■
BGRIPSET
■
BLOOKUPTABLE
■
BPARAMETER
■
BSAVE
■
BSAVEAS
■
BVHIDE
■
BVSHOW
■
BVSTATE
170 | Chapter 3 B Commands
When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened. The Block Editor also provides a Block Editor toolbar on page 171 and Block Authoring palettes that contain tools for creating dynamic blocks. The Block Authoring Palettes window contains the following tabs: ■
Parameters tab on page 172
■
Actions tab on page 174
■
Parameter Sets tab on page 175
Block Editor Toolbar Provides tools for working in the Block Editor, creating dynamic blocks, and working with visibility states.
Edit or Create Block Definition Displays the Edit Block Definition dialog box on page 166. Save Block Definition Saves the current Block Definition. Save Block As Displays the Save Block As dialog box on page 213, in which you can save a copy of the current block definition under a new name. Name Displays the name of the current block definition. Authoring Palettes Displays or hides the Block Authoring palettes, which provide tools for adding parameters and actions to the dynamic block definition. Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, which adds a parameter to the dynamic block definition. Action Runs the BACTION command, which adds an action to the dynamic block definition. Define Attribute Displays the Attribute Definition dialog box on page 116, in which you can define the mode, attribute tag, prompt, value, insertion point, and text options for an attribute. Update Parameter and Action Text Size Runs the REGEN command, which regenerates the display in the Block Editor and updates the text, arrowhead, icon, and grips sizes of parameters and actions. When you zoom in and out in the Block Editor, the text, arrowhead, icon, and grip size changes relative
Block Editor | 171
to the zoom factor. When you regenerate the display in the Block Editor, text, arrowheads, icons, and grips display at their specified values. Learn About Dynamic Blocks Displays demonstrations in the New Features Workshop for creating dynamic blocks. Close Block Editor Closes the Block Editor and prompts you to save or discard any changes to the current block definition. Visibility Mode Sets the BVMODE system variable, which dims or hides objects made invisible for the current visibility state. Make Visible Runs the BVSHOW command, so that you can make objects visible for the current visibility state or for all visibility states. Make Invisible Runs the BVHIDE command, so that you can make objects invisible for the current visibility state or for all visibility states. Manage Visibility States Displays the Visibility States dialog box on page 215, in which you can create, delete, rename, and make current visibility states. Visibility State Specifies the current visibility state displayed in the Block Editor.
Parameters Tab (Block Authoring Palettes Window) Provides tools for adding parameters to a dynamic block definition in the Block Editor. Parameters specify positions, distances, and angles for geometry in the block reference. When you add a parameter to a dynamic block definition, it defines one or more custom properties for the block. Point Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Point parameter option, which adds a point parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference. A point parameter defines an X and Y location in the drawing. In the Block Editor, a point parameter looks similar to an ordinate dimension. Linear Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Linear parameter option, which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines a custom distance property for the block reference. A linear parameter shows the distance between two anchor points. A linear parameter constrains grip movement along a preset angle. In the Block Editor, a linear parameter looks similar to an aligned dimension. Polar Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Polar parameter option, which adds a polar parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines custom distance and angle properties for the block reference. A polar parameter
172 | Chapter 3 B Commands
shows the distance between two anchor points and displays an angle value. You can use both grips and the Properties palette to change both the distance value and the angle. In the Block Editor, a polar parameter looks similar to an aligned dimension. XY Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, XY parameter option, which adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines custom horizontal and vertical distance properties for the block reference. An XY parameter shows the X and Y distances from the base point of the parameter. In the Block Editor, an XY parameter displays as a pair of dimensions (horizontal and vertical). These dimensions share a common base point. Rotation Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Rotation parameter option, which adds a rotation parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines a custom angle property for the block reference. A rotation parameter defines an angle. In the Block Editor, a rotation parameter displays as a circle. Alignment Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Alignment parameter option, which adds an alignment parameter to the dynamic block definition. An alignment parameter defines an X and Y location and an angle. An alignment parameter always applies to the entire block and needs no action associated with it. An alignment parameter allows the block reference to automatically rotate around a point to align with other objects in the drawing. An alignment parameter affects the angle property of the block reference. In the Block Editor, an alignment parameter looks like an alignment line. Flip Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Flip parameter option, which adds a flip parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines a custom flip property for the block reference. A flip parameter flips objects. In the Block Editor, a flip parameter displays as a reflection line. Objects can be flipped about this reflection line. A flip parameter displays a value that shows if the block reference has been flipped or not. Visibility Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Visibility parameter option, which adds a visibility parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines a custom visibility property for the block reference. A visibility parameter allows you to create visibility states and to control the visibility of objects in the block. A visibility parameter always applies to the entire block and needs no action associated with it. In a drawing, you click the grip to display a list of visibility states available for the block reference. In the Block Editor, a visibility parameter displays as text with an associated grip. Lookup Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Lookup parameter option, which adds a lookup parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines custom lookup properties for the block reference. A lookup parameter defines a custom property that you can specify or set to evaluate to a value
Block Editor | 173
from a list or table you define. It can be associated with a single lookup grip. In the block reference, you click the grip to display a list of available values. In the Block Editor, a lookup parameter displays as text. Base Point Parameter Runs the BPARAMETER command, Base Point parameter option, which adds a base point parameter to the dynamic block definition. A base point parameter defines a base point for the dynamic block reference relative to the geometry in the block. A base point parameter cannot be associated with any actions, but can belong to an action's selection set. In the Block Editor, a base point parameter displays as a circle with crosshairs
Actions Tab (Block Authoring Palettes Window) Provides tools for adding actions to a dynamic block definition in the Block Editor. Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference will move or change when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters. Move Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Move action option, which adds a move action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter. A move action is similar to the MOVE command. In a dynamic block reference, a move action causes objects to move a specified distance and angle. Scale Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Scale action option, which adds a scale action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. A scale action is similar to the SCALE command. In a dynamic block reference, a scale action causes its selection set to scale when the associated parameter is edited by moving grips or by using the Properties palette. Stretch Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Stretch action option, which adds a stretch action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter. A stretch action causes objects to move and stretch a specified distance in a specified location. Polar Stretch Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Polar Stretch action option, which adds a polar stretch action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a polar parameter. A polar stretch action rotates, moves, and stretches objects a specified angle and distance when the key point on the associated polar parameter is changed through a grip or the Properties palette Rotate Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Rotate action option, which adds a rotate action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a rotation parameter. A rotate action is similar to the ROTATE
174 | Chapter 3 B Commands
command. In a dynamic block reference, a rotate action causes its associated objects to rotate when the associated parameter is edited through a grip or the Properties palette. Flip Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Flip action option, which adds a flip action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a flip parameter. With a flip action you can flip a dynamic block reference about a specified axis called a reflection line. Array Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Array action, which adds an array action to the dynamic block definition when you associate the action with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. An array action causes its associated objects to copy and array in a rectangular pattern when the associated parameter is edited through a grip or the Properties palette. Lookup Action Runs the BACTIONTOOL command, Lookup action option, which adds a lookup action to the dynamic block definition. When you add a lookup action to a dynamic block definition and associate it with a lookup parameter, it creates a lookup table. You can use a lookup table to assign custom properties and values to a dynamic block.
Parameter Sets Tab (Block Authoring Palettes Window) Provides tools for adding a parameter and at least one action at the same time to a dynamic block definition in the Block Editor. When you add a parameter set to a dynamic block, the actions are automatically associated with the parameter. After you add a parameter set to a dynamic block, you double-click the yellow alert icon (or use the BACTIONSET command) and follow the command prompts to associate the action with a selection set of geometry. Point Move Runs the BPARAMETER command, Point parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a point parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a move action associated with the point parameter. Linear Move Runs the BPARAMETER command, Linear parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a move action associated with the endpoint of the linear parameter. Linear Stretch Runs the BPARAMETER command, Linear parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a stretch action associated with the linear parameter.
Block Editor | 175
Linear Array Runs the BPARAMETER command, Linear parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds an array action associated with the linear parameter. Linear Move Pair Runs the BPARAMETER command, Linear parameter option with two grips specified, which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a two move action, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the linear parameter. Linear Stretch Pair Runs the BPARAMETER command, Linear parameter option with two grips specified, which adds a linear parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a two stretch actions, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the linear parameter. Polar Move Runs the BPARAMETER command, Polar parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a polar parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a move action associated with the polar parameter. Polar Stretch Runs the BPARAMETER command, Polar parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a polar parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a stretch action associated with the polar parameter. Polar Array Runs the BPARAMETER command, Polar parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a polar parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds an array action associated with the polar parameter. Polar Move Pair Runs the BPARAMETER command, Polar parameter option with two grips specified, which adds a polar parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds two move actions, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the polar parameter. Polar Stretch Pair Runs the BPARAMETER command, Polar parameter option with two grips specified, which adds a polar parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds two stretch actions, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the polar parameter. XY Move Runs the BPARAMETER command, XY parameter option with one grip specified, which adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a move action associated with the endpoint of the XY parameter. XY Move Pair Runs the BPARAMETER command, XY parameter option with two grips specified, which adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block
176 | Chapter 3 B Commands
definition. Automatically adds two move actions, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the XY parameter. XY Move Box Set Runs the BPARAMETER command, XY parameter option with four grips specified, which adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds four move actions, one associated with each key point on the XY parameter. XY Stretch Box Set Runs the BPARAMETER command, XY parameter option with four grips specified, which adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds four stretch actions, one associated with each key point on the XY parameter. XY Array Box Set Runs the BPARAMETER command, XY parameter option with four grips specified, which adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds an array action associated with the XY parameter. Rotation Set Runs the BPARAMETER command, Rotation parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a rotation parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a rotation action associated with the rotation parameter. Flip Set Runs the BPARAMETER command, Flip parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a flip parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a flip action associated with the flip parameter. Visibility Set Runs the BPARAMETER command, Visibility parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a visibility parameter to the dynamic block definition and allows visibility states to be defined. No action is necessary with the visibility parameter. Lookup Set Runs the BPARAMETER command, Lookup parameter option with one grip specified, which adds a lookup parameter to the dynamic block definition. Automatically adds a lookup action associated with the lookup parameter.
-BEDIT Quick Reference If you select a block in a drawing and enter -bedit at the command prompt, opens the selected block in the Block Editor on page 169. If nothing is selected, the following prompt is displayed:
-BEDIT | 177
Enter block name on page 178 or [? on page 178]: Enter a name or ?
Block Name Specifies the name of a block saved in the current drawing to open in the Block Editor or specifies the name of a new block to create.
?—List Previously Defined Blocks Lists the block names in the text window. Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
BGRIPSET Quick Reference Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter Shortcut menu: Select a parameter in the block definition. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Grip Display, and then click an option. Command entry: bedit ➤ bgripset Specifies the number of grips displayed for a parameter. Also reset the position of grips for a parameter to their default location. You can only use the BGRIPSET command in the Block Editor on page 169. Select parameter: Select a parameter in the current dynamic block definition Enter number of grip objects for parameter or reset position [0/1/2/4/Reposition]: Enter the number of grips to display for the parameter (the number of grips available will vary depending on the type of parameter you selected) or enter reposition to reposition the existing grips in the block definition to their default locations
BHATCH Quick Reference Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill Command entry: bhatch
178 | Chapter 3 B Commands
The BHATCH command has been renamed to HATCH. If you enter bhatch, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 662 is displayed. If you enter -bhatch or -hatch, command prompts on page 675 are displayed.
BLIPMODE Quick Reference Controls the display of marker blips Command entry: blipmode (or 'blipmode for transparent use) Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.
To remove marker blips, use REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, PAN, or other commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing.
BLOCK Quick Reference Creates a block definition from selected objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create.
Toolbar: Draw
BLIPMODE | 179
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make Command entry: block The Block Definition dialog box on page 180 is displayed. If you enter -block at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 183. You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion point, and giving it a name. You can create your own blocks or use the blocks provided in the DesignCenter or tool palettes.
Block Definition Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make Command entry: block Defines and names a block.
180 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system or the program for other purposes. The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing. NOTE You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE_RENDER, RM_SDB, SH_SPOT, and OVERHEAD as valid block names.
Preview If an existing block is selected under Name, displays a preview of the block.
Base Point Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Prompts you to specify the base point when the dialog box is closed. Pick Insertion Base Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. X Specifies the X coordinate value. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value.
Objects Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block. Specify On-Screen Prompts you to specify the objects when the dialog box is closed. Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the block. When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the Block Definition dialog box. Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box on page 1220, which defines a selection set.
Block Definition Dialog Box | 181
Retain Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block. Convert to Block Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create the block. Delete Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block. Objects Selected Displays the number of selected objects.
Behavior Specifies the behavior of the block. Annotative Specifies that the block is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Match Block Orientation to Layout Specifies that the orientation of the block references in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the Annotative option is cleared. Scale Uniformly Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being non-uniformly scaled. Allow Exploding Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded.
Settings Specifies settings for the block. Block Unit Specifies the insertion units for the block reference. Hyperlink Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box on page 692, which you can use to associate a hyperlink with the block definition.
Description Specifies the text description of the block.
Open in Block Editor Opens the current block definition in the Block Editor on page 169 when you click OK.
182 | Chapter 3 B Commands
-BLOCK Quick Reference If you enter -block at the command prompt, the following BLOCK command prompts are displayed. Enter block name on page 183 or [? on page 184]: Enter a name or ?
Block Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1. If you enter the name of an existing block, you are prompted as follows: Block "NAME" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER By redefining a block, you automatically update all references to that block. Attributes attached to existing block references remain unchanged in the drawing. However, new insertions of the block do not prompt for attributes unless the attribute definitions are included in the new block definition (use ATTREDEF to redefine blocks that contain attributes). Specify insertion base point or [Annotative]: Specify a point (1), enter a, or press ENTER
The point specified as the base point is used for subsequent insertions of the block. Typically, a base point is the center of the block or its lower-left corner. The base point is also the point about which you can rotate the block during insertion. A block with 0 rotation is oriented according to the UCS in effect when it was created. Entering a 3D point inserts the block at a specific elevation. Omitting the Z coordinate uses the current elevation. Enter a to create an block. Create annotative block [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter yes, the block becomes annotative.
-BLOCK | 183
Match orientation to layout in paper space viewports [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter yes, the block’s orientation in paper space viewports will match the orientation of the layout. If you specify the insertion base point, you are prompted to select the objects. Select objects: Use an object selection method The program defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base point, and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the drawing. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command immediately after BLOCK.
The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block's coordinate system, which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation in space by setting the UCS first.
?—List Previously Defined Blocks Lists the block names in the text window. Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER In the list, external references (xrefs) are indicated with the notation Xref: resolved In addition, externally dependent blocks (blocks in an xref) are indicated with the notation xdep: XREFNAME where xrefname is the name of an externally referenced drawing. The following terms are used in the list: ■
User Blocks: Number of user-defined blocks in the list.
■
External References: Number of xrefs in the list.
184 | Chapter 3 B Commands
■
Dependent Blocks: Number of externally dependent blocks in the list.
■
Unnamed Blocks: Number of unnamed (anonymous) blocks in the drawing.
BLOCKICON Quick Reference Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Update Block Icons Command entry: blockicon Enter block names <*>: Specify block names, or press ENTER to update all blocks Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release. You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wild-card characters. For example, enter b1,?2, to specify that block B1 and all two-character blocks ending with 2 should be updated. After you enter the block names, a message is displayed describing the process as it proceeds. Press ESC at any time to stop.
BLOOKUPTABLE Quick Reference Displays or creates a lookup table for a dynamic block definition Command entry: bedit ➤ baction Displays the Property Lookup Table dialog box on page 186. The current dynamic block definition must contain a lookup action and at least one lookup parameter in order for the Property Lookup Table dialog box to display. If a table is already defined for the lookup action, then that table is displayed in the dialog box. If no table is defined, one is created and displayed in the Property Lookup Table dialog box.
BLOCKICON | 185
Property Lookup Table Dialog Box Quick Reference The Property Lookup Table dialog box provides a lookup table for the dynamic block definition. You use the lookup table to control the values available for a lookup parameter (lookup property). The lookup table also allows the values of lookup parameters to be controlled by the values of other parameters (input properties). The lookup table assigns property values to the dynamic block reference based on how it is manipulated in a drawing. If Reverse Lookup is selected for a lookup property, the block reference displays a lookup grip. When the lookup grip is clicked in a drawing, a list of lookup properties is displayed. Selecting an option from that list will change the display of the dynamic block reference.
Action Name Displays the name of the lookup action associated with the table. Add Properties Displays the Add Parameter Properties dialog box on page 187. You can add parameter properties to the lookup table. Audit Checks the data in the table to ensure that each row is unique. Input Properties Specifies the input properties for the dynamic block. Each parameter (except a lookup, alignment, or base point parameter) in the dynamic block can be displayed as a column under Input Properties. When a parameter's value matches a value in its corresponding input property column
186 | Chapter 3 B Commands
in the lookup table, the corresponding lookup property on the right side of the table is assigned to the block reference. Lookup Properties Specifies the lookup properties for the dynamic block. Each lookup parameter in the dynamic block can be displayed as a column under Lookup Properties. When a parameter's value matches a value in its corresponding input property column in the lookup table, the corresponding lookup property on the right side of the table is assigned to the block reference. The drop-down control at the bottom of a lookup column is used to make the lookup property read-only or to allow reverse lookup. If all the rows in the table are unique, you can set the lookup property to allow reverse lookup. Allow Reverse Lookup enables the lookup property for a block reference to be set from a drop-down list that is displayed when the lookup grip is clicked in a drawing. Selecting an option from this list changes the block reference to match the corresponding input property values in the table.
Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference Adds parameter properties to a lookup table.
Add Parameter Properties Dialog Box | 187
Parameter Properties Displays a list of parameters not yet added to the lookup table. Select a parameter and click OK to add it to the lookup table.
Property Type Specifies the type of property to add to the lookup table. Add Input Properties When selected, the Parameter Properties list displays the available input property parameters that can be added to the lookup table. Add Lookup Properties When selected, the Parameter Properties list displays the available lookup property parameters that can be added to the lookup table.
BMPOUT Quick Reference Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format Command entry: bmpout The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. Select objects or : Press ENTER to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are displayed.
188 | Chapter 3 B Commands
BOUNDARY Quick Reference Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary. Menu: Draw ➤ Boundary Command entry: boundary The Boundary Creation dialog box on page 189 is displayed. If you enter -boundary at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 191. Each point that you specify identifies the surrounding objects and creates a separate region or polyline.
Boundary Creation Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary. Menu: Draw ➤ Boundary Command entry: boundary Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects.
BOUNDARY | 189
Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.
Island Detection Controls whether BOUNDARY detects internal closed boundaries, called islands.
Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. BOUNDARY creates the boundary as a region or a polyline object.
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects BOUNDARY analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point. Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set. New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set. BOUNDARY includes only the objects that can be used to create a region or closed polyline when it constructs the new boundary set. For more information about the options in this dialog box, see HATCH.
190 | Chapter 3 B Commands
-BOUNDARY Quick Reference If you enter -boundary at the command prompt, the following BOUNDARY command prompts are displayed. Specify internal point on page 191 or [Advanced options on page 191]: Specify a point or enter a
Internal Point Creates a region or polyline from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify a point inside the area.
Advanced Options Sets the method BOUNDARY uses to create the boundary. Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt Boundary Set Defines the set of objects BOUNDARY analyzes when it creates a boundary from a specified point. For information about defining a boundary set at the command prompt, see the HATCH command prompt option. Island Detection Specifies whether BOUNDARY uses objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. For information about specifying island detection at the command prompt, see the HATCH command prompt option. Object Type Specifies the type of object that BOUNDARY creates. Enter type of boundary object [Region/Polyline] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
BOX Quick Reference Creates a 3D solid box
-BOUNDARY | 191
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Box.
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Box Command entry: box Specify first corner or [Center on page 192]: Specify a point or enterc for center Specify other corner or [Cube on page 193/Length on page 194]: Specify the other corner of the box or enteran option If the other corner of the box is specified with a Z value that differs from the first corner, then no height prompt is displayed. Specify height or [2Point on page 194] <default>: Specify the height or enter 2P for the 2 Point option Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. The base of the box is always drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS (workplane). The height of the box is specified in the Z-axis direction. You can enter both positive and negative values for the height.
Center Creates the box by using a specified center point.
Specify center: Specify a point (1) Specify other corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point or enter an option
192 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Specify height or [2Point] <default>: Specify the height or enter2P for the 2 Point option Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length. Specify length: Enter a value, or pick a point to specify the length and the rotation of the box in the XY plane
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. Specify length: Enter a value, or pick a point to specify the length and the rotation of the box in the XY plane Specify width: Specify a distance Specify height: Specify a distance
Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length. Specify length: Enter a value, or pick a point to specify the length and the rotation of the box in the XY plane
BOX | 193
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. If you enter values, the length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify the rotation in the XY plane. Specify length: Enter a value, or pick a point to specify the length and the rotation of the box in the XY plane Specify width: Specify a distance Specify height: Specify a distance
2Point Specifies that the height of the box is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point
BPARAMETER Quick Reference Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition
194 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Toolbar: Block Editor Command entry: bedit ➤ bparameter You can use the BPARAMETER command only in the Block Editor on page 169. A parameter defines custom properties for the block reference. After you add a parameter, you must associate an action with the parameter to make the block dynamic. Enter parameter type [Alignment on page 195/Base on page 196/pOint on page 196/Linear on page 197/Polar on page 200/XY on page 202/Rotation on page 204/Flip on page 206/Visibility on page 207/looKup on page 208] : Enter a parameter type
Alignment Adds an alignment parameter to the current dynamic block definition. Because the alignment parameter affects the entire block, it is not necessary (or possible) to associate an action with the alignment parameter. An alignment parameter defines an X and Y location and an angle. An alignment parameter always applies to the entire block and needs no action associated with it. An alignment parameter allows the block reference to automatically rotate around a point to align with other objects in the drawing. An alignment parameter affects the angle property of the block reference. Specify base point of alignment or [Name]: Specify a point or enter name When you specify the base point for the alignment parameter, an X is displayed in the Block Editor. When the command is completed, an alignment grip is added at this base point. The block reference automatically rotates about this point to align with another object in the drawing. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Alignment type = Perpendicular Specify alignment direction or alignment type [Type] : Specify an alignment direction or enter type The alignment direction specifies the direction of the grip and the angle of alignment for the block reference. Enter alignment type [Perpendicular/Tangent] : Specify an alignment type Perpendicular Specifies that the dynamic block reference aligns perpendicular to objects in a drawing.
BPARAMETER | 195
Tangent Specifies that the dynamic block reference aligns tangent to objects in a drawing.
Base Adds a base point parameter to the current dynamic block definition. You do not associate any actions with a base point parameter. The base point parameter defines the base point for the dynamic block reference in relation to the geometry in the block. This provides a way to control the location of the base point within the block reference when it is edited in a drawing. The base point parameter is generally included in a selection set of the block definition's actions. Specify parameter location: Specify a location Only one base point parameter is allowed in a dynamic block definition. If you try to add another base point parameter, the following alert is displayed. Base point parameter already exists in block definition
Point Adds a point parameter to the current dynamic block definition and defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference. You associate a move or stretch action with a point parameter. Specify parameter location or [Name/Label/Chain/Description/Palette]: Specify a location or enter an option Specify label location: Specify a location for the parameter label Enter number of grips [0/1] <1>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter.
196 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Enter position property label <default>: Enter a label for the position property or press ENTER to use the default label
Chain Specifies the Chain Actions property for the parameter. The point parameter may be included in the selection set of an action that is associated with a different parameter. When that parameter is edited in a block reference, its associated action may trigger a change in the values of other parameters included in the action's selection set. If the Chain Actions property is set to Yes, this change triggers any actions associated with the point parameter, just as if you had edited the parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the point parameter's associated actions are not triggered by the changes to the other parameter. Evaluate associated actions when parameter is edited by another action? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter property description: Enter a description for the parameter
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
Linear Adds a linear parameter to the current dynamic block definition and defines a custom distance property for the block reference. You associate a move, scale, stretch, or array action with a linear parameter. Specify start point or [Name/Label/Chain/Description/Base/Palette/Value set]: Specify a start point for the parameter or enter an option
BPARAMETER | 197
Specify endpoint: Specify an endpoint for the parameter Specify label location: Specify a location for the parameter label Enter number of grips [0/1/2] <2>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter If you specify one grip for the parameter, the grip is added to the endpoint of the parameter.
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter. Enter distance property label <default>: Enter a label for the distance property or press ENTER to use the default label
Chain Specifies the Chain Actions property for the parameter. The linear parameter may be included in the selection set of an action that is associated with a different parameter. When that parameter is edited in a block reference, its associated action may trigger a change in the values of other parameters included in the action's selection set. If the Chain Actions property is set to Yes, this change triggers any actions associated with the linear parameter, just as if you had edited the parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the linear parameter's associated actions are not triggered by the changes to the other parameter. Evaluate associated actions when parameter is edited by another action? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER
198 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter property description: Enter a description for the parameter
Base Specifies the Base Location property for the parameter. Enter base location [Startpoint/Midpoint]: Specify an option Startpoint Specifies that the start point of the parameter remains fixed when the endpoint of the parameter is edited in the block reference. Midpoint Specifies a midpoint base location for the parameter. This midpoint is indicated by an X in the block definition. When you edit the linear parameter in the block reference, the midpoint of the parameter remains fixed, and the start point and endpoint of the parameter move simultaneously equal distances from the midpoint. For example, if you move the grip on the endpoint two units away from the midpoint, the start point simultaneously moves two units in the opposite direction.
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
Value Set Specifies a value set for the parameter. Limits the available values for the parameter in a block reference to the values specified in the set. Enter distance value set type [None/List/Increment] : Specify a value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type List Specifies a list of available values for the parameter in a block reference. Enter list of distance values (separated by commas): Specify a list of values separated by commas Increment Specifies a value increment and minimum and maximum values for the parameter in the block reference.
BPARAMETER | 199
Enter distance increment: Specify an increment value for the parameter Enter minimum distance: Specify a minimum distance value for the parameter Enter maximum distance: Specify a maximum distance value for the parameter
Polar Adds a polar parameter to the current dynamic block definition. Defines custom distance and angle properties for the block reference. You associate a move, scale, stretch, polar stretch, or array action with a polar parameter. Specify base point or [Name/Label/Chain/Description/Palette/Value set]: Specify a start point for the parameter or enter an option Specify endpoint: Specify an endpoint for the parameter Specify label location: Specify a location for the parameter label Enter number of grips [0/1/2] <2>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter If you specify one grip for the parameter, the grip is added to the endpoint of the parameter.
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter. Enter distance property label <default>: Enter a label for the distance property or press ENTER to use the default label Enter angle property label <default>: Enter a label for the angle property or press ENTER to use the default label
Chain Specifies the Chain Actions property for the parameter. The polar parameter may be included in the selection set of an action that is associated with a different parameter. When that parameter is edited in a block reference, its
200 | Chapter 3 B Commands
associated action may trigger a change in the values of other parameters included in the action's selection set. If the Chain Actions property is set to Yes, this change triggers any actions associated with the polar parameter, just as if you had edited the parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the polar parameter's associated actions are not triggered by the changes to the other parameter. Evaluate associated actions when parameter is edited by another action? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter property description: Enter a description for the parameter
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
Value Set Specifies a value set for the parameter. Limits the available values for the parameter in a block reference to the values specified in the set. Enter distance value set type [None/List/Increment] : Specify a distance value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type Enter angle value set type [None/List/Increment] : Specify an angle value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type List Specifies a list of available values for the parameter in a block reference. Enter list of distance values (separated by commas): Specify a list of values separated by commas Enter list of angle values (separated by commas): Specify a list of values separated by commas
BPARAMETER | 201
Increment Specifies a value increment and minimum and maximum values for the parameter distance in the block reference. Enter distance increment: Specify an increment value for the parameter distance Enter minimum distance: Specify a minimum value for the parameter distance Enter maximum distance: Specify a maximum value for the parameter distance Specifies a value increment and minimum and maximum values for the parameter angle in the block reference. Enter angle increment: Specify an increment value for the parameter angle Enter minimum angle: Specify a minimum value for the parameter angle Enter maximum angle: Specify a maximum value for the parameter angle
XY Adds an XY parameter to the current dynamic block definition and defines custom horizontal and vertical distance properties for the block reference. You associate a move, scale, stretch, or array action with an XY parameter. Specify base point or [Name/Label/Chain/Description/Palette/Value set]: Specify a base point for the parameter or enter an option Specify endpoint: Specify an endpoint for the parameter Enter number of grips [0/1/2/4] <1>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter If you specify one grip for the parameter, the grip is added to the endpoint of the parameter. If you specify two grips for the parameter, a grip is added to the base point and endpoint of the parameter. If you specify four grips for the parameter, a grip is added to all four corners of the parameter.
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter. Enter horizontal distance property label <default>: Enter a label for the horizontal distance property or press ENTER to use the default label
202 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Enter vertical distance property label <default>: Enter a label for the vertical distance property or press ENTER to use the default label
Chain Specifies the Chain Actions property for the parameter. The XY parameter may be included in the selection set of an action that is associated with a different parameter. When that parameter is edited in a block reference, its associated action may trigger a change in the values of other parameters included in the action's selection set. If the Chain Actions property is set to Yes, this change triggers any actions associated with the XY parameter, just as if you had edited the parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the XY parameter's associated actions are not triggered by the changes to the other parameter. Evaluate associated actions when parameter is edited by another action? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter horizontal distance property description: Enter a description for the horizontal distance property of the parameter Enter vertical distance property description: Enter a description for the vertical distance property of the parameter
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
Value Set Specifies a value set for the parameter. Limits the available values for the parameter in a block reference to the values specified in the set.
BPARAMETER | 203
Enter horizontal value set type [None/List/Increment] : Specify a value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type Enter vertical value set type [None/List/Increment] : Specify a value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type List Specifies a list of available values for the parameter in a block reference. Enter list of distance values (separated by commas): Specify a list of values separated by commas Increment Specifies a value increment and minimum and maximum values for the parameter in the block reference. Enter distance increment: Specify an increment value for the parameter Enter minimum distance: Specify a minimum distance value for the parameter Enter maximum distance: Specify a maximum distance value for the parameter
Rotation Adds a rotation parameter to the current dynamic block definition and defines a custom angle property for the block reference. Only a rotate action can be associated with a rotation parameter. Specify base point or [Name/Label/Chain/Description/Palette/Value set]: Specify a base point for the parameter or enter an option Specify radius of parameter: Specify a radius for the parameter Specify default rotation angle or [Base angle] <0>: Specify a base angle for the parameter Specify label location: Specify a location for the parameter label Enter number of grips [0/1] <1>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter If you specify one grip for the parameter, the grip is added to the key point on the radius of the parameter. Base Angle Specifies a base angle for the parameter and places the grip for the parameter at this angle. Specify base angle <0>: Specify a base angle for the parameter or press ENTER
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
204 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter. Enter rotation property label <default>: Enter a label for the rotation property or press ENTER to use the default label
Chain Specifies the Chain Actions property for the parameter. The rotation parameter may be included in the selection set of an action that is associated with a different parameter. When that parameter is edited in a block reference, its associated action may trigger a change in the values of other parameters included in the action's selection set. If the Chain Actions property is set to Yes, this change triggers any actions associated with the rotation parameter, just as if you had edited the parameter in the block reference through a grip or custom property. If the Chain Actions property is set to No, the rotation parameter's associated actions are not triggered by the changes to the other parameter. Evaluate associated actions when parameter is edited by another action? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter property description: Enter a description for the parameter
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
BPARAMETER | 205
Value Set Specifies a value set for the parameter. Limits the available values for the parameter in a block reference to the values specified in the set. Enter angle value set type [None/List/Increment] : Specify an angle value set type or press ENTER to specify no value set type List Specifies a list of available values for the parameter in a block reference. Enter list of angle values (separated by commas): Specify a list of values separated by commas Increment Specifies a value increment and minimum and maximum values for the parameter angle in the block reference. Enter angle increment: Specify an increment value for the parameter angle Enter minimum angle: Specify a minimum value for the parameter angle Enter maximum angle: Specify a maximum value for the parameter angle
Flip Adds a flip parameter to the current dynamic block definition. Defines a custom flip property for the block reference. A flip parameter flips objects. In the Block Editor, a flip parameter displays as a reflection line. Objects can be flipped about this reflection line. A flip parameter displays a value that shows if the block reference has been flipped or not. You associate a flip action with a flip parameter. Specify base point of reflection line or [Name/Label/Description/Palette]: Specify a base point for the reflection line or enter an option Specify endpoint of reflection line: Specify an endpoint for the reflection line Specify label location: Specify a location for the parameter label Enter number of grips [0/1] <1>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a
206 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter. Enter Flip property label <default>: Enter a label for the flip property or press ENTER to use the default label Specify values for items in the flip property dropdown control: Enter flip property value for an unflipped state : Enter a property value to display when the parameter is unflipped or press ENTER to use the default label Enter flipped property value for a flipped state : Enter a property value to display when the parameter is flipped or press ENTER to use the default label
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter property description: Enter a description for the parameter
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
Visibility Adds a visibility parameter to the current dynamic block definition and defines a custom visibility property for the block reference. A visibility parameter allows you to create visibility states and to control the visibility of objects in the block. A visibility parameter always applies to the entire block and needs no action associated with it. Specify parameter location or [Name/Label/Description/Palette]: Specify a location for the parameter or enter an option Enter number of grips [0/1] <1>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor.
BPARAMETER | 207
Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter. Enter visibility property label <default>: Enter a label for the visibility property or press ENTER to use the default label
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter property description: Enter a description for the parameter
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
Lookup Adds a lookup parameter to the current dynamic block definition and defines custom lookup properties for the block reference. A lookup parameter defines a custom property that you can specify or set to evaluate to a value from a list or table you define. You associate a lookup action with a lookup parameter. Each lookup parameter you add to the block definition can be added as a column in the Property Lookup Table dialog box on page 186. Specify parameter location or [Name/Label/Description/Palette]: Specify a location for the parameter or enter an option Enter number of grips [0/1] <1>: Specify the number of grips for the parameter
208 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Name Specifies the parameter name. The parameter name is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. Enter parameter name <default>: Enter a name for the parameter or press ENTER to use the default name
Label Specifies the parameter label, which defines the custom property name added to the block. The parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette as a Custom property when you select the block reference in a drawing. In the Block Editor, the parameter label is displayed next to the parameter. Enter lookup property label <default>: Enter a label for the lookup property or press ENTER to use the default label
Description Specifies the description for the custom property name (parameter label). This description is displayed in the Properties palette when you select the parameter in the Block Editor. In a drawing, when you select the custom property name (parameter label) for the block reference in the Properties palette, the description is displayed at the bottom of the Properties palette. Enter property description: Enter a description for the parameter
Palette Specifies whether or not the parameter label is displayed in the Properties palette when the block reference is selected in a drawing. Display property in Properties palette? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER
BREAK Quick Reference Breaks the selected object between two points
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Break.
BREAK | 209
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Break Command entry: break Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1) on an object You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it into two objects. If the points are off of an object, they are automatically projected on to the object. BREAK is often used to create space for a block or text. The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If you select the object by using your pointing device, the program both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next prompt you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the first point. Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or enter f Second Break Point Specifies the second point to use to break the object. First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify. Specify first break point: Specify second break point:
The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify. If the second point is not on the object, the nearest point on the object is selected; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the second point beyond the end to be removed. To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the second point.
210 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed. The program converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point.
You can also break selected objecs at a single point with the Break at Point tool. With this tool, you can break objects such as a long line, open polyline, or arc into two contiguous objects.
BREP Quick Reference Removes the history from 3D solid primitives and composite solids Command entry: brep Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish The history of the selected solids is removed. The solid no longer retains a history of the original parts from which the solid was created, and thus, its original parts cannot be selected and modified. If you use BREP on a solid primitive, the solid primitive is no longer a true primitive and cannot be manipulated as such (through grips and the Properties palette).
BREP | 211
BROWSER Quick Reference Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry
Toolbar: Web Command entry: browser Enter Web location (URL) <current>: Press ENTER or enter a new location; you don't need to enter http:// before the location Pressing ENTER displays your web browser, which automatically connects to the location you specify. Because BROWSER does not append “http://” to web locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser.
BSAVE Quick Reference Saves the current block definition
Toolbar: Block Editor Command entry: bedit ➤ bsave
212 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Saves changes to the current block definition. You can only use the BSAVE command in the Block Editor on page 169.
BSAVEAS Quick Reference Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name
Toolbar: Block Editor Command entry: bedit ➤ bsaveas Displays the Save Block As dialog box on page 213. You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor on page 169.
Save Block As Dialog Box Quick Reference Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
Block Name Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block definition.
BSAVEAS | 213
Block List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition. Description Displays the block definition description specified in the Block area of the Properties palette in the Block Editor.
BVHIDE Quick Reference Makes objects invisible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition
Toolbar: Block Editor Shortcut menu: Select objects to hide for visibility states. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Object Visibility ➤ Hide for Current State or click Object Visibility ➤ Hide for All States Command entry: bedit ➤ bvhide Allows you to make objects invisible for the current visibility state. You can only use the BVHIDE command in the Block Editor on page 169. Select objects to hide: Select objects to hide for the current visibility state or all visibility states Hide for current state or all visibility states [Current/All] : Enter currentto hide the selected objects for the current visibility state or enterallto hide the selected objects for all visibility states in the block definition
BVSHOW Quick Reference Makes objects visible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a dynamic block definition
214 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Toolbar: Block Editor Shortcut menu: Select objects to make visible for visibility states. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Object Visibility ➤ Show for Current State or click Object Visibility ➤ Show for All States Command entry: bedit ➤ bvshow Allows you to make objects visible for visibility states. You can only use the BVSHOW command in the Block Editor on page 169. Select objects to make visible: Select objects to make visible for the current visibility state or all visibility states Make visible for current state or all visibility states [Current/All] : Enter current to make the selected objects visible for the current visibility state or enter all to make the selected objects visible for all visibility states in the block definition
BVSTATE Quick Reference Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block Command entry: bedit ➤ bvstate Displays the Visibility States dialog box on page 215. You can only use the BVSTATE command in the Block Editor on page 169 after a visibility parameter has been added to the block definition.
Visibility States Dialog Box Quick Reference Creates or modifies visibility states. Through buttons in the dialog box or right-click menu options, you can ■
Create new visibility states
■
Set any visibility state as the current state
■
Rename visibility states
BVSTATE | 215
■
Delete visibility states
■
Move visibility states up or down in the list
Visibility States Lists the available visibility states for the current dynamic block definition. The order of this list is reflected in the dynamic block reference when the grip is clicked to display the list of visibility states. The state at the top of the list is the default state for the block reference. Set Current Sets the selected visibility state as the current state to display in the Block Editor. Does not change the default visibility state that is displayed when the block is inserted in a drawing, nor does it change the displayed visibility state for block references already inserted and edited in the drawing. New Displays the New Visibility State dialog box. on page 216 Rename Renames the selected visibility state. Delete Deletes the selected visibility state. Move Up Moves the selected visibility state up in the list. Move Down Moves the selected visibility state down in the list.
New Visibility State Dialog Box Quick Reference Creates a new visibility state.
216 | Chapter 3 B Commands
Visibility State Name Specifies the name for the new visibility state. Visibility Options for New States Displays options for the new visibility state. Hide All Existing Objects in New State Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be hidden in the new visibility state. Show All Existing Objects in New State Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state. Leave Visibility of Existing Objects Unchanged in New State Specifies that the visibility of objects in the new visibility state will be the same as in the current visibility state on which the new state is based. OK Creates a new visibility state.
-BVSTATE Quick Reference If you enter -bvstate at the command prompt, the following BVSTATE command prompts are displayed. Current visibility state: Enter an option [New on page 217/Set on page 218/Delete on page 218] : Enter an option or press ENTER
New Creates a new visibility state. Enter name of new visibility state: Enter a name for the new visibility state Enter object visibility for new state [Hide all/Show all/Current visibility] : Enter object visibility for new state
-BVSTATE | 217
Hide All Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be hidden in the new visibility state. Show All Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state. Current Visibility Specifies that the visibility of objects in the new visibility state will be the same as in the current visibility state on which the new state is based.
Set Specifies the visibility state to set as current. Enter visibility state name to make current or [?]: Enter the name of the visibility state to set as the current state
Delete Deletes a visibility state. Enter visibility state name(s) to delete: Enter the name(s) of the visibility states to delete
218 | Chapter 3 B Commands
C Commands
4
CAL Quick Reference Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions Command entry: cal (or 'cal for transparent use) CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS. You can insert AutoLISP® variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expression back to an AutoLISP variable. You can use these arithmetic and vector expressions in any command that expects points, vectors, or numbers.
Understand Syntax of Expressions Quick Reference CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence: ■
Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set
219
■
Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division second, and addition and subtraction last
■
Operators of equal precedence from left to right
Numeric Expressions Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with the operators in the following table. Numeric operators Operator
Operation
()
Groups expressions
^
Indicates exponentiation
*,/
Multiplies, divides
+, -
Adds, subtracts
The following are examples of numeric expressions: 3 3 + 0.6 (5.8^2) + PI
Vector Expressions A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions combined with the operators in the following table. Vector operators Operator
Operation
()
Groups expressions
&
Determines the vector product of vectors (as a vector) [a,b,c]&[x,y,z] = [ (b*z) - (c*y) , (c*x) - (a*z) , (a*y) - (b*x) ]
220 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Vector operators Operator
Operation
*
Determines the scalar product of vectors (as a real number) [a,b,c]*[x,y,z] = ax + by + cz
*, /
Multiplies, divides a vector by a real number a*[x,y,z] = [a*x,a*y,a*z]
+,-
Adds, subtracts vectors (points) [a,b,c] + [x,y,z] = [a+x,b+y,c+z]
The following are examples of vector expressions: A+[1,2,3] provides the point positioned [1,2,3] units relative to point A. The expression [2<45<45] + [2<45<0] - [1.02, 3.5, 2] adds two points and subtracts a third point. The first two points are in spherical coordinates.
Format Feet and Inches Quick Reference Enter feet and inches using the following format: feet'-inches" or feet' inches" or feet'inches" You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch formatted values: ■
5' or 60”
■
5'-9” or 5' 9” or 5'9”
■
5'-1/2” or 5' 1/2” or 5'1/2”
■
5'-9-1/2” or 5' 9-1/2” or 5'9-1/2”
Format Feet and Inches | 221
■
5'-9 1/2” or 5' 9 1/2” or 5'9 1/2”
To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (“) is optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2”, you could enter 5'9-1/2. WARNING With imperial units, CAL interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9” from 5', enter 5' -9” rather than 5'-9”.
Format Angles Quick Reference The default units for angles are decimal degrees. Enter angles using the following format: <degrees>d<minutes>'<seconds>” You must enter 0d when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree (minutes and seconds only). You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are zero. Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number followed by g to enter angles in grads. The following examples show ways of entering angles: 5d10'20" 0d10'20" 124.6r 14g Angles entered in any format are converted to decimal degrees. Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees.
222 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Use Points and Vectors Quick Reference Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines a location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space. Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions, such as nor and vec, return a vector.
Formatting Points and Vectors A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]): [r1,r2,r3] The notation p1, p2, and so forth designates points. The notation v1, v2, and so forth designates vectors. In drawings, points are displayed as dots, and vectors are displayed as lines with arrows. CAL supports points expressed in all formats. Point formats Coordinate system
Point format
Polar
[dist
Cylindrical
[dist
Spherical
[dist
Relative
Uses the @ prefix [@x,y,z]
WCS (instead of UCS)
Uses the * prefix [*x,y,z]
You can omit the following components of a point or vector: coordinate values of zero and a comma immediately preceding the right bracket (]). The following are valid points: [1,2] is the same as [1,2,0] [,,3] is the same as [0,0,3]
Use Points and Vectors | 223
[ ] is the same as [0,0,0] In the following example, the point is entered in the relative spherical coordinate system with respect to the (WCS). The distance is 1+2=3; the angles are 10+20=30 degrees and 45 degrees, 20 minutes. [@*1+2<10+20<45d20"] The following is a valid point that contains arithmetic expressions as its components: [2*(1.0+3.3),0.4-1.1,2*1.4] The following example uses the Endpoint object snap and the vector [2,0,3] to calculate a point that is offset from a selected endpoint: end + [2,,3] The calculated point is offset 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Z direction relative to the selected endpoint.
Use AutoLISP Variables Quick Reference You can use AutoLISP variables within arithmetic expressions. The variables must be one of the following types: real, integer, or 2D or 3D point (vector). This example defines a point positioned 5 units in the X direction and 1 unit in the Y direction from the point stored in AutoLISP variable A. A+[5,1] If you enter an AutoLISP variable with a name containing a character with special meaning in CAL, such as +, -, *, or /, enclose the variable name in apostrophes ('), for example: 'number-of-holes'
Assigning Values to AutoLISP Variables To assign a value to an AutoLISP variable, precede the arithmetic expression with the variable name and the equal sign (=). Later, you can use the value of this variable for other calculations. This example saves the values of two expressions in AutoLISP variables P1 and R1.
224 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Command: cal rel="nofollow">> Expression: P1=cen+[1,0] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Command: cal >> Expression: R1=dist(end,end)/3 >> Select entity for END snap: Select an object with an endpoint This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: 'cal >> Expression: P1+[0,1] Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] : 'cal >> Expression: R1+0.5
Use System Variables in Calculations Quick Reference You can use the getvar function to read the value of a system variable. The syntax is getvar(variable_name)
The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of the view in the current viewport. getvar(viewctr) With this method, you can also access the user system variables, USERI1-5 and USERR1-5. For example, to retrieve the value stored in USERR2, enter the following: getvar(userr2)
Use System Variables in Calculations | 225
Convert Units of Measurement Quick Reference The cvunit function converts either a number or a point from one unit of measurement to another. See the acad.unt file for a list of units that you can convert. The syntax is cvunit(value, from_unit, to_unit)
The following example converts the value 1 from inches to centimeters: cvunit(1,inch,cm)
Use Standard Numeric Functions Quick Reference CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table. Numeric functions Function
Description
sin(angle)
Sine of the angle
cos(angle)
Cosine of the angle
tang(angle)
Tangent of the angle
asin(real)
Arcsine of the number; the number must be between -1 and 1
acos(real)
Arccosine of the number; the number must be between -1 and 1
atan(real)
Arctangent of the number
ln(real)
Natural log of the number
226 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Numeric functions Function
Description
log(real)
Base-10 log of the number
exp(real)
Natural exponent of the number
exp10(real)
Base-10 exponent of the number
sqr(real)
Square of the number
sqrt(real)
Square root of the number; the number must be nonnegative
abs(real)
Absolute value of the number
round(real)
Number rounded to the nearest integer
trunc(real)
Integer portion of the number
r2d(angle)
Angles in radians converted to degrees; for example, r2d(pi) converts the pi radians to 180 degrees
d2r(angle)
Angles in degrees converted to radians; for example, d2r(180) converts 180 degrees to radians and returns the value of pi
pi
The constant pi
Calculate a Vector from Two Points Quick Reference The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points. vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2. vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.
Calculate a Vector from Two Points | 227
The following example uses CAL to move selected objects 3 units in the direction from the center of one selected circle to the center of another selected circle: Command: move Select objects Specify base point or displacement: 'cal >> Expression: 3*vec1(cen,cen) Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER The following examples illustrate the meaning of vector and point calculations. Examples of vector and point calculations Expression
Meaning
vec(a,b)
Determines vector translation from point a to point b.
vec1(a,b)
Determines unit vector direction from point a to point b.
L*vec1(a,b)
Determines vector of length L in the direction from point a to point b.
a+v
Determines point b, which is a translation of the point a through vector v.
a+[5<20]
Determines point b positioned 5 units away from point a under the angle of 20 degrees. Note that [5<20] is a vector in polar coordinates.
228 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Calculate the Length of a Vector Quick Reference The abs function calculates the length of a vector. abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real number. In spherical coordinates (dist
Obtain a Point by Cursor Quick Reference To enter a point using the pointing device, use the cur function. The program prompts you to specify a point and uses the coordinate values of the point in the expression. The point coordinate values are expressed in terms of the current UCS. The cur function sets the value of the LASTPOINT system variable. The following example adds the vector [3.6,2.4,0]—the result of 1.2*[3,2]—to the point you select. This expression produces a point that is offset from the selected point. cur+1.2*[3,2]
Calculate the Length of a Vector | 229
Obtain the Last-Specified Point Quick Reference Use the @ character in the expression to obtain the coordinate of the last point, as shown in the following example: Command: line Specify first point: 'cal rel="nofollow">> Expression: cen+[0,1] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal >> Expression: @+3*vec1(cen,cen) The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the first selected circle. The second point of the line is 3 units away from the first point. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle to the center of the second selected circle.
Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions Quick Reference You can use Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions. The program prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the appropriate snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes greatly simplifies entering coordinates relative to other objects. When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable. CAL Snap modes Abbreviation
Snap mode
END
ENDPOINT
INS
INSERT
230 | Chapter 4 C Commands
CAL Snap modes Abbreviation
Snap mode
INT
INTERSECTION
MID
MIDPOINT
CEN
CENTER
NEA
NEAREST
NOD
NODE
QUA
QUADRANT
PER
PERPENDICULAR
TAN
TANGENT
The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL expression: (cen+end)/2 CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the midpoint between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected object. Using the Midpoint Snap mode, in the following example CAL prompts for an object and returns a point 1 unit in the Y direction from the midpoint of the selected object: mid+[,1] The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the centroid of a triangle defined by three endpoints: (end+end+end)/3
Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions | 231
Convert Points Between UCS and WCS Quick Reference Normally, the program assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS. w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current UCS. u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the WCS. You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS: w2u([0,0,0])
Filtering the X,Y, and Z Components of a Point or Vector The following functions filter the X, Y, and Z components of a point or vector. Point-filter functions Function
Description
xyof(p1)
X and Y components of a point; Z component is set to 0.0
xzof(p1)
X and Z components of a point; Y component is set to 0.0
yzof(p1)
Y and Z components of a point; X component is set to 0.0
xof(p1)
X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.0
yof(p1)
Y component of a point; X and Z components are set to 0.0
zof(p1)
Z component of a point; X and Y components are set to 0.0
rxof(p1)
X component of a point
ryof(p1)
Y component of a point
rzof(p1)
Z component of a point
232 | Chapter 4 C Commands
The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in spherical coordinates: zof([2<45<45]) The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b: xyof(a)+zof(b)
Calculate a Point on a Line Quick Reference The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line. You can specify the position of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or parametrically by a t parameter. pld(p1,p2,dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2. The parameter dist defines the distance of the point from the point p1. plt(p1,p2,t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2. The parameter t defines the parametric position of the point on the line. The following are examples of the parameter t: If t=0 the point is p1 If t=0.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2 If t=1 the point is p2
Rotate a Point About an Axis Quick Reference The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point. rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis passing through the point origin, as shown in the following example:
Calculate a Point on a Line | 233
rot(p,AxP1,AxP2,ang) Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the following example. The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point.
Obtain an Intersection Point Quick Reference The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points. ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines (p1,p2) and (p3,p4). All points are considered three-dimensional. ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5).
234 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Calculate a Distance Quick Reference dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2). dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line passing through points p1 and p2.
dpp(p,p1,p2,p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane defined by three points (p1,p2,p3). dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2).
The following example returns half the distance between the centers of two selected objects: dist(cen,cen)/2
Calculate a Distance | 235
The following example finds the distance between the point 3,2,4 and a plane you define by selecting three endpoints: dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end)
Obtain a Radius Quick Reference The rad function determines the radius of a selected object. rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment. The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE command. The radius of the new circle is two-thirds of the radius of the selected polyline arc segment: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: cen of Select the circle Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] : 'cal >> Expression: 2/3*rad >> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the circle
Obtain an Angle Quick Reference The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-dimensional case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case.
236 | Chapter 4 C Commands
ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v. The vector v is considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(p1,p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line (p1,p2), oriented from p1 to p2. The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(apex,p1,p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2). The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(apex,p1,p2,p) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2). The lines are considered 3D. The last parameter, point p, is used to define the orientation of the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with respect to the axis going from apex to p. The following examples show how angles are measured.
You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang function, as shown in the following example: Command: cal
Obtain an Angle | 237
>> Expression: ang(end,end,end) Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.
Calculate a Normal Vector Quick Reference The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal, not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain another point. nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object. nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to vector v. Both vectors are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. The orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left of the original vector v. nor(p1,p2) Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1,p2. The line is oriented from p1 to p2. The orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left from the original line (p1,p2). nor(p1,p2,p3) Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane defined by the three points p1, p2, and p3. The orientation of the normal vector is such that the given points go counterclockwise with respect to the normal. The following illustrations show how normal vectors are calculated:
238 | Chapter 4 C Commands
The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the object by the parallel projection. Command: vpoint Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current Specify a view point or [Rotate] : 'cal >> Expression: nor >> Select circle, arc or polyline for NOR function:
Calculate a Normal Vector | 239
Use Shortcut Functions Quick Reference The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode. Shortcut functions Function
Shortcut for
Description
dee
dist(end,end)
Distance between two endpoints
ille
ill(end,end,end,end)
Intersection of two lines defined by four endpoints
mee
(end+end)/2
Midpoint between two endpoints
nee
nor(end,end)
Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two endpoints
pldee (d)
pld(d,end,end)
Point at a distance along a line determined by two endpoints (see pld)
pltee (t)
plt(t,end,end)
Point at a parametric location on a line determined by two endpoints (see plt)
vee
vec(end,end)
Vector from two endpoints
vee1
vec1(end,end)
Unit vector from two endpoints
CAMERA Quick Reference Sets a camera and target location to create and save a 3D perspective view of objects
240 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ View panel ➤ Create Camera.
Toolbar: View Command entry: camera Current camera settings: Height=<current> Lens Length=<current> Specify camera location <current>: Enter a value or specify a point Sets the point from which you view objects in a model. Specify target location: Enter a value or specify a point Sets the target location of a camera’s lens. Enter an option[? on page 241/Name on page 241/LOcation on page 241/Height on page 241/Target on page 241/LEns on page 242/Clipping on page 242/View on page 242/<eXit> on page 242]:
?—List Cameras Displays a list of the currently defined cameras. Enter camera name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press Enter to list all cameras.
Name Names a camera. Enter name for new camera :
Location Specifies the location of the camera. Specify camera location <current>:
Height Changes the camera height. Specify camera height <current>:
Target Specifies the target of the camera.
CAMERA | 241
Specify camera target <current>:
Lens Changes the lens length of the camera. Specify lens length in mm <current>:
Clipping Defines front and back clipping planes and sets their values. Enable front clipping plane? [Yes/No] : Specify Yes to enable front clipping Specify front clipping plane offset from target plane <current>: Enter a distance Enable back clipping Plane? : Specify Yes to enable back clipping Specify back clipping plane offset from target plane <current>: Enter a distance
View Sets the current view to match the camera settings. Switch to camera view? [Yes/No] :
Exit Cancels the command.
Camera Preview Dialog Box Quick Reference Displays a preview of a camera view. Preview Displays a preview of a camera view defined with the CAMERA command. Visual Style Specifies the visual style applied to the preview. Display This Window When Editing a Camera Specifies that the Camera Preview dialog box is displayed when you edit a camera.
242 | Chapter 4 C Commands
CHAMFER Quick Reference Bevels the edges of objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Chamfer.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Chamfer Command entry: chamfer (TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current Select first line on page 243 or [Undo on page 245/Polyline on page 245/Distance on page 245/Angle on page 246/Trim on page 246/mEthod on page 247/Multiple on page 247]: Use an object selection method or enter an option The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you select the objects.
First Line Specifies the first of two edges required to define a 2D chamfer, or the edge of a 3D solid to chamfer. Select second line or shift-select to apply corner: Use an object selection method or hold down SHIFT and select an object to create a sharp corner If you select lines or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the chamfer line. You can hold down SHIFT while selecting the objects to override the current chamfer distances with a value of 0. If the selected objects are line segments of a 2D polyline, they must be adjacent or separated by no more than one segment. If they're separated by another polyline segment, CHAMFER deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the chamfer.
CHAMFER | 243
If you select an edge on a 3D solid, you must indicate which one of the two surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface. Base surface selection... Enter surface selection option [Next/OK (current)] : Enter n or o, or press ENTER Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface. Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge. Specify base surface chamfer distance <current>: Specify other surface chamfer distance <current>: After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the edges at once. Select an edge or [Loop]: Select an edge, enter L, or press ENTER
Edge Selects an individual edge to chamfer.
Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode. Select an edge loop or [Edge]: Select an edge, enter e, or press ENTER Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface.
244 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Edge Switches to Edge mode.
Undo Reverses the previous action in the command.
Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline. Select 2D polyline: The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline. If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.
Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge. Specify first chamfer distance <current>: Specify second chamfer distance <current>:
CHAMFER | 245
If you set both distances to zero, CHAMFER extends or trims the two lines so they end at the same point.
Angle Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line. Specify chamfer length on the first line <current>: Specify chamfer angle from the first line <current>:
Trim Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints. Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>: NOTE Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0, the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines.
246 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Method Controls whether CHAMFER uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create the chamfer. Enter trim method [Distance/Angle] <current>:
Multiple Chamfers the edges of more than one set of objects. CHAMFER displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command.
CHANGE Quick Reference Changes the properties of existing objects Command entry: change Select objects: Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the current user coordinate system (UCS). If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you get varying results depending on the object selection sequence. The easiest way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only objects other than lines in a selection set. Specify change point on page 247 or [Properties on page 249]: Specify a new point, or press ENTER to enter new values
Change Point or Values Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you select. Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are closest to the change point to the new point, unless Ortho mode is on. If Ortho mode is on, the selected lines are modified so that they become parallel to either the X or the Y axis; their endpoints are not moved to the specified coordinate.
CHANGE | 247
Circles Changes the circle radius. If you selected more than one circle, the prompt is repeated for the next circle. Specify new circle radius <no change>:
Text Changes text position and other properties. Specify new text insertion point <no change>: Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing ENTER leaves the text in its original position. Enter new text style <current>: If the text has a fixed height, the height prompt is not displayed. Specify new height <current>: Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter new text <current>: The next object is highlighted and prompts are displayed. Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that is not part of a block. Specify new text insertion point <no change>: Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing ENTER leaves the text at its original position. Enter new text style <current>: If the text has a fixed height, the height prompt is not displayed Specify new height <current>: Specify new rotation angle <current>:
248 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Enter new tag <current>: Enter new prompt <current>: Enter new default value <current>: Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block. Specify new block insertion point: Specify a point (1), or press ENTER Specifying a new location repositions the block. Pressing ENTER leaves the block in its original position. Specify new block rotation angle <current>: The block is rotated about its insertion point to the specified angle.
Properties Modifies properties of existing objects. Enter property to change [Color/Elev/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/Material/Annotative]: NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change, varies is displayed as the current value. You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.
Color Changes the color of the selected objects. Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook] <current>: Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255, enter t, enter co, enter bylayer or byblock, or press ENTER For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color
CHANGE | 249
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as PANTONE If you enter a color book name, the following prompt is displayed. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book, such as Pantone 573
Elev Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects. Specify new elevation <current>: You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same Z value.
Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects. Enter new layer name <current>:
Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects. Enter new linetype name <current>: If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the linetype.
Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
250 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects. Enter new lineweight <current>:
Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Specify new thickness <current>: Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect.
Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached. Enter new material name :
Annotative Changes the property of the selected objects. Make annotative? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
CHECKSTANDARDS Quick Reference Checks the current drawing for standards violations
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Check.
CHECKSTANDARDS | 251
Toolbar: CAD Standards Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Check Command entry: checkstandards The Check Standards dialog box on page 252 is displayed.
Check Standards Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Check.
Toolbar: CAD Standards Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Check Command entry: checkstandards Analyzes the current drawing for standards violations. Problem Provides a description of a nonstandard object in the current drawing. To fix a problem, select a replacement from the Replace With list, and then click Fix. Replace With Lists possible replacements for the current standards violation. If a recommended fix is available, it is preceded by a check mark. If a recommended fix is not available, no items are highlighted in the Replace With list. Preview of Changes Indicates the properties of the nonstandard object that will be changed if the fix currently selected in the Replace With list is applied. Fix Fixes the nonstandard object using the item currently selected in the Replace With list, and advances to the next nonstandard object in the current drawing. This button is unavailable if a recommended fix does not exist or if an item is not highlighted in the Replace With list. Next Problem Advances to the next nonstandard object in the current drawing without applying a fix. Mark This Problem as Ignored Flags the current problem as ignored. If the Show Ignored Problems option is turned off in the CAD Standards Settings
252 | Chapter 4 C Commands
dialog box, problems flagged as ignored are not displayed the next time the drawing is checked. Settings Displays the CAD Standards Settings dialog box on page 1432, which specifies additional settings for the Check Standards dialog box and the Configure Standards dialog box. Close Closes the Check Standards dialog box without applying a fix to the standards violation currently displayed in Problem.
CHPROP Quick Reference Changes the properties of an object Command entry: chprop Select objects: Enter property to change [Color on page 253/LAyer on page 254/LType on page 254/ltScale on page 254/LWeight on page 254/Thickness on page 254/Material on page 255/Annotative on page 255]: NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change, varies is displayed as the current value.
Color Changes the color of the selected objects. Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook] <current>: Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255, enter t, enter co, enter bylayer or byblock, or press ENTER For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.
CHPROP | 253
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as PANTONE® If you enter a color book name, the following prompt is displayed. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book, such as PANTONE® 573
Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects. Enter new layer name <current>:
Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects. Enter new linetype name <current>: If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the linetype.
Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects. Enter new lineweight <current>:
Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Specify new thickness <current>: Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect.
254 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached. Enter new material name :
Annotative Changes the property of the selected objects. Make annotative? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
CHSPACE Quick Reference Moves objects between model space and paper space Menu: Modify ➤ Change Space Command entry: chspace Select objects: Set the SOURCE viewport active and press ENTER to continue: Returns prompts similar to the following: N object(s) changed from MODEL space to PAPER space. Objects were scaled by a factor of n to maintain visual appearance. The moved object is scaled appropriately in the new space. When transferring objects to paper space, the SOURCE viewport that you click determines the paper space location of the transferred objects. When transferring objects to model space, the TARGET viewport that you click determines the model space location of the transferred objects.
CHSPACE | 255
CIRCLE Quick Reference Creates a circle
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Center, Radius.
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Circle Command entry: circle Specify center point on page 256 for circle or [3P on page 257/2P on page 257/Ttr (tan tan radius) on page 258]: Specify a point or enter an option To create a circle, you can also specify the diameter, center point, points on the circumference, and tangents.
Center Point Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius. Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: Specify a point, enter a value, enter d, or press ENTER Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a point (2). The distance between this point and the center point determines the radius of the circle.
256 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Diameter Draws a circle using the center point and a specified distance for the diameter. Specify diameter of circle <current>: Specify a point (2), enter a value, or press ENTER
3P (Three Points) Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference. Specify first point on circle: Specify a point (1) Specify second point on circle: Specify a point (2) Specify third point on circle: Specify a point (3)
2P (Two Points) Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter. Specify first endpoint of circle's diameter: Specify a point (1) Specify second endpoint of circle's diameter: Specify a point (2)
CIRCLE | 257
TTR (Tangent,Tangent, Radius) Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select a circle, arc, or line Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select a circle, arc, or line Specify radius of circle <current>:
Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.
CLASSICLAYER Quick Reference Manages layer and layer properties Command entry: classiclayer The modal Layer Properties Manager is displayed. Currently, the modeless Layer Properties Manager is launched by default when you click the Layer Properties button or type LAYER on page 739at the Command prompt. You can switch back to modal Layer Properties Manager using this command. NOTE This command will be removed in future releases.
258 | Chapter 4 C Commands
CLEANSCREENON Quick Reference Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows (excluding the command line) Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen Command entry: cleanscreenon The screen displays only the menu bar, the Model and layout tabs at the bottom of the drawing, the status bars, and the command line. Use CLEANSCREENOFF to restore display of interface items except menu bar, status bar, and the command line. Press CTRL+0 (zero) to switch between CLEANSCREENON and CLEANSCREENOFF. A Clean Screen button is available in the lower-right corner of the application status bar.
CLEANSCREENOFF Quick Reference Restores display of toolbars and dockable windows (excluding the command line) Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen Command entry: cleanscreenoff Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON on page 259 was used. Use CLEANSCREENON to clear the screen of toolbars and dockable windows (excluding the command line). Press CTRL+0 (zero) to switch between CLEANSCREENON and CLEANSCREENOFF. The Clean Screen button is available in the lower-right corner of the application status bar.
CLOSE Quick Reference Closes the current drawing
CLEANSCREENON | 259
Menu: File ➤ Close Command entry: close The current drawing is closed. If you modified the drawing since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes. You can close a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to a read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS command.
CLOSEALL Quick Reference Closes all currently open drawings Menu: Window ➤ Close All Command entry: closeall All open drawings are closed. A message box is displayed for each unsaved drawing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it.
COLOR Quick Reference Sets the color for new objects Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: color (or 'color for transparent use) The Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. If you enter -color at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 265.
260 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Select Color Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: color (or 'color for transparent use) Define the color of objects. You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. ■
Index Color on page 261
■
True Color on page 262
■
Color Books on page 264
Index Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Quick Reference Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD Color Index. If you hover over a color, the number of the color and its red, green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or enter the color number or name in the Color box. The large palette displays colors 10 through 249. The second palette displays colors 1 through 9; these colors have names as well as numbers. The third palette displays colors 250 through 255; these colors are shades of gray.
Index Color Indicates the ACI color number when you hover over a color.
Select Color Dialog Box | 261
Red, Green, Blue Indicates the RGB color value when you hover over a color.
Bylayer Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. When BYLAYER is selected, the color of the current layer is displayed in the Old and New color swatches.
Byblock Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current Color setting. NOTE The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK options do not apply to the LIGHT command.
Color Specifies a color name, BYLAYER or BYBLOCK color, or an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) number of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the most recently selected color.
Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color.
New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.
True Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Quick Reference Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true
262 | Chapter 4 C Commands
color functionality. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified.
HSL Color Model Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors. Hue, saturation, and luminance are properties of colors. By manipulating the values of these properties, you can specify a wide range of colors. Hue Specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific wavelength of light within the visible spectrum. To specify a hue, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Hue box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid hue values are from 0 to 360 degrees. Saturation Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a color to look more pure while low saturation causes a color to look washed-out. To specify color saturation, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid saturation values are from 0 to 100%. Luminance Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, use the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box. Valid luminance values are from 0 to 100%. A value of 0% represents the color black, 100% represents white, and 50% represents the optimal brightness for the color. Adjusting this value also affects the RGB value. Color Spectrum Specifies the hue and purity of a color. To specify a hue, move the crosshairs from side to side over the color spectrum. To specify color saturation, move the crosshairs from top to bottom over the color spectrum. Color Slider Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, adjust the bar on the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box.
RGB Color Model Specifies the RGB color model for selecting colors. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The values specified for each component represent the intensity of the red, green, and blue components. The combination of these values can be manipulated to create a wide range of colors.
Select Color Dialog Box | 263
Red Specifies the red component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Red box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Green Specifies the green component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Green box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Blue Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Color Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the following format: 000,000,000.
True Color Stored as RGB Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color.
New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.
Color Books Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Quick Reference Specifies colors using third-party color books (such as PANTONE®) or user-defined color books. Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the selected color book.
264 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. The list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Options dialog box, Files tab. Displays the pages of the selected color book and the colors and color names on each page. Color books containing up to ten colors per page are supported. If a color book is not paginated, the colors are organized into pages containing seven colors per page. To view color book pages, select an area on the color slider or use the up and down arrows to browse.
RGB Equivalent Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Color Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing TAB. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color number. If the specified color is not found in the color book, the closest number match is displayed.
Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color.
New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.
-COLOR Quick Reference If you enter -color at the command prompt, the following COLOR command prompts are displayed. Enter default object color [Truecolor on page 266/COlorbook on page 266] : Enter a color, enter t, enter co, or press ENTER
-COLOR | 265
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red by entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red. You can also enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock, all new objects are drawn in the default color (white or black, depending on your background color) until they are grouped into a block. When you insert the block in a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR. WARNING If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that make up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex results. If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about assigning a color to a layer.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as Pantone If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book, such as Pantone 573
COMMANDLINE Quick Reference Displays the command line
266 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Command Line. Menu: Tools ➤ Command Line Command entry: commandline Displays the command window when it has been hidden.
COMMANDLINEHIDE Quick Reference Hides the command line Menu: Tools ➤ Command Line Command entry: commandlinehide Hides the command window. When the command window is hidden, you can still enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on.
COMPILE Quick Reference Compiles shape files and PostScript font files into SHX files Command entry: compile The Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box. The compiled file is assigned this name with the file extension .shx.
CONE Quick Reference Creates a 3D solid cone
COMMANDLINEHIDE | 267
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Cone.
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Cone Command entry: cone Specify center point of base or [3P on page 269/2P on page 270/Ttr on page 270/Elliptical on page 271]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option Specify base radius or [Diameter on page 272] <default>: Specify a base radius, enter d to specify a diameter, or press ENTER to specify the default base radius value Specify height or [2Point on page 273/Axis endpoint on page 273/Top radius on page 274] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Creates a 3D solid with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically to a point or to a circular or elliptical planar face. You can control the smoothness of 3D curved solids, such as a cone, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.
Use the Top Radius option to create a cone frustum. Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive.
268 | Chapter 4 C Commands
3P (Three Points) Defines the base circumference and base plane of the cone by specifying three points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Specify third point: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint/Top radius] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cone. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. Specify top radius <default>: Specify a value or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive.
CONE | 269
2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cone by specifying two points. Specify first endpoint of diameter: Specify a point Specify second endpoint of diameter: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint/Top radius] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cone. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. Specify top radius <default>: Specify a value or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive.
TTR (Tangent,Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cone with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Specify point on object for first tangent: Select a point on an object Specify point on object for second tangent: Select a point on an object Specify radius of circle <default>: Specify a base radius or press ENTER to specify the default base radius value Sometimes, more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.
270 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint/Top radius] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cone. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. Specify top radius <default>: Specify a value or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive.
Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the cone. Specify endpoint of first axis or [Center]: Specify a point Specify other endpoint of first axis: Specify a point Specify endpoint of second axis: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint/Top radius] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. Center Creates the base of the cone by using a specified center point. Specify center point: Specify a point Specify distance to first axis <default>: Specify a distance or press ENTER to specify the default distance value
CONE | 271
Specify endpoint of second axis: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint/Top radius] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cone. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. Specify top radius <default>: Specify a value or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive.
Diameter Specifies the diameter for the base of the cone. Specify diameter <default>: Specify a diameter or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default diameter is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the diameter is always the previously entered diameter value for any solid primitive.
272 | Chapter 4 C Commands
2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cone. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. Specify top radius <default>: Specify a value or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive.
2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point
Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cone.
CONE | 273
Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. Specify top radius <default>: Specify a value or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive.
CONVERT Quick Reference Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier Command entry: convert Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch on page 274/Polyline on page 274/All on page 274] : Enter h for hatches, p for polylines, or a for both Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing. Enter object selection preference [Select/All] : Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing. Enter object selection preference [Select/All] : Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing. Enter object selection preference [Select/All] : Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing One or both of the following messages are displayed: number hatch objects converted number 2d polyline objects converted Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release is opened in Release 14 or later. Information about the rotation of a hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS since
274 | Chapter 4 C Commands
creating the hatch. When updating hatches with CONVERT, it is recommended that you use the Select option so that you can check your results. In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default, the PLINETYPE system variable specifies that polylines are updated automatically when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in the old format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an older drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded. NOTE Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old format, as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices. Editing commands make no distinction between the two formats.
CONVERTCTB Quick Reference Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB) Command entry: convertctb Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996), where you can select the color-dependent plot style table file you want to convert. The Save As dialog box is then displayed. If necessary, specify a new location or name for the converted plot style table file. CONVERTCTB saves a copy of a color-dependent plot style table as a named plot style table, which you can then attach to drawings that use named plot styles. The original color-dependent plot style table is not affected by CONVERTCTB. The default location for the new named plot style table file is in the Plot Styles folder. The default name for the new named plot style table file is the same as the color-dependent plot style table name. CONVERTCTB creates one named plot style for each color that has unique plot properties, one named plot style for each group of colors that are assigned the same plot properties, and a default named plot style called NORMAL. For example, if all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties, CONVERTCTB creates only two named plot styles in the named plot style table: NORMAL, the default plot style, and STYLE 1, which assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the colors in the color-dependent plot style table. However, suppose that all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties except for two
CONVERTCTB | 275
colors, BLUE and GREEN. If these colors each have unique plot properties, CONVERTCTB creates four named plot styles in the named plot style table: NORMAL, the default plot style; STYLE 1, which assumes the plot properties of GREEN; STYLE 2, which assumes the plot properties of BLUE; and STYLE 3, which assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the other colors. CONVERTCTB gives the plot styles in the new named plot style table generic names such as STYLE 1, STYLE 2. You can modify these generic plot style names in the Plot Style Table Editor. Click the Edit button on the Plot Device tab in the Page Setup dialog box on page 1069. If you want to rename the plot styles, you must do so before applying them to drawing layouts.
CONVERTOLDLIGHTS Quick Reference Converts lights created in previous drawing file formats to the current format Command entry: convertoldlights The lights in the drawing that were originally created in a previous drawing file format are updated to the current drawing file format. Drawing file format changes occur infrequently in AutoCAD-based products. For example, format changes occurred in AutoCAD 2000, AutoCAD 2004, and AutoCAD 2007. WARNING The conversion may not be correct in all cases. You may need to adjust intensity, for example.
CONVERTOLDMATERIALS Quick Reference Converts materials created in previous drawing file formats to the current format Command entry: convertoldmaterials The materials in the drawing that were originally created in a previous drawing file format are updated to the current drawing file format. Drawing file format changes occur infrequently in AutoCAD-based products. For example, format changes occurred in AutoCAD 2000, AutoCAD 2004, and AutoCAD 2007.
276 | Chapter 4 C Commands
WARNING The conversion may not be correct in all cases. You may need to adjust material mapping, for example.
CONVERTPSTYLES Quick Reference Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles Command entry: convertpstyles A drawing can use either named or color-dependent plot styles, but not both. CONVERTPSTYLES converts a currently open drawing from color-dependent plot styles to named plot styles, or from named plot styles to color-dependent plot styles, depending on which plot style method the drawing is currently using. ■
Converting drawings from color-dependent plot styles to named plot styles on page 277
■
Converting drawings from named plot styles to color-dependent plot styles on page 278
When you convert a drawing, CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE system variable to the appropriate setting (1 = named, 0 = color-dependent). For example, a drawing using color-dependent plot styles assigns plot properties to objects and layers by color. In other words, all objects with the same color have the same plot properties. CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing to use named plot styles that can be applied to objects or layers independent of color assignment. In other words, all objects with the same color can have different plot properties.
Converting Drawings from Color-Dependent to Named Plot Styles A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing's plot style tables before converting the drawing. You can convert the color-dependent plot style tables assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB. The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed, where you select the named plot style table file to attach to the converted drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES | 277
CONVERTPSTYLES requires you to select a named plot style table that was converted using CONVERTCTB or created from a PC2 or PCP file. Normally you should select the named plot style table that was converted from the color-dependent plot style table that was assigned to the same drawing. CONVERTPSTYLES attaches the selected named plot style table to model space and to all layouts. Drawing layers are each assigned a named plot style (from the converted plot style table) that has the same plot properties that their color-dependent plot style had. Drawing objects that had the same color-dependent plot style as their layer are assigned the named plot style BYLAYER. Drawing objects that had a color-dependent plot style that was different from their layer are assigned a named plot style that has the same properties that their color-dependent plot style had. After a drawing is converted to named plot styles, you can change the named plot style table assignment or assign other named plot styles tables to model space or layouts. You can also assign individual plot styles to drawing objects.
Converting Drawings from Named to Color-Dependent Plot Styles A dialog box advises you that the named plot styles attached to objects and named plot style tables attached to model space and layouts will be detached. After a drawing is converted to color-dependent plot styles, you can assign a color-dependent plot style table. Plot styles will be applied by color.
CONVTOSOLID Quick Reference Converts polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Solid. Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Convert to Solid Command entry: convtosolid With the CONVTOSOLID command, you can convert the following objects into extruded 3D solids: ■
Uniform-width wide polylines with thickness
■
Closed, zero-width polylines with thickness
278 | Chapter 4 C Commands
■
Circles with thickness
NOTE You cannot use CONVTOSOLID with polylines that contain vertices with 0 width or that contain segments of variable width. You can select the objects to convert before you start the command. Select objects: Select one or more objects with thickness to convert into extruded 3D solids If one or more objects in the selection set are invalid for the command, you will be prompted again to select objects. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the objects you select are automatically deleted when the solid is created or whether you are prompted to delete the objects.
CONVTOSURFACE Quick Reference Converts objects to surfaces
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Surface. Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Convert to Surface Command entry: convtosurface With the CONVTOSURFACE command, you can convert the following objects into surfaces: ■
2D solids
■
Regions
■
Open, zero-width polylines with thickness
■
Lines with thickness
■
Arcs with thickness
■
Planar 3D faces
CONVTOSURFACE | 279
You can select the objects to convert before you start the command. NOTE You can create surfaces from 3D solids with curved faces, such as a cylinder, with the EXPLODE command. Select objects: Select one or more objects to convert into surfaces If one or more objects in the selection set are invalid for the command, you will be prompted again to select objects. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the objects you select are automatically deleted when the surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete the objects.
COPY Quick Reference Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
280 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Copy Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Copy Selection. Command entry: copy Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Current settings: Copy mode = current Specify base point or [Displacement/mOde/Multiple]: Specify a base point or enter an option The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the copied objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the objects are copied 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position. The COPY command repeats automatically by default. To exit the command, press ENTER. With the COPYMODE system variable, you can control whether multiple copies are created automatically.
Displacement Specifies a relative distance and direction using coordinates. Specify displacement : Enter coordinates to represent a vector
Mode Controls whether the command repeats automatically. This setting is controlled by the COPYMODE system variable. Enter a copy mode option [Single/Multiple] <current>: Enter s or m
COPY | 281
Multiple Overrides the Single mode setting. The COPY command is set to repeat automatically for the duration of the command. This setting is controlled by the COPYMODE system variable. NOTE This option is displayed only when copy mode is set to Single.
COPYBASE Quick Reference Copies objects with a specified base point
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Copy with Base Point. Menu: Edit ➤ Copy with Base Point Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy with Base Point. Command entry: copybase Specify base point: Select objects: The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. Use PASTECLIP to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to another document. When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, it is placed relative to the specified base point.
COPYCLIP Quick Reference Copies selected objects to the Clipboard
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Copy Clip.
282 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Edit ➤ Copy Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy. Command entry: copyclip Select objects: COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object. NOTE You can also use CTRL+C to run COPYCLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing area, the selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window, the selected text is copied to the Clipboard. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.
COPYHIST Quick Reference Copies the text in the command prompt history to the Clipboard Command entry: copyhist The text is copied to the Clipboard.
COPYLINK Quick Reference Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Copy Link. Menu: Edit ➤ Copy Link
COPYHIST | 283
Command entry: copylink COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object.
COPYTOLAYER Quick Reference Copies one or more objects to another layer
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer Command entry: copytolayer Select objects to copy: Select object on destination layer on page 284 or [Name on page 285] : Select an object or enter n If you enter -copytolayer at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 285.
Select Object on Destination Layer Specifies the layer on which the selected objects are placed. Specify Base Point or [Displacement/Exit] <eXit>: Specify a point, enter d, or enter x Specify Base Point Specifies the base point of the copied objects. Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Displacement Enters coordinate values that specify a relative distance and direction. Specify displacement <0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000>: Exit Cancels the command.
284 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Name Displays the Copy to Layer dialog box on page 285. Specify Base Point or [Displacement/Exit] <eXit>: Specify a point, enter d, or enter x Specify Base Point Specifies the base point of the copied objects. Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Displacement Enters coordinate values that specify a relative distance and direction. Specify displacement <0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000>: Exit Cancels the command. Creates duplicates of selected objects on a layer that you specify. You can also specify a different location for the duplicated objects.
Copy To Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference Specifies the layer on which the selected objects are placed.
Destination Layer Displays a list of layers that you can select as the destination layer. You can also enter a name to create a new layer. The new layer inherits the properties (on/off, freeze/thaw, locked/unlocked, etc.) of the current layer.
-COPYTOLAYER Quick Reference If you enter -copytolayer at the command prompt, the following COPYTOLAYER command prompts are displayed. Select objects to copy: Specify the destination layer name on page 286 or [? on page 286/= on page 286 (select object)] <0>: Select an object on the destination layer, enter?, or enter=
Copy To Layer Dialog Box | 285
Specify the Destination Layer Name Displays a list of layers that you can select as the destination layer. You can also enter a name to create a new layer. The new layer inherits the properties (on/off, freeze/thaw, locked/unlocked, etc.) of the current layer N object(s) copied and placed on layer "".
?—List Layers Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: *
=—Layer By Object Selects a destination layer by selecting an object on that layer. Select an object with the desired layer name: Select an object on the destination layer
CUI Quick Reference Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Command entry: cui The Customize User Interface Dialog Box on page 287 is displayed. NOTE The XML-based CUI file replaces both the legacy menu file (MNS) and legacy menu template (MNU) files used in releases prior to AutoCAD 2006. For information about customizing the different user interface elements found in the Customize User Interface dialog box, see Customize the User Interface in the Customization Guide.
286 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Customize User Interface Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Command entry: cui Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts. ■
Transfer tab (Customize User Interface dialog box) on page 287
■
Customize tab (Customize User Interface dialog box) on page 288
For information about customizing the different user interface elements found in the Customize User Interface dialog box, see Customize the User Interface in the Customization Guide.
Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Dialog Box) Quick Reference Transfers user interface elements to or from a main or partial customization (CUI) file, where your interface element data is stored. You open a CUI, MNS, or MNU file to import or export user interface data. When you open MNU or MNS files, they are automatically converted to a CUI file format. The original MNU or MNS files are not modified.
Customize User Interface Dialog Box | 287
Customizations In panes When you enter cuiimport at the command prompt, the main CUI file is display (acad.cui by default) in the right pane. You open a CUI or MNU file in the left pane to transfer data. When you enter cuiexport at the command prompt, the main CUI file is displayed in the left pane. You open another CUI or MNU file in the right pane to transfer data.
Customize Tab (Customize User Interface Dialog Box) Quick Reference Provides an interface for customizing workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, shortcut menus, and other user interface elements. NOTE When the Customize User Interface dialog box is displayed using the Customize Commands option from the Tool Palettes window or the Customize option from a toolbar, the Customizations In pane is collapsed and the Command List pane is expanded.
288 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Customizations In Pane Displays a tree structure of user interface elements that can be customized, such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, partial CUI files, and so on.
List box Displays a list of CUI files that are loaded and an Open option. Available Customizations In toolbar Contains Load Partial Customization File and Save All Current Customization Files buttons. Load Partial Customization File Loads a CUI file that you can add to the acad.cui file. Save All Current Customization Files Saves changes to all loaded CUI files.
Customize User Interface Dialog Box | 289
Tree View Displays the current customization file in a structured view so you can add and modify the user interface elements.
Dynamic Display Pane Displays content specific to the user interface element you select in the tree view in the left pane. Following are the types of display content you'll see in the right pane and the corresponding information displayed in the left pane's tree view: Information Describes selected user interface elements that do not have properties (such as the Toolbars node, Menus node, and Shortcut Menus node). Properties Displays the properties of user interface elements or items selected in the tree view. Elements or items that display properties include specific menus, menu commands, toolbars, and toolbar buttons. Button Image Displays the toolbar buttons of all toolbars loaded in the program. You can edit the toolbar button, change its properties, and create a new toolbar button. Shortcuts Displays a list of shortcut key names and temporary override names, their corresponding shortcut key combinations, keyboard shortcut type (shortcut key or temporary override), and the source CUI file name. Toolbar Preview Displays a preview of the selected toolbar. Panel Preview Displays a preview of the selected ribbon panel. Quick Properties Displays a list of object types and associated properties. You can specify which object types and properties are enabled to use with the Quick Properties panel and rollover tooltips.
Command List Pane Displays a list of commands that are loaded in the program. Categories Displays filters for the command list, including All Commands, ACAD Commands, User Defined, or Control Commands. You can also filter the list to display commands within a specific menu. Find Command or Text Searches the current CUI for a selected command or matching text string. Displays the Find and Replace dialog box on page 296. Create a New Command Creates a new command. You can add or change properties and create or edit a button.
290 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Properties Pane Displays user interface properties that you can view, edit, or delete. General Displays the name and description of a command or user interface element. ■
Name - Displays the name of the user interface element. The name you enter is the label or tooltip name displayed in the program.
■
Description - Displays the description for the user interface element. The description you enter is displayed in the status bar or in a tooltip.
Properties for Ribbon Tabs: ■
Show - Specifies if the ribbon panel is displayed on the ribbon tab. (Yes or No)
■
Orientation - Specifies the location of the ribbon panel. (Docked or Floating)
■
Default X Location - Specifies the X location of the ribbon panel when floating.
■
Default Y Location - Specifies the Y location of the ribbon panel when floating.
Display Determines which user interface elements are displayed after start up or when a workspace is set current. ■
Start On - Specifies if the Model tab or last used layout is set current. (Model, Layout, or Do Not Change)
■
Ribbon - Specifies the display of the ribbon bar. (Off or On)
■
Menu Bar - Specifies the display of the menu bar. (Off or On)
■
Status Bar - Specifies the display of the application and drawing status bars. (Application Only, All Off, All On, or Drawing Status Bar Only)
■
Model/Layout Tabs - Specifies the display of the Model and layout tabs along the bottom of the drawing window. (Off, On, or Do Not Change)
■
Screen Menus - Specifies the display of the screen menu. (Off, On, or Do Not Change)
■
Scroll Bars - Specifies the display of the scroll bars in the drawing window. (Off, On, or Do Not Change)
Customize User Interface Dialog Box | 291
Appearance Controls the appearance of toolbars, ribbon panels, commands on a ribbon panel, and screen menus. Properties for Toolbars: ■
On By Default - Specifies if the toolbar is displayed the first time the CUI file is loaded. (Hide or Show)
■
Orientation - Specifies the location of the toolbar. (Floating, Top, Bottom, Left, or Right)
■
Default X Location - Specifies the X location of the toolbar when floating.
■
Default Y Location - Specifies the Y location of the toolbar when floating.
■
Rows - Specifies the number of rows the items on the toolbar are displayed in when the toolbar is floating.
Properties for Ribbon Panels: ■
Rows - Displays the number of rows that are on a ribbon panel.
Properties for Command on Ribbon Panel: ■
Orientation - Specifies the orientation of the command. (Horizontal or Vertical)
■
Size - Specifies the button size for a command. (Standard, Medium, or Large)
■
Show Label - Specifies if a label is displayed near the command. (Yes or No)
Properties for Screen Menus: ■
Start Line - Specifies where the first line of a submenu should be displayed.
■
Number of Lines - Specifies the number of lines that make up the screen menu.
Resize Controls the display of the large images for a command when a subpanel is resized. ■
Collapse Large Images - Collapses commands that display a large image when a subpanel is resized. (Yes or No)
292 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Access Controls the key combination assigned to a shortcut key. ■
Key(s) - Specifies the key combination assigned to a shortcut key.
Size Controls the size of a tablet menu. ■
Rows - Specifies the number of rows for a tablet menu.
■
Columns - Specifies the number of columns for a tablet menu.
Shortcut Controls the key combination and macros assigned to a temporary override key. ■
Key(s) - Specifies the key combination for the temporary override.
■
Macro 1 (Key Down) - Displays the macro to execute when the key combination is pressed.
■
Macro 2 (Key Up) - Displays the macro to execute when the key combination is released.
Command Displays the properties assigned to a command. ■
Name - Displays the name of the command. The name you enter is the label or tooltip name displayed in the program.
■
Description - Displays the description for the command. The description you enter is displayed in the status bar or in a tooltip.
■
Extended Help File - Displays the file name and ID from the extended help file that should be displayed when the cursor continues to hover over a toolbar, panel button, or menu item for a specified period of time.
■
Command Display Name - Displays the command line text string that is shown in the command tooltip.
■
Macro - Displays the macro assigned to a selected command. You can create a macro or edit an existing macro.
■
Tags - Displays the user-defined keywords that are associated with a command. Tags can be used to search for commands in the menu browser.
Advanced Displays the aliases and element IDs that you can define for each user interface element. ■
Aliases - Specifies a unique value for a user interface element that is used to programmatically reference the user interface element.
■
Object Name - Specifies the object type associated with a double click action.
Customize User Interface Dialog Box | 293
■
Element ID - Displays the tag that uniquely identifies a command or user interface element.
Images Determines which images are assigned to a command when displayed on a user interface element. ■
Small Image - Specifies the small image file to use when a command is added to a toolbar, menu, or ribbon panel.
■
Large Image - Specifies the large image file to use when a command is added to a toolbar or ribbon panel.
Quick Properties Pane Displays a list of object types and the properties associated to the selected object type. Edit Object Type List Controls which object types are used with the Quick Properties panel or rollover tooltips. Displays the Edit Object Type List dialog box on page 302. Object Type List Displays a list of the object types you can use with Quick Properties panel or rollover tooltips. General Displays the general properties that are available for all object types in the Properties list. Properties List Displays the properties for the selected object type or the general properties available for all object types. Reset Overrides Overrides the selected general properties for all object types.
Button Editor Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Shortcut ➤ Right-click any toolbar and click Customize
294 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Command entry: cui
Modifies or creates buttons.
Button Image Displays the button at its actual size.
Editing Tools Provides tools for editing a button image. Pencil Edits one pixel at a time using the current color. Line Creates lines using the current color. Click and drag to set the start point and draw the line. Release to complete the line. Circle Creates circles using the current color. Click to set the center and drag to set the radius. Release to complete the circle. Erase Sets pixels to white. Click and drag over colored pixels to change them to white.
Color Palette Sets the current palette used by the editing tools.
More Opens the Select Color dialog box.
Button Editor Dialog Box | 295
Editing Area Provides a close-up view of the button image for editing.
Grid Displays a grid in the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel.
Clear Clears the editing area.
Open Opens an existing button image for editing. Button images are stored as bitmap (BMP) files.
Undo Undoes the last action.
Save Saves the customized button image.
Save As Saves the customized button image using a different name or location. NOTE When saving a new button image, the Create File dialog box will default to the folder defined under Custom Icon Location of the Files tab in the Options dialog box. Button images that are located in this folder can be migrated with the Migrate Custom Settings dialog box in future releases.
Find and Replace Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
296 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Command entry: cui Locates and replaces commands or command properties (command names, descriptions, or macros). ■
Find tab (Find and Replace dialog box) on page 297
■
Replace tab (Find and Replace dialog box) on page 298
Find Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box) Quick Reference Searches for commands or command properties in either the Command List pane or the Available Customizations in pane.
Find What Displays the search string you want to locate. If you select a command in the Command List pane, this box displays that string. You can also enter a string. Any previous strings entered in this box are stored in the drop-down list. Ignore Case Locates all commands or command properties regardless of their case (for example, the program would search for both LINE and line). Restrict Search To Limits the search to the CUI file you select from the drop-down list. By default, the main CUI file (acad.cuiby default) is searched.
Find and Replace Dialog Box | 297
Find Selected Command When a command is selected in the Command List pane, locates the next interface element in the tree view that references the selected command. Find Next Locates the next instance of the search string in the Name, Description, or Macros box in the Properties pane. If you search in the Command List pane, only commands in the list are located. If you search in the tree view in the Customizations In pane, the search starts in the tree view and continues to the commands in the Command List pane.
Replace Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box) Quick Reference Replaces a search string with a new search string.
Find What Displays the search string you want to locate. If you select a command in the Command List pane, this box displays that string. You can also enter a string. Any previous strings entered in this box are stored in the drop-down list. Replace With Displays the string that will replace the string you searched for. Ignore Case Locates all commands or command properties regardless of their case (for example, the program would replace both LINE and line). Restrict Search To Limits the search to the CUI file you select from the drop-down list. By default, the main CUI file (acad.cuiby default) is searched. Replace Replaces a single instance of the search string. In the Customize User Interface dialog box, the location of the search string is displayed in the Command List pane, tree view, and Properties pane.
298 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Replace All Replaces all instances where the search string is found. You cannot undo this operation. Find Next Locates the next instance of the search string in the Name, Description, or Macros boxes in the Properties pane. If you search in the Command List pane, only commands in the list are located. If you search in the tree view in the Customizations In pane, the search starts in the tree view and continues to the commands in the Command List pane.
Shortcut Keys Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Shortcut ➤ Right-click any toolbar and click Customize Command entry: cui
Adds and modifies the key combination assigned to a shortcut or temporary override key.
Press New Shortcut Key Assigns a key combination to a shortcut or temporary override key. Shortcut keys can be assigned key combinations that start with CTRL or CTRL+SHIFT, and temporary override keys can be assigned key combinations that start with SHIFT.
Shortcut Keys Dialog Box | 299
Long String Editor Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Shortcut ➤ Right-click any toolbar and click Customize Command entry: cui
Adds and modifies the macro assigned to a command.
Macro Displays the macro for the selected command.
Tag Editor Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Shortcut ➤ Right-click any toolbar and click Customize Command entry: cui
300 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Adds and modifies tags for a command.
Name Displays the name of the selected menu item when adding or modifying tags from the menu browser, or the name of the command when using the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor.
Tags Lists the tags that are currently associated with a menu item or command; you can add additional tags as needed. If no tag is present, Add a Tag is displayed in the field. Each tag must be separated by a comma and the total number of characters for all the tags and separators cannot be more than 256 characters. As you enter a tag value, if the value entered matches a previous tag or tags, the previous tag values will be displayed in a flyout.
Select Help ID Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Shortcut ➤ Right-click any toolbar and click Customize Command entry: cui
Select Help ID Dialog Box | 301
Assigns a Help ID found in the selected XAML file to the selected command.
Help ID List Lists all the help IDs in the selected XAML file that can be assigned to the selected command. A preview of the tooltip can be viewed by positioning the cursor over the help ID in the list and letting it remain idle for a few seconds.
Edit Object Type Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Shortcut ➤ Right-click any toolbar and click Customize Command entry: cui
302 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Controls which object types are supported for Quick Properties and rollover tooltips.
Object Types List Lists all the object and subobject types that are available for Quick Properties and rollover tooltips. Objects that support subobjects are indicated by the appearance of a triangle to the left on the object type’s name. The list of subobjects is revealed when you click the triangle.
CUIEXPORT Quick Reference Exports customized settings to an enterprise or partial CUI file
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Export.
CUIEXPORT | 303
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Export Customizations Command entry: cuiexport Opens with the Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Dialog Box) on page 287 opened by default. The main CUI file (acad.cui) is open in the left pane. You can drag items from one CUI file to the other. Click Apply to save the changes and view the updated CUI file.
CUIIMPORT Quick Reference Imports customized settings from an enterprise or partial CUI file to acad.cui
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Import.
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Import Customizations Command entry: cuiimport Opens with the Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Dialog Box) on page 287 opened by default. You can drag items from one CUI file to the other. Click Apply to save the changes and view the updated CUI file.
CUILOAD Quick Reference Loads a CUI file Command entry: cuiload Opens the Load/Unload Customizations dialog box on page 305, where you can locate and load a CUI file to customize or transfer user interface settings. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), CUILOAD displays the following command prompt. Enter name of customization file to load: Enter a file name
304 | Chapter 4 C Commands
NOTE The Legacy Menu File (MNS) and Legacy Menu Template (MNU) files used in past releases have been replaced with just one file type, the XML-based CUI file.
Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: cuiload Controls the display of customization groups and interface elements. Loaded Customization Groups Lists the currently loaded customization files. File Name Specifies the file to load when you choose Load. You can either enter the file name or choose Browse to display the Select Customization File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). Unload Unloads the customization group selected in the Customization Groups list. Load Loads the file specified under File Name. Browse Displays the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996), in which you can select a menu file to load.
CUIUNLOAD Quick Reference Unloads a CUI file Command entry: cuiunload Opens the Load/Unload Customizations dialog box on page 305, which has the same options as CUILOAD. The only difference between the two commands is in the command prompts. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), CUIUNLOAD displays the following command prompt. Enter the name of a Customization Group to unload: Enter a name
Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box | 305
CUSTOMIZE Quick Reference Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes. Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Tool Palettes Shortcut menu: Right-click any tool palette and choose Customize Palettes. Command entry: customize The Customize dialog box on page 306 is displayed.
Customize Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Tool Palettes Shortcut menu: Right-click any tool palette and choose Customize Palettes. Command entry: customize Provides an interface for customizing tool palettes, palette groups, and block authoring palettes. Creates, modifies, and organizes tool palettes and palette groups. Imports and exports palette files. Palettes Lists all available tool palettes. Click and drag a tool palette to move it up or down in the list. Right-click a palette in the list to rename, delete, or export the palette. (When you export a palette, it's saved to a file with an .xtp extension.) Right-click in the Palettes area to import a palette or to create a new, blank one. The shortcut menus also provide options to ■
Rename an existing palette
■
Create a new palette
■
Delete a tool palette
■
Export a tool palette (as an XTP file)
306 | Chapter 4 C Commands
■
Import a tool palette
Palette Groups Displays the organization of your palettes in a tree view. Click and drag a palette to move it into another palette group. Right-click a palette group, and then click Set Current on the shortcut menu to display the palette group. The shortcut menus also provide options to ■
Create a new palette group
■
Delete an existing palette group
■
Rename an existing palette group
■
Remove a tool palette from a group
■
Export a palette group (as an XPG file)
■
Export all palette groups (as an XPG file)
■
Import a palette group
NOTE You might need to collapse all palette groups to expose a blank area within the Palette Groups area. Then, right-click in the blank area to display shortcut menu options that are not specific to any existing palette groups. Current Palette Group Displays the name of the palette group currently shown. Displays All Palettes when all available palettes are shown.
CUTCLIP Quick Reference Moves the selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Cut.
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Edit ➤ Cut
CUTCLIP | 307
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Cut. Command entry: cutclip Select objects: CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP does not create OLE link information. When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you can cut these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them into another application. You can also use Cut and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.
CYLINDER Quick Reference Creates a 3D solid cylinder
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Cylinder.
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Cylinder Command entry: cylinder Specify center point of base or [3P on page 309/2P on page 309/Ttr on page 310/Elliptical on page 311]: Specify a center point or enter an option Specify base radius or [Diameter on page 312] <default>: Specify a base radius, or enter d to specify a diameter, or press ENTER to specify the default base radius value Specify height or [2Point on page 312/Axis endpoint on page 313] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value In the illustration, the cylinder was created using a center point (1), a point on the radius (2), and a point for the height (3). The base of the cylinder is always on a plane parallel with the workplane. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a cylinder, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.
308 | Chapter 4 C Commands
During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value.
3P (Three Points) Defines the base circumference and base plane of the cylinder by specifying three points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Specify third point: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. This endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cylinder. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cylinder by specifying two points. Specify first endpoint of diameter: Specify a point Specify second endpoint of diameter: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value
CYLINDER | 309
Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. The axis endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cylinder. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
TTR (Tangent,Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cylinder with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Specify point on object for first tangent: Select a point on an object Specify point on object for second tangent: Select a point on an object Specify base radius <default>: Specify a base radius or press ENTER to specify the default base radius value Sometimes more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. The axis endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cylinder. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
310 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the cylinder. Specify endpoint of first axis or [Center]: Specify a point (1) Specify other endpoint of first axis: Specify a point Specify endpoint of second axis: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value
Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. Center Creates the base of the cylinder by using a specified center point. Specify center point: Specify a point Specify distance to first axis <default>: Specify a distance or press ENTER to specify the default distance value Specify endpoint of second axis: Specify a point Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. The axis endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cylinder. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
CYLINDER | 311
Diameter Specifies the diameter for the base of the cylinder. Specify diameter <default>: Specify a diameter or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default diameter is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the diameter is always the previously entered diameter value for any solid primitive. Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] <default>: Specify a height (2), enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value
Initially, the default height is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the height is always the previously entered height value for any solid primitive. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. The axis endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cylinder. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point
312 | Chapter 4 C Commands
Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. The axis endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cylinder. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
CYLINDER | 313
314
D Commands
5
DATAEXTRACTION Quick Reference Exports object property, block attribute, and drawing information to a data extraction table or to an external file and specified a data link to an Excel spreadsheet
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data.
Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction The Data Extraction wizard on page 316 is displayed. If you enter -dataextraction at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt. on page 338
315
Data Extraction Wizard Quick Reference
Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Provides step-by-step instructions for extracting information from objects, blocks, and attributes, including drawing information in the current drawing or a set of drawings. The information is used to create a data extraction table in the current drawing, or is saved to an external file, or both. The Data Extraction wizard includes the following pages: ■
Begin on page 316
■
Define Data Source on page 317
■
Select Objects on page 319
■
Select Properties on page 320
■
Refine Data on page 322
■
Choose Output on page 324
■
Table Style on page 324
■
Finish on page 325
Begin Starts the data extraction process. Options include creating a new data extraction, using a template, or editing an existing data extraction.
316 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Create a New Data Extraction Creates a new data extraction and save it to a .DXE file. Also makes the Use a Previous Extraction as a Template button available so you can select a data extraction template (DXE) file or attribute extraction (BLK) file. Use a Previous Extraction as a Template Uses settings previously saved in a data extraction (DXE) file or an attribute extraction template (BLK) file. As you move through the wizard, each page is already filled in with the settings in the template file. You can change these settings. Click the [...] button to select the file in a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. Edit an Existing Data Extraction Allows you to modify an existing data extraction (DXE) file. Click the [...] button to select the data extraction file in a standard file selection dialog box on page 996.
Define Data Source Specifies the drawing files, including folders from which to extract data. Allows selection of objects in the current drawing from which to extract information.
Data Extraction Wizard | 317
Data Source Drawings/Sheet Set Makes the Add Folder and Add Drawings buttons available for specifying drawings and folders for the extraction. The drawings and folders for the extraction are listed in the Drawing Files view. Include Current Drawing Includes the current drawing in the data extraction. The current drawing can be empty (not contain objects) if additional drawings are selected for extraction. Select Objects in the Current Drawing Makes the Select Objects in the Current Drawing button available so you can select objects for data extraction. Select Objects button Closes the wizard temporarily so that you select objects and blocks in the current drawing. Drawing Files and Folders Lists the selected drawing files or folders. Checked folders are included in the extraction. Add Folder Displays the Add Folder Options dialog box on page 326,where you can specify folders to include in the data extraction. Add Drawings Displays the standard file selection dialog box on page 996, where you can specify drawings to include in the data extraction. Remove Removes the checked drawings or folders listed in the Drawing Files and Folders list from the data extraction. Settings Displays the Data Extraction - Additional Settings dialog box on page 327, where you can specify data extraction settings.
318 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Folders Shortcut Menu You can see the shortcut menu for Folders (and the drawings listed within the selected folder) only after you explicitly add a folder using the Add Folder button. Edit Folder Settings Displays the Add Folder Options dialog box where you can specify the folders to be used for data extraction. Drawings in the selected folders are monitored for data changes. Remove Removes the selected folder. Check All Selects all the drawings listed below the selected folder. Uncheck All Clears all the drawings listed below the selected folder. Invert Selection Inverts the current selected items below the selected folder.
Select Objects Specifies the types of objects (blocks and non-blocks) and drawing information to be extracted. Valid objects are checked by default. Objects that do not exist in the selected drawing are not checked. Click the column head to reverse the sort order. Columns can be resized. Property data from checked objects is displayed on the Select Properties on page 320 page.
Object Displays each object by its name. Blocks are listed by block name. Non-blocks are listed by their object name.
Data Extraction Wizard | 319
Display Name Provides a place to enter an optional alternative name for an object as it will appear in the extracted information. Select a display name, right-click in the list, and click Edit Display Name. Type Displays whether the object is a block or non-block. Preview Displays a preview image of the checked block in the Object list view.
Display Options Display All Object Types Displays a list of all object types (blocks and non-blocks) in the Object list view. This option is selected by default. Display Blocks Only Displays only blocks in the Object list view. Display Non-Blocks Only Displays only those objects that are not blocks in the Object list view. Display Blocks with Attributes Only Displays only those blocks in the Object list view that contain attributes. Dynamic blocks are listed if they have special properties assigned to them (for example, actions and parameters). Display Objects Currently In-Use Only Displays objects in the Object list view that exist in the selected drawings.
Select Properties Controls the object, block, and drawing properties to extract. Each row displays a property name, its display name, and category. Right-click a column head and use options on the shortcut menu to check all or uncheck all items, invert the selection set, or edit the display name. Click the column head to reverse the sort order. Columns can be resized.
320 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Property Displays object properties from objects selected on the page. The property list is filtered according to the filter categories that are selected. Properties are the same as those listed in the Properties palette. Display Name Provides a place to enter an optional alternative name for a property as it will appear in the extracted information. Select the property display name, right-click in the list, and click Edit Display Name. Category Displays a category for each property. For example, General designates ordinary object properties, such as color or layer. Attribute designates user-defined attributes. Dynamic designates user-defined property data for dynamic blocks. Categories are the same as those listed in the Properties palette.
Category Filter Property Category List Displays a list of categories that are extracted from the property list. Unchecked categories filter the Properties list. Categories include 3D Visualization, Attribute, Drawing, Dynamic Block, General, Geometry, Misc, Pattern, Table, and Text.
Property Grid Shortcut Menu Check All Selects all the properties in the property grid. Uncheck All Clears all the properties in the property grid. Invert Selection Inverts the current checked items in the property grid. Edit Display Name Allows in-place editing of the property display name for the selected row.
Data Extraction Wizard | 321
Refine Data Modifies the structure of the data extraction table. You can reorder and sort columns, filter results, add formula columns and footer rows, and create a link to data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
Data Grid View Columns Displays properties in a columnar format as they were specified in the Select Properties page. Right-click any column header to display a shortcut menu of options. The Count column and Name column display by default. Icons display in the column header for inserted formula columns and columns extracted from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Combine Identical Rows Groups identical records by row in the table. Updates the Count column with the sum of all aggregated objects. Show Count Column Displays the Count column in the grid. Show Name Column Displays the Name column in the grid. Link External Data Displays the Link External Data dialog box on page 329, where you can create a link between the extracted drawing data and data in an Excel spreadsheet. Sort Columns Options Displays the Sort Columns dialog box on page 331, where you can sort data across multiple columns. Full Preview Displays a full preview of the final output, including linked external data, in the text window. The preview is for viewing only.
322 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Column Shortcut Menu Sort Descending Sorts column data in a descending order. Sort Ascending Sorts column data in an ascending order. Sort Column Options Displays the Sort Columns dialog box on page 331, where you can sort data across multiple columns. Rename Column Allows in-place editing of the selected column name. Hide Column Hides the selected column. Show Hidden Columns Displays the hidden column. The flyout option includes Display All Hidden Columns. Set Column Data Format Displays the Set Cell Format dialog box, on page 333 where you can set a data type for cells in the selected column. Insert Formula Column Displays the Insert Formula Column dialog box on page 332, where you can specify the formula that is inserted into the table. Inserts the formula column to the right of the selected column. An existing formula column cannot be used as a value for another formula column. Edit Formula Column Displays the Edit Formula Column dialog box on page 336. This option is only available when a formula column is selected. Remove Formula Column Removes the selected formula column. This option is only available when a formula column is selected. Combine Record Mode Displays numeric data in the selected column as separate values or collapses identical property rows into one row and displays the sum of all the numeric data in the selected column. This option is available when the Combine Identical Rows is checked and the selected column contains numerical data. Show Count Column Displays a Count column that lists the quantity of each property. Show Name Column Displays a Name column that displays the name of each property. Insert Totals Footer Displays a flyout menu with options for Sum, Max, Min, and Average. Creates a footer row for the selected column that is placed below all the data rows and displays values based on the selected arithmetic function. This option is available only for columns that have a numeric data type. Sum Displays a sum of all the values in the selected column in a footer row. Max Displays the maximum value in the selected column in a footer row.
Data Extraction Wizard | 323
Min Displays the minimum value in the selected column in a footer row. Average Displays the average value in the selected column in a footer row. Remove Totals Footer Removes the Totals footer. This option is available when a footer row exists. Filter Options Displays the Filter Column dialog box on page 337, where you can specify filter conditions for the selected column. Reset Filter Restores the default filter for the selected column. Reset All Filters Restores default filters for all columns that have filters. Copy to Clipboard Copies all the data cells, including column names, to the Clipboard.
Choose Output Specifies the type of output to which the data is extracted.
Output Options Insert Data Extraction Table into Drawing Creates a table that is populated with extracted data. You are prompted to insert the table into the current drawing when you click Finish on the Finish on page 325 page. Output Data to External File Creates a data extraction file. Click the [...] button to select the file format in a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. Available file formats are Microsoft Excel (XLS), comma-separated file format (CSV), Microsoft Access (MDB), and tab-separated file format (TXT). The external file is created when you click Finish on the Finish page. The maximum number of columns that can be exported to an XLS and MDB file is 255.
Table Style Controls the appearance of the data extraction table. This page is displayed only if AutoCAD Table is selected on the Choose Output on page 324 page.
324 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Table Style Select the Table Style to Use for the Inserted Table Specifies the table style. Click the Table Style button to display the Table Style Dialog Box on page 1474, or select a table style from the drop-down list that is defined in the drawing.
Formatting and Structure Use Table in Table Style for Label Rows Creates the data extraction table with a set of top rows that contain label cells and a bottom set of label rows that contain header and footer cells. Extracted data is inserted between the top and bottom label rows. This option is only available when the selected table style contains a template table. Manually Setup Table Provides for manually entering a title and specification of the title, header, and data cells style. Enter a Title for Your Table Specifies a title for the table. This row is not overwritten when the table is updated. The default table style, STANDARD, includes a title row. If the selected table style does not include a title row, this option is not available. Title Cell Style Specifies the style for the title cell. Click the drop-down list to select a title cell style defined in the selected table style. Header Cell Style Specifies the style for the header row. Click the drop-down list to select a cell style defined in the selected table style. Data Cell Style Specifies the style for data cells. Click the drop-down list to select a cell style defined in the selected table style. Use Property Names as Additional Column Headers Includes column headers and uses the Display Name as the header row. Display Preview Displays a preview of the table layout. If the table style does not include a title row or header row, none is displayed.
Finish Completes the process of extracting object property data that was specified in the wizard and creates the output type that was specified on the Choose Output on page 324 page. If data linking and column matching to an Excel
Data Extraction Wizard | 325
spreadsheet was defined in the Link External Data dialog box on page 329, the selected data in the spreadsheet is also extracted. If the Insert Data Extraction Table into Drawing option was selected on the Choose Output page, you are prompted to insert the table into the drawing when you click Finish. If the Output Data to External File option was selected, the extracted data is saved to the specified file type.
Add Folder Options Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Specifies the folders to be used for data extraction. Drawings in the selected folders are monitored for data changes.
Folder Displays the path to the specified folder.
326 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Folder Button Click the [...] button to select the folder in a standard file selection dialog box on page 996.
Options Automatically Include New Drawings Added in this Folder to the Data Extraction Includes new drawings to the data extraction when they are added to the folder. The New Drawings Found dialog box on page 328 displays when new drawings are added. When this option is selected, the specified folders are “live.” When this option is not selected, the folders are “static.” Include Subfolders Includes drawings in subfolders of selected folders in the data extraction process. Utilize a Wild-card Character to Select Drawings Activates a text entry field where you can enter search criteria using wild-card characters to select specific drawings. Wild-Card Field Enter wild-card characters. Valid characters are * ? .
Data Extraction - Additional Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Provides options for extracting objects in nested and xref blocks, options for counting blocks, and whether all objects are extracted or only those in model space.
Data Extraction - Additional Settings Dialog Box | 327
Extraction Settings Extract Objects from Blocks Includes objects nested in blocks. Extract Objects from Xrefs Includes objects and blocks in externally referenced (xref) files. Include Xrefs in Block Counts Includes xrefs when counting blocks.
Extract From Objects in Model Space Includes only those objects in model space and ignores objects in paper space. All Objects in Drawing Includes all objects in model space and paper space in the drawing, including drawing information. On by default.
New Drawings Found Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Displays a list of new drawings that were added to the folder that was selected for the data extraction after the extraction was performed.
328 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Drawing Name Displays the name of the drawing that was added to the data extraction folder. Folder Displays the path and folder name for each new drawing.
Link External Data Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Matches the extracted drawing data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet through a data link and data matching.
Link External Data Dialog Box | 329
Data Link Choose the Source of the External Data Displays a list of established links to an Excel spreadsheet. Data Link Manager Button Displays the Data Link Manager on page 340, where you can specify a link to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
Data Matching Drawing Data Column Displays a list of extracted property columns. External Data Column Displays a list of column names from the linked data in the Excel spreadsheet. Check Match Compares the data in the specified drawing data key column and the external data key column. If the data is unique across all rows in the external data key columns, and there is at least one data match between the drawing data and in data in the spreadsheet, a message displays the check key is successful. If the check key is unsuccessful, a warning message is displayed. Matching Options Provides two options for the Check Match function: Case Sensitive and Ignore Prefix and Suffix White Space. Case Sensitive When Case Sensitive is selected, the case of the data is checked. Ignore Prefix and Suffix White Space Removes blank spaces in front of and after each data source before the check matching process proceeds. When this option is clear, white spaces are evaluated. Learn About Data Matching Displays Understand Data Linking and Matching topic in the User’s Guide.
330 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Additional Columns for Data Table Select External Data Columns to Include Displays the column names in the order in which they appear in the spreadsheet. Selected columns are linked to the drawing data through data matching. Use Top Row of External Data as Column Names Uses the top row of data in the data link as the column name for the linked data. Otherwise, column names are labeled “Column 1, Column 2” and so on. Learn About Using External Data Displays the New Features Workshop.
Sort Columns Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Specifies a sort order for columns.
Define Sort Order Specifies the sort order of columns. The Column section contains column names from the Refine Data on page 322 page. Add Adds a new item of sorting criteria to the Column list. Remove Removes the currently selected sort criteria. Move Up Moves the selected item up in the list view. Move Down Moves the selected item down in the list view.
Sort Columns Dialog Box | 331
Insert Formula Column Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Specifies the formula for the column that is inserted into the extracted data.
Column Name Specifies a name for the column that can be edited. Duplicate column names cannot be used. Formula Displays the selected formula or functions that are available for QUICKCALC on page 1222 and CAL on page 219. Addition (+) Button Adds the numerical data from one column to another. Minus (-) Button Subtracts the numerical data from one column to another. Multiply (*) Button Multiplies the numerical data from one column to another. Division (/) Button Divides the numerical data from one column to another. Validate Checks the validity of the specified equation. A formula column can only be inserted when the formula is validated. Columns Displays the column names from the extracted drawing data and external data (if data linking was established). Column names can be double-clicked to be added to the Formula field or dragged from the Column
332 | Chapter 5 D Commands
list to the Formula field. Existing formula columns are not listed and cannot be used as values for creating additional formula columns.
Set Cell Format Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Defines the formatting for cells in the table.
Data Type Displays a list of data types (Angle, Date, Decimal Number, and so on) that you can format for table rows. Preview Displays a preview of the option you selected in the Format list. Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant format types. For example, if you select Angle as the data type, Format includes options such as Decimal Degrees, Grads, Radians, and so on. Precision For Angle, Decimal Number, and Points data types only, sets the precision for applicable formats. For example, if you select Angle as the data
Set Cell Format Dialog Box | 333
type and Radians as the format type, Precision includes options such as Current Precision, 0.0r, 0.00r, 0.000r, and so on. List Separator For a Point data type only, displays a list of options (comma, semicolon, or colon) that you can use to separate list items. Symbol For Currency data types only, displays a list of currency symbols that you can use. Append Symbol For Currency data types, places the currency symbol after the number. For Percentage data types, the percent symbol is placed after the number. Negative Numbers For Currency data types only, lists options for displaying negative numbers. X, Y, and Z Coordinates For Point data types only, filters X, Y, or Z coordinates. Additional Format For Angle, Decimal Number, Point, and Whole Number data types only, opens the Additional Format dialog box on page 334, where you set additional formatting options for table cells. Examples For the Date data types only, displays a list of date display options in the Format field. Click a date in the Format field to see an example.
Additional Format Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Data Extraction Provides additional formatting options for fields and table cells.
334 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Current Value Displays the value in base drawing units.
Preview Displays updates to the format as you change the conversion factor and other settings.
Conversion Factor Specifies the conversion factor to use on the current value. The default is 1 for no conversion.
Additional Text Specifies a prefix or a suffix for the value.
Number Separators Specifies a decimal separator and the formatting for numbers over 1000. Decimal Specifies the separator for decimal values. Select a period, a comma, or a space. Thousands Inserts a comma to group thousands in a field value.
Set Cell Format Dialog Box | 335
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal values. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal values. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches value when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches value when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Edit Formula Column Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Displays the equation for the selected formula column.
Column Name Specifies a name for the column that can be edited. Formula Displays the existing formula or function.
336 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Plus (+) Adds the numerical data from one column to another. Minus (-) Subtracts the numerical data from one column to another. Multiply (*) Multiplies the numerical data from one column to another. Division (/) Divides the numerical data from one column to another. Validate Checks the validity of the specified equation. A formula column can only be inserted when the formula is validated. Columns Displays the column names from the extracted drawing data and external data (if data linking was established). Column names can be double-clicked to be added to the Formula field or dragged from the Column list to the Formula field.
Filter Column Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Filters column data by specified filters.
Filter Column Dialog Box | 337
Filter Based on the Following Conditions Displays conditions based on the type of data in the selected column. First Column Specifies the first condition. Second Column Available when the specified filter uses two conditions. Filter Across These Values Displays a list of values depending on the type of data being filtered. Filters for numeric data include Greater than >, Equal To, Between, and so on. Filters for textual data include Equal To, Not Equal To, Contains, and Begins With.
Data Extraction - Out of Date Table Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: dataextraction Offers options to update the data extraction table, update all tables, skip the update, or skip all updates.
Update Updates the data extraction table in the current drawing. Update All Updates all the data extraction tables. Skip Update Does not update the table. Skip All Does not update any table.
-DATAEXTRACTION Quick Reference If you enter -dataextraction at the command prompt, the following DATAEXTRACTION command prompts are displayed.
338 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Extracts data as specified in an existing attribute extraction template (BLK) file created with the Attribute Extraction wizard in AutoCAD 2006 or data extraction (DXE) file created in AutoCAD 2007. Enter the template file path for the extraction: type: Specify the path and file name for the attribute extraction template (BLK) or data extraction (DXE) file that describes how to extract the information Subsequent prompts depend on the information set up in the template file. If the template specifies extracting data to an external file, the following prompts are displayed: Enter the output filetype [Csv/Txt/Xls/Mdb] : Enter c for comma-separated (CSV), t for tab-separated (TXT), x for Microsoft Excel (XLS), or m for Microsoft Access (MDB) Enter output filepath: Specify the names of the path and file where the data will be extracted NOTE The maximum number of columns that can be exported to an XLS and MDB file is 255. If the template specifies a table, the following prompt is displayed: Specify insertion point:
DATALINK Quick Reference The Data Link Manager is displayed.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Data Link. Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Data Link Manager Command entry: datalink The Data Link Manager on page 340 is displayed.
DATALINK | 339
Data Link Manager Quick Reference Creates, edits, and manages data links.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Data Link. Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Data Link Manager Command entry: datalink
Data Link Tree View Displays links contained within the drawing. Also gives options for creating new data links. Excel Links Lists the Microsoft Excel data links within the drawing. If the icon displays a linked chain, then the data link is valid. If the icon displays a broken chain, then the data link is broken. Create a New Excel Data Link Launches a dialog box where you enter the name for a new data link. Once a name has been created, the New Excel Data Link dialog box on page 341 is displayed.
340 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Details Lists information for the data link selected in the tree view above.
Preview Displays a preview of the linked data as it would appear in the drawing table. When a data link is not currently selected then no preview is displayed.
New and Modify Excel Link Dialog Box Quick Reference Links data from a spreadsheet created in Microsoft Excel to a table within your drawing.
Command entry: datalink
File Specifies the file and file path from which to create a data link. Choose an Excel File Allows you to choose an established Microsoft XLS, XLSX, or CSV file to link to your drawing. At the bottom of this drop-down list, you can select a new XLS, XLSX, or CSV file from which to create a data link. Click the [...] button to browse for another Microsoft Excel file on your computer.
New and Modify Excel Link Dialog Box | 341
Path Type Determines the path that will be used to find the file specified above. There are three path options: full path, relative path, and no path. Full Path Uses the full path of the file specified above, including the root directory and all subdirectories that contain the linked Microsoft Excel file. Relative Path Uses the file path relative to the current drawing file to reference the linked Microsoft Excel file. To use a relative path, the linked file must be saved. No Path Uses only the filename of the linked Microsoft Excel file for referencing.
Link Options Specifies the data in your Excel file to link to your drawing. Select the Excel Sheet to Link to Displays the names of all sheets within the specified XLS, XLSX, or CSV file. The link options specified below are applied to the sheet you choose here. Link whole sheet Links the entire specified sheet within your Excel file to a table in your drawing. Link to a named range Links a named range of cells already contained within your Excel file to a table in your drawing. Clicking the arrow displays the available named ranges found in the linked spreadsheet. Link to range Specifies a range of cells in your Excel file to link to a table in your drawing. In the text box, enter the range of cells you want linked to your drawing. Valid ranges include ■
Rectangular regions (for example, A1:D10)
■
Entire columns (for example, A:A)
■
Sets of columns (for example, A:D)
Click the button to the right of the text box to preview the linked range.
Preview Window Displays a preview of your table using the options you have applied.
342 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Cell Contents Options in this box will determine how data is imported into your drawing from your external source. Keep Data Formats and Formulas Imports data with formulas and supported data formats attached. Keep Data Formats, Solve Formulas in Excel Imports data formats. Data is calculated from formulas in Excel. Convert Data Formats to Text, Solve Formulas in Excel Imports Microsoft Excel data as text with data calculated from formulas in Excel (supported data formats not attached). Allow Writing to Source File Specifies that the DATALINKUPDATE on page 343 command can be used to upload any changes made to linked data in your drawing to the original external spreadsheet.
Cell Formatting Use Excel Formatting Imports any formatting specified in the original XLS, XLSX, or CSV file will be brought into your drawing. Keep Table Updated to Excel Formatting If the option above is selected, updates any changed formatting when the DATALINKUPDATE on page 343 command is used. Start With Excel Formatting, Do Not Update Imports the formatting specified in the original XLS, XLSX, or CSV file into your drawing, but any changes made to the formatting are not included when the DATALINKUPDATE on page 343 command is used.
DATALINKUPDATE Quick Reference Updates data to or from an established external data link.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Download from Source. Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Update Data Links Command entry: datalinkupdate
DATALINKUPDATE | 343
Updates data in a drawing that is referenced by changed data in an external data link. Also updates any data in an external data link that has been changed within a linked table in your drawing. Select an option [Update data link/Write data link] :
Update Data Link Updates data in a drawing that is referenced by changed data in an established data link. Select objects or [Data link/All]: Select Objects Updates tables containing data links with data that has been changed in the external source file. Data Link Specifies the name of a data link to update the link with data that has been changed in the external source file. Enter data link name or [?]: Entering [?] lists the data links in the current drawing. All Updates all data links in all tables in the drawing with data that has been changed in the external source file.
Write Data Link Updates any data in an external data link that has been changed within a linked table in your drawing. Select objects: Select Objects Uploads data that has been changed from the original linked content to the source file.
DBCONNECT Quick Reference Provides an interface to external database tables
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ dbConnect. Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ dbConnect. Command entry: dbconnect
344 | Chapter 5 D Commands
The dbConnect Manager on page 346 is displayed and the dbConnect menu is added to the menu bar. The four primary interfaces (the dbConnect Manager, the Data View window, the Query Editor, and the Link Select dialog box) are described first, followed by descriptions of each additional dialog box presented in alphabetical order. The Column Values dialog box, a sub-dialog box of the Query Editor, is described in the Query Editor section. The section describing each dialog box contains a list of methods that you can use to access it. ■
dbConnect Manager on page 346
■
Data View window on page 350
■
Query Editor on page 360
■
Column Values dialog box on page 367
■
Link Select dialog box on page 383
■
Configure a Data Source dialog box on page 367
■
Data View and Query Options dialog box on page 368
■
Export Links dialog box on page 370
■
Export Query Set dialog box on page 371
■
Export Template Set dialog box on page 371
■
Find dialog box on page 371
■
Format dialog box on page 372
■
Import Query Set dialog box on page 373
■
Import Template Set dialog box on page 373
■
Label Template dialog box on page 374
■
Label Template Properties dialog box on page 379
■
Link Conversion dialog box on page 380
■
Link Manager on page 382
■
Link Template dialog box on page 386
■
Link Template Properties dialog box on page 388
■
New Label Template dialog box on page 388
DBCONNECT | 345
■
New Link Template dialog box on page 389
■
New Query dialog box on page 390
■
Replace dialog box on page 391
■
Select a Database Object dialog box on page 391
■
Select Data Object dialog box on page 392
■
Sort dialog box on page 392
■
Synchronize dialog box on page 393
dbConnect Manager Quick Reference Provides the primary interface for the connectivity feature. You can view and edit database tables, execute structured query language (SQL) queries, and link table records to graphical objects. By default, the dbConnect Manager opens as a docked window on the left side of the drawing area.
When you open the dbConnect Manager, a small red X is displayed in the lower right corner of each database and data object. The X indicates that these objects are currently unconnected. To connect to a database or data object, double-click it in the dbConnect Manager.
dbConnect Manager Buttons Display and manipulate database objects.
346 | Chapter 5 D Commands
View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode. This button is not available unless a single table, link template, or label template is selected in the tree view. Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode. This button is not available unless a single table, link template, or label template is selected in the tree view. Execute Query Executes a query. This button is not available unless a query is selected in the tree view. New Query Displays the New Query dialog box on page 390. This button is not available unless a single table, link template, or query is selected. If a query is selected, you can use this button to display the Query Editor on page 360, in which you can edit the query. New Link Template Displays the New Link Template dialog box on page 389. This button is not available unless a single table or link template is selected. If a link template is selected, you can use this button to display the Link Template dialog box on page 386, in which you can edit the link template. Not available for link templates with links already defined in a drawing. New Label Template Displays the New Label Template dialog box on page 388. This button is not available unless a single table, link template, or label template is selected. If a label template is selected, you can use this button to display the Label Template dialog box on page 374, in which you can edit the label template.
dbConnect Manager Tree View Contains nodes for each drawing that's currently open and a Data Sources node that contains all available data sources configured on your system.
Drawing Nodes Shortcut Menu Provides options available for an open drawing. Right-click the node of an open drawing.
dbConnect Manager | 347
Export Template Set Opens the Export Template Set dialog box on page 371, in which you can save all link and label templates stored in the drawing to an external file. Import Template Set Opens the Import Template Set dialog box on page 373, in which you can import a set of link and label templates that are stored in an external file. Export Query Set Opens the Export Query Set dialog box on page 371, in which you can save all queries stored in the drawing to an external file. The exported query set is saved with the file extension .dbq. Import Query Set Opens the Import Query Set dialog box on page 373, in which you can import a set of queries stored in an external file with the file extension .dbq. Show Labels Turns on visibility of all labels in the selected drawing. Hide Labels Turns off visibility of all labels in the selected drawing. Reload Labels Refreshes the field values of the labels in the selected drawing, updating them to reflect any changes made in the source database table.
Database Objects Shortcut Menu Provides options available for database objects (such as link templates, label templates, and queries) attached to the drawing nodes. Different database objects have different subsets of menu options available to them. For example, the shortcut menu options that are displayed when you right-click a query differ from the options that are available when you right-click a link template. The following shortcut menu options are available for various database objects. View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode. Available only for link templates. Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode. Available only for link templates. Edit Opens a dialog box in which you can edit the properties of the selected database object. Available for link templates, label templates, and queries. Not available for link templates with links already defined in the drawing. Delete Deletes the selected database object. Available for link templates, label templates, and queries. Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected database object and inserts it in the current drawing. Available for link templates, label templates, and queries.
348 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Rename Opens a dialog box in which you can rename the selected database object. Available for link templates, label templates, and queries. Not available for link templates with links already defined in the drawing. New Query Opens the New Query dialog box on page 390. Available only for link templates. Link Select Opens the Link Select dialog box on page 383. Available only for link templates. New Label Template Opens the New Label Template dialog box on page 388. Available only for link templates. Show Labels Displays all labels that are associated with the selected database object. Available for link templates and label templates. Hide Labels Hides all labels that are associated with the selected database object. Available for link templates and label templates. Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the selected link template. Available only for link templates. Delete Labels Deletes all labels in the current drawing that use the selected label template. Available only for label templates. Synchronize Verifies that all links in the current drawing based on the selected link template contain valid values. Any detected problems are reported in the Synchronize dialog box on page 393. Available only for link templates. Reload Refreshes the field values of all labels associated with the selected label template in the current drawing, updating them to reflect any changes made in the source database table. Available only for label templates. Execute Executes the selected query. Available only for queries. Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the selected link template. Available only for link templates.
Data Sources Node Shortcut Menu Provides options available for data sources. Right-click the data sources node.
Configure Data Source Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box on page 367 where you can configure a new data source or edit an existing one.
dbConnect Manager | 349
Data Objects Shortcut Menu Provides options available for data objects. Right-click a data object (such as a catalog or table) in the data sources node. Connect Establishes a connection to the selected data object. Available for data sources, catalogs, and schemas. Disconnect Closes the connection to the selected data object. Available for data sources, catalogs, and schemas. Synchronize Opens the Synchronize dialog box on page 393. Available only for connected data sources. Configure Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box on page 367 where you can configure a new data source or edit an existing one. Available only for disconnected data sources. View Table Opens the selected database table in Read-only mode. Available only for tables. Edit Table Opens the selected database table in Edit mode. Available only for tables. New Link Template Opens the New Link Template dialog box on page 389. Available only for database tables. New Label Template Opens the New Label Template dialog box on page 388. Available only for database tables. New Query Opens the New Query dialog box on page 390. Available only for database tables.
Data View Window Quick Reference Provides the primary interface for viewing and editing external database tables from within the program. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a link template, a label template, or a table from the dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table.
350 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Menu: dbConnect ➤ View Data ➤ View External Table, Edit External Table, View Linked Table, or Edit Linked Table. (Displays a dialog box in which you can select a database table to open.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a database table in the dbConnect Manager on page 346 and choose View Table or Edit Table. Pointing device: Double-click a database table or a link template in the dbConnect Manager. Double-clicking a link template that has no links created in the drawing it's associated with opens the Link Template dialog box on page 386. The database table is opened in either Edit mode or Read-only mode, depending on the dbConnect Settings specified on the System tab of the Options dialog box. See OPTIONS. The Data View window displays records from the selected database table. The Data View contains a set of buttons, a grid window for viewing and editing records, and a set of navigation controls for navigating through the record set. After you open the Data View window, the Data View menu is added to the menu bar. You can specify whether the Data View window can be docked or anchored by right-clicking the title bar and choosing an option from the shortcut menu. The appearance of the Data View window is governed by your computer's system settings, and it can be changed in the Windows Control Panel. Text in the cells is displayed using the system window text color. If the database table is opened in Read-only mode, the cell background is shown using the system 3D objects button shade color (light gray by default). If it is opened in Edit mode, the cell background is shown using the system window color (white by default). When a cell is selected, it is shown using the system-
Data View Window | 351
selected items background and text colors.
Data View Buttons Create links and display linked records and graphical objects.
Link Links the currently selected database table row or rows to one or more graphical objects. The link and, if desired, the label from the currently selected link and label templates are created in the Data View window. To change the current link creation setting, choose the Link and Label Settings button. Three distinct link methods are available: Link Creates a link to one or more graphical objects without creating a corresponding label. If the current drawing has a selection set already established, a link is created for each object in the selection set. If the current drawing does not have a current selection set, you are prompted to select objects to link to.
Create Freestanding Label Creates a freestanding label that isn't associated with a graphical object. You are prompted to specify an insertion point for the label.
352 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Create Attached Label Creates a link to one or more graphical objects and creates a corresponding label. If the current drawing has a selection set already established, a link is created for all objects in the selection set. If the current drawing does not have a current selection set, you are prompted to select objects to link to.
View Linked Objects in Drawing Selects graphical objects in the current drawing that are linked to the currently selected Data View row or rows.
View Linked Records in Table Selects records in the Data View window that are linked to the current selection set of graphical objects.
AutoView Linked Objects in Drawing Displays linked objects automatically in the current drawing as you select rows from the database table.
AutoView Linked Records in Table Displays linked records automatically in the Data View window as you select graphical objects in the current drawing.
Data View Window | 353
Print Data View Prints the contents of the Data View window to the current Microsoft® Windows® system printer.
Data View and Query Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box on page 368, in which you can specify a number of settings that affect the interaction and display of linked objects in the Data View window and the current drawing.
Query, Return to Query, and Return to Link Select Opens either the New Query dialog box on page 390, the Query Editor on page 360, or the Link Select dialog box on page 383, depending on the method used to open the Data View window. If the Data View window was opened to view or edit a database table, this button's tooltip is Query, and choosing it opens the New Query dialog box. If the Data View window was opened to return the results of a query, this button's tooltip is Return to Query, and choosing it returns you to the Query Editor. If the Data View window was opened to return the results of a Link Select operation, this button's tooltip is Return to Link Select, and choosing it returns you to the Link Select dialog box.
Link Template List Creates a new link template, or specifies a link template from those that are defined for the open table. The selected link template is applied when you create new links in the current drawing. To create a new link template, select the New Link Template option from the Link Template list, and then choose the Link button flyout.
354 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Label Template List Creates a new label template, or specifies a label template from those that are defined for the currently selected table. The selected label template is applied when you create new labels in the current drawing. To create a new label template, select the New Label Template option from the Label Template list and choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the selected database table in the current drawing, the New Link Template dialog box on page 389 is displayed.
Data View Grid Window Displays a subset of the records from a database table. You can select records by clicking the following elements: ■
Column header: Selects all records in that column. Double-clicking a column header sorts its records in ascending order. Double-clicking a column header a second time sorts its records in descending order.
■
Record header: Selects an individual record. Double-clicking a record header selects any graphical objects that the record is linked to in the drawing area.
■
Grid cell: Selects one field of a given record. Double-clicking a cell selects it for editing.
■
Grid header: Selects the entire table. Double-clicking the grid header commits any changes made during an editing session and closes the Data View window.
Column Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected column headers.
Data View Window | 355
Sort Opens the Sort dialog box on page 392, in which you can select a combination of up to five columns to use in specifying a sort order for the Data View. A small triangle in the column header indicates that the data is sorted by that column. Hide Removes all selected columns from the Data View display. Unhide All Restores all hidden columns to the Data View display. Available only if you have hidden one or more columns. Freeze Freezes all selected columns so that they do not scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar. Available only if the selected columns are contiguous. Unfreeze All Unfreezes all frozen columns so that they scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar. Available only if you have frozen one or more columns. Align Aligns the current column. Standard right-aligns numeric fields and left-aligns all others, Left left-aligns the column cells, Center center-aligns the cells, and Right right-aligns the cells. Find Opens the Find dialog box on page 371, which you can use to search for a specific value. Find is limited to the values stored in the currently selected column. Replace Opens the Replace dialog box on page 391, which you can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a replacement value that you specify. Replace is limited to the values stored in the currently selected column. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Cell Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click the selected cell. View Linked Objects Indicates graphical objects in the current drawing that are linked to the selected database record. Link Links the current row to a graphical object. The link and, if desired, the label from the currently selected link and label templates are created in the Data View. You can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an attached label is created by changing the settings from the Link and Label Settings cell shortcut menu option. Link and Label Settings Lists the currently selected link creation mode. You can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu option is chosen.
356 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Find Opens the Find dialog box on page 371, which you can use to search for a specific value. The Find shortcut menu option limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell. Replace Opens the Replace dialog box on page 391, which you can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a replacement value that you specify. Replace limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode. Edit Enables you to change the value of the currently selected cell. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode. Cut Clears the current cell and copies its value to the Clipboard. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode. Copy Copies the value from the current cell to the Clipboard. Paste Inserts the value currently stored on the Clipboard into the selected cell. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode. Clear Deletes the value in the current cell. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Record Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected record headers. View Linked Objects Indicates graphical objects in the current drawing that are linked to the selected database records. Link Links the selected row or rows to one or more graphical objects. The link and, if desired, the label from the currently selected link and label templates are created in the Data View window. You can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an attached label is created by choosing the Link and Label Settings shortcut menu option. Link and Label Settings Lists the currently selected link creation mode. You can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu option is chosen. Copy Copies the selected records to the Clipboard. Delete Record Deletes the selected records. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Data View Window | 357
Add New Record Adds a new record with blank field values to the end of the record set. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode. Clear All Marks Clears record selection marks from the selected records in the Data View window.
Grid Header Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click the grid header. Commit Saves all changes made in the Data View window to the source database table and closes the Data View window. Available only when a database table is open in Edit mode and you have edited its values. Restore Undoes any changes made to a database table during an editing session and closes the Data View window. Available only when a database table is open in Edit mode and you have edited its values. Unhide All Columns Restores any hidden columns to the Data View window display. Unfreeze All Columns Unfreezes any frozen columns so that they scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar. Clear All Marks Clears all record selection marks from the Data View window. Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window in the Data View window, in which you can preview your printed report. Print Prints the contents of the Data View window to the current Windows system printer. Format Opens the Format dialog box on page 372, in which you can control how data is displayed in the Data View window.
Navigation Controls Cycle quickly through the records in the Data View window. The following controls are available: First Button Selects the first record. Previous Button Selects the previous record. Next Button Selects the next record. Last Button Selects the last record.
358 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Data View Print Preview Window Loads into the Data View window a preview image of how the current table appears when you print it. When the Data View window is in Preview mode, none of the primary Data View buttons is available and the navigation buttons are removed from the bottom of the window. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: Data View ➤ Print Preview Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and choose Print Preview.
Print Opens the default system Print dialog box. Next Page Presents a preview image of the next page of the database table. Prev Page Restores the preview image of the previous page of the database table. Two Page Toggles the display between one and two preview pages. If you choose Two Page, the name of the button changes to One Page and vice versa. Zoom In Magnifies the preview page so that you can view the details more closely.
Data View Window | 359
Zoom Out Shrinks the preview page to display a larger region of the database table. Close Closes the Data View Print Preview window and restores the default Data View window display.
Query Editor Quick Reference Consists of a series of tabs that you can use to build and execute queries. If you are creating a new query, the New Query dialog box on page 390 is displayed first. You can open the Query Editor using the following methods: Toolbar: dbConnect buttons ➤ Select a database table or a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button.
Toolbar: Data View buttons ➤ Choose the Query or Return to Query button in the Data View window.
Menu: dbConnect ➤ Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table, New Query on a Link Template, or Edit Query. (Displays a dialog box in which you can select a database object to query.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a database table or link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Query, or right-click a query and choose Edit. ■
Quick Query on page 361
■
Range Query on page 362
■
Query Builder on page 362
■
SQL Queries on page 365
360 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Quick Query Tab (Query Editor) Quick Reference Develops simple queries based on a single database field, single operator, and single value.
Field Lists the fields from the current database table, from which you can select one to apply to the query. Operator Displays a list of available operators that can be applied to the query. For information about operators, see “Construct Simple Queries” in the User's Guide. Value Specifies a value for the field that you are using to construct your query. Look Up Values Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values dialog box on page 367, from which you can select the value you want. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criterion in the Data View window on page 350. Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criterion in the current drawing. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. Store Saves the query with the current drawing.
Query Editor | 361
Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box on page 368.
Range Query Tab (Query Editor) Quick Reference Constructs a query that returns all records or objects that fall within a given range of values. Field Lists the fields from the current database table, from which you can select one to apply to the query. From Specifies the first value of the range. The query returns all records or graphical objects that are greater than or equal to this value. Look Up Values (From, Through) Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values dialog box on page 367, from which you can select the value you want. Through Specifies the second value of the range. The query returns all records or graphical objects that are less than or equal to this value. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criterion in the Data View window on page 350. Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criterion in the current drawing. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. Store Saves the query with the current drawing. Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box on page 368.
Query Builder Tab (Query Editor) Quick Reference Constructs queries based on multiple search criteria. You can also group criteria parenthetically, select which fields to display in the returned query, and specify a sort order for the fields.
362 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Query Builder Grid Provides a space for you to construct queries based on multiple search parameters. Parenthetical Grouping Groups a series of search criteria by bracketing them within parentheses. You can nest up to four sets of parentheses within a single statement. To insert a beginning parenthesis, click in the cell to the left of the first Field cell that you want to group. To insert an end parenthesis, click in the cell to the right of the last Value cell that you want to group. Field Provides a space where you can select the field or fields to include in your query. Double-click in the Field cell of the current row to display a list of available fields from the current database table that you can use in constructing your query. To add an additional parameter, specify an operator and a value for the current row and then select the Logical cell. Operator Provides a space where you can select an operator to apply to the query condition of the current row. Double-click in the Operator cell to display a list of operators that you can use in constructing your query. Value Provides a space where you can specify a value for the query condition of the current row. Click in the Value cell and enter a value, or choose the [...] button to retrieve a list of available values for the selected field in the Column Values dialog box on page 367. Logical Provides either an And or an Or operator to the query statement. Click in the Logical cell to add an And value. To change the value to Or, click in the Logical cell again.
Query Editor | 363
Fields in Table Displays a list of available fields from the current database table, from which you can specify the fields to display in the Data View window on page 350 when the query is executed. If you don't specify any fields to display, the query displays all fields from the database table. Double-clicking in a field in this list or selecting a field and choosing Add (Show Fields) adds the field to the list of those that are displayed in the Data View window by the returned query. You can also drag fields to add them to the Show Fields and Sort By areas.
Show Fields Specifies the fields that are displayed in the Data View window on page 350 when the query is executed. To remove a field from this list, drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab.
Add (Show Fields) Adds a field to include in the Data View window on page 350 display of the returned query. To add a field, select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add.
Sort By Specifies a sort order for the returned query. The first field added to the Sort By list is the primary sort. To change the sort order for a field, drag the field to a new location in the Sort By list. By default, fields are added to the Sort By list in an ascending sort order. To apply a descending sort, select a field and choose the Ascending/Descending Sort button, or double-click in the field. To remove a field, drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab or select the field and press DELETE.
Add (Sort By) Adds a field to the Sort By list. To add a sort field, select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add. Repeat for additional fields that you want to apply to the sort.
Ascending/Descending Sort Reverses the sort order for the currently selected field. If an ascending sort order is currently applied, choosing this button reverses the sort to descending order, and vice versa.
364 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criteria in the Data View window on page 350.
Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria in the current drawing.
Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store Saves the query with the current drawing.
Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box on page 368.
SQL Query Tab (Query Editor) Quick Reference Constructs any query statement that conforms with the SQL 92 protocol. The SQL Query tab provides both a query editor text box where you can type a free-form SQL statement and a set of tools to assist you in constructing your query. As not all database management systems are fully compliant with the SQL 92 standard, you should review your system's documentation to see what SQL commands are valid for your particular database.
Query Editor | 365
SQL Text Editor Provides a space for you to type a free-form SQL query or add elements that you select using the various SQL Query tools. Table Lists all database tables that are available in the current data source. You can add database tables to the SQL text editor by double-clicking them, by selecting them and choosing Add in the Table area, by dragging them from the Table list to the SQL text editor, or by entering their names directly in the SQL text editor. Add (Table) Adds the currently selected database table to the SQL text editor. Fields Displays a list of the fields in the selected database table. You can add fields to the SQL text editor by double-clicking them, by selecting them and choosing Add in the Fields area, or by dragging them from the Fields list to the SQL text editor. Add (Fields) Adds the selected field to the SQL text editor. Operator Displays a list of operators that you can apply to your query. Add (Operator) Adds the selected operator to the SQL text editor. Values Specifies a value for the selected field. Add (Values) Adds the value specified in the Values area to the SQL text editor. [...] Button Returns a list of available values for the specified field from the selected database table in the Column Values dialog box on page 367, from which you can select a value to apply to the query. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criteria in the Data View window on page 350.
366 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria in the current drawing. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. Store Saves the query with the current drawing. Check Checks your SQL query for proper syntax without actually executing it. This function helps you isolate syntax errors before you issue your query. Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box on page 368.
Column Values Dialog Box Quick Reference Lists values for the selected database column; you can select a value to apply to the current operation. Column Values Lists all values for the selected database column. Select a value from the list and choose OK to apply it to the current operation. If you are constructing a query using the In operator, you can add additional values to the query by pressing the CTRL or SHIFT key as you select values.
Configure a Data Source Dialog Box Quick Reference Configures an external database so it can be accessed from the program. For detailed information about configuring a particular database system, refer to “Configure External Databases” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Data Sources ➤ Configure Shortcut menu: Right-click the Data Sources node and choose Configure Data Source. Data Source Name Specifies a name for the OLE DB data source that you are configuring.
Column Values Dialog Box | 367
Data Sources Lists all OLE DB data sources configured for use with the program that are present on your system. OK Opens the Microsoft Data Links Properties dialog box, in which you can continue configuring your data source.
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box Quick Reference Controls a number of settings related to the display of linked records and objects and the processing of SQL queries. You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
Toolbar: Data View buttons Menu: Data View ➤ Options. (The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window.)
AutoPan and Zoom Control how linked objects are displayed in the current drawing when you select their corresponding records in the Data View window on page 350. Automatically Pan Drawing Pans the drawing automatically to display objects that are associated with the current selection set of Data View records. Automatically Zoom Drawing Zooms the drawing automatically so that all objects associated with the current record set are displayed.
368 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Zoom Factor Specifies a zoom factor that limits the size of the extents of the indicated object set to a defined percentage of the drawing area. The available range is 20 to 90 percent with a default value of 50 percent. A value of 50 percent means that either the height of the extents is 50 percent of the height of the window, or the width of the extents is 50 percent of the window, whichever value is less.
Record Indication Settings Control the appearance of linked records in the Data View window on page 350 when their corresponding objects are selected in the current drawing. Show Only Indicated Records Displays in the Data View window only the record set that is associated with the current selection set. Any records not linked to the current drawing selection set are not displayed. Show All Records, Select Indicated Records Displays all records in the current database table. All records that are linked to the current selection set are selected in the Data View window. Mark Indicated Records Applies a marking color to linked Data View records to clearly differentiate them from records without links. Marking Color Specifies the marking color to apply to linked Data View records. The default color is yellow.
Query Options Specify options for SQL query processing. Send as Native SQL Issues queries to database tables in the format of the source table rather than SQL 92 format. You can use this option to issue proprietary commands in native database format. Automatically Store Automatically stores queries when they are executed with the current drawing.
Accumulate Options Control the accumulation of selection and record sets. Accumulate Selection Set in Drawing Adds additional objects to the selection set as you select additional Data View records. If this option is cleared, the current drawing indicates a new set of objects each time you select a new set of Data View records.
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box | 369
Accumulate Record Set in Data View Adds additional records to the record set as you select additional graphical objects. If this option is cleared, the Data View window on page 350 indicates a new set of records each time you select a new set of graphical objects.
Export Links Dialog Box Quick Reference Exports a set of links that are associated with a selection set of graphical objects. You can open this dialog box using the following method: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Links ➤ Export Links If more than one link template exists for the set of graphical objects that you select, the Select a Database Object dialog box on page 391 is displayed, in which you can select a link template whose links you want to export.
Include Fields Specifies the database table fields to export. The key fields for the selected link template are included automatically. The handle of the object that each link is associated with is also exported. File Name Specifies a name for the exported link file. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the exported links. You can save the file in the native database format of the current database table or as a comma-delimited or space-delimited text file. Link Template Name Displays the name of the link template whose links you're exporting.
370 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Export Query Set Dialog Box Quick Reference Exports a set of queries that are associated with the current drawing. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Queries ➤ Export Query Set Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager on page 346, right-click the drawing node of a drawing that contains one or more queries and choose Export Query Set. File Name Specifies a name for the query set. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the query set. Query sets are always saved with the .dbq file extension.
Export Template Set Dialog Box Quick Reference Exports a set of link templates and label templates that are associated with the current drawing. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ Export Template Set Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager on page 346, right-click the drawing node of a drawing that has one or more templates defined and choose Export Template Set. File Name Specifies a name for the template set. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the template set. Template sets are always saved with the .dbt extension.
Find Dialog Box Quick Reference Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data View table. The search is limited to a single table column. It is not possible to
Export Query Set Dialog Box | 371
conduct a global search that scans all columns in the table. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: Data View ➤ Find. (The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a record header or a single cell in the Data View window and choose Find. Find What Specifies the value to search for. Match Case Searches for the exact value, including case, of what you enter in Find What. If this option is cleared, the program searches for the value regardless of case. Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you're searching for. Direction Toggles the direction that the program searches for the specified value in the Data View window.
Format Dialog Box Quick Reference Controls how database table records are displayed in the Data View window on page 350. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: Data View ➤ Format. (The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window.) Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and choose Format. Font Specifies the font style that is applied to the current Data View table. Font Style Specifies a style to apply to the current font. The available options are Normal, Italic, Bold, Bold Italic, Not Bold, and Not Italic. Size Specifies the size in points that is applied to the current font. Effects Applies additional formatting to the Data View window display. Strikeout draws a line through the center of all column data. Underline applies an underline to all column data. Color applies a color to all column data. Sample Displays how the current Format option values look when applied to the Data View window. Script Specifies the script that is applied to the current font.
372 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Import Query Set Dialog Box Quick Reference Imports a set of queries into the current drawing. If the query set contains a name that matches a query in the current drawing, an alert box is displayed, and you can enter a different name for the query. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Queries ➤ Import Query Set Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager on page 346 and choose Import Query Set. Look In Specifies the directory where the query set is located. File Name Specifies the name of the query set to import. Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the query set that you're importing. Query sets always have the .dbq extension.
Import Template Set Dialog Box Quick Reference Imports a set of link templates and label templates into the current drawing. If the template set contains a link or label template with a name that matches a template in the current drawing, an alert box is displayed where you can enter a different name for the template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ Import Template Set Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager on page 346 and choose Import Template Set. Look In Specifies the directory where the template set is located. File Name Specifies the name of the template set to import. Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the template set that you're importing. Template sets always have the .dbt extension.
Import Query Set Dialog Box | 373
Label Template Dialog Box Quick Reference Applies formatting to labels. Before the Label Template dialog box opens, the New Label Template dialog box on page 388 is displayed, in which you can name the label template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table, link template, or label template and choose the New Label Template button. If a label template is selected, the program opens the Label Template dialog box without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box.
Toolbar: Data View buttons ➤ Choose New Label Template from the Label Template list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the selected database table in the current drawing, the program displays the New Link Template dialog box. Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Label Template. Select a link template in the Select a Database Object dialog box and choose Continue. Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a database table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Label Template. Pointing device: Double-click a label template in the dbConnect Manager. This method opens the Label Template dialog box directly without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box.
374 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Character Tab Controls character formatting for text that is entered at the keyboard or imported.
Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. The default value is based on the current text style. If the current text style has no fixed height, the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Italic Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Underline Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text. Undo Undoes actions, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Z. Redo Redoes actions, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Y. Stack, Unstack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right. By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values. Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottom-right aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar are top-left aligned.
Label Template Dialog Box | 375
Text Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text. You can assign text the color associated with the layer it is on (BYLAYER) or the color of the block it is contained in (BYBLOCK). You can also select one of the colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select Color dialog box. on page 261 Symbol Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. Symbols can also be inserted manually. See Symbols and Special Characters on page 949. Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu. Click Other to display the Character Map dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system. Select a character and click Select to place it in the Characters to Copy box. When you have selected all the characters that you want to use, click Copy and close the dialog box. In the Label Template dialog box, right-click and click Paste. You can use the euro symbol with SHX fonts and their TrueType equivalent fonts shipped with AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. If your keyboard does not contain a euro symbol, hold down the ALT key and enter 0128 on the numeric keypad. Symbols are not supported in vertical text. NOTE In the dialog box, the diameter symbol is displayed as %%c, but it is displayed correctly in the label. The nonbreaking space is unavailable in double-byte operating systems.
Properties Tab Controls properties that apply to the whole label template.
Style Applies a text style to the label. The current style is saved in the TEXTSTYLE system variable. Character formatting for font, height, and bold or italic attributes is overridden if you apply a new style to an existing label template. Stacking, underlining, and color attributes are retained in characters to which a new style is applied.Styles that have backward or upside-down
376 | Chapter 5 D Commands
effects are not applied. If a style defined with a vertical effect is applied to an SHX font, the text is displayed horizontally in the Label Template dialog box. Justification Sets justification and alignment for the label. Top Left is the default setting. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. Text is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. See -MTEXT on page 945 for an illustration of the nine justification options. Width Sets a paragraph width for new or selected text. The No Wrap option produces a single line. The width of individual characters is not affected by this option. Rotation Sets the rotation angle for the label in the current unit of angle measurement (degrees, radians, or grads).
Find/Replace Tab Searches for specified text strings in the label template and replaces them with new text.
Find Defines the text string to search for. Find Button Starts a search for the text string in Find. To continue the search, click the Find button again. Replace With Defines the text string to replace the text in Find What. Replace Button Replaces the highlighted text with the text in Replace With. Match Case Finds text only if the case of all characters in the text string is identical to the case of the text in Find. When this option is cleared, a match is found for specified text strings regardless of case. Whole Word Matches the text in the Find box only if it is a single word. Text that is part of another word is ignored. When this option is cleared, a match is found for text strings, whether they are single words or parts of other words.
Label Template Dialog Box | 377
Label Fields Tab Specifies which database table fields are displayed when you create labels based on this template.
Field Displays a list of available fields from the current database table that you can include in your label. You may include any number of fields from the source table. Add Adds the selected field in the Field list to the label. Table Displays the name of the current database table.
Label Offset Tab Defines X and Y coordinate offsets for the insertion point of both your label and, if it is an attached label, its associated leader object.
Start Specifies the start point for the leader object. The point is defined with respect to the extents of the graphical object that the label is attached to. The Start option has no effect on freestanding labels, as they have no associated leader object. Leader Offset Specifies an X and Y offset for the multiline text object with respect to the associated leader object. By default, the X and Y Leader Offset options are set to 1, indicating that the label text is offset 1 unit in the X and Y planes from the tip of the leader object. The Leader Offset settings apply only to attached labels.
378 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Tip Offset Specifies the leader tip or label text offset values for attached and freestanding labels. For attached labels, the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the value specified in Start for the tip of the leader object. For freestanding labels, the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the insertion point you specified for the label.
Label Template Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference Displays the full data source path to a label template's database table. You can use this dialog box to update a label template with new data source information. Before the Label Template Properties dialog box opens, the Select a Database Object dialog box is displayed, from which you can select a label template. You can open this dialog box using the following method: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ Label Template Properties Template Name Displays the name of the selected label template. Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the selected label template. You can select a new data source from this list to apply to the label template. Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the selected label template. You can select a new catalog from this list to apply to the label template. Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the selected label template. You can select a new schema from this list to apply to the label template. Table Displays the name of the database table specified for the selected label template. You can select a new database table from this list to apply to the label template. Fields Displays the fields specified for the selected label template.
Label Template Properties Dialog Box | 379
Link Conversion Dialog Box Quick Reference Converts links created in AutoCAD Release 12, Release 13, and Release 14 to AutoCAD 2000 (and later) format. You can open this dialog box using the following method: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Link Conversion
Because legacy links are stored in formats that differ significantly from AutoCAD 2000 and later, the link conversion process requires that you specify a mapping of the old AutoCAD SQL Extension™ (ASE) link values to the new ones used by AutoCAD 2000 and later. For example, you must identify the environment used by a particular link in Release 14 and specify the corresponding data source that you want substituted for this environment in AutoCAD 2000 and later. Similar mappings must be established between all old ASE link values and the new values that you want substituted for them.
Link Format Specifies the format of the link that you are converting. Different fields are displayed depending on whether you select R12 or R13/R14. R12 Specifies settings for converting R12 links.
380 | Chapter 5 D Commands
R13/R14 Specifies settings for converting R13 and R14 links.
Old Link Format (R12) Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you're converting. DBMS Specifies the database management system used by the link that you're converting. Database Specifies the database used by the link that you're converting. Table Specifies the database table used by the link that you're converting.
Old Link Format (R13/R14) Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you're converting. Environment Specifies the environment used by the link that you're converting. Catalog Specifies the catalog used by the link that you're converting. Schema Specifies the schema used by the link that you're converting. Table Specifies the database table used by the link that you're converting. Link Path Name Specifies the link path name used by the link that you're converting.
New Link Format Specifies the path to the database table used by the converted link. Data Source Lists available data sources that you can select for the converted link. Catalog Lists available catalogs that you can select for the converted link. Schema Lists available schemas that you can select for the converted link. Table Lists available database tables that you can select for the converted link. Link Template Lists available link templates that you can select for the converted link.
OK Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file and closes the dialog box.
Link Conversion Dialog Box | 381
Apply Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file but keeps the dialog box open so that you can specify conversions for additional links.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without converting any links.
Link Manager Quick Reference Edits the values of the key fields for a selected linked object. You can open the Link Manager using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Links ➤ Link Manager. Select a linked graphical object. Shortcut menu: Select and then right-click a linked graphical object, and then choose Link ➤ Link Manager.
Link Templates Lists all link templates that are associated with the selected graphical object. Select the link template whose link values you want to view or edit. Key Displays the key fields of the currently selected link template.
382 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Value Displays all key values that are defined for the selected link. To display a list of values for a specific field, click a Value cell and choose [...]. Delete Deletes the currently selected link from the graphical object it's associated with.
Link Select Dialog Box Quick Reference Constructs iterative selection sets of graphical objects and database records. The Link Select dialog box, known as ASE Select in previous releases, is an advanced implementation of the Query Editor. You begin a Link Select operation by creating an initial query or selection set of graphical objects (set A), which can be operated on by an additional query or selection set (set B). The results of the returned operation become the new running selection set (set A), and you can apply additional queries or selection sets to further refine your running query. In order to work with the Link Select dialog box, you must have a drawing open that has a number of links already created. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Links ➤ Link Select Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager on page 346 and choose Link Select.
Link Select Dialog Box | 383
The Link Select dialog box contains the Quick Query, Range Query, and Query Builder tabs from the Query Editor on page 360, and the following additional controls.
Do Applies a Link Select operator to the current query or selection set. The following operators are available: Select, Union, Intersect, Subtract A-B, Subtract A-B. Select Creates an initial query or selection set. This selection set can be refined through subsequent Link Select operations.
Union Adds the results of the new query or selection set to the running selection set. This operation returns all records or objects that are members of set A or set B.
384 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Intersect Returns the intersection of the existing running selection and the results of the new query or drawing selection. This operation returns all records or objects that are members of set A and set B.
Subtract A-B Subtracts the results of the new query or drawing selection from the existing running selection.
Subtract B-A Subtracts the existing running selection from the results of the new query or drawing selection.
Using Lists available link templates that you can apply to the current selection set.
Use Query Uses any of the available Query Editor tabs to construct a query that returns a selection set to the Link Select operation.
Select in Drawing Closes the Link Select dialog box when you choose the Select button so that you can construct a selection set of graphical objects to return to the Link Select operation.
Execute/Select Executes the current Link Select query or temporarily dismisses the Link Select dialog box so you can select graphical objects from the drawing. If the Use Query option is selected, the Execute button is displayed. If the Select in Drawing option is selected, the Select button is displayed. After choosing the Execute or Select button, you can apply more queries or select additional graphical objects to further refine your selection set.
Link Select Dialog Box | 385
Venn Diagram Displays a diagram of the currently selected Do operation.
Reset Clears the Link Select dialog box and discards all previous actions so that you can begin a new Link Select operation.
Cancel Closes the dialog box and discards all actions.
Finish Completes the Link Select operation and closes the dialog box. Returns either a selection set of graphical objects, a subset of Data View records, or both, depending on the parameters specified in the Link Select operation.
Status Bar Displays the current status information based on the running Link Select operation. The current drawing and table are displayed, as well as the number of linked objects and records that currently meet the specified Link Select parameters.
Link Template Dialog Box Quick Reference Specifies the key fields that are used by a link template. Before the Link Template dialog box opens, the New Link Template dialog box on page 389 is displayed, in which you can name the link template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table and choose the New Link Template button.
386 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Toolbar: Data View buttons ➤ Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list, and then choose the Link button flyout.
Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Link Template. Navigate to and select a database table from the Select a Database Object dialog box and choose Continue. Shortcut menu: Right-click a database table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Link Template. Pointing device: Double-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager. This method opens the Link Template dialog box directly, without first displaying the New Link Template dialog box.
Template Name Displays the name of the link template. Table Displays the current database table. The first line lists the name of the table, and the second line lists the full data source path to the table in the following syntax: environment.catalog.schema.table Key Fields Displays all fields that are available for the current database table, as well as the field type and, in the case of character fields, the field length. You specify the link template's key fields by selecting the check box to the left of the field name.
Link Template Dialog Box | 387
Link Template Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference Displays the full data source path to a link template's table. You can use this dialog box to update a link template with new data source information. Before the Link Template Properties dialog box opens, the Select a Database Object dialog box on page 391 is displayed, from which you can select a link template. You can open this dialog box using the following method: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ Link Template Properties Template Name Displays the name of the selected link template. Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the selected link template. You can select a new data source from this list to apply to the link template. Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the selected link template. You can select a new catalog from this list to apply to the link template. Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the selected link template. You can select a new schema from this list to apply to the link template. Table Displays the name of the database table specified for the selected link template. You can select a new table from this list to apply to the link template. Keys Displays the key fields specified for the selected link template.
New Label Template Dialog Box Quick Reference Creates a new label template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table and choose the New Label Template button.
388 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Toolbar: Data View buttons ➤ Choose New Label Template from the Label Template list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the selected database table in the current drawing, the program displays the New Link Template dialog box. Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Label Template. Select a link template from the Select a Database Object dialog box and choose Continue. Shortcut menu: Right-click a database table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Label Template. After you enter a name for the label template and choose Continue, the Label Template dialog box on page 374 opens, in which you specify the fields to display in your label and how to format them. New Label Template Name Specifies a name for the label template. Start with Template Lists available label templates in the current drawing, from which you can select one to use as a start point for your new label template.
New Link Template Dialog Box Quick Reference Creates a new link template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table and choose the New Link Template button.
Toolbar: Data View buttons ➤ Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list, and then choose the Link button flyout.
New Link Template Dialog Box | 389
Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Link Template. Navigate to and then select a database table in the Select a Data Object dialog box and choose Continue. Shortcut menu: Right-click a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Link Template. After you enter a name for the link template and choose Continue, the Link Template dialog box on page 386 opens, in which you specify the key fields that the link uses. New Link Template Name Specifies a name for the link template. Start with Template Lists all available link templates from the current drawing, from which you can select one to use as a starting point for the new link template.
New Query Dialog Box Quick Reference Creates a new query and opens the Query Editor. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a link template, database table, or existing query and choose the New Query button.
Menu: dbConnect ➤ Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table or New Query on a Link Template. (A dialog box is displayed in which you can select a database object to query.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template, database table, or existing query in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Query. After you enter a name for the query and choose Continue, the Query Editor on page 360 is displayed, in which you can construct a new query. Query for Records in Table Read-only field that indicates the table to query. New Query Name Specifies a name for the query. Existing Query Names Lists all available queries from the current drawing.
390 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Replace Dialog Box Quick Reference Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data View table. You can specify a replacement value that overwrites the value that you're searching for. The search is limited to a single database table column. It is not possible to conduct a global search that scans all columns in the database table. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: Data View ➤ Replace. (This menu is available only if you have a database table open in the Data View window.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a single cell or column header in the Data View window and choose Replace. Find What Specifies the value to search for. Replace With Specifies a replacement value for the value that you're searching for. Match Case Searches for the exact value, including case, of what you enter in Find What. If this option is cleared, the program searches for the value regardless of case. Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you're searching for. Replace Replaces the next occurrence of the value that you're searching for with the value specified in Replace With. Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the value that you're searching for with the value specified in Replace With.
Select a Database Object Dialog Box Quick Reference Displays a list of the database objects, such as link templates, label templates, or queries, that are associated with the current drawing. You can select a database object from this list to apply to the current operation. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Label Template, Edit Link Template, Edit Label Template, Delete Link Template, or Delete Label Template;
Replace Dialog Box | 391
Queries ➤ Execute Query, New Query on a Link Template, Edit Query, or Delete Query; Links ➤ Delete Links; Labels ➤ Reload Labels, Show Labels, Hide Labels, or Delete Labels; View Data ➤ View Linked Table, Edit Linked Table Database Object List Lists the available database objects that are associated with the current drawing, from which you must select one to apply to the current operation. OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a secondary dialog box in which you can continue the current operation. If, for example, you are creating a new label template, the New Label Template dialog box is displayed.
Select Data Object Dialog Box Quick Reference Displays the Data Sources node of the dbConnect Manager on page 346, from which you can navigate to and select a database table that the current operation is applied to. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Data Sources ➤ Connect; Templates ➤ New Link Template; Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table; View Data ➤ View External Table or Edit External Table Tree View Window Lists the available data sources, from which you can select a database table to apply to the current operation. OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a secondary dialog box or window, in which you can continue the current operation. If, for example, you are creating a new link template, the New Link Template dialog box is displayed.
Sort Dialog Box Quick Reference Specifies a sort order that is applied to the database table records displayed in the Data View window on page 350. You can select a combination of up to five
392 | Chapter 5 D Commands
columns to apply to the sort order. You can open this dialog box using the following method: Shortcut menu: Right-click a column header in the Data View window and choose Sort. Sort By Specifies the primary column to apply to the sort operation. The data from this column is sorted first, and then the data from any additional Then By columns that are specified is sorted. Ascending Applies an ascending sort order to the selected column. The column data is ordered with the smallest value at the beginning of the Data View record set and the largest value at the end of the record set. Descending Applies a descending sort order to the selected column. The column data is ordered with the largest value at the beginning of the Data View record set and the smallest value at the end of the record set. Then By Specifies an additional column to apply to the sort operation. Reset Clears all columns that are specified for the current sort order so that you can specify a new sort order.
Synchronize Dialog Box Quick Reference Updates links that the program is unable to resolve. Links can become invalid if you change the underlying structure of their source database table, or if you move the source table to a new location. In these cases, the structure specified by the link template used to create the links is no longer valid, and link templates and any associated links must be updated. The Synchronize dialog box provides a list of detected errors. Certain errors (such as a resized column in the source database table) can be fixed directly from the Synchronize dialog box. Other errors (such as links that point to nonexistent records) must be fixed in the source database table. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Menu: dbConnect ➤ Synchronize Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager on page 346 and choose Synchronize.
Synchronize Dialog Box | 393
Errors Displays a list of errors detected. You can select an error to fix. Description Provides a brief description of the error selected in the Errors list. Fix Fixes the currently selected error. Delete Deletes the invalid link template and any associated links from the current drawing. Close Closes the dialog box. Indicate Drawing Objects Indicates all objects in the current drawing that are associated with the invalid link template.
DBLIST Quick Reference Lists database information for each object in the drawing Command entry: dblist The text window displays information about each object in the current drawing. The program pauses when the window fills with information. Press ENTER to resume output, or press ESC to cancel.
394 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DDEDIT Quick Reference Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames
Toolbar: Text Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit Pointing device: Double-click a text object. Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Command entry: ddedit Select an annotation object or [Undo]: Object Selection Displays the appropriate editing method for the type of text you select: ■
When the DTEXTED system variable is set to 0 or 2, text created using TEXT or DTEXT displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 929 without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Right-click to display options on page 1502.
■
Text created using MTEXT displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 929.
■
Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition) display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box on page 396.
■
Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box on page 1509.
DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to end the command. Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. You can use this option immediately after editing.
DDEDIT | 395
Edit Text Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Text Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Command entry: ddedit When the DTEXTED system variable is set to 1, modifies text created with TEXT or DTEXT. Enter the new text and click OK. To add a field to the text, right-click the text where you want to insert the field and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box on page 617.
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Text Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Command entry: ddedit Modifies an attribute definition's tag, prompt, and default value. Tag Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain exclamation marks (!). The case change is not immediately displayed in the tag field. Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you need leading blanks in the prompt, start the string with a backslash (\). If the first character must be a backslash, start the string with two backslashes.
396 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Default Specifies the default attribute value. If you need leading blanks in the default value, start the string with a backslash (\). If the first character must be a backslash, start the string with two backslashes. To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box on page 617.
DDPTYPE Quick Reference Specifies the display style and size of point objects Menu: Format ➤ Point Style Command entry: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use) The Point Style dialog box on page 397 is displayed.
Point Style Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Point Style Command entry: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use) Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an icon.
DDPTYPE | 397
Point Display Images Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in the PDMODE system variable.
Point Size Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units. The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value. Set Size Relative to Screen Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom in or out. Set Size in Absolute Units Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify under Point Size. Points are displayed larger or smaller when you zoom in or out.
DDVPOINT Quick Reference Sets the three-dimensional viewing direction Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets Command entry: ddvpoint The Viewpoint Presets dialog box on page 398 is displayed.
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets Command entry: ddvpoint Defines 3D view settings.
398 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Set Viewing Angles Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system (WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS).
Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS. Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS.
From Specifies viewing angles. X Axis Specifies the angle from the X axis. XY Plane Specifies the angle from the XY plane. You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. The black arm indicates the new angle. The gray arm indicates the current angle. Specify an angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. Selecting the bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box | 399
region. If you select the inner arc or an area inside it, the angle is not rounded off, and the result may be a fractional number.
Set to Plan View Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view (XY plane) relative to the selected coordinate system.
DELAY Quick Reference Provides a timed pause within a script Command entry: delay (or 'delay for transparent use) Enter delay time (in milliseconds): Enter a value from 0 through 32,767 milliseconds Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The longest delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.
DETACHURL Quick Reference Removes hyperlinks in a drawing Command entry: detachurl Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects. If an area is selected, the polyline is deleted. You can use PURGE to remove the URLLAYER layer.
DGNADJUST Quick Reference Changes the display options of selected DGN underlays
400 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Command entry: dgnadjust Select DGN underlay: Select one or more DGN underlays Enter DGN underlay option [Fade on page 401/Contrast on page 401/Monochrome on page 401] : NOTE The default values for Fade, Contrast, Monochrome remain as they were set the last time the command was used. To confirm the settings on a selected DGN underlay, use the Properties palette.
Fade Controls the fade effect of the underlay. Values range from 0 through 80. The greater the value, the more transparent the underlay appears against the background. The lesser the value, the less transparent and closer to opaque the underlay appears. A value of 0 makes the underlay appear fully opaque. Enter fade value (0-80): Enter a value
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Enter contrast value (0-100): Enter a value
Monochrome This Yes/No toggle controls the color saturation of all linework while maintaining the luminance. When turned on, the linework appears in varying shades of gray starting at black if the background color luminance is 50% or more. If the background color luminance is less than 50%, then the colors are inverted, with the darkest linework displaying in white, and the lightest linework displaying in black. Monochrome? [Yes/No]: Enter yes or no and then press ENTER
DGNATTACH Quick Reference Attaches a DGN underlay to the current drawing
DGNATTACH | 401
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ DGN.
Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ DGN Underlay Command entry: dgnattach The Select DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Once you select a DGN file, the Attach DGN Underlay dialog box on page 402 is displayed. NOTE DGNATTACH is not limited to files with *.dgn extensions. It supports all DGN files, even those that do not have a .dgn extension. If you enter -dgnattach at the Command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 404. NOTE When a DGN file is attached as an underlay, its levels structure (layers) are combined into a single layer. The DGN underlay is placed on the current layer. To hide the DGN attachment, freeze the layer on which it was attached.
Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ DGN Underlay Command entry: dgnattach Names, locates and defines the insertion point, scale and rotation of attached DGN underlays.
Name Identifies the DGN file you have selected to attach, either from the Select DGN File dialog box (an unattached DGN file) or from the list of previously attached DGN underlays. To add another instance of a DGN underlay that is already attached, select the DGN name from the list.
402 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Browse Opens the Select DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). Found In Displays the path where the DGN file was located. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the DGN file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.
Select a Design Model from the DGN File Displays all of the design models that are found in the DGN file. Sheet models in the DGN file are not listed. If the DGN file only contains a single design model, that model is listed. If the DGN file contains multiple models, only a single model can be selected for attachment. The first model in the list is selected by default.
Conversion Units Select the appropriate conversion units for the DGN underlay. The DGN file contains working units (imperial or metric) called master units and sub-units. The selected working units (master units or sub-units) are converted one-for-one into DWG units. Master Units Specifies that one master unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG drawing unit. Sub Units Specifies that one sub-unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG drawing unit.
Path Type Specifies one of three types of folder path information to save with an attached DGN underlay: a full (absolute) path, a relative path, and no path. Full Path Specifies the full path to the DGN file. Relative Path Specifies a relative path to the DGN file. No Path Specifies only the DGN file name. The DGN file should be located in the folder with the current drawing file.
Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected model in the DGN file.
Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box | 403
Specify On-Screen Directs input at the command prompt or the pointing device. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale Specifies the scale factor of the selected model in the DGN file. If INSUNITS on page 1810 is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain information about its extents, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the underlay has information about its extents, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined. For best results, set INSUNITS to match the units used to create the DGN file.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected design model.
-DGNATTACH Quick Reference If you enter -dgnattach at the command prompt, the following DGNATTACH command prompts are displayed. Path to DGN file on page 405 to attach: Enter a path and file name, or enter ~ to display a file selection dialog box Enter name of model or [? on page 405] : Enter the name of a design model in the DGN file, enter ? to list all design models, or press ENTER Specify conversion units [Master/Sub] <Master>: Specify m or s, or press ENTER Specify insertion point: Specify a point Specify scale factor or [Unit on page 405] <1.0000>: Enter a value, enter u, or press ENTER Specify rotation <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
404 | Chapter 5 D Commands
TIP You can drag a DGN file onto the drawing window to start the DGNATTACH command.
DGN File The file name can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program. Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). To avoid errors when entering a file name, it is recommended that you specify both the DGN file and path as follows: path name\filename.dgn or “path name\filename.dgn” If you enter a valid DGN file name without a file extension, the program will add the extension and search for the file.
? - List of Design Models Lists all design models contained in the DGN file.
Unit Specifies a drawing-units value for scaling the DGN underlay. Enter unit [MM/Centimeter/Meter/Kilometer/Inch/Foot/Yard/MILe/Unitless] <current unit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
DGNCLIP Quick Reference Defines a clipping boundary for a selected DGN underlay
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Clip DGN.
DGNCLIP | 405
Shortcut menu: Select an DGN underlay to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DGN Clip. Command entry: dgnclip Select DGN to clip: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects Enter DGN clipping option [ON on page 406/OFF on page 406/Delete on page 406/New boundary on page 406] : Enter an option or press ENTER
On Turns on clipping and displays the DGN underlay clipped to the previously defined boundary.
Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire DGN underlay. If you reclip the DGN underlay while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the entire DGN underlay.
New Boundary Specifies a new clipping boundary. The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal, and consists only of straight line segments. When defining a clipping boundary, specify vertices within the DGN underlay’s boundary. Self-intersecting vertices are valid. Rectangular is the default option. If you use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt, the point is interpreted as the first corner of a rectangle. Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] : Enter p or press ENTER If the DGN underlay already has a clipping boundary defined, the following prompt is displayed: Delete old boundary? [Yes/No] : Enter yes or no and then press ENTER If you choose Yes, the entire DGN underlay is redrawn and the command continues; if you choose No, the command ends.
406 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point, or enter c or u You must specify at least three points to define a polygon. Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners. The rectangle is always drawn parallel to the edges of the DGN underlay. Specify first corner point: Specify a point Specify opposite corner point: Specify a point
DGNEXPORT Quick Reference Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing Command entry: dgnexport The Export DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Once you specify a DGN file name, the Export DGN Settings dialog box on page 408 is displayed. You can export a V8 or V7 file using DGNEXPORT. If you enter -dgnexportat the Command prompt, options are displayed at the Command prompt on page 415. See the DGNEXPORT Conversion Table on page 412 specific details about the scope of exporting DWG objects and other data to DGN files. WARNING Some programs that work with DGN files do not support extended characters that the Windows operating system considers valid for file names. Thus, it is recommended that you do not use accented or Asian characters in file names when using DGNEXPORT.
DGNEXPORT | 407
Export DGN Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: dgnexport Controls how objects are processed when exporting them to a DGN file.
External DWG References Controls how xrefs are processed. Translate All DWG References to DGN Files All referenced DWG files, including nested DWG references, are converted into DGN files. The resulting DGN files use the same file name as the DWG files, but use a .dgn file extension. With the following set of options, you can choose whether or not to overwrite DGN reference files: ■
Prompt to Overwrite
■
Overwrite without Prompting
■
Do Not Overwrite
408 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Bind All DWG References into One DGN file The parent DWG file and all referenced DWG files are combined into a single DGN file. The referenced DWG files are converted to cells as part of the primary DGN file. Ignore DWG References Referenced DWG files are not included in the resulting DGN file.
External DGN References Controls whether DGN underlays in the DWG file are exported as DGN references of the resulting DGN file. Export DGN Underlays as DGN References When checked, any DGN underlays are exported as DGN references along with the base drawing. When cleared, DGN underlays are not exported. NOTE Do not export drawings that include V8 DGN underlays to a V7 DGN format file. The V8 DGN references cannot display in a V7 DGN file because the V8 DGN file format is not a valid design file for the resulting V7 DGN file.
Specify Seed File A seed file for a DGN file is similar to a drawing template (DWT) file that contains default settings and attributes, such as working units. Selecting the appropriate DGN seed file (imperial, metric, or user-defined), and conversion units is critical to the translation from DWG to DGN. In addition, the seed file contains settings that are not present in a DWG file, and therefore inherited in the exported DGN. These settings include working units and resolution as well as whether the file is 2D or 3D.
Conversion Units Select the appropriate conversion units for the translation. The DGN seed file contains working units (imperial or metric) called master units and sub-units. One DWG unit is converted to either one master unit or one sub-unit. Master Units Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one master unit of the specified DGN seed file. Sub Units Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one sub-unit of the specified DGN seed file.
Export DGN Settings Dialog Box | 409
NOTE The master units and the sub-units of the selected DGN seed file are displayed next to the buttons for reference. Filename drop-down list Specify the name of the DGN seed file. Several sample seed files are provided upon installation. Browse button Displays the Select Seed File dialog box (a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes on page 996), in which you can select the DGN seed file. See the DGNEXPORT Conversion Table on page 412specific details about the scope of exporting DWG objects and other data to DGN files.
Sample DGN Seed Files The following table lists the default DGN seed files and their settings. You may need to edit these settings or obtain the appropriate seed file to suit your conversion requirements.
Sample DGN Seed Files DGN Seed File Name
Master Unit (label)
Sub Unit (label)
Resolution
V7-Imperial-Arch01Seed2D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Inches (“)
12”/1’ and 8000 POS
V7-Imperial-Arch01Seed3D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Inches (“)
12”/1’ and 8000 POS
V7-Imperial-Arch02Seed2D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Inches (“)
12”/1’ and 1000 POS
V7-Imperial-Arch02Seed3D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Inches (“)
12”/1’ and 1000 POS
V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed2D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Tenths (tn)
10tn/1’ and 100 POS
V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed3D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Tenths (tn)
10tn/1’ and 100 POS
410 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Sample DGN Seed Files DGN Seed File Name
Master Unit (label)
Sub Unit (label)
Resolution
V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed2D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Tenths (tn)
10tn/1’ and 1000 POS
V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed3D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Tenths (tn)
10tn/1’ and 1000 POS
V7-Metric-Seed2D.dgn
Meters (m)
Millimeters (mm)
1000mm/1m and 1 POS
V7-Metric-Seed3D.dgn
Meters (m)
Millimeters (mm)
1000mm/1m and 1 POS
V8-Imperial-Seed2D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Inches (“)
304800 per foot
V8-Imperial-Seed3D.dgn
Feet (‘)
Inches (“)
304800 per foot
V8-Metric-Seed2D.dgn
Meters (m)
Millimeters (mm)
1000mm per millimeter
V8-Metric-Seed3D.dgn
Meters (m)
Millimeters (mm)
1000mm per millimeter
Translate DWG Properties to DGN Properties Selects and manages the mapping setup used on the current DGN export. Select Mapping Setup Displays the currently defined mapping setups. Standard is the default mapping setup which extracts data from the drawing being exported and applies an automatic mapping to DGN layers, linetypes, lineweights, and colors, as shown in the mapping preview. Setup Description Displays the description of the selected mapping setup.
Export DGN Settings Dialog Box | 411
Mapping Setups Opens the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 428 where new mapping setups can be created and existing mapping setups can be renamed, modified, or deleted (see DGNMAPPING on page 427). Mapping Preview for Setup Lists all properties of both the exported DWG file in the DWG column and the selected mapping setup in the DGN column. NOTE The reference properties are not listed in the preview, but any properties that apply to those references that are shown in the mapping preview are applied to the references as well.
DGNEXPORT Conversion Table Quick Reference The following table lists the DGN objects and features that are supported for export, and notes on the scope of the translation.
DWG to DGN Conversion Table AutoCAD
MicroStation
Notes
Geometric Objects
Geometric Elements
The following DWG objects are translated into DGN elements: line, xline, ray, polyline, arc, circle, spline (NURBS), ellipse, elliptical arc, point, donut, mline, hatch (including gradient fills), and wipeout. Variable width polylines maintain only their starting width when translated into SmartLines.
Layers
Levels
Invalid DWG characters in layer names are converted to spaces.
Colors
Colors
Colors are matched as closely as possible. Colors set with the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) are translated directly to the DGN color index. If TrueColor is used and a direct match of RGB values is available in the DGN color index, the colors are also mapped directly. If
412 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DWG to DGN Conversion Table AutoCAD
MicroStation
Notes a TrueColor match is not available, an RGB value is added to the DGN color index.
Linetypes
Line Styles
Custom linetypes are unsupported and could produce unexpected results.
Blocks
Cells
Blocks are exported as shared cells. Dynamic blocks are also exported as cells and lose their dynamic behavior. Invisible, Constant, Verify, and Preset attributes are all converted into tags.
Single-line Text Objects, Multiline Text Objects, Text Styles
Text, Text Nodes, Text Styles
The visual integrity of multiline text is maintained. However, if exported multiline text objects are edited in MicroStation, the formatting is lost. TrueType and SHX fonts in AutoCAD are exported to MicroStation V7 as Engineering. This can result in many visual differences.
Tables
Tables
Table objects are exported as cell elements composed of lines and text.
Fields
Fields
In general, fields are translated as static text. The exceptions are fields that behave identically in both products. This includes the Date fields CreateDate, SaveDate, and PlotDate, and the Document property fields Author, Filename, and Filesize. NOTE Use the MicroStation Key-in utility to update text containing fields (field update all).
Dimensions, Dimension Styles
Dimensions, Dimension Styles
The size, spacing, style, and shape of dimensions may vary slightly. Dimension associativ-
DGNEXPORT Conversion Table | 413
DWG to DGN Conversion Table AutoCAD
MicroStation
Notes ity is maintained whenever possible, and the correct dimension values are always maintained.
Raster Images
Raster Images
These image file types are supported: .bmp, .cal, .tif, .png, .tga, .jpg, .gif, .rlc, .bil, and .pcx. All other image file types are discarded.
DWG References
DGN References
Depending on the export option specified, all referenced DWG files, including nested DWG references, are either converted into DGN files, combined into a single DGN file as cells, or discarded. NOTE MicroStation V7 does not support nested references to references that are merged into the host file.
DWG Model
DGN Design Model
The model in a DWG file is converted into a DGN file.
DWG Layout
DGN Sheet Model
When exporting to V8, any initialized layouts are converted into sheet models in the DGN file. V7 only supports one model. For V7, several DGN files can be exported: one for the model and the other DGN files for any initialized layouts in the DWG file. The layout names get appended to the exported DGN file - Layout1.dgn.
AEC Objects
414 | Chapter 5 D Commands
AEC objects are not supported. Use the EXPORTTOAUTOCAD on page 595 command to convert AEC objects to base ACAD objects before exporting to DGN.
-DGNEXPORT Quick Reference If you enter -dgnexport at the command prompt, the following DGNEXPORT prompts are displayed. Enter DGN file format on page 415 [V7/V8] : Specify whether the file is DGN V7 or V8 Enter filename on page 415 for DGN export <default path\filename>: Specify path and filename of DGN file Specify conversion units on page 415 [Master/Sub] <Master>: Specify m or s, or press ENTER Specify mapping setup on page 416 or [?] <Standard>: Specify mapping setup or ? to specify filter of mapping setup Specify seed file on page 416 or [?] <default path\filename>: Specify path and filename of seed file TIP Create a script using -DGNEXPORT to batch process exporting drawings to DGN files.
File Format Specifies the file format of the DGN file being exported.
Filename The file name can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program. To avoid errors when entering a file name, it is recommended that you specify both the DGN file and path as follows: path\filename or “path\filename” Specify the path and file name of DGN file.
Units Specifies a drawing-units value for scaling the DGN file.
-DGNEXPORT | 415
Mapping Setups Specifies the mapping setup of the selected design model. If ? is entered, another prompt is displayed: Enter mapping setup(s) to list <*>: Specify a filter...mapping setup After specifying a filter, a list of available export mapping setups that match the filter is displayed and will re-prompt.
Seed File Specify a seed file that matches the existing behavior of other commands with filters. If ? is entered, another prompt is displayed: Enter seed file(s) to list <*>: Specify a filter of seed files After specifying a filter, a list of available seed files that match the filter is displayed and will re-prompt.
DGNIMPORT Quick Reference Imports the data from a DGN file into a new DWG file Command entry: dgnimport The Import DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Once you select a DGN file, the Import DGN Settings dialog box on page 417 is displayed. If you enter -dgnimportat the Command prompt, options are displayed at the Command prompt on page 425. See the DGNIMPORT Conversion Table on page 420 for specific details about the scope of importing MicroStation objects and other data. See the DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table on page 423 for specific details about unit conversions when importing MicroStation objects. NOTE The type of plot style drawing (Color-dependent or Named) is based on the value of PSTYLEPOLICY on page 1885.
416 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Import DGN Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: dgnimport Specifies the import settings for a DGN file.
Select a Design Model from the DGN file The DGN design model that you select is imported into the model space of your current DWG file. V8 DGN files might contain multiple design and sheet models. A DGN design model is equivalent to model space, and a DGN sheet model is equivalent to paper space. Because a DWG file can have only one model space, you need to select the design model in the DGN file that you want to import. If a design model is selected and is referenced into a sheet model, then the sheet model is also converted as one or more layouts in the DWG file. Only the sheet models that reference the primary design model are imported. These sheet models are translated to paper space layouts, and will include layout viewports that display each reference to the primary design model.
Import DGN Settings Dialog Box | 417
External DGN References Controls how DGN references are handled in a DWG environment. Any DGN files are supported as references. These file types include, but not limited to, these extensions: .dgn, .dwg,.cel,.s,.h, .cgm,.rdl,.d files. However, DXF files are not supported and are ignored. Translate References to DWG Xrefs All referenced DGN design models, including nested references, are converted into individual DWG files and attached as xrefs in model space. The nesting relationships of these references are maintained. DGN design model references that reference the primary DGN design model, also called circular references or self references, are handled by creating a separate DWG copy of the DGN design model and attaching it to the primary DWG as an xref. Design model references to sheet models, and sheet model references to other sheet models are not supported and are ignored. Unique names for the referenced DWG files are generated by appending the model name to the design file name separated with a dash (-). If necessary, the resulting DWG file names is truncated and one or more of the last characters might be replaced with numerals to make the file name unique. With the following set of options, you can choose whether or not to overwrite external reference files: ■
Prompt to Overwrite
■
Overwrite without Prompting
■
Do Not Overwrite
NOTE If a host folder is read-only, any DWG xrefs will be created in the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder. Ignore All External References Referenced DGN and DWG files that are external to the specified DGN file are not included in the resulting DWG file. If the DGN file has self references or references to other design models contained within the DGN file, these references are included. Attach as DGN Underlay All DGN external references in the DGN file are imported as DGN underlays in the resulting DWG file. Referenced DWG files remain xrefs when imported. NOTE New DWG files are created in this process. These new DWGs are not automatically deleted.
418 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Conversion Units Select the appropriate conversion units for the translation. The imported DGN file contains working units (imperial or metric) called master units and sub-units. The selected working units (master units or sub-units) are converted one-for-one into DWG units. Master Units Specifies that one master unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG drawing unit. Sub Units Specifies that one sub-unit of the imported DGN file converts to one DWG drawing unit. NOTE The master units and the sub-units of the selected DGN file are displayed next to the buttons for reference.
Explode Text Node to Text Elements Text node elements in a DGN file are multiple lines of text stored as one element, and are similar to MTEXT objects. Check this option to maintain text which follows a path. When cleared, multiple lines of text are maintained as a single multiline text object. When checked, multiple lines of text are separated into individual text objects. Select this option to maintain visual fidelity when you import a DGN file that includes text created along a curved path. The first character determines the location and rotation of the text object.
Translate DGN Properties to DWG Properties Selects and manages the mapping setup used on the current DGN import. Select Mapping Setup Displays the currently defined mapping setups. Standard is the default mapping setup which extracts data from the drawing being exported and applies an automatic mapping to DGN layers, linetypes, lineweights, and colors, as shown in the mapping preview. Setup Description Displays the description of the selected mapping setup. Mapping Setups Opens the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 428 where new mapping setups can be created and existing mapping setups can be renamed, modified, or deleted (see DGNMAPPING on page 427). Mapping Preview for Setup Lists all properties of both the imported DGN file in the DGN column and the selected mapping setup in the DWG column.
Import DGN Settings Dialog Box | 419
NOTE External reference files properties are not listed in a mapping preview. See the DGNIMPORT Conversion Table on page 420 for specific details about the scope of importing MicroStation objects and other data. See the DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table on page 423 for specific details about unit conversions when importing MicroStation objects.
DGNIMPORT Conversion Table Quick Reference The following table lists the DGN objects and features that are supported for import, and notes on the scope of the translation.
DGN to DWG Conversion Table MicroStation
AutoCAD
Notes
Geometric Elements
Geometric Objects
The following DGN elements are translated into DWG objects: line, SmartLine, LineString, multiline, shape, complex chain, complex shape, arc, ellipse, curve, B-spline curve, and pattern. Pattern elements are limited to simple pattern styles. Bitonal gradient properties are also supported.
Levels
Layers
DGN levels are mapped automatically into the equivalent DWG layers. Invalid DGN characters in level names are converted to spaces.
Colors
Colors
All colors are translated using RGB values either to the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) or TrueColor index as appropriate.
Line Styles
Linetypes
Only simple line styles using solid lines, dashes, and dots are supported. Unsupported
420 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DGN to DWG Conversion Table MicroStation
AutoCAD
Notes custom line styles are converted into continuous linetypes. Dynamically scaled line styles are converted into fixed-scale linetypes. The resulting linetypes use a scale near the middle of the scaling range of the dynamic line style. NOTE To import standard V7 line styles correctly, you must “Fit View” and “Save Settings” in MicroStation first.
Cells
Blocks
Cells are converted into blocks. Tags that are associated with cells are converted into constant-mode block attributes.
Text Elements, Text Styles
Single-line Text Objects, Multiline Text Objects, Text Styles
Missing SHX text fonts are converted into the AutoCAD text font specified in the FONTALT system variable. The acad.fmp file can be used to map SHX text fonts to DGN text fonts. TrueType fonts and SHX fonts in AutoCAD are exported to MicroStation V7 as Engineering. This can result in many visual differences.
Tables
Tables
Cells that represent tables in DGN are imported as blocks.
Dimensions, Dimension Styles
Dimensions, Dimension Styles
The size, spacing, style, and shape of dimensions may vary slightly. Dimension associativity is maintained whenever possible, and the correct dimension values are always maintained.
Fields
Fields
In general, fields are translated as static text. The exceptions are fields that behave identically in both products. This includes the Date fields CreateDate, SaveDate, and PlotDate, and
DGNIMPORT Conversion Table | 421
DGN to DWG Conversion Table MicroStation
AutoCAD
Notes the Document property fields Author, Filename, and Filesize. Fields are converted to text when “Explode Text Nodes to Text Elements” is checked in the Import DGN Settings dialog box.
Raster Images
Raster Images
These image file types: .bmp, .cal, .tif, .png, .tga, .jpg, .pcx, .gif, .rlc, .bil, and .pct are supported. All other image file types are not.
DGN References
DWG References
.dwg and .dgn file types are supported. Other non-DGN file types such as .cel, .h, .s, .d, .rdl, and .cgm are also supported.
DGN Design Model
DWG Model
The selected design model in a DGN file is converted into a DWG file.
DGN Sheet Model
DWG Layout
Only the sheet models that reference the primary design model are imported. DGN sheet models are translated as layouts in a DWG file.
422 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table Quick Reference The following table lists the linear units used in the resulting DWG file as determined by the master units, sub-units, and unit precision of the DGN file being imported.
DGN to DWG Unit Mapping Table DGN Master Units
DGN Sub Units
DGN Precision
DWG Units Notes
Feet
Inches
Decimal
Engineering
Feet
Inches
Fractional
Architectural
Inches
Inches
Decimal
Engineering
Inches
Inches
Fractional
Architectural
Inches
Any Other Unit
Decimal
Engineering
Master Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog box.
Inches
Any Other Unit
Decimal
Decimal
Sub Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog box.
Inches
Any Other Unit
Fractional
Architectural
Master Units selected in the Im-
DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table | 423
DGN to DWG Unit Mapping Table DGN Master Units
DGN Sub Units
DGN Precision
DWG Units Notes
port DGN Settings dialog box Inches
Any Other Unit
Fractional
Fractional
Inches
Any Other Unit
Decimal
Decimal
Any Other Unit
Any Other Unit
Fractional
Fractional
Sub Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog box
For import of a V7 file, Master unit label will be read and will use the following table to set the Master units based on the unit translation table. The Resolution value will be used to set the Sub units. NOTE Unknown labels will be treated as “meters” and “decimeters.”
V7 DGN Unit Translation Table DGN Label
Name
DGN Label
Name
km
kilometers
mi
miles
m
meters
yd
yard
dc
decimeters
ft
feet
cm
centimeters
in
inches
mm
millimeters
tn
1/10 feet
424 | Chapter 5 D Commands
V7 DGN Unit Translation Table DGN Label
Name
DGN Label
Name
um
micrometers
ti
1/10 inches
ui
micro inches
‘
feet
“
inches
‘
feet
-DGNIMPORT Quick Reference If you enter -dgnimport at the command prompt, the following DGNIMPORT command prompts are displayed. Enter filename on page 425 for DGN Import: Specify path and filename of DGN file Enter name of model or [? on page 426] : Enter the name of the design model in the DGN file, enter ? to list all design models, or press Enter Specify conversion units on page 426 [Master/Sub] <Master>: Specify m or s, or press Enter Specify mapping setup on page 426 or [?] <Standard>: Specify mapping setup or ? to specify filter command TIP Create a script using -DGNIMPORT to batch process importing of DGN files.
Filename The file name can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program.
-DGNIMPORT | 425
To avoid errors when entering a file name, it is recommended that you specify both the DGN file and path as follows: path\filename.dgn or “path\filename.dgn” If you enter a valid DGN file name without a file extension, the program adds the extension and search for the file.
? - List of Design Models Lists all design models contained in the DGN file.
Units Specifies a drawing-units value for scaling the DGN file.
Mapping Setups Specifies the mapping setup of the selected design model. If ? is entered, another prompt is displayed: Enter mapping setup(s) to list <*>: Specify a filter of mapping setup After specifying a filter, a list of available import mapping setups that match the filter is displayed and will re-prompt.
DGNLAYERS Quick Reference Controls the display of layers in a DGN underlay Command entry: dgnlayers After selecting the DGN underlay, the DGN Layers dialog box on page 427 is displayed.
426 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DGN Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: dgnlayers Displays a list of the layers in the DGN underlay and their display status. On Turns the selected layers on and off. Name Displays the name of the layer. To turn a selected layer on or off, click its light bulb icon. You can select several layers by pressing the CTRL or SHIFT keys while clicking layer names. To turn several selected layers on and off, right-click and click Layer(s) On or Layer(s) Off.
DGNMAPPING Quick Reference Allows users to create and edit user-defined DGN mapping setups Command entry: dgnmapping The DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 428 is displayed. It can also be accessed from the Import DGN Settings and Export DGN Settings dialog boxes. The import/export process translates basic DGN/DWG data into the corresponding DWG/DGN data. The Standard (default) mapping translation is used to map DGN levels, linestyles, lineweights, and colors to equivalent DWG layers, linetypes, lineweights, and colors. The DGNMAPPING on page 427command allows users to create, modify, rename, or delete mapping translations based on their company CAD standards to remap DGN level names to appropriate DWG layer names, or remap unsupported DGN linestyles to a DWG linetype, for example, from the acad.lin file, therefore, streamlining the import/export process while minimizing the need for editing the resulting imported or exported files. The list of translation mapping setups is sorted by mapping type, based on where it was accessed from. The Standard mapping setup is always on the top of the list. This mapping setup is the default translation based on the file being imported or exported. It is not editable.
DGN Layers Dialog Box | 427
DGN Mapping Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: dgnmapping Creates new mapping setups, renames mapping setups, modifies mapping setups, and deletes mapping setups.
Current User Displays the user’s login name. Name Lists all mapping setups. If the setup name is too long to be completely displayed, an ellipsis (...) is shown at the end. Type Specifies the mapping setup type: import or export. Description Displays the description of the selected mapping setup.
New Displays the New Mapping Setup dialog box on page 429, in which you can define a new mapping setup.
Rename Starts in-place editing of the currently selected mapping setup (direct editing in the list). NOTE The Rename button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected.
428 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Modify Displays the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box on page 430, in which you can modify the currently selected mapping setup. NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected.
Delete Deletes the currently selected mapping setup. After deletion, the mapping setup directly below the one deleted is selected. If there is none below, the one directly above it is selected. NOTE The Delete button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected.
New Mapping Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: dgnmapping Names the new mapping setup, sets the mapping setup on which to start the new one, and indicates the mapping types to which you want the new style to apply.
Current User Displays the user’s login name. New DGN Mapping Setup Name Specifies the new mapping setup name.
New Mapping Setup Dialog Box | 429
Based On Sets a mapping setup to use as a basis for the new one. For the new mapping setup, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with.
Mapping Type Specifies what type of mapping setup to create. Import Specifies an import mapping type. Export Specifies an export mapping type. Continue button Opens the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box on page 430. Depending on the mapping type selected (Import or Export), the appropriate import/export dialog box is displayed.
Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: dgnmapping Sets the properties for the selected mapping setup. When you choose Continue in the New Mapping Setup dialog box, the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new mapping setup in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the mapping setup that you selected. The Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box includes the following tabs: ■
Layer on page 431
■
Linetype on page 432
■
Lineweight on page 433
■
Color on page 433
430 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Layer The corresponding cells are automatically filled with the default mapping. The properties are added depending on which of the following mapping setup you are currently working on. Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand column), we will use the default system mapping. You can only make changes on the right-hand column of the Layer tab. The left-hand column is not editable. You can only add properties to Layer tab by using the Add Properties buttons. New mapping setup: If you have accessed the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box by creating a new mapping setup from the Import/Export DGN Settings dialog boxes, the rows are populated with all defined levels in the imported DGN file or all defined layers in the current drawing file. Existing mapping setup: If you are editing an existing mapping setup (even if you are editing from the Import (or Export) DGN Settings dialog box), the properties listed in the mapping table are not derived from the imported DGN file or the exported drawing file. The drop-down list in the right column contains all layers or levels.
Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box | 431
Linetype You can map linetypes by editing the right-hand column of the Linetype tab. The left-hand column is not editable. You can only add properties to Linetype tab by using the Add Properties buttons. If you have accessed the Modify DGN Mapping Setups dialog box by creating a new setup from the Export DGN Settings dialog box, the drop-down list includes all defined linetypes in the current drawing file. Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand column), we will use the default system mapping.
You can directly type the linetypes in the cells in the right column. If non-existing linestyles are added to the right column of the mapping table, they are ignored and default to Continuous. If you are in the Modify Mapping Setup dialog box by creating a new setup from the DGN Import Settings dialog box, the linetype drop-down list includes all defined DGN line types in the imported DGN file. When remapping linetypes in the DWG column, only linetypes from the acad.lin and acadiso.lin files are supported (depending on Units or Measurement type of file). Linetypes stored in custom .lin files are not supported.
432 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Lineweight A predefined set of lineweights is displayed. You can select a lineweight or multiple lineweights in the drop-down list and populate all selected cells with them. Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand column), we will use the default system mapping. You can only make changes on the right-hand column of the Lineweight tab. The left-hand column is not editable. You can only add properties to Lineweight tab by using the Add Properties buttons.
It is recommended to use the predefined set of Lineweight as this is the best match between the list of standard DGN lineweights and the list of standard AutoCAD lineweights.
Color The DWG color drop-down list contains the predefined set of colors. It will not list the used colors in the drawing, but colors are added (up to 16 additional colors are added to the standard color list).
Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box | 433
The DGN color drop-down list contains all added DGN colors. The drop-down list is blank if no DGN color has been added yet. Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand column), we will use the default system mapping. The Color tab is the only tab that allows editing on both columns. You can create a customized color mapping. However, it is not necessary to create any user-defined color mapping. The system will match the DGN RGB to the closest ACI when importing. You can select DGN colors or DWG colors from the color drop-down list. To add a color row, use the right-click context menu and select Add Color. You can also add other colors by clicking Select Color (DWG drop-down list item only). This displays the Select Color dialog box on page 435.
Add Properties from DGN File Opens the Add Properties from DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). The level and linestyle properties from the chosen
434 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DGN file are added to the DGN columns in the Modify DGN Mapping Setups dialog box table. In Files of Type, the drop-down list includes MicroStation DGN (*.dgn) and All DGN Files (*.*) to recognize DGN files that have other extensions. NOTE Only unique properties are added to the list in the Layer and Linetype tabs when adding properties from files.
Add Properties from Drawing File Opens the Add Properties from Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). The layer and linetype properties from the chosen DWT/DWG/DWS files are added to the DWG columns in the Modify DGN Mapping Setups dialog box table. In Files of Type, the drop-down list includes the following: ■
Drawing template (*.dwt)
■
Drawing (*.dwg)
■
Standards (*.dws)
Setup Description Specifies a mapping setup description. You can also edit the description for an existing mapping setup. NOTE Only unique properties are added to the list in the Layer and Linetype tabs when adding properties from files.
Select Color Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: dgnmapping
Select Color Dialog Box | 435
The Select Color dialog box is displayed when you click Select Color from the color drop-down list. This dialog contains 3 tabs: ■
Index Color on page 261
■
True Color on page 262
■
Color Books on page 264
DIM and DIM1 Quick Reference Accesses Dimensioning mode Command entry: dim or dim1 Dim: Enter a Dimensioning mode command The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you can use a special set of dimensioning commands on page 436. (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command. Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately return to the Command prompt. To exit Dimensioning mode, enter e or exit, or press ESC.
Dimensioning Mode Commands The following commands are available at the DIM prompt.
Dimensioning mode commands Command
Description
EXIT
Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt. You can also press ESC to exit Dimensioning mode.
REDRAW
Redraws the current viewport.
STYLE
Changes the current text style.
436 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Dimensioning mode commands Command
Description
UNDO or U
Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session.
The following table shows which AutoCAD commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command
Equivalent command
ALIGNED
DIMALIGNED
ANGULAR
DIMANGULAR
BASELINE
DIMBASELINE
CENTER
DIMCENTER
CONTINUE
DIMCONTINUE
DIAMETER
DIMDIAMETER
HOMETEXT
DIMEDIT Home
HORIZONTAL
DIMLINEAR Horizontal
LEADER
LEADER
JOG
DIMJOGGED
NEWTEXT
DIMEDIT New
DIM and DIM1 | 437
Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command
Equivalent command
OBLIQUE
DIMEDIT Oblique
ORDINATE
DIMORDINATE
OVERRIDE
DIMOVERRIDE
RADIUS
DIMRADIUS
RESTORE
- Restore
ROTATED
DIMLINEAR Rotated
SAVE
- Save
STATUS
- Status
TEDIT
DIMTEDIT
TROTATE
DIMEDIT Rotate
UPDATE
-DIMSTYLE Apply
VARIABLES
-DIMSTYLE Variables
VERTICAL
DIMLINEAR Vertical
438 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DIMALIGNED Quick Reference Creates an aligned linear dimension
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Aligned.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Aligned Command entry: dimaligned Specify first extension line origin on page 439 or <select object on page 439>: Specify a point for manual extension lines, or press ENTER for automatic extension lines After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location on page 440 or [Mtext on page 440/Text on page 441/Angle on page 441]: Specify a point or enter an option Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the extension lines.
Extension Line Origin Specifies the first extension line origin (1). You are prompted to specify the second one. Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)
Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. Select object to dimension:
DIMALIGNED | 439
For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, its endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE). This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable.
If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line.
Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED command ends.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 929, which you can use to edit the dimension text. The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets
440 | Chapter 5 D Commands
([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Change Existing Objects” in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, the Dimension Line Location prompt is redisplayed.
DIMALIGNED | 441
DIMANGULAR Quick Reference Creates an angular dimension
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Angular.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Angular Command entry: dimangular Select arc on page 443, circle on page 443, line on page 443, or <specify vertex on page 444>: Select an arc, circle, or line, or press ENTER to create the angular dimension by specifying three points After you define the angle to dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension arc line location on page 444 or [Mtext on page 444/Text on page 445/Angle on page 445/Quadrant on page 445]: Measures the angle between selected objects or 3 points. Objects that can be selected include arcs, circles, and lines, among others.
442 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Arc Selection Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point angular dimension. The center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc endpoints become the origin points of the extension lines.
The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line.
Circle Selection Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. The center of the circle is the angle vertex. Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (2) The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and does not have to lie on the circle.
Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines. Select second line: The program determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned, extension lines are added as needed to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees.
DIMANGULAR | 443
Three-Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify. Specify angle vertex: Specify a point (1) Specify first angle endpoint: Specify a point (2) Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (3) The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints. If you need extension lines, the endpoints are used as origin points.
The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line.
Dimension Arc Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR ends.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the text, enter the new text, and then click OK. For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Change Existing Objects” in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements.
444 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
Quadrant Specifies the quadrant that the dimension should be locked to. When quadrant behavior is on, the dimension line is extended past the extension line when the dimension text is positioned outside of the angular dimension. Specify quadrant: Specify a quadrant
DIMANGULAR | 445
DIMARC Quick Reference Creates an arc length dimension
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Arc Length.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Arc Length Command entry: dimarc Select arc or polyline arc segment: Use an object selection method Specify arc length dimension location on page 446 or [Mtext on page 447/Text on page 447/Angle on page 447/Partial on page 447/Leader on page 448]: Specify a point or enter an option Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc segment. The extension lines of an arc length dimension can be orthogonal or radial. An arc symbol is displayed either above or preceding the dimension text.
Arc Length Dimension Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction of the extension lines.
446 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the text, enter the new text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Change Existing Objects” in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
Partial Reduces the length of the arc length dimension. Specify first point for arc length dimension: Specify a point on the arc where the arc length dimension should begin.
DIMARC | 447
Specify second point for arc length dimension: Specify a point on the arc where the arc length dimension should end.
Leader Adds a leader object. This option is displayed only if the arc (or arc segment) is greater than 90 degrees. The leader is drawn radially, pointing towards the center of the arc being dimensioned. Specify arc length dimension location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Partial/No leader]: Specify a point or enter an option. The leader is created automatically. The No Leader option cancels the Leader option before the leader is created. To remove a leader, delete the arc length dimension and recreate it without the leader option.
DIMBASELINE Quick Reference Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimension or a selected dimension
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Baseline.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Baseline Command entry: dimbaseline The default spacing between baseline dimensions can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Lines tab, Baseline Spacing (DIMDLI system variable).
448 | Chapter 5 D Commands
If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or angular, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a second extension line origin on page 449 or [Undo on page 450/Select on page 450] <Select>: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed: Specify feature location on page 450 or [Undo/Select] <Select>: To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
Second Extension Line Origin By default, the first extension line of the base dimension is used as the extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To override this default behavior, explicitly select the base dimension; the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point of the selection. When you select a second point, the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press ENTER. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
DIMBASELINE | 449
Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location, the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press ENTER. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
Undo Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session.
Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. After you select a base dimension, the Specify Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed.
DIMBREAK Quick Reference Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other objects
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Break.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Break Command entry: dimbreak Dimension breaks can be added to linear, angular, and ordinate dimensions, among others.
450 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Select a dimension to add/remove break or [Multiple on page 451]: Select a dimension, or enter m and press ENTER After you select a dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Select object to break dimension or [Auto on page 451/Manual on page 452/Remove on page 451] : Select an object that intersects the dimension or extension lines of the selected dimension, enter an option, or press ENTER After you select an object to break the dimension with, the following prompt is displayed: Select object to break dimension: Select an object that passes through the dimension or press ENTER to end the command NOTE Dimension breaks can be added to dimensions for objects that do not intersect the dimension or extension lines using the by Manual option.
Multiple Specifies multiple dimensions to add breaks to or remove breaks from. Select dimensions: Use an object selection method and press ENTER Select object to break dimensions or [Auto on page 451/Remove on page 451] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Auto Places dimension breaks automatically at all the intersection points of the objects that intersect the selected dimension. Any dimension break created using this option is updated automatically when the dimension or an intersecting object is modified. When a new object is drawn over the top of a dimension that has any dimension breaks, no new dimension breaks are automatically applied at the intersecting points along the dimension object. To add the new dimension breaks, must be run the command again.
Remove Removes all dimension breaks from the selected dimensions.
DIMBREAK | 451
Manual Places a dimension break manually. You specify two points on the dimension or extension lines for the location of the break. Any dimension break that is created using this option is not updated if the dimension or intersecting objects are modified. You can only place a single manual dimension break at a time with this option. Specify first break point: Specify a point Specify second break point: Specify a point
DIMCENTER Quick Reference Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Center Mark.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Center Mark Command entry: dimcenter Select arc or circle: Use an object selection method The default sizes of the center mark components can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Symbols and Arrows tab, Center Marks (DIMCEN system variable).
You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size when you set up the dimension style. See DIMSTYLE. You can also change center mark settings using the DIMCEN system variable.
452 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DIMCONTINUE Quick Reference Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension that starts from the second extension line of the previous or selected dimension
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Continue.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Continue Command entry: dimcontinue The dimension lines are lined up automatically.
If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the continued dimension. Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or angular, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a second extension line origin on page 454 or [Undo on page 455/Select on page 455] <Select>: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:
DIMCONTINUE | 453
Specify feature location on page 454 or [Undo/Select] <Select>: To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
Second Extension Line Origin Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the first extension line origin of the next dimension. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. After you select a continued dimension, the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press ENTER. Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location, the continued dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press ENTER. Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
454 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Undo Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session.
Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press ESC.
DIMDIAMETER Quick Reference Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Diameter.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Diameter Command entry: dimdiameter Select arc or circle: Measures the diameter of a selected circle or arc, and displays the dimension text with a diameter symbol in front of it. You can use grips to easily reposition the resulting diameter dimension.
Specify dimension line location on page 456 or [Mtext on page 456/Text on page 456/Angle on page 456]: Specify a point or enter an option
DIMDIAMETER | 455
Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD automatically draws an arc extension line.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the text, enter the new text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Change Existing Objects” in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension text.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45. After you specify the angle, the Dimension Line Location prompt is redisplayed.
456 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DIMDISASSOCIATE Quick Reference Removes associativity from selected dimensions Command entry: dimdisassociate Select dimensions to disassociate: Select one or more dimensions and then press ENTER DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensions that are not on locked layers, and that are not in a different space than the current space (for example, if model space is active, associative dimensions in paper space are excluded). DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and the number that are disassociated.
DIMEDIT Quick Reference Edits dimension text and extension lines
Toolbar: Dimension Command entry: dimedit Enter type of dimension editing [Home on page 457/New on page 458/Rotate on page 458/Oblique on page 459] : Enter an option or press ENTER Rotates, modifies, or restores dimension text. Changes the oblique angle of extension lines. The companion command that moves text and the dimension line is DIMTEDIT. Home Moves rotated dimension text back to its default position. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select dimension objects
DIMDISASSOCIATE | 457
The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its dimension style. New Changes dimension text using the In-Place Text Editor on page 929.
The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Change Existing Objects in the User's Guide. Rotate Rotates dimension text. This option is similar to the Angle option of DIMTEDIT. Enter text angle: Entering 0 places the text in its default orientation, which is determined by the vertical and horizontal text settings on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this orientation. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select dimension objects
458 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Oblique Adjusts the oblique angle of the extension lines for linear dimensions. Linear dimensions are created with extension lines perpendicular to the direction of the dimension line. The Oblique option is useful when extension lines conflict with other features of the drawing. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select dimension objects Enter oblique angle (press ENTER for none): Enter an angle or press ENTER
DIMINSPECT Quick Reference Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Inspection Command entry: diminspect
DIMINSPECT | 459
Inspection dimensions specify how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range.
The Inspection Dimension Dialog Box on page 460 is displayed and allows you to add or remove inspection dimensions from an existing dimension. Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range. If you enter -diminspect at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 462.
Inspection Dimension Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Inspection Command entry: diminspect Allows you to add or remove an inspection dimension from selected dimensions. Use the Shape and Inspection Label/Rate settings to the appearance of the frame of the inspection dimension and the inspection rate value.
460 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Select Dimensions Specifies the dimensions that an inspection dimension should be added to or removed from. You can select dimensions before or after the Inspection Dimension dialog box is displayed. To select dimensions when the Inspection Dimension dialog box is displayed, click Select Dimensions. The dialog box temporarily closes. When you finish selecting dimensions, press ENTER. The Inspection Dimension dialog box is redisplayed.
Remove Inspection Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimension.
Shape Controls the shape of the frame that is drawn around the label, dimension value, and inspection rate of the inspection dimension. Round Creates a frame with semi-circles on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. Angular Creates a frame with lines that form a 90-degree angle on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. None Specifies that no frame is drawn around the values; the fields are not separated by vertical lines.
Inspection Dimension Dialog Box | 461
Label/Inspection Rate Specifies the label text and inspection rate for an inspection dimension. Label Turns the display of the label field on and off. Label Value Specifies the label text. The label is displayed in the leftmost section of the inspection dimension when the Label check box is selected. Inspection Rate Turns the display of the rate field on and off. Inspection Rate Value Specifies how frequent a part should be inspected. The value is expressed as a percentage, and the valid range is 0 to 100. The inspection rate is displayed in the rightmost section of the inspection dimension when the Inspection Rate check box is selected.
-DIMINSPECT Quick Reference If you enter -diminspect at the command prompt, the following DIMINSPECT command prompts are displayed. Add inspection data on page 462 or [Remove on page 463] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Add Adds an inspection dimension to the selected dimensions. Select dimensions: Use an object selection method to select dimension objects and press ENTER when you finish After you select dimension objects, the following prompt is displayed: Enter shape option [Round/Angular/None] : Enter an option or press ENTER Round Creates a frame with semi-circles on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. Angular Creates a frame with lines that form a 90-degree angle on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines.
462 | Chapter 5 D Commands
None Specifies that no frame is drawn around the values; the fields are not separated by vertical lines. After you specify a frame shape, the following prompt is displayed: Enter label data or : Enter a value for the inspection label or press ENTER None No label is displayed with the inspection dimension. After you specify a label, the following prompt is displayed: Enter inspection rate <100%>: Enter a value for the inspection rate or press ENTER
Remove Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimensions. Select dimensions: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish After you press ENTER, a status string of the number of inspection dimensions that were removed is displayed at the command prompt. n of inspection removed n represents the number of inspections removed from the selected dimension objects.
DIMJOGGED Quick Reference Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Jogged Command entry: dimjogged Select arc or circle: Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment DIMJOGGED measures the radius of the selected object and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. The origin point of the dimension line can be specified at any convenient location. NOTE Jogged radius dimensions are also called foreshortened radius dimensions.
DIMJOGGED | 463
Creates jogged radius dimensions when the center of an arc or circle is located off the layout and cannot be displayed in its true location. The origin point of the dimension can be specified at a more convenient location called the center location override.
Specify center location override: Specify a point Accepts a new center point for a jogged radius dimension that takes the place of the true center point of the arc or circle. Specify dimension line location on page 464 or [Mtext on page 464/Text on page 464/Angle on page 465]: Specify a point or enter an option
Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD automatically draws an arc extension line.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the text, enter the new text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Change Existing Objects” in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
464 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45. Also determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. Specify jog location: Specify a point Locates the middle point of the jog. The transverse angle of the jog is determined by the Dimension Style Manager.
DIMJOGLINE Quick Reference Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Jog Line.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Jogged Linear Command entry: dimjogline Select dimension to add jog on page 466 or [Remove on page 466]: Select a linear or aligned dimension
DIMJOGLINE | 465
Jog lines in a dimension indicate a break in the objects being dimensioned. The dimension value represents the actual distance, rather than the measured distance in the drawing.
Add Jog Specifies the linear or aligned dimension to which to add a jog. You are prompted for the location of the jog. Specify jog location (or press ENTER): Specify a point for the location of the jog, or press ENTER to place the jog at the midpoint between the dimension text and the first extension line or the midpoint of the dimension line based on the location of the dimension text
Remove Specifies the linear or aligned dimension from which to remove the jog. Select jog to remove: Select a linear or aligned dimension
DIMLINEAR Quick Reference Creates a linear dimension
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Linear.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Linear Command entry: dimlinear Creates a linear dimension with a horizontal, vertical, or rotated dimension line.
466 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Specify first extension line origin on page 467 or <select object on page 470>: Specify a point or press ENTER to select an object to dimension After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location on page 467 or [Mtext on page 468/Text on page 468/Angle on page 469/Horizontal on page 469/Vertical on page 469/Rotated on page 470]: Specify a point or enter an option
First Extension Line Origin Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first. Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)
Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn.
DIMLINEAR | 467
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the text, enter the new text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Change Existing Objects in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
468 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 90 degrees, enter 90.
Horizontal Creates horizontal linear dimensions. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn. Mtext, Text, Angle These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command.
Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
DIMLINEAR | 469
Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn. Mtext, Text, Angle These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command.
Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions. Specify angle of dimension line <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. Select object to dimension: For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable.
470 | Chapter 5 D Commands
If you select a circle, the diameter endpoints are used as the origins of the extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the north or south quadrant point, a horizontal dimension is drawn. When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant point, a vertical dimension is drawn.
DIMORDINATE Quick Reference Creates ordinate dimensions
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Ordinate.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Ordinate Command entry: dimordinate
DIMORDINATE | 471
Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object Specify leader endpoint on page 472 or [Xdatum on page 472/Ydatum on page 472/Mtext on page 472/Text on page 473/Angle on page 473]: Specify a point or enter an option Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum.
Leader Endpoint Specification Uses the difference between the feature location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or a Y ordinate dimension. If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater, the dimension measures the X ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate. Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed, where you can specify the endpoint.
Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed, where you can specify the endpoint.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 929, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503.
472 | Chapter 5 D Commands
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the text, enter the new text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Change Existing Objects in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. After you choose OK, the Leader Endpoint prompt is redisplayed. Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. After you press ENTER, the Leader Endpoint prompt is redisplayed. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45. After you specify the angle, the Leader Endpoint prompt is redisplayed.
DIMOVERRIDE Quick Reference Overrides dimensioning system variables
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Override. Menu: Dimension ➤ Override Command entry: dimoverride Enter dimension variable name to override on page 474 or [Clear overrides on page 474]: Enter the name of a dimension variable, or enter c
DIMOVERRIDE | 473
Dimension Variable Name to Override Overrides the value of the dimensioning system variable you specify. Enter new value for dimension variable <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER If you enter a new value, the Dimension Variable Name to Override prompt is redisplayed. If you press ENTER, you are prompted to select the dimensions. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the dimensions The overrides to the selected dimensions are applied. Clear Overrides Clears any overrides on selected dimensions. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the dimensions The overrides are cleared, and the dimension objects return to the settings defined by their dimension style.
DIMRADIUS Quick Reference Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Radius.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Radius Command entry: dimradius Select arc or circle: Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting radius dimension easily.
Specify dimension line location on page 475 or [Mtext on page 475/Text on page 475/Angle on page 475]: Specify a point or enter an option
474 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD automatically draws an arc extension line.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor on page 929, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete text, enter the new text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Change Existing Objects” in the User's Guide. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
DIMRADIUS | 475
DIMREASSOCIATE Quick Reference Associates selected dimensions to geometric objects
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Reassociate. Menu: Dimension ➤ Reassociate Dimensions Command entry: dimreassociate Select dimensions to reassociate: Select dimension objects Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is displayed for each association point prompt. If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears as an X; if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside a box. NOTE The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse. Press ESC to terminate the command without losing the changes that were already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed dimensions. The prompts for the different types of dimensions are: Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any Aligned Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any Angular (Three Point) Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] : Specify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt
476 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Specify first angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any Angular (Two Line) Select first line : Select a line, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Select second line : Select another line, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any Diameter Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any Leader Specify leader association point : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any Ordinate Specify feature location : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any Radius Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any NOTE DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension. Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings.
DIMREGEN Quick Reference Updates the locations of all associative dimensions Command entry: dimregen The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated. Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in the following three cases: ■
After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model space active; update associative dimensions created in paper space.
■
After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version of the program; update associative dimensions if the dimensioned objects have been modified.
DIMREGEN | 477
■
After opening a drawing containing external references that are dimensioned in the current drawing; update associative dimensions if the associated external reference geometry has been modified.
DIMSPACE Quick Reference Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Adjust Space.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Space Command entry: dimspace Select base dimension: Select a parallel linear or angular dimension Select dimensions to space: Select a parallel linear or angular dimension to equally space from the base dimension and press ENTER Enter value on page 478 or [Auto on page 479] : Specify a spacing distance or press ENTER The spacing between parallel linear dimensions, or between angular dimensions that share a common vertex is adjusted automatically. The dimension lines are spaced equally. You can also align linear or angular dimensions by using a spacing value of 0.
Enter Spacing Value Specifies a spacing value to equally space the selected dimensions from the base dimension. For example, if you enter a value of 0.5000, all selected dimensions will be separated by a distance of 0.5000. NOTE You can use a spacing value of 0 (zero) to align selected linear and angular dimensions end to end.
478 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Auto Calculates the spacing distance automatically based on the text height specified in the dimension style of the selected base dimension. The resulting spacing value is twice the height of the dimension text.
DIMSTYLE Quick Reference Creates and modifies dimension styles
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
Toolbar: Styles Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Style Command entry: dimstyle A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that control the appearance of dimensions. You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to standards. The Dimension Style Manager on page 479 is displayed. If you enter -dimstyle at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 508.
Dimension Style Manager Quick Reference
Toolbar: Styles
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension Style.
DIMSTYLE | 479
Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Command entry: dimstyle Creates new styles, sets the current style, modifies styles, sets overrides on the current style, and compares styles.
Current Dimension Style Displays the name of the dimension style that is current. The default dimension style is STANDARD. The current style is applied to dimensions you create.
Styles Lists dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted. Right-click in the list to display a shortcut menu with options to set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a style that is current
or in use in the current drawing. A that the style is .
icon before the style name indicates
The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed. To make a style current, select it and click Set Current. Unless you select Don't List Styles in Xrefs, dimension styles are displayed in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally referenced named objects. (See “Overview of Referenced Drawings (Xrefs)” in the User's Guide.) Although you cannot change, rename, or make current externally referenced dimension styles, you can create new styles based on them.
480 | Chapter 5 D Commands
List Controls the display of styles in the Styles list. Select All Styles if you want to see all dimension styles in a drawing. Select Styles in Use if you want to see only the dimension styles currently used by dimensions in the drawing.
Don't List Styles in Xrefs When selected, suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings in the Styles list.
Preview Shows a graphic representation of the style selected in the Styles list.
Description Describes the style selected in the Styles list relative to the current style. If the description is longer than the space provided, you can click in the pane and use arrow keys to scroll down.
Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current. The current style is applied to dimensions you create.
New Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box on page 482, in which you can define a new dimension style.
Modify Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box on page 483, in which you can modify dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box.
Override Displays the Override Current Style dialog box on page 483, in which you can set temporary overrides to dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. Overrides are displayed as unsaved changes under the dimension style in the Styles list.
Dimension Style Manager | 481
Compare Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box on page 506, in which you can compare two dimension styles or list all the properties of one dimension style.
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Styles Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Style Command entry: dimstyle Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one, and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply.
New Style Name Specifies the new dimension style name. Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new style, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with. Annotative Specifies that the dimension style is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Use For Creates a dimension substyle that applies only to specific dimension types. For example, you could create a version of the STANDARD dimension style to be used only for diameter dimensions. Continue Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box on page 483, in which you define the new dimension style properties.
482 | Chapter 5 D Commands
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes Quick Reference
Toolbar: Styles Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Style Command entry: dimstyle Set properties for dimension styles. When you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box. Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog box. The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding an existing dimension style rather than creating a new one. The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option. ■
Lines on page 483
■
Symbols and Arrows on page 487
■
Text on page 490
■
Fit on page 494
■
Primary Units on page 497
■
Alternate Units on page 500
■
Tolerances on page 502
Lines Tab Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 483
Dimension Lines Sets the dimension line properties. Color Displays and sets the color for the dimension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRD system variable) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. Linetype Sets the linetype of the dimension line. (DIMLTYPE system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line. (DIMLWD system variable) Extend Beyond Ticks Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique, architectural, tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. (DIMDLE system variable)
484 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Baseline Spacing Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline dimension. Enter a distance. For information about baseline dimensions, see DIMBASELINE. (DIMDLI system variable.)
Suppress Suppresses display of dimension lines. Dim Line 1 suppresses the first dimension line; Dim Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line. (DIMSD1 and DIMSD2 system variables)
Extension Lines Controls the appearance of the extension lines. Color Sets the color for the extension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRE system variable.) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. Linetype Ext 1 Sets the linetype of the first extension line. (DIMLTEX1 system variable) Linetype Ext 2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line. (DIMLTEX2 system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the extension line. (DIMLWE system variable) Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines. Ext Line 1 suppresses the first extension line; Ext Line 2 suppresses the second extension line. (DIMSE1 and DIMSE2 system variables)
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 485
Extend Beyond Dim Lines Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above the dimension line. (DIMEXE system variable)
Offset From Origin Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the points on the drawing that define the dimension. (DIMEXO system variable)
Fixed Length Extension Lines Enables fixed length extension lines. (DIMFXLON system variable) Length Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. (DIMFXL system variable)
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
486 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Symbols and Arrows Tab Sets the format and placement for arrowheads, center marks, arc length symbols, and jogged radius dimensions.
Arrowheads Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads. NOTE blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders. First Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it. (DIMBLK1 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Second Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line. (DIMBLK2 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Leader Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. (DIMLDRBLK system variable)
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 487
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Arrow Size Displays and sets the size of arrowheads. (DIMASZ system variable)
Center Marks Controls the appearance of center marks and centerlines for diameter and radial dimensions. The DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands use center marks and centerlines. For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS, the center mark is drawn only if you place the dimension line outside the circle or arc. None Creates no center mark or centerline. The value is stored as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable. Mark Creates a center mark. The size of the center mark is stored as a positive value in the DIMCEN system variable. Line Creates a centerline. The size of the centerline is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system variable. Size Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN system variable)
Dimension Break Controls the gap width of dimension breaks. Break Size Displays and sets the size of the gap used for dimension breaks.
Arc Length Symbol Controls the display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension. (DIMARCSYM system variable) Preceding Dimension Text Places arc length symbols before the dimension text. (DIMARCSYM system variable) Above Dimension Text Places arc length symbols above the dimension text. (DIMARCSYM system variable) None Suppresses the display of arc length symbols. (DIMARCSYM system variable)
488 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Radius Jog Dimensions Controls the display of jogged (zigzag) radius dimensions. Jogged radius dimensions are often created when the center point of a circle or arc is located off the page. Jog Angle Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension. (DIMJOGANG system variable)
Linear Jog Dimensions Controls the display of the jog for linear dimensions. Jog lines are often added to linear dimensions when the actual measurement is not accurately represent by the dimension. Typically the actual measurement is smaller than the desired value. Linear Jog Size Determines the height of the of the jog, which is determined by the distance between the two vertices of the angles that make up the jog.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 489
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
Text Tab Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text.
Text Appearance Controls the dimension text format and size. Text Style Displays and sets the current style for dimension text. Select a style from the list. To create and modify styles for dimension text, choose the [...] button next to the list. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box on page 1438, in which you can define or modify text styles. Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. You can also enter color name or number. (DIMCLRT system variable) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.
490 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Fill Color Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. You can also enter color name or number. (DIMTFILL and DIMTFILLCLR system variables) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. Text Height Sets the height of the current dimension text style. Enter a value in the text box. If a fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text style height is greater than 0), that height overrides the text height set here. If you want to use the height set on the Text tab, make sure the text height in the Text Style is set to 0. (DIMTXT system variable) Fraction Height Scale Sets the scale of fractions relative to dimension text. This option is available only when Fractional is selected as the Unit Format on the Primary Units tab. The value entered here is multiplied by the text height to determine the height of dimension fractions relative to dimension text. (DIMTFAC system variable) Draw Frame Around Text When selected, draws a frame around dimension text. Selecting this option changes the value stored in the DIMGAP system variable to a negative value.
Text Placement Controls the placement of dimension text. Vertical Controls the vertical placement of dimension text in relation to the dimension line. (DIMTAD system variable) Vertical position options include the following: ■
Centered: Centers the dimension text between the two parts of the dimension line.
■
Above: Places the dimension text above the dimension line. The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap. See the Offset from Dim Line option.
■
Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the dimension line farthest away from the first defining point.
■
JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 491
Horizontal Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text along the dimension line, in relation to the extension lines. (DIMJUST system variable) Horizontal position options include the following: ■
Centered: Centers the dimension text along the dimension line between the extension lines.
■
At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first extension line along the dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See Arrowheads and Offset from Dim Line.
■
At Ext Line 2: Right-justifies the text with the second extension line along the dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See Arrowheads and Offset from Dim Line.
■
Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the first extension line.
■
Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the second extension line.
492 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Offset from Dim Line Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line is broken to accommodate the dimension text. This value is also used as the minimum length required for dimension line segments. Text is positioned inside the extension lines only if the resulting segments are at least as long as the text gap. Text above or below the dimension line is placed inside only if the arrowheads, dimension text, and a margin leave enough room for the text gap. (DIMGAP system variable)
Text Alignment Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables) Horizontal Places text in a horizontal position.
Aligned with Dimension Line Aligns text with the dimension line. ISO Standard Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside the extension lines, but aligns it horizontally when text is outside the extension lines.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 493
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
Fit Tab Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line.
Fit Options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines.
494 | Chapter 5 D Commands
When space is available, text and arrowheads are placed between the extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables) Either Text or Arrows (Best Fit) Moves either the text or the arrowheads outside the extension lines based on the best fit (DIMATFIT system variable). ■
When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. Otherwise, either the text or the arrowheads are moved based on the best fit.
■
When enough space is available for text only, places text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside the extension lines.
■
When enough space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the extension lines and places text outside the extension lines.
■
When space is available for neither text nor arrowheads, places them both outside the extension lines.
Arrows Moves arrowheads outside the extension lines first, then text (DIMATFIT system variable). ■
When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines.
■
When space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the extension lines and places text outside them.
■
When not enough space is available for arrowheads, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.
Text Moves text outside the extension lines first, then arrowheads (DIMATFIT system variable). ■
When space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines.
■
When space is available for text only, places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them.
■
When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.
Both Text and Arrows When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads, moves both outside the extension lines (DIMATFIT system variable).
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 495
Always Keep Text Between Ext Lines Always places text between extension lines. (DIMTIX system variable)
Suppress Arrows If They Don't Fit Inside Extension Lines Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. (DIMSOXD system variable)
Text Placement Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default position, that is, the position defined by the dimension style. (DIMTMOVE system variable)
Beside the Dimension Line If selected, moves the dimension line whenever dimension text is moved. (DIMTMOVE system variable)
Over the Dimension Line, with Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. If text is moved away from the dimension line, a leader line is created connecting the text to the dimension line. The leader line is omitted when text is too close to the dimension line. (DIMTMOVE system variable)
Over the Dimension Line, Without Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. Text that is moved away from the dimension line is not connected to the dimension line with a leader. (DIMTMOVE system variable)
496 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
Scale for Dimension Features Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling. Annotative Specifies that the dimension is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Scale Dimensions To Layout Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. (DIMSCALE system variable) When you work in paper space, but not in a model space viewport, or when TILEMODE is set to 1, the default scale factor of 1.0 is used or the DIMSCALE system variable. Use Overall Scale Of Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify size, distance, or spacing, including text and arrowhead sizes. This scale does not change dimension measurement values. (DIMSCALE system variable)
Fine Tuning Provides additional options for placing dimension text. Place Text Manually Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line Location prompt. (DIMUPT system variable) Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when the arrowheads are placed outside the measured points. (DIMTOFL system variable)
Primary Units Tab Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for dimension text.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 497
Linear Dimensions Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions. Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. (DIMLUNIT system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text. (DIMDEC system variable) Fraction Format Sets the format for fractions. (DIMFRAC system variable) Decimal Separator Sets the separator for decimal formats. (DIMDSEP system variable) Round Off Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all dimension types except Angular. If you enter a value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you enter a value of 1.0, all dimension distances are rounded to the nearest integer. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. (DIMRND system variable) Prefix Includes a prefix in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. When you enter a prefix, it overrides any default prefixes such as those used in diameter and radius dimensioning. (DIMPOST system variable)
498 | Chapter 5 D Commands
If you specify tolerances, the prefix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. Suffix Includes a suffix in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMPOST system variable)
If you specify tolerances, the suffix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503. Measurement Scale Defines linear scale options. Applies primarily to legacy drawings. Scale Factor: Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. It is recommended that you do not change this value from the default value of 1.00. For example, if you enter 2, the dimension for a 1-inch line is displayed as two inches. The value does not apply to angular dimensions and is not applied to rounding values or to plus or minus tolerance values. (DIMLFAC system variable) Apply to Layout Dimensions Only: Applies the measurement scale factor only to dimensions created in layout viewports. Except when using nonassociative dimensions, this setting should remain unchecked. (DIMLFAC system variable) Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMZIN system variable) Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP® rtos and angtos functions. Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 499
0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Angular Dimensions Displays and sets the current angle format for angular dimensions. Units Format Sets the angular units format. (DIMAUNIT system variable) Precision Sets the number of decimal places for angular dimensions. DIMADEC system variable) Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros. (DIMAZIN system variable) Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in angular decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
Alternate Units Tab Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision.
500 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Display Alternate Units Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. Sets the DIMALT system variable to 1.
Alternate Units Displays and sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular. Unit Format Sets the unit format for alternate units. (DIMALTU system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Sets the number of decimal places for alternate units. (DIMALTD system variable) Multiplier for Alternate Units Specifies the multiplier used as the conversion factor between primary and alternate units. For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 25.4. The value has no effect on angular dimensions, and it is not applied to the rounding value or the plus or minus tolerance values. (DIMALTF system variable) Round Distances To Sets rounding rules for alternate units for all dimension types except Angular. If you enter a value of 0.25, all alternate measurements are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you enter a value of 1.0, all dimension measurements are rounded to the nearest integer. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. (DIMALTRND system variable) Prefix Includes a prefix in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. (DIMAPOST system variable) For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503.
Suffix Includes a suffix in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text cm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMAPOST system variable) For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1503.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 501
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMALTZ system variable) Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Placement Controls the placement of alternate units in dimension text. (DIMAPOST system variable) After Primary Value Places alternate units after the primary units in dimension text. Below Primary Value Places alternate units below the primary units in dimension text.
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
Tolerances Tab Controls the display and format of dimension text tolerances.
502 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Tolerance Format Controls the tolerance format. Method Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. (DIMTOL system variable) ■
None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0.
■
Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which a single value of variation is applied to the dimension measurement. A plus-or-minus sign appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
■
Deviation: Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression. Different plus and minus values of variation are applied to the dimension measurement. A plus sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in Upper Value, and a minus sign (-) precedes the tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 503
■
Limits: Creates a limit dimension. A maximum and a minimum value are displayed, one over the other. The maximum value is the dimension value plus the value entered in Upper Value. The minimum value is the dimension value minus the value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 1.
■
Basic: Creates a basic dimension, which displays a box around the full extents of the dimension. The distance between the text and the box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP system variable.
Precision Sets the number of decimal places. (DIMTDEC system variable) Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in Method, this value is used for the tolerance. (DIMTP system variable) Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. (DIMTM system variable) Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text. The ratio of the tolerance height to the main dimension text height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system variable. Vertical Position Controls text justification for symmetrical and deviation tolerances. ■
Top: Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 2.
504 | Chapter 5 D Commands
■
Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1.
■
Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0.
Tolerance Alignment Controls the alignment of upper and lower tolerance values when stacked Align Decimal Separators Values are stacked by their decimal separators. Align Operational Symbols Values are stacked by their operational symbols.
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMTZIN system variable) Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP®rtos and angtos functions. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 505
0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Alternate Unit Tolerance Formats alternate tolerance units. Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places. (DIMALTTD system variable)
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMALTTZ system variable) Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Styles Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Style Command entry: dimstyle
506 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of one style. You can print the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and then paste to other MicrosoftWindowsapplications.
Compare Specifies the first dimension style for the comparison. With Specifies the second dimension style for the comparison. If you set the second style to <none> or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed. Comparison results are displayed automatically under the following headings: ■
Description of the dimension style property
■
System variable that controls the property
■
System variable values of style properties that differ for each dimension style
Results Displays the results of the dimension style comparison. If you compare two different styles, the properties that differ are displayed. If you set the second style to <none> or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed. Print to Clipboard button Copies the results of the comparison to the Clipboard. You can then paste the results to other Windows applications, such as word processors and spreadsheets.
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box | 507
-DIMSTYLE Quick Reference If you enter -dimstyle at the command prompt, the following DIMSTYLE command prompts are displayed. Current dimension style: <current> Annotative: <current> Enter a dimension style option [ANnotative on page 508/Save on page 508/Restore on page 509/STatus on page 510/Variables on page 510/Apply on page 510/? on page 511] : Enter an option or press ENTER You can save or restore dimensioning system variables to a selected dimension style.
Annotative Creates an dimension style. Create annotative dimension style [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press ENTER
Save Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension style. Enter name for new dimension style or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Name Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a new dimension style using the name you enter. The new dimension style becomes the current one. If you enter the name of an existing dimension style, the following prompts are displayed: That name is already in use, redefine it? : Enter y or press ENTER If you enter y, associative dimensions that use the redefined dimension style are regenerated. To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to save and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Name for New Dimension Style prompt. Only settings that differ are
508 | Chapter 5 D Commands
displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. After the differences are displayed, the previous prompt returns.
?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card characters, or press ENTER to list all dimension styles After the named dimension styles are listed, the previous prompt returns.
Restore Restores dimensioning system variable settings to those of a selected dimension style. Enter dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?, or press ENTER to select a dimension
Name Makes the dimension style you enter the current dimension style. To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to restore and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. Only settings that differ are displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. After the differences are displayed, the previous prompt returns.
?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER After the dimension styles are listed, the previous prompt returns.
Select Dimension Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style. Select dimension:
-DIMSTYLE | 509
Status Displays the current values of all dimension system variables. After listing the variables, DIMSTYLE ends.
Variables Lists the dimension system variable settings of a dimension style or selected dimensions without modifying the current settings. Enter a dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?, or press ENTER to select dimensions
Name Lists the settings of dimension system variables for the dimension style name you enter. After listing the variables, DIMSTYLE ends. To display the differences between a particular dimension style and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. Only settings that differ are displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. After the differences are displayed, the previous prompt returns.
?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER After the dimension styles are listed, the previous prompt returns.
Select Dimension Lists the dimension style and any dimension overrides for the dimension object you select. Select dimension:
Apply Applies the current dimensioning system variable settings to selected dimension objects, permanently overriding any existing dimension styles applied to these objects. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select a dimension object
510 | Chapter 5 D Commands
The dimension line spacing between existing baseline dimensions is not updated (see the DIMDLI system variable); dimension text variable settings do not update existing leader text.
?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card characters, or press ENTER
DIMTEDIT Quick Reference Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Align Text.
Toolbar: Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Align Text Command entry: dimtedit Select dimension: Select a dimension object You are prompted for the new location of the dimension text. Specify new location for dimension text on page 511 or [Left on page 511/Right on page 512/Center on page 512/Home on page 512/Angle on page 512]: Specify a point or enter an option The companion command that edits the dimension text and changes the extension line angle is DIMEDIT. Location for Dimension Text Updates the location of the dimension text dynamically as you drag it. To determine whether text appears above, below, or in the middle of the dimension line, use the Text tab in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog box. Left Left-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radial, and diameter dimensions.
DIMTEDIT | 511
Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radial, and diameter dimensions.
Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line. Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Enter text angle:
The center point of the text does not change. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated, the orientation set by the text angle is retained. Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation.
512 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DIST Quick Reference Measures the distance and angle between two points
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Distance.
Toolbar: Inquiry Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance Command entry: dist (or 'dist for transparent use) Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Distance = calculated distance, Angle in XY plane = angle, Angle from XY plane = angle Delta X = change in X, Delta Y = change in Y, Delta Z = change in Z The true 3D distance between points is reported. The angle in the XY plane is relative to the current X axis. The angle from the XY plane is relative to the current XY plane. DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordinate value. The distance is displayed using the current units format.
NOTE When you work on a layout in paper space, distances are normally reported in paper space units. However, if you use the DIST command with object snaps on model space objects that are displayed within a single viewport, distances are reported in 2D model space units. When using the DIST command for 3D distances, it is recommended that you switch to model space.
DIST | 513
DISTANTLIGHT Quick Reference Creates a distant light
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Distant.
Toolbar: Lights Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Distant Light Command entry: distantlight Specify light direction FROM <0,0,0> or [Vector]: Specify a point or enterv Specify light direction TO <1,1,1> Specify a point If you enter the Vector option, the following prompt is displayed: Specify vector direction <0.0000,-0.0100,1.0000>: Enter a vector After you specify the light direction and if the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 514/Intensity on page 515/Status on page 515/shadoW on page 516/Color on page 516/eXit on page 517] <eXit>: If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 514/Intensity factor on page 515/Status on page 515/Photometry on page 515/shadoW on page 516/filterColor on page 516/eXit on page 517] <eXit>: NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility.
Name Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters. Enter light name:
514 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Enter intensity (0.00 - max float) <1.0000>:
Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Enter status [oN/oFf] :
Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Enter a photometric option to change [Intensity/Color/eXit] : Intensity Enter intensity (Cd) or enter an option [Flux/Illuminance] <1500.0000>: Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface. ■
Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr
■
Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance. Lm/m^2
■
Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2
Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value. Enter Flux (Lm) <18849.5556>: If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an illuminance value. Enter Illuminance ("Lx"|"Fc") or enter an option [Distance] <1500.0000>:
DISTANTLIGHT | 515
The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance. Enter Distance <1.0000>: Color Enter color name or enter an option [?/Kelvin] : Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter color name(s) to list <*> : Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterick (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Enter Kelvin temperature <3600.0000>: Exit Exits the command.
Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Enter shadow settings [Off/Sharp/soFt mapped/soft sAmpled] <Sharp>: Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Enter map size [64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096] <256>: Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Enter softness (1-10) <1>: Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map.
Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light. Enter true color (R,G,B) or enter an option [Index color/Hsl/colorBook]<255,255,255>: True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
516 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Enter color name or number (1-255): HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Enter HSL color (H,S,L) <0,0,100>: Color Book Specifies a color from a color book. Enter Color Book name:
Exit Exits the command.
DIVIDE Quick Reference Places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Divide Command entry: divide Select object to divide: Use an object selection method Enter number of segments on page 517 or [Block on page 518]: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767, or enter b
Number of Segments Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects. The illustration shows a polyline divided into five parts. Point Display mode (PDMODE) has been set such that the points can be seen.
DIVIDE | 517
Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included. Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing Align block with object? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to, or collinear with, the divided object at the dividing points. No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation. Enter number of segments: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767 The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block consisting of a vertically oriented ellipse.
DONUT Quick Reference Creates filled circles and rings
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Donut. Menu: Draw ➤ Donut Command entry: donut Specify inside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER If you specify an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a filled circle. Specify outside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify center of donut or <exit>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER to end the command
518 | Chapter 5 D Commands
The location of the donut is set based on the center point. After you specify the diameters, you are prompted for the locations at which to draw donuts. A donut is drawn at each point specified (2). How the interior of a donut is filled depends on the current setting of the FILL command.
A donut consists of two arc polylines that are joined end-to-end to create a circular shape. The width of the polylines is determined by the specified inside and outside diameters. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of zero.
DRAGMODE Quick Reference Controls the way dragged objects are displayed Command entry: dragmode (or 'dragmode for transparent use) Enter new value [ON on page 519/OFF on page 519/Auto on page 520] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER On Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to initiate dragging.
Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those embedded in menu items.
DRAGMODE | 519
Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it. Dragging is performed whenever it is possible. Entering drag each time is not necessary.
DRAWINGRECOVERY Quick Reference Displays a list of drawing files that can be recovered after a program or system failure
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Recovery Manager. Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Recovery Command entry: drawingrecovery Opens the Drawing Recovery Manager on page 520.
Drawing Recovery Manager Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Recovery Command entry: drawingrecovery The Drawing Recovery Manager displays a list of all drawing files that were open at the time of a program or system failure. You can preview and open each drawing or backup file to choose which one should be saved as the primary DWG file.
Backup Files Displays the drawings that may need to be recovered after a program or system failure. A top-level drawing node contains a set of files associated with each drawing. You can expand a top-level node to display the drawing files and
520 | Chapter 5 D Commands
backup files that are candidates for recovery. If available, up to four files are displayed including ■
The recovered drawing file saved at the time of a program failure (DWG, DWS)
■
The automatic save file, also called the “autosave” file (SV$)
■
The drawing backup file (BAK)
■
The original drawing file (DWG, DWS)
Once a drawing or backup file is opened and saved, the corresponding top-level drawing node is removed from the Backup Files area.
Details Provides the following information about the currently selected node in the Backup Files area: ■
When a top-level drawing node is selected, information about each available drawing or backup file associated with the original drawing is displayed.
■
When an individual drawing or backup file is selected, additional information about that file is displayed.
Preview Displays a thumbnail preview of the currently selected drawing or backup file.
Shortcut Menu Options Right-click a drawing node, drawing or backup file, or a blank area in the Backup Files area to display a shortcut menu with relevant options. Open All Opens all the drawing and backup files associated with the selected, top-level drawing node. Remove Removes the selected, top-level drawing node. Open Opens the selected drawing or backup file for drawing recovery. You can select multiple files using SHIFT and CTRL. Properties Displays the File Properties dialog box from Windows Explorer for the selected drawing or backup file.
Drawing Recovery Manager | 521
Expand All Expands all top-level drawing nodes. Access this option by right-clicking a blank area in the Backup Files area. Collapse All Collapses all top-level drawing nodes. Access this option by right-clicking a blank area in the Backup Files area.
DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE Quick Reference Closes the Drawing Recovery Manager Command entry: drawingrecoveryhide Closes the Drawing Recovery Manager.
DRAWORDER Quick Reference Changes the draw order of images and other objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Bring to Front. Toolbar: Draw Order Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order Shortcut menu: Select an object, right-click, and then click Draw Order. Command entry: draworder Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter object ordering option [Above objects on page 522/Under objects on page 522/Front on page 523/Back on page 523] : Enter an option or press ENTER Above Objects Moves the selected object above the specified reference objects. Select reference objects: Use an object selection method Under Objects Moves the selected objects below the specified reference objects. Select reference objects: Use an object selection method
522 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Front Moves the selected objects to the top of the order of objects in the drawing. Back Moves the selected objects to the bottom of the order of objects in the drawing. When you change the draw order (display and plotting order) of multiple objects, the relative draw order of the selected objects is maintained. By default, when you create new objects from existing ones (for example, FILLET or PEDIT), the new objects are assigned the draw order of the original object you selected first. By default, while you edit an object (for example, MOVE or STRETCH), the object is displayed on top of all objects in the drawing. When you are finished editing, your drawing is partially regenerated so that the object is displayed according to its correct draw order. This can result in some edit operations taking slightly longer. You can use DRAWORDERCTL to change the default draw order settings. TEXTTOFRONT changes the draw order of all text and dimensions in the drawing.
DSETTINGS Quick Reference Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, Dynamic Input, and Quick Properties Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, Dyn or Quick Properties on the status bar. Click Settings. Command entry: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use) The Drafting Settings dialog box on page 523 is displayed.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, Dyn or Quick Properties on the status bar and click Settings. Command entry: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use)
DSETTINGS | 523
Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids in the following categories: Snap and Grid on page 524, Polar Tracking on page 526, Object Snap on page 528, Dynamic Input on page 532 and Quick Properties on page 534.
Options Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box on page 1012. You cannot access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box if you are running DSETTINGS transparently.
Snap and Grid Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Specifies Snap and Grid settings.
Snap On Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9, or by using the SNAPMODE system variable.
Snap Spacing Controls an invisible, rectangular grid of snap locations that restricts cursor movement to specified X and Y intervals. Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system variable)
524 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Equal X and Y Spacing Forces the X and Y spacing to the same values for snap spacing and for grid spacing. The snap spacing intervals can be different from the grid spacing intervals.
Polar Spacing Controls the PolarSnap™ increment distance. Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap tracking. If neither tracking feature is enabled, the Polar Distance setting has no effect. (POLARDIST system variable)
Snap Type Sets the snap style and snap type. Grid Snap Sets the snap type to Grid. When you specify points, the cursor snaps along vertical or horizontal grid points. (SNAPTYPE system variable) Rectangular Snap: Sets the snap style to standard Rectangular snap mode. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to a rectangular snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable) Isometric Snap: Sets the snap style to Isometric snap mode. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to an isometric snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable) PolarSnap Sets the snap type to Polar. When Snap mode is on and you specify points with polar tracking turned on, the cursor snaps along polar alignment angles set on the Polar Tracking tab relative to the starting polar tracking point. (SNAPTYPE system variable)
Grid On Turns the grid on or off. You can also turn grid mode on or off by clicking Grid on the status bar, by pressing F7, or by using the GRIDMODE system variable.
Grid Spacing Controls the display of a grid that helps you visualize distances.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 525
NOTE The limits of the grid are controlled by the LIMITS command and the GRIDDISPLAY system variable. Grid X Spacing Specifies the grid spacing in the X direction. If this value is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap X Spacing. (GRIDUNIT system variable) Grid Y Spacing Specifies the grid spacing in the Y direction. If this value is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap Y Spacing. (GRIDUNIT system variable) Major Line Every Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed when the VSCURRENT is set to any visual style except 2D Wireframe. (GRIDMAJOR system variable)
Grid Behavior Controls the appearance of the grid lines that are displayed when VSCURRENT is set to any visual style except 2D Wireframe. Adaptive Grid Limits the density of the grid when zoomed out. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable) Allow Subdivision Below Grid Spacing: Generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines when zoomed in. The frequency of these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major grid lines. (GRIDDISPLAY and GRIDMAJOR system variables) Display Grid Beyond Limits Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS command. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable) Follow Dynamic UCS Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable)
Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls the AutoTrack settings.
526 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Polar Tracking On Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable.
Polar Angle Settings Sets the alignment angles for polar tracking. (POLARANG system variable) Increment Angle Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar tracking alignment paths. You can enter any angle, or select a common angle of 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10, or 5 degrees from the list. (POLARANG system variable) Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking. The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable, and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the POLARADDANG system variable. NOTE Additional angles are absolute, not incremental. List of Angles If Additional Angles is selected, lists the additional angles that are available. To add new angles, click New. To remove existing angles, click Delete. (POLARADDANG system variable) New Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment angles.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 527
NOTE Before adding fractional angles, you must set the AUPREC system variable to the appropriate decimal precision to avoid undesired rounding. For example, if the value of AUPREC is 0 (the default value), all fractional angles you enter are rounded to the nearest whole number. Delete Deletes selected additional angles.
Object Snap Tracking Settings Sets options for object snap tracking. Track Orthogonally Only Displays only orthogonal (horizontal/vertical) object snap tracking paths for acquired object snap points when object snap tracking is on. (POLARMODE system variable) Track Using All Polar Angle Settings Applies polar tracking settings to object snap tracking. When you use object snap tracking, the cursor tracks along polar alignment angles from acquired object snap points. (POLARMODE system variable) NOTE Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and object snap tracking on and off.
Polar Angle Measurement Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured. Absolute Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system (UCS). Relative to Last Segment Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn.
Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls running object snap settings. With running object snap settings, also called Osnap, you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an object. When more than one option is selected, the selected snap modes are applied to return a point closest to the center of the aperture box. Press TAB to cycle through the options.
528 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Object Snap On Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (OSMODE system variable)
Object Snap Tracking On Turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking, the cursor can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP system variable)
Object Snap Modes Lists object snaps that you can turn on as running object snaps. Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray, or to the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.
Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, region, solid, spline, or xline.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 529
Center Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Node Snaps to a point object, dimension definition point, or dimension text origin.
Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, spline, or xline. Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap. Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids.
530 | Chapter 5 D Commands
NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Extension Causes a temporary extension line or arc to be displayed when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects, so you can specify points on the extension. NOTE When working in perspective view, you cannot track along the extension line of an arc or elliptical arc. Insertion Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a shape, or text. Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, solid, spline, or xline. Deferred Perpendicular snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one perpendicular snap. You can use a line, arc, circle, polyline, ray, xline, multiline, or 3D solid edge as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line. You can use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point, an AutoSnap tooltip and marker are displayed.
Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, or spline. Deferred Tangent snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one tangent snap. You can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line or xline that is tangent to arcs, polyline arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point, a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip are displayed.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 531
NOTE When you use the From option in conjunction with the Tangent snap mode to draw objects other than lines from arcs or circles, the first point drawn is tangent to the arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the drawing area. Nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, point, polyline, ray, spline, or xline. Apparent Intersection Snaps to the visual intersection of two objects that are not in the same plane but may appear to intersect in the current view. Extended Apparent Intersection is not available as a running object snap. Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids. NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Parallel Constrains a line segment, polyline segment, ray or xline to be parallel to another linear object. After you specify the first point of a linear object, specify the parallel object snap. Unlike other object snap modes, you move the cursor and hover over another linear object until the angle is acquired. Then, move the cursor back toward the object that you are creating. When the path of the object is parallel to the previous linear object, an alignment path is displayed, which you can use to create the parallel object. NOTE Turn off ORTHO mode before using the parallel object snap. Object snap tracking and polar snap are turned off automatically during a parallel object snap operation. You must specify the first point of a linear object before using the parallel object snap. Select All Turns on all object snap modes. Clear All Turns off all object snap modes.
Dynamic Input Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls pointer input, dimension input, dynamic prompting, and the appearance of drafting tooltips.
532 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Enable Pointer Input Turns on pointer input. When pointer input and dimensional input are both turned on, dimensional input supersedes pointer input when it is available. (DYNMODE system variable)
Pointer Input Displays the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip near the cursor. When a command prompts for a point, you can enter coordinate values in the tooltip instead of on the command line. Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input. Settings Displays the Pointer Input Settings dialog box on page 535.
Enable Dimension Input Turns on dimensional input. Dimensional input is not available for some commands that prompt for a second point. (DYNMODE system variable)
Dimension Input Displays a dimension with tooltips for distance value and angle value when a command prompts for a second point or a distance. The values in the dimension tooltips change as you move the cursor. You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 533
Preview Area Shows an example of dimensional input. Settings Displays the Dimension Input Settings dialog box on page 536.
Dynamic Prompts Displays prompts in a tooltip near the cursor when necessary in order to complete the command. You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line. Preview Area Shows an example of dynamic prompts. Show Command Prompting and Command Input near the Crosshairs Displays prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips. (DYNPROMPT system variable)
Drafting Tooltip Appearance Displays the Tooltip Appearance dialog box. on page 537
Quick Properties Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Specifies the settings for displaying the Quick Properties panel.
Quick Properties On Turns the display of the Quick Properties panel on or off depending on the object type. You can also turn the Quick Properties panel on or off by clicking Quick Properties on the status bar or by using the QPMODE on page 1889 system variable.
Display Per Object Type Sets the display settings of the Quick Properties panel. See Customize Quick Properties for more information. Display Quick Properties panel for Any Object Sets the Quick Properties panel to display for any selection of objects. Display Quick Properties panel Only for Defined Objects Sets the Quick Properties panel to display only for objects that are defined in the Customize User Interface (CUI) editor to display properties.
534 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Location Modes Sets the display position of the Quick Properties panel. Cursor Sets the location mode to Cursor. In cursor mode, the Quick Properties panel displays in a location relative to where you selected the object. ( QPLOCATION on page 1889 system variable) Quadrant: Specifies the relative location to display the Quick Properties panel. You can select one of the four quadrants top-right, top-left, bottom-right, or bottom-left. Distance: Sets the distance when Cursor is selected under the Location modes. You can specify values in the range of 0 to 400 (only integer values). Float Sets the location mode to Float. In float mode, the Quick Properties panel displays in the same position unless you relocate the panel manually. ( QPLOCATION on page 1889 system variable)
Size Settings Sets the size of Quick Properties panel. Auto-Collapse Enables the Quick Properties panel to display only a specified number of properties in the idle state. Default Height: Sets the default number of properties for the Quick Properties panel to display in the collapsed idle state. You can specify values in the range of 1 to 30 (only integer values).
Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, or Dyn on the status bar and click Settings. Command entry: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use)
Format Controls coordinate format in the tooltips that are displayed when pointer input is turned on.
Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box | 535
Polar Format Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in polar coordinate format. Enter a comma (,) to change to Cartesian format. (DYNPIFORMAT system variable) Cartesian Format Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in Cartesian coordinate format. Enter an angle symbol (<) to change to polar format. (DYNPIFORMAT system variable) Relative Coordinates Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in relative coordinate format. Enter a pound sign (#) to change to absolute format. (DYNPICOORDS system variable) Absolute Coordinates Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in absolute coordinate format. Enter an at sign (@) to change to relative format. Note that you cannot use the direct distance method when this option is selected. (DYNPICOORDS system variable)
Visibility Controls when pointer input is displayed. (DYNPIVIS system variable) As Soon As I Type Coordinate Data When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips only when you start to enter coordinate data. (DYNPIVIS system variable) When a Command Asks for a Point When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips whenever a command prompts for a point. (DYNPIVIS system variable) Always—Even When Not in a Command Always displays tooltips when pointer input is turned on. (DYNPIVIS system variable)
Dimension Input Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, or Dyn on the status bar and click Settings. Command entry: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use)
536 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Visibility Controls which tooltips are displayed during grip stretching when dimensional input is turned on. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show Only 1 Dimension Input Field at a Time Displays only the length change dimensional input tooltip when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show 2 Dimension Input Fields at a Time Displays the length change and resulting dimensional input tooltips when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show the Following Dimension Input Fields Simultaneously When you are using grip editing to stretch an object, displays the dimensional input tooltips that are selected below. (DYNDIVIS and DYNDIGRIP system variables) Resulting Dimension Displays a length dimensional tooltip that is updated as you move the grip. Length Change Displays the change in length as you move the grip. Absolute Angle Displays an angle dimensional tooltip that is updated as you move the grip. Angle Change Displays the change in the angle as you move the grip. Arc Radius Displays the radius of an arc, which is updated as you move the grip.
Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, or Dyn on the status bar and click Settings. Command entry: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use) Controls the appearance of tooltips. NOTE Use the TOOLTIPMERGE system variable to combine drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. For more information about tooltips, see Set Interface Options.
Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box | 537
Previews Displays an example of the current tooltip appearance settings. Colors Displays the Drawing Window Colors dialog box on page 1049, where you can specify a color for drafting tooltips and their backgrounds in a specified context.
Size Specifies a size for tooltips. The default size is 0. Use the slider to make tooltips larger or smaller.
Transparency Controls the transparency of tooltips. The lower the setting, the less transparent the tooltip. A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque.
Apply To Specifies whether the settings apply to all drafting tooltips or only to Dynamic Input tooltips. (DYNTOOLTIPS system variable) Override OS Settings for All Drafting Tooltips Applies the settings to all tooltips, overriding the settings in the operating system. Use Settings Only for Dynamic Input Tooltips Applies the settings only to the drafting tooltips used in Dynamic Input.
DSVIEWER Quick Reference Opens the Aerial View window Menu: View ➤ Aerial View Command entry: dsviewer The Aerial View window on page 539 is displayed.
538 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Aerial View Window Quick Reference Menu: View ➤ Aerial View Command entry: dsviewer Displays the entire drawing; the current view is marked with a wide outline box.
View Menu (Aerial View Window) Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the drawing or by displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window. When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View window, the Zoom Out menu option and button are unavailable. When the current view nearly fills the Aerial View window, the Zoom In menu option and button are unavailable. If both of these conditions exist at the same time, such as after using ZOOM Extents, both options are unavailable. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window. Zoom In Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming in by a factor of 2, centered on the current view box.
Aerial View Window | 539
Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming out by a factor of 2, centered on the current view box.
Global Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the Aerial View window.
Options Menu (Aerial View Window) Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the drawing. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window.
540 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Auto Viewport Displays the model space view of the current viewport automatically when multiple viewports are displayed. When Auto Viewport is off, the Aerial View window is not updated to match the current viewport. Dynamic Update Updates the Aerial View window while you edit the drawing. When Dynamic Update is off, the Aerial View window is not updated until you click in the Aerial View window. Realtime Zoom Updates the drawing area in real time when you zoom using the Aerial View window.
DVIEW Quick Reference Defines parallel projection or perspective views by using a camera and target Command entry: dview Select objects on page 542 or <use DVIEWBLOCK on page 542>. Enter option [CAmera on page 543/TArget on page 544/Distance on page 545/POints on page 546/PAn on page 547/Zoom on page 547/TWist on page 548/CLip on page 548/Hide on page 550/Off on page 550/Undo on page 550]: Specify a point on page 542 with your pointing device, or enter an option NOTE Transparent ZOOM, DSVIEWER, PAN, and scroll bars are not available in DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM and PAN, DSVIEWER, and scroll bars are not available while that view is current.
DVIEW | 541
Object Selection Specifies objects to use in the preview image as you change views. Selecting too many objects slows image dragging and updating.
DVIEWBLOCK If you press ENTER at the Select Objects prompt, DVIEWBLOCK displays a preview image. You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a 1 unit by 1 unit by 1 unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view (moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view).
Point Specification Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing device is a start point for the dragging operation. Your viewing direction changes about the target point as you move the pointing device. Enter direction and magnitude angles: Enter angles between 0 degrees and 360 degrees, or specify a point with your pointing device Enter both angles, separated by a comma. The angles must be positive. The direction angle indicates the front of the view, and the magnitude angle determines how far the view rolls.
542 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Camera Specifies a new camera position by rotating the camera about the target point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation. Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane , or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an angle, or press ENTER Camera Location Sets the camera's position based on the specified point. Enter Angle from the XY Plane Sets the camera's position at an angle above or below the XY plane. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from above, and an angle of -90 looks up from below. A camera angle of 0 degrees places the camera parallel to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS). When you toggle the angle input mode or specify the angle from the XY plane, you are returned to the previous prompt. Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an angle at the command prompt locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and you can use the cursor to rotate the camera. Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the camera's position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle measures from -180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of 0 degrees looks down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin.
DVIEW | 543
The illustration shows the camera rotating to the left from its initial position, leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged. Toggle (Angle From) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an angle at the command prompt locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and you can use the cursor to rotate the camera.
Target Specifies a new position for the target by rotating it around the camera. The effect is like turning your head to see different parts of the drawing from one vantage point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation. Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane , or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an angle, or press ENTER Enter Angle from the XY Plane Sets the target's position at an angle above or below the XY plane. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from above, and an angle of -90 looks up from below. A target angle of 0 degrees means that the target is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. After you toggle the angle input mode or specify the angle from the XY plane, you are returned to the previous prompt. Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an angle at the command prompt locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and you can use the cursor to rotate the target. Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the target's position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle measures from -180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of 0 degrees means you look down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin.
544 | Chapter 5 D Commands
The illustration shows the effect of moving the target point from left to right, leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged. Toggle (Angle From) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an angle at the command prompt locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and you can use the cursor to rotate the target.
Distance Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspective icon replaces the coordinate system icon. You are prompted for the new camera-to-target distance. Specify new camera-target distance <current>: Enter a distance or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current distance. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the distance between camera and target. Moving it to the left decreases that distance. To turn off perspective viewing, click the Off option from the main DVIEW prompt. If the target and camera points are close together, or if you specify a long-focal-length lens, you might see very little of your drawing when you
DVIEW | 545
specify a new distance. If you see little or none of your drawing, try the maximum scale value (16x) or enter a large distance. To magnify the drawing without turning perspective viewing on, use the Zoom option of DVIEW.
The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant.
Points Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use XYZ point filters. Specify target point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER To help you define a new line of sight, a rubber-band line is drawn from the current camera position to the crosshairs. You are prompted for a new camera location. Specify camera point <current>: Specify a point, enter direction and magnitude angles, or press ENTER A rubber-band line connects the target point to the crosshairs to help you place the camera relative to the target. The illustration shows the change in view as you swap the camera and target points. Lens and distance settings are the same in each case.
546 | Chapter 5 D Commands
For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see Point Specification.
Pan Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification. Specify displacement base point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point
Zoom If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport. Specify zoom scale factor <current>: Specify a scale or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale. If perspective viewing is on, Zoom adjusts the camera lens length, which changes the field of view and causes more or less of the drawing to be visible at a given camera and target distance. The default lens length is 50mm, simulating what you'd see with a 35mm camera and a 50mm lens. Increasing the lens length is similar to switching to a telephoto lens. Decreasing the lens length widens the field of view, as with a wide-angle lens.
DVIEW | 547
Specify lens length <50.000mm>: Specify a value or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current lens length. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the lens length. Moving it to the left decreases the lens length.
Twist Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. The twist angle is measured counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right. Specify view twist angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Clip Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target. Enter clipping option [Back/Front/Off] : Enter an option or press ENTER
548 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Back Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane. Specify distance from target or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a distance, enter an option, or press ENTER Distance from Target Positions the back clipping plane and turns on back clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. A negative distance places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. On Turns on back clipping at the current clipping distance. Off Turns off back clipping.
Front Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane. Specify distance from target or [set to Eye (camera)/ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a distance, enter e, or press ENTER Distance from Target Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. A negative distance places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. Eye Positions the front clipping plane at the camera. On Turns on front clipping. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off. Off Turns off front clipping. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off.
DVIEW | 549
Off Turns off front and back clipping. If perspective viewing is on, front clipping remains on at the camera position.
Hide Suppresses hidden lines on the selected objects to aid in visualization. Circles, solids, traces, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness are considered to be opaque surfaces that hide objects.This hidden line suppression is quicker than that performed by HIDE, but it can't be plotted.
Off Turns off perspective viewing. The Distance option turns on perspective viewing.
Undo Reverses the effects of the last DVIEW action. You can undo multiple DVIEW operations.
DWFADJUST Quick Reference Allows adjustment of a DWF or DWFx underlay at the command prompt Command entry: dwfadjust Select DWF underlay: Select one or more DWF or DWFx underlays Enter DWF underlay option [Fade on page 551/Contrast on page 551/Monochrome on page 551] : If you selected a single DWF or DWFx underlay, the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome are the current property settings of the underlay selected. If you select multiple underlays, the default values for Fade, Contrast, Monochrome remain as they were set the last time the command was used. To adjust colors in the DWF or DWFx underlay, open the Properties palette for the DWF or DWFx underlay. For more information, see Adjust DWF Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for Background.
550 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Fade Controls the fade effect of the underlay. Values range from 0 through 80. The greater the value, the lighter the linework in the underlay appears. Works indirectly with the contrast effect; a higher contrast value blends the underlay into the background when fade is set to a higher value. Default=25. Enter fade value (0-80): Enter a value
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the underlay. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Default=75. Enter contrast value (0-100): Enter a value
Monochrome This Yes/No toggle controls the color saturation of all linework while maintaining the luminance. When turned on, the linework appears in varying shades of gray starting at black if the background color luminance is 50% or more. If the background color luminance is less than 50%, then the colors are inverted, with the darkest linework displaying in white, and the lightest linework displaying in black. Monochrome? [Yes/No]: Select yes or no and then press ENTER
DWFATTACH Quick Reference Attaches a DWF or DWFx underlay to the current drawing
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ DWF.
Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ DWF Underlay Command entry: dwfattach
DWFATTACH | 551
The Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Once you select a DWF or DWFx file, the Attach DWF Underlay dialog box on page 552 is displayed. NOTE If you plan to access DWF or DWFx files from the Vault client server, the Vault file open dialog box supersedes the Select DWF File dialog box. Access to the Vault client server is only available to Autodesk Subscription customers.
Attach DWF Underlay Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ DWF Underlay Command entry: dwfattach Names, locates and defines the insertion point, scale and rotation of attached DWF or DWFx underlays.
Name Identifies the DWF or DWFx file you have selected to attach, either from the Select DWF File dialog box (an unattached DWF or DWFx file) or from the list of previously attached DWF or DWFx underlays. To add another instance of a DWF or DWFx underlay that is already attached, select the DWF or DWFx name from the list. NOTE The Name field is disabled when you’re attaching a DWF or DWFx file that is stored on the Vault client server. This information is automatically entered by the Vault. Access to the Vault client server is only available to Autodesk Subscription customers. Browse Opens the Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). If Views ➤ Preview is selected, a preview of the selected file is displayed. NOTE The Browse button is hidden when you’re attaching a DWF file that is stored on the Vault client server.
552 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Found In Displays the path where the DWF or DWFx file was located. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the DWF or DWFx file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.
Select a Sheet Displays all of the sheets that are found in the DWF or DWFx file. If the DWF file only contains a single sheet, that sheet is listed. If the DWF or DWFx file contains multiple sheets, only a single sheet can be selected for attachment. The first sheet in the list is selected by default. NOTE 3D sheets are not listed and if a DWF or DWFx file does not contain a usable 2D sheet, a warning message is displayed.
Path Type Specifies one of three types of folder path information to save with an attached DWF or DWFx underlay: a full path, a relative path, and no path. For a complete description of each option, see “Set Paths to Referenced Drawings” in the User's Guide. NOTE The Path Type group is disabled when you’re attaching a DWF or DWFx file that is stored on the Vault client server. This information is automatically entered by the Vault. Full Path Specifies the full (absolute) path to the DWF or DWFx file. Relative Path Specifies a relative path to the DWF or DWFx file. No Path Specifies only the DWF or DWFx file name. The DWF or DWFx file should be located in the folder with the current drawing file.
Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected DWF or DWFx file. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Directs input at the command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and Z. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value.
Attach DWF Underlay Dialog Box | 553
Z Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale Specifies the scale factor of the selected DWF or DWFx underlay. Specify On-Screen directs input at the command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1. If INSUNITS on page 1810 is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected DWF or DWFx underlay. If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value at the command prompt. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0.
Substitute DWF Name Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ DWF Underlay Command entry: dwfattach The names of DWF or DWFx references you attach must be unique. Attempts to attach two DWF or DWFx references that have the same name results in displaying the Substitute DWF Name dialog box.
554 | Chapter 5 D Commands
New DWF Name Enter a unique name for the DWF or DWFx underlay you are attempting to attach. Once a new name is supplied, you can continue with the attachment process. NOTE This only changes the name of the DWF or DWFx reference when it is attached. It does not affect the name of the DWF or DWFx file.
-DWFATTACH Quick Reference If you enter -dwfattach at the command prompt, the following DWFATTACH command prompts are displayed. Path to DWF file to attach: Enter the path and filename of the DWF file to be attached Enter name of sheet or [? on page 555]: Specify a sheet name or press ENTER to accept the sheet name that is listed Specify insertion point: Pick an insertion point Specify scale factor or [Unit] <1.0000>: Specify a scale factor Specify rotation <0>: Specify a rotation angle
?—List Sheets Lists the valid sheets in the current drawing. Enter sheet(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card characters, or press ENTER to list all sheets After the sheets are listed, the previous prompt returns.
-DWFATTACH | 555
DWFCLIP Quick Reference Uses clipping boundaries to define a subregion of a DWF or DWFx underlay
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Clip DWF. Shortcut menu: Select a DWF or DWFx underlay to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF Clip. Command entry: dwfclip Select DWF to clip: Select an edge of a DWF or DWFx underlay Enter DWF clipping option [ON on page 556/OFF on page 556/Delete on page 556/New boundary on page 556] : Enter an option or press ENTER The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the DWF or DWFx underlay.
On Turns on clipping and displays the DWF or DWFx underlay clipped to the previously defined boundary.
Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire DWF or DWFx underlay and frame. If you reclip the DWF or DWFx underlay while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original underlay.
New Boundary Specifies a new clipping boundary. The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal, and consists only of straight line segments. When defining a clipping boundary, specify vertices within the DWF or DWFx underlay boundary. Self-intersecting vertices are valid. Rectangular is the default option.
556 | Chapter 5 D Commands
If you use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt, the point is interpreted as the first corner of a rectangle. Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] : Enter p or press ENTER Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point, or enter c or u You must specify at least three points to define a polygon. If the DWF or DWFx underlay already has a clipping boundary defined, the following prompt is displayed: Delete old boundary? [No/Yes] : Enter n or press ENTER If you choose Yes, the entire DWF or DWFx underlay is redrawn and the command continues; if you choose No, the command ends. Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners. The rectangle is always drawn parallel to the edges of the DWF or DWFx underlay. Specify first corner point: Specify a point Specify opposite corner point: Specify a point
DWFFORMAT Quick Reference Sets the default DWF format to either DWF or DWFx for the following commands: - Publish - 3DDWF - EXPORT Command entry: dwfformat Select default DWF format [Dwf/dwfX] : Enter the default DWF Format value The DWF Format is set for PUBLISH, 3DDWF, and EXPORT. The default DWF Format is DWFx.
DWFFORMAT | 557
DWFLAYERS Quick Reference Controls the display of layers in a DWF or DWFx underlay Shortcut menu: Select a DWF or DWFx underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF Layers. Command entry: dwflayers Select DWF underlay: Select a DWF or DWFx underlay in which to manage the layer display After selecting the DWF or DWFx underlay, the DWF Layers dialog box on page 558 is displayed.
DWF Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference Shortcut menu: Select a DWF or DWFx underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF Layers. Command entry: dwflayers Displays a list of the layers in the DWF or DWFx underlay and their display status. NOTE It is possible for a DWF or DWFx file to be published without any layer information. If an attached DWF or DWFx underlay does not include at least one layer, the DWF Layers dialog box cannot be displayed. On Turns the selected layers on and off. Name Displays the name of the layer. To turn a selected layer on or off, click its light bulb icon. You can select several layers by pressing the CTRL or SHIFT keys while clicking layer names. To turn several selected layers on and off, right-click and choose Layer(s) On or Layer(s) Off.
558 | Chapter 5 D Commands
DWGPROPS Quick Reference Sets and displays the properties of the current drawing
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Drawing Utilities panel ➤ Drawing Properties. Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: dwgprops The Drawing Properties dialog box on page 559 is displayed.
Drawing Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: dwgprops Displays read-only statistics or general information about your drawing, assigns summary properties, and assigns names and values to custom properties. These custom properties can help you identify your drawing. Document properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field dialog box on page 617. ■
General on page 559
■
Summary on page 561
■
Statistics on page 562
■
Custom on page 563
General Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Displays read-only information about the drawing file. This data is derived from the operating system.
DWGPROPS | 559
File Name Shows the file icon and the file name.
File Type, Location, Size Shows the file type, the file location, and the size of the file.
MS-DOS Name, Created, Modified,Accessed Shows MS-DOS name, when the file was created, and the date and time it was last modified and last accessed.
Attributes Shows system-level file attributes. These values can be modified in Windows Explorer. Read-Only Indicates that the file is read-only; it cannot be changed or deleted accidentally. Archive Indicates that this file should be archived. This setting is used to determine which files should be backed up. Hidden Indicates that the file is hidden; you cannot see or use it unless you know its name.
560 | Chapter 5 D Commands
System Indicates that the file is a system file. A drawing cannot have the System attribute set.
Summary Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Displays properties such as author, title, and subject that are predefined. For example, you can add keywords to all your drawing files and then use DesignCenter™ to search for all drawing files with a particular keyword.
Title Specifies the title you want to use when searching for this drawing. The title can be different from the drawing file name. Subject Specifies the subject of the drawing. You can use the subject name to group drawings that have the same subject. Author Specifies the author of the drawing. The author name can only be entered or changed by the user. To change the author, delete the existing name and enter a new one. Keywords Specifies the keywords you want to use to locate the drawing. Comments Provides a space to add comments to the drawing. Hyperlink Base Specifies the base address that is used for all relative links inserted within the drawing. You can specify an Internet location, for example, http://www.autodesk.com, or a path to a folder on a network drive.
Drawing Properties Dialog Box | 561
Statistics Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Displays data such as the dates the drawing was created and last modified. These file properties are automatically maintained for you and can help you search for drawings created or modified during a specific period. NOTE If the drawing was last saved using an application other than Autodesk® software, a warning message is displayed. Display of the warning message is controlled by the DWGCHECK system variable.
Created Displays the date and time the drawing was created. This value is stored in the TDCREATE system variable. Modified Displays the date and time the drawing was last modified. This value is stored in the TDUPDATE system variable. Last Saved By Displays the name of the last person who modified the file. The Last Saved By name is stored in the LOGINNAME system variable. Revision Number Displays the revision number. This value is not accessible. To track revisions, create a custom property on the Custom tab. Total Editing Time Displays the total amount of editing time in the drawing. This value is stored in the TDINDWG system variable.
562 | Chapter 5 D Commands
Custom Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Assigns custom properties to the drawing. For example, you could create a custom property called Project and assign the actual project name as the value. To assign the same custom properties to a group of drawings, create the custom properties in a drawing template file. Custom properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field dialog box. You also have access to the properties data using programming interfaces, such as AutoLISP®.
Custom Properties Lists names and values of custom properties for the current drawing. Add Displays the Add Custom Property dialog box on page 564, where you can enter a name and a value for the new custom property. The name must be unique. The value can be left blank. Delete Deletes the custom property that is selected in the list. NOTE If you delete a custom property that is used in a field, the field displays #### the next time it is updated.
Drawing Properties Dialog Box | 563
Add Custom Property Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: dwgprops Adds a custom property to the drawing file. Custom Property Name Specifies a unique name for the custom property. The name can contain up to 255 characters. The following characters are not permitted: asterisk (*), equal sign (=), less-than and greater-than signs (< >), slash (/), backslash (\), quotation marks ("), reverse quote (`), pipe sign (|), colon (:), and semicolon (;). Value Specifies a value for the property. The value can be left blank.
DXBIN Quick Reference Imports specially coded binary files
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Import panel ➤ DXB File. Menu: Insert ➤ Drawing Exchange Binary Command entry: dxbin The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Enter the name of the file to import.
564 | Chapter 5 D Commands
E Commands
6
EATTEDIT Quick Reference Edits attributes in a block reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Single Attribute.
Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Command entry: eattedit Select a block: You are prompted to select a block in the drawing area. After you select a block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor on page 566 is displayed. If the block you select does not contain attributes, or if you select something that is not a block, an error message isblock displayed, and you are prompted to select another block. Edits the values, text options, and properties of each attribute in a block.
565
Enhanced Attribute Editor Quick Reference Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Command entry: eattedit Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute. You can change the attribute properties and values. Block Name of the block whose attributes you are editing. Tag Tag identifying the attribute. Select Block Temporarily closes the dialog box while you select a block with your pointing device. If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you save the attribute changes you made, you are prompted to save the changes before selecting another block. Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you have made, and leaves the Enhanced Attribute Editor open. The Enhanced Attribute Editor contains the following tabs: ■
Attribute on page 566
■
Text Options on page 567
■
Properties on page 568
Attribute Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Displays the tag, prompt, and value assigned to each attribute. You can change only the attribute value.
566 | Chapter 6 E Commands
List Lists the attributes in the selected block instance and displays the tag, prompt, and value for each attribute. Value Assigns a new value to the selected attribute. Multiple-line attributes include a button with an ellipsis. Click to open the In-Place Text Editor on page 929 with the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box on page 617.
Text Options Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.
Text Style Specifies the text style for the attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box.
Enhanced Attribute Editor | 567
Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-, or right-justified). Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Backwards Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed backwards. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Upside down Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed upside down. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for the attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Boundary Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available for single-line attributes.
Properties Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the lineweight, linetype, and color for the attribute text. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.
568 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute. Color Specifies the color of the attribute. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY system variable is off.
EATTEXT Quick Reference Exports property data from objects, block attribute information, and drawing information to a table or to an external file Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Command entry: eattext This command no longer displays the Attribute Extraction wizard and has been replaced by the Data Extraction wizard. on page 316 If you enter -eattext at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt. on page 569
-EATTEXT Quick Reference If you enter -eattext at the command prompt, the following DATAEXTRACTION command prompts are displayed. Extracts data as specified in an existing attribute extraction template (BLK) file created with the Attribute Extraction wizard in AutoCAD 2006 or data extraction (DXE) file created in AutoCAD 2007.
EATTEXT | 569
Enter the template file path for the extraction: type: Specify the path and file name for the attribute extraction template (BLK) or data extractino (DXE) file that describes how to extract the information Subsequent prompts depend on the information set up in the template file. If the template specifies extracting data to an external file, the following prompts are displayed: Enter the output filetype [Csv/Txt/Xls/Mdb] : Enter c for comma-separated (CSV), t for tab-separated (TXT), x for Microsoft Excel (XLS), or m for Microsoft Access (MDB) Enter output filepath: Specify the names of the path and file where the data will be extracted NOTE The maximum number of columns that can be exported to an XLS and MDB file is 255. If the template specifies a table, the following prompt is displayed: Specify insertion point:
EDGE Quick Reference Changes the visibility of three-dimensional face edges
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Edge. Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Edge Command entry: edge Specify edge on page 570 of 3dface to toggle visibility or [Display on page 571]: Select an edge or enter d
Edge Controls the visibility of the edges you select. Specify edge of 3d face to toggle visibility or [Display]: The prompt is repeated until you press ENTER.
570 | Chapter 6 E Commands
If the edges of one or more 3D faces are collinear, the program alters the visibility of each collinear edge.
Display Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them. Enter selection method for display of hidden edges [Select/All] : Enter an option or press ENTER
All Selects the hidden edges of all 3D faces in the drawing and displays them. If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again, use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap™ markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed, indicating the apparent snap locations on each invisible edge. This prompt continues until you press ENTER. Select Selects hidden edges of a partially visible 3D face and displays them. Select objects:
If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again, use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed, indicating the apparent snap locations on each invisible edge. This prompt continues until you press ENTER.
EDGE | 571
EDGESURF Quick Reference Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Edge Surface. Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Edge Mesh Command entry: edgesurf Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current SURFTAB2=current
Select object 1 for surface edge: Select object 2 for surface edge: Select object 3 for surface edge: Select object 4 for surface edge: You must select the four adjoining edges that define the mesh patch. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, or open 2D or 3D polylines. The edges must touch at their endpoints to form a topologically rectangular closed path. You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1) determines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2) of the mesh.
572 | Chapter 6 E Commands
ELEV Quick Reference Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects Command entry: elev (or 'elev for transparent use) Specify new default elevation <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER The current elevation is the default Z value for new objects when you specify only X and Y values for a 3D point. The elevation setting is the same for all viewports regardless of their user coordinate systems (UCSs). New objects are created at the specified Z value relative to the current UCS in the viewport. Specify new default thickness <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER The thickness sets the distance to which a 2D object is extruded above or below its elevation. A positive value is extruded along the positive Z axis; a negative value is extruded along the negative Z axis.
ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects. The elevation is reset to 0.0 whenever you change the coordinate system to the world coordinate system (WCS).
ELLIPSE Quick Reference Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc
ELEV | 573
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Center.
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Ellipse Command entry: ellipse Specify axis endpoint on page 574 of ellipse or [Arc on page 575/Center on page 577/Isocircle on page 578]: Specify a point or enter an option The first two points of the ellipse determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the ellipse and the end point of the second axis.
Axis Endpoint Defines the first axis by its two endpoints. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the ellipse. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of the ellipse. Specify other endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2) Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value or locating a point (3), or enter r Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis using the distance from the midpoint of the first axis to the endpoint of the second axis (3).
Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point (3), or enter an positive angle value less than 90
574 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circular ellipse.
Arc Creates an elliptical arc. The first two points of the elliptical arc determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the elliptical arc and the endpoint of the second axis. The fourth and fifth points are the start and end angles.
The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis depending on its size. Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: Specify a point or enter c
Axis Endpoint Defines the start point of the first axis. Specify other endpoint of axis: Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r The descriptions of the Distance to Other Axis and Rotation options match those of the corresponding options under Center.
Center Creates the elliptical arc using a center point you specify. Specify center of elliptical arc:
ELLIPSE | 575
Specify endpoint of axis: Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r Creates an ellipse using a center point, the endpoint of the first axis, and the length of the second axis. You can specify the distances by clicking a location at the desired distance or by entering a value for the length.
Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify. Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or enter p The descriptions of the Start Angle and Parameter options match those of the corresponding options under Rotation.
Rotation Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis. The higher the value from 0 through 89.4 degrees, the greater the ratio of minor to major axis. Values between 89.4 degrees and 90.6 degrees are invalid because the ellipse would otherwise appear as a straight line. Multiples of these angle values result in a mirrored effect every 90 degrees. Entering 0 , 180, or multiples of 180 creates an ellipse in the shape of a circle. Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a rotation angle Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or enter p Start Angle Defines the first endpoint of the elliptical arc. The Start Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated. Specify end angle or [Parameter/Included angle]: Specify a point (2), enter a value, or enter an option
576 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Parameter Requires the same input as Start Angle, but creates the elliptical arc using the following parametric vector equation: p(u) = c + a * cos(u) + b * sin(u) where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its major and minor axes, respectively. Specify start parameter or [Angle]: Specify a point, enter a value, or enter a Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]: Specify a point, enter a value, or enter an option ■
End Parameter: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Start Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated.
■
Angle: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc. The Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated.
■
Included Angle: Defines an included angle beginning at the start angle.
Center Creates the ellipse by a center point you specify. Specify center of ellipse: Specify a point (1) Specify endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2) Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value or locating a point (3), or enter r
Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify. Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point, or enter an angle value between 0 and 89.4 Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or enter p Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circle.
ELLIPSE | 577
Isocircle Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane. NOTE The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP to Isometric. Specify center of isocircle: Specify radius of isocircle or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Creates a circle using a radius you specify. Diameter Creates a circle using a diameter you specify. Specify diameter of isocircle: Specify a distance The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP to Isometric.
ERASE Quick Reference Removes objects from a drawing
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Erase Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area, and click Erase. Command entry: erase
578 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects The objects are removed from the drawing.
Instead of selecting objects to erase, you can enter an option, such as L to erase the last object drawn, p to erase the previous selection set, or ALL to erase all objects. You can also enter ? to get a list of all options.
ETRANSMIT Quick Reference Packages a set of files for Internet transmission
Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ eTransmit. Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit The Create Transmittal dialog box on page 580 is displayed. If you enter -etransmit at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 591.
ETRANSMIT | 579
Create Transmittal Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit Packages a set of files for Internet transmission. All files to be included in the transmittal package are indicated by a check mark next to the file name. Right-click in the file display area to display a shortcut menu with several options.
Sheets Tab Lists the sheets to be included in the transmittal package in a hierarchy based on sheet subsets. On this tab, you can create a transmittal package from a sheet set, sheet subset, or sheet. A sheet set must be open in the Sheet Set Manager, and eTransmit must be selected from the shortcut menu that is displayed when a sheet set, sheet subset, or sheet node is right-clicked.
NOTE If a sheet in the list is unavailable, the sheet is referenced (as an xref) by another sheet in the transmittal package, and the unavailable sheet is automatically included in the transmittal package.
580 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Files Tree Tab Lists the files to be included in the transmittal package in a hierarchical tree format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the transmittal package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the transmittal package. The drawings to be transmitted are listed under the following categories: ■
Sheet Drawings. Lists the drawing files associated with the sheet set.
■
Sheet Set Files. Lists the support files associated with the sheet set.
■
Current Drawing. Lists the files associated with the current drawing.
■
User Added Files. Lists the files that have been added manually with the Add File option.
Files Table Tab Displays the files to be included in the transmittal package in a table format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the transmittal package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the transmittal package.
Create Transmittal Dialog Box | 581
Add File Opens a standard file selection dialog box on page 996, in which you can select an additional file to include in the transmittal package. This button is available on both the Files Tree tab and the Files Table tab.
Enter Notes to Be Included with This Transmittal Package Provides a space where you can enter notes related to a transmittal package. The notes are included in the transmittal report. You can specify a template of default notes to be included with all your transmittal packages by creating an ASCII text file called etransmit.txt. This file must be saved to a location specified by the Support File Search Path option on the Files tab on page 1013 in the Options dialog box.
Select a Transmittal Setup Lists previously saved transmittal setups. The default transmittal setup is named STANDARD. Click to select a different transmittal setup. To create a new transmittal setup or to modify an existing one in the list, click Transmittal Setups. Right-click to display a shortcut menu with several options.
Transmittal Setups Displays the Transmittal Setups dialog box on page 583, in which you can create, modify, and delete transmittal setups.
582 | Chapter 6 E Commands
View Report Displays report information that is included with the transmittal package. Includes any transmittal notes that you entered and distribution notes automatically generated that detail what steps must be taken for the transmittal package to work properly. For example, if SHX fonts are detected in one of the transmittal drawings, you are instructed where to copy these files so that they can be detected on the system where the transmittal package is being installed. If you have created a text file of default notes, the notes are also included in the report. Save As Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify a location in which to save a report file. Note that a report file is automatically included with all transmittal packages that you generate; by choosing Save As, you can save an additional copy of a report file for archival purposes.
Transmittal Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit
Creates, modifies, and deletes transmittal setups.
Transmittal Setups Lists transmittal setups.
Transmittal Setups Dialog Box | 583
New Creates a new transmittal setup. New Transmittal Setup Name Enter the name of the new transmittal setup. Based On Select an existing transmittal setup from which the new one will be created.
Rename Renames the currently highlighted transmittal setup.
Modify Displays the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box on page 586, in which you can specify options for the transmittal package.
Delete Removes the currently highlighted transmittal setup.
Import In a sheet set context, opens standard file selection dialog box on page 996, in which you can navigate to a sheet set data (DST) file. Then displays the Import Transmittal Setups dialog box on page 584, in which you can specify the transmittal setups that you want to import.
Import Transmittal Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit
584 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Imports selected transmittal setups from a specified sheet set data file.
List of Transmittal Setups Displays a list of transmittal setups. Check the ones that you want to import into the current sheet set.
Description Displays the optional description that is stored with the selected transmittal setup.
Current Sheet Set Storage Location Displays the storage location for the current sheet set.
Overwrite with Current Storage Location When checked, replaces the imported sheet set storage locations with the storage location of the current sheet set.
Import Checked Imports the transmittal setups on the list that display check marks.
Import Transmittal Setups Dialog Box | 585
Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit
Transmittal Type and Location Specifies the type and path to the transmittal package created. Transmittal Package Type Specifies the type of transmittal package created. Transmittal Package Type
Description
Folder
Creates a transmittal package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder.
Self-Extracting Executable
Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed, self-extracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting EXE file decompresses the transmittal package and
586 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Transmittal Package Type
Description restores the files to the folder location that you specify.
Zip
Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed ZIP file. To restore the files to the folder location that you specify, you need a decompression utility such as the shareware application PKZIP or WinZip.
File Format Specifies the file format to which all drawings included in a transmittal package will be converted. You can select a drawing file format from the drop-down list. Maintain Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects Specifies whether or not drawings are saved with visual fidelity for objects. Click the information icon to learn more about saving drawings with visual fidelity. Annotative objects may have multiple . Annotative objects are decomposed and scale representations are saved to separate layers, which are named based on their original layer and appended with a number. Transmittal File Folder Specifies the location in which the transmittal package is created. Lists the last nine locations in which transmittal packages were created. To specify a new location, click Browse and navigate to the location you want. If this field is left unchanged, the transmittal file is created in the folder containing the first specified drawing file. In a sheet set context, the transmittal file is created in the folder containing the sheet set data (DST) file. Transmittal File Name Specifies the method for naming the transmittal package. Displays the default file name for the transmittal package. This option is not available if the transmittal package type is set to Folder. Transmittal File Type Property
Description
Prompt for a File Name
Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the name of the transmittal package.
Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box | 587
Transmittal File Type Property
Description
Overwrite if Necessary
Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already exists, the existing file is automatically overwritten.
Increment File Name if Necessary
Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already exists, a number is added to the end. This number is incremented each time a new transmittal package is saved.
Path Options Provides options for organizing the files and folders that are included in the transmittal package. Use Organized Folder Structure Duplicates the folder structure for the files being transmitted. The root folder is the top-level folder within a hierarchical folder tree. The following considerations apply: ■
Relative paths remain unchanged. Relative paths outside the source root folder retain up to one level of the folder path above them, and are placed in the root folder.
■
Full (absolute) paths within the root folder tree are converted to relative paths. Full paths outside the source root folder retain up to one level of the folder path above them, and are placed in the root folder.
■
Full paths outside the root folder tree are converted to No Path and are moved to the root folder or to a folder within the root folder tree.
■
A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.
■
A PlotCfgs folder is created, if necessary.
■
A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files for sheet sets, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder.
This option is not available if you're saving a transmittal package to an Internet location.
588 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Source Root Folder Defines the source root folder for relative paths of drawing-dependent files, such as xrefs. The source root folder also contains the sheet set data (DST) file when a sheet set is transmitted. Place All Files in One Folder All files are installed to a single, specified target folder when the transmittal package is installed. Keep Files and Folders As Is Preserves the folder structure of all files in the transmittal package, facilitating ease of installation on another system. This option is not available if you're saving a transmittal package to an Internet location.
Actions Provides options for organizing the actions that can be associated with the transmittal package. Send E-mail with Transmittal Launches the default system email application when the transmittal package is created so that you can send an email that includes the transmittal package as an attachment. Set Default Plotter to 'None' Changes the printer/plotter setting in the transmittal package to None. Your local printer/plotter settings are usually not relevant to the recipient. Bind External References Binds all external references to the files to which they were attached. Prompt for Password Opens the Transmittal - SetPassword dialog box on page 590, where you can specify a password for your transmittal package. Purge Drawings Does a complete purge of all the drawings in the transmittal package. NOTE As the purge is done in silent mode, you will not receive any notifications when the drawings have been removed.
Include Options Provides a means for including additional options with the transmittal package. Include Fonts Includes any associated font files (TTF and SHX) with the transmittal package.
Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box | 589
NOTE Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, you should make sure that the recipient of the transmittal package also owns the TrueType fonts. If you are not sure whether the recipient owns the TrueType fonts, clear this option. If any required TrueType fonts are not available to the recipient, the font specified by the FONTALT system variable is substituted. Include Textures from Materials Includes textures from materials that are attached to objects or faces. Include Files from Data Links Adds external files referenced by a data link to the transmittal package. Include Photometric Web Files Includes photometric web files that are associated with web lights in the drawing.
Transmittal Setup Description Enter a description for the transmittal setup. This description is displayed in the Create Transmittal dialog box below the list of transmittal file setups. You can select any transmittal setup in the list to display its description.
Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit
Password for Compressed Transmittal Provides a space for an optional password for the transmittal package. When others attempt to open the transmittal package, they must provide this
590 | Chapter 6 E Commands
password to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder transmittal packages.
Password Confirmation Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to reenter them.
-ETRANSMIT Quick Reference If you enter -etransmit at the command prompt, the following ETRANSMIT command prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Create transmittal package/Report only/CUrrent setup/CHoose setup/Sheet set> : Enter an option Report Only Creates a report (TXT) file without creating a transmittal package. This report file is based on the current transmittal setup. Current Setup Displays the name of the current transmittal setup. Choose Setup Specifies the transmittal setup to use for the transmittal package. Choose Transmittal Setup or [?] <current>: Enter a predefined transmittal setup name, enter ? to display a list of transmittal setups, or press ENTER Sheet Set Specifies a sheet set and transmittal setup to use for the transmittal package. This option is available only when a sheet set is open. Sheet Set name or [?] <current>: Enter a predefined sheet set name, enter ? to display a list of sheet sets, or press ENTER Choose Transmittal Setup or [?] <current>: Enter a predefined transmittal setup name, enter ? to display a list of transmittal setups, or press ENTER
EXPLODE Quick Reference Breaks a compound object into its component objects
-ETRANSMIT | 591
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Explode.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Explode Command entry: explode Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Explodes a compound object when you want to modify its components separately. Objects that can be exploded include blocks, polylines, and regions, among others. The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change. Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you're exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each. To explode objects and change their properties at the same time, use XPLODE. NOTE If you're using a script or an ObjectARX® function, you can explode only one object at a time. 2D and Lightweight Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information. For wide polylines, the resulting lines and arcs are placed along the center of the polyline. 3D Polyline Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line segment. 3D Solid Explodes planar faces into regions. Nonplanar faces explode into surfaces. Annotative Objects Explodes the current scale representation into its constituent parts which become non. Other scale representations are removed. Arc If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into elliptical arcs. Block Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects. Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects. When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be exploded, they are collected into an anonymous block (named with a “*E” prefix) and
592 | Chapter 6 E Commands
referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected block reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid, and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded. Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions. Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references (xrefs) and their dependent blocks cannot be exploded. Body Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar surfaces), regions, or curves. Circle If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into ellipses. Leaders Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks), multiline text, or tolerance objects, depending on the leader. Multiline Text Explodes into text objects. Multiline Explodes into lines and arcs. Polyface Mesh Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Two-vertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes explode into 3D faces. Region Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.
EXPORT Quick Reference Saves objects to other file formats
Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ Export. Menu: File ➤ Export Command entry: export The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. In File Type, select the desired export format. In File Name, enter the name of the file to create. The objects are exported to the specified file format using the specified file name.
EXPORT | 593
NOTE The Export Data dialog box records the last used file format selection and stores it for use during the current drawing session and between drawing sessions. The following output types are available: ■
3D DWF (*.dwf) 3D DWFx (*.dwfx): Autodesk Design Web Format (see 3DDWF)
■
Metafile (*.wmf): Microsoft Windows® Metafile (see WMFOUT)
■
ACIS (*.sat): ACIS solid object file (see ACISOUT)
■
Lithography (*.stl): Solid object stereolithography file (see STLOUT)
■
Encapsulated PS (*.eps): Encapsulated PostScript file
■
DXX Extract (*.dxx): Attribute extract DXF™ file (see ATTEXT)
■
Bitmap (*.bmp): Device-independent bitmap file (see BMPOUT)
■
Block (*.dwg): Drawing file (see WBLOCK)
■
V7 DGN (*.dgn): MicroStation DGN file (see DGNEXPORT on page 407)
■
V8 DGN (*.dgn): MicroStation DGN file (see DGNEXPORT)
EXPORTLAYOUT Quick Reference Exports all visible objects from the current layout to the model space of the new drawing
Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ Export Layout to Model. Command entry: exportlayout The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box on page 595 is displayed. Select the location and file name for the new exported drawing. All drawings are exported to AutoCAD 2007 drawing format.
594 | Chapter 6 E Commands
NOTE The EXPORTLAYOUT command is only available in a layout. The command is not available from the Model tab, while in the block editor, during reference editing, or while using a maximized viewport.
Export Layout to Model Space Drawing Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Send panel ➤ Export Layout to Model. Command entry: exportlayout Exports all visible objects from the current layout to the model space of a new drawing. Also exports objects that are outside the boundaries of the “paper” in the layout. The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box is displayed. You can specify a file name and location. The default location is the location of the current drawing. The default file name is the concatenation of the name of the current drawing and the current layout name. The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box is a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. However, on the Tools drop-down list, Options is not displayed.
EXPORTTOAUTOCAD Quick Reference Creates a new DWG file with all AEC objects exploded Command entry: -exporttoautocad or aectoacad Export options [Format on page 596/Bind on page 596/bind Type on page 596/Maintain on page 597/Prefix on page 597/Suffix on page 597/? on page 597] <Enter for filename on page 596>: Enter an option or press ENTER to specify a file name You can create a new version of a drawing file with all proxy AEC objects exploded into basic AutoCAD objects. The new version of the drawing loses
Export Layout to Model Space Drawing Dialog Box | 595
the intelligence of the custom AEC objects, but the resulting basic objects can be displayed and accessed in earlier versions of AutoCAD when object enablers are not available for those versions. NOTE Any subsequent changes you make to this new drawing file do not affect the original drawing file.
Enter for Filename Creates a new drawing file with the specified name. NOTE You can use the Prefix option to create a unique file name for this drawing and to prevent overwriting the existing drawing file. Export drawing name <current>: Enter a file name
Format Determines the drawing file format for the resulting drawing file. Enter file format [r14/2000/2004/2007] <2007>: Specify the drawing file format
Bind Determines how xrefs are treated when creating the new drawing. Bind xrefs [Yes/No] : Enter y or n Yes Binds all xrefs to the drawing. Layers and other xref-dependent named objects are merged into the new drawing. No Maintains the xrefs as links to other drawings.
Bind Type Determines how xref-dependent objects are treated when the Bind option is turned on. Bind type [Bind/Insert] : Enter an option Bind Maintains the names of layers and other xref-dependent objects when binding xrefs. Insert Merges the names of xref-dependent objects into the new drawing without including the original file name.
596 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Maintain Determines how blocks within custom AEC objects are treated. Maintain resolved properties [Yes/No] : Enter y or n Yes Explodes all block instances within custom AEC objects into basic AutoCAD objects. The resulting basic objects revert to their original properties rather than the properties of the block definitions. No Does not explode any block instances within custom AEC objects. The properties of the block instances are determined in the usual way, depending on how the objects in the blocks were created and the property settings of the layers on which the blocks are inserted.
Prefix Specifies the prefix to be added to the current drawing file name. Filename prefix <>: Enter the characters to be added to the beginning of the current file name
Suffix Specifies the suffix to be added to the current drawing file name. Filename suffix <>: Enter the characters to be added to the end of the file name
? List Settings Lists the current settings for the command. File format: current setting Bind xrefs: current setting Bind type: current setting Filename prefix: current setting Filename suffix: current setting
EXTEND Quick Reference Extends objects to meet the edges of other objects
EXTEND | 597
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Extend Command entry: extend Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select boundary edges... Select objects on page 598 or <select all>: Select one or more objects and press ENTER, or press ENTER to select all displayed objects Select object to extend on page 598 or shift-select to trim on page 598 or [Fence on page 598/Crossing on page 599/Project on page 599/Edge on page 600/Undo on page 601]: Select objects to extend, or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim, or enter an option To extend objects, first select the boundaries. Then press ENTER and select the objects that you want to extend. To use all objects as boundaries, press ENTER at the first Select Objects prompt.
Boundary Object Selection Uses the selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to extend an object.
Object to Extend Specifies the objects to extend. Press ENTER to end the command.
Shift-Select to Trim Trims the selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending them. This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending.
Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points. The selection fence does not form a closed loop. Specify first fence point: Specify the starting point of the selection fence Specify next fence point or [Undo]: Specify the next point of the selection fence or enter u
598 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Specify next fence point or [Undo]: Specify the next point of the selection fence enter u, or press ENTER
Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points. Specify first corner: Specify a point Specify opposite corner: Specify a point at a diagonal from the first point NOTE Some crossing selections of objects to be extended are ambiguous. EXTEND resolves the selection by following along the rectangular crossing window in a clockwise direction from the first point to the first object encountered.
Project Specifies the projection method used when extending objects. Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
None Specifies no projection. Only objects that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space are extended.
EXTEND | 599
UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D space are extended.
View Specifies projection along the current view direction.
Edge Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space.
600 | Chapter 6 E Commands
No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Undo Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.
EXTERNALREFERENCES Quick Reference Displays the External References palette Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ External References.
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Insert ➤ External References Command entry: externalreferences The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the External References palette on page 602 if the palette is inactive. If the External References palette is active but hidden, executing EXTERNALREFERENCES will open the palette. If you click anywhere outside of the External References palette, the palette returns to its auto-hidden state. NOTE The FILEDIA system variable is ignored when attaching files from the External References palette.
EXTERNALREFERENCES | 601
External References Palette Quick Reference Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ External References.
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Insert ➤ External References Command entry: externalreferences The External References palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced files, such as referenced drawings (Xrefs), attached DWF, DWFx, or DGN underlays, and imported raster images. Only DWG, DWF, DWFx, and raster image files can be opened directly from the External References palette.
602 | Chapter 6 E Commands
NOTE When using the External References palette, it is recommended that you turn on the Auto-hide feature or anchor the palette. The palette will then hide automatically when you specify the insertion point of the external reference. The External References palette contains several buttons on page 604, and is split into two panes. The upper pane, called the File References Pane on page 605, can display file references in a list or in a tree structure. Shortcut menus and function keys provide options for working with the files. on page 607The lower pane, called the Details / Preview Pane on page 610, can display properties for the selected file references or it can display a thumbnail preview of the selected file reference.
External References Palette | 603
External References Palette Buttons Quick Reference Use the buttons at the top of the External References palette to choose the types of files to attach to the drawing and to refresh the status of file references that you already have attached.
Attach (file type) Button The Attach button displays a list of file types that you can attach. The following options are displayed: ■
Attach DWG. Starts the XATTACH command.
■
Attach Image. Starts the IMAGEATTACH command.
■
Attach DWF. Starts the DWFATTACH command.
■
Attach DGN. Starts the DGNATTACH on page 401 command
■
Attach from Vault. Provides access to content stored in the Vault client.
NOTE Attach from Vault is only shown when the Vault client is installed. You must be an Autodesk Subscription customer to have access to the Vault client.
Refresh/Reload All References Button The following options are available:
Refresh Resynchronizes the status data of referenced drawing files with the data in memory. Refresh interacts primarily with Autodesk Vault.
Reload All References Updates all file references to ensure that the most current version is used. Updating also occurs when you first open a drawing that contains file references.
604 | Chapter 6 E Commands
File References List View / Tree View Pane Quick Reference The upper File References pane displays a list of all file references in the current drawing. You can display these file references in a list or in a tree structure.
List View When the File References pane is set to list view, the file references pane displays a list of all the external references that you have associated with the drawing. In list view, you can select multiple file references. The listed information includes the reference name, status, file size, file type, creation date and saved path. Reference Icons Each file reference is preceded by an icon specific to that reference type. Indicates the current drawing icon. It represents the master drawing to which all external references are attached. Indicates a DWF or DWFx Underlay attachment. Indicates a DWG (xref) attachment. Indicates a DWG (xref) overlay. Indicates a DGN underlay. Indicates a raster image attachment. Indicates a spreadsheet (datalink) attachment.
External References Palette | 605
Reference Name The reference name column always displays the current drawing as the first entry, followed by additional attached files that are listed in the order they were attached. Status The status of the referenced file: ■
Loaded - The referenced file is currently attached to the drawing.
■
Unloaded - The referenced file is marked to be unloaded from the drawing.
■
Not Found - The referenced file is no longer exists in the valid search paths.
■
Unresolved - The referenced file cannot be read.
■
Orphaned - The referenced file is attached to another file that has an Unresolved status.
Size The size of the attached file reference. Type Date The date when the referenced file was created or last saved. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the referenced file is attached.
Tree View When the File References pane is set to tree view, the File References pane displays a tree structure of of all external references along with their levels of nesting within the drawing.
The top level of the tree view always shows the current drawing. Referenced files appear at the next level. Referenced files that contain their own nested file references can be opened to show deeper levels. When making selections in tree view, only one file reference can be selected at a time.
606 | Chapter 6 E Commands
File References Pane Shortcut Menus and Function Keys Quick Reference When working in the File References pane, there are several shortcut menus that can be displayed when you right-click on file references or empty areas of the pane. The following tables show the shortcut menu items that you are presented under certain conditions.
Nothing Selected When no file references are selected, right-clicking to open the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item
Description
Reload All References
Reloads all referenced files. (Unavailable if no file references are attached)
Select All
Selects all file references, excluding the current drawing. This item is not displayed in tree view.
Attach DWG
Starts the XATTACH command.
Attach Image
Starts the IMAGEATTACH command.
Attach DWF
Starts the DWFATTACH command.
Attach DGN
Starts the DGNATTACH command.
Attach from Vault
Launches the Vault Attach File dialog box - Only displayed when the Vault Client is installed.
Log In
Allows you to log into the Vault Server. If you are already logged in, this item is unavailable - Only displayed when the Vault Client is installed.
External References Palette | 607
Menu Item
Description
Log Out
Allows you to log out of the Vault Server. If you are already logged out, this item is unavailable - Only displayed when the Vault Client is installed.
Close
Closes the External References palette.
When you select a file reference, right-clicking to open the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item
Description
Reference Status
Open
Opens the selected file reference in the application specified by the operating system.
Available only for file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.
Attach
Opens the dialog box corresponding to the selected reference type.
Always available - status has no affect on this function.
■
Selecting a DWG reference opens the External Reference dialog box on page 1647.
■
Selecting a raster image reference opens the Image dialog box on page 552.
■
Selecting a DWF or DWFx reference opens the Attach DWF Underlay dialog box on page 552.
Unload
Unloads the selected file references.
Always available - status has no affect on this function.
Update Data Extraction
Updates all Data Extraction tables that reference the selected .DXE file.
Available when you select a .DXE file.
Reload
Reloads the selected file references.
Always available - status has no affect on this function.
608 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Menu Item
Description
Reference Status
Detach
Detaches the selected file references.
Always available - status has no affect on this function.
Bind
Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box on page 1661. The selected DWG reference is bound to the current drawing - Only available for referenced DWG files.
Available only for file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.
Check In
Returns a modified file that is checked out of the Vault. The previous version is retained in the file history - Only displayed when the Vault Client is installed.
Determined by Vault functionality.
Check Out
Retrieves a read/write copy of a file stored in the Vault - Only displayed when the Vault Client is installed.
Determined by Vault functionality.
Undo Check Out
Releases a file that you have checked out of the Vault - Only displayed when the Vault Client is installed.
Determined by Vault functionality.
Function Key Access Some tasks in the File References pane can be accessed with function keys. ■
F2 - Accesses the Rename function when a single file reference is selected.
■
F3 - List View toggle.
■
F4 - Tree View toggle.
External References Palette | 609
Details / Preview Pane Quick Reference The lower data pane of the External References palette can be set to display file reference properties or a preview image of the selected file reference.
Details Pane When displaying the Details mode, properties for the selected file reference are reported. Each file reference has a core set of properties and some file references, like referenced images, display properties specific to the file type. The core set of details include the reference name, status, file size, file type, creation date, saved path, found at path and file version, if the Vault client is installed. Some of the properties can be edited. Reference Name Displays the file reference name. This property can be edited only if single file references are selected. The reference name shows *Varies* if multiple file references are selected. This property is editable for all the file references. Status Shows whether the file reference is loaded, unloaded or not found. This property cannot be edited. Size Shows the file size of the selected file reference. The size is not displayed for file references that are unloaded or not found. This property cannot be edited. Type Indicates whether the file reference is an attachment or overlay, the type of image file or DWF/DWFx underlay. This property cannot be edited.
610 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Date Displays the last date the file reference was modified. This date is not displayed if the file reference is unloaded or not found. This property cannot be edited. Saved Path Shows the saved path of the selected file reference (this is not necessarily where the file reference is found). This property cannot be edited. Found At Displays the full path of the currently selected file reference. This is where the referenced file is actually found and is not necessarily the same as the saved path. Clicking the […] button displays the Select Image File dialog box where you can select a different path or file name. You can also type directly into the path field. These changes are stored to the Saved Path property if the new path is valid. File Version File Version property defined by the Vault client. This property is only displayed when you are logged into the Vault.
Specific Image Properties If you select a referenced image, additional properties are displayed. None of the added image properties can be edited. Color System Displays the color system. Color Depth The amount of information that is stored in each pixel of a raster image. Higher color depth values produce smoother degrees of shading. Pixel Width The width of the raster image measured in pixels. Pixel Height The height of the raster image measured in pixels. Resolution The width and height resolution in dots per inch (dpi). Default Size (in AutoCAD units) The width and height of the raster image measured in AutoCAD units.
External References Palette | 611
Preview Pane The Preview mode displays a preview for the file reference selected in the File References pane. The preview image is displayed only when a single file reference is selected from the File References pane. There are no other controls for this data pane. When no reference file is selected, the preview pane displays a solid grey field. If there is no preview available, the text "Preview not available" is displayed in the center of the pane.
Messaging Field Below the Details / Preview pane is a messaging field that supplies information about certain selected file references. When you select one or more nested references, information is displayed regarding the file references. Messages also appear if you decide the change the name of a file reference.
EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE Quick Reference Closes the External References palette Command entry: externalreferencesclose The EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE command closes the External References palette on page 602. If the External References palette is currently displayed, either in an auto-hidden state or open state, it is closed.
EXTRUDE Quick Reference Creates a 3D solid or surface by extruding a 2D object
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Extrude.
612 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Extrude Command entry: extrude Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=4 Select objects to extrude: on page 613 Specify height of extrusion on page 614 or [Direction on page 615/Path on page 615/Taper angle on page 616] <default>: Specify a distance or enter p If you extrude a closed object, the result is a 3D solid. If you extrude an open object, the result is a surface.
You can select the objects to extrude before you start the command. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the object(s) and path (if selected) are automatically deleted when the solid or surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete the object(s) and path.
Object Selection
Specifies the objects to extrude. You can extrude the following objects and subobjects: ■
Lines
■
Arcs
■
Elliptical arcs
■
2D polylines
■
2D splines
■
Circles
■
Ellipses
EXTRUDE | 613
■
2D solids
■
Traces
■
Regions
■
Planar 3D polylines
■
Planar 3D faces
■
Planar surfaces
■
Planar faces on solids
NOTE You can select faces on solids by pressing and holding CTRL, and then selecting these subobjects. You cannot extrude objects contained within a block or polylines that have crossing or self-intersecting segments. If a selected polyline has width, the width is ignored and the polyline is extruded from the center of the polyline path. If a selected object has thickness, the thickness is ignored. NOTE You can use CONVTOSOLID to convert polylines and circles with thickness to solids. You can use CONVTOSURFACE to convert lines with thickness; arcs with thickness; and open, zero-width polylines with thickness to surfaces.
Height of Extrusion Extrudes objects along the positive Z axis of the object's coordinate system if you enter a positive value. If you enter a negative value, the objects are extruded along the negative Z axis. Objects do not have to be parallel to the same plane. If all the objects are on a common plane, the objects are extruded in the direction of the normal of the plane. By default, planar objects are extruded in the direction of the object’s normal. Specify second point: Specify a point
614 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion with two points you specify. Specify start point of direction: Specify a point Specify end point of direction: Specify a point
Path Selects the extrusion path based on a specified object. The path is moved to the centroid of the profile. Then the profile of the selected object is extruded along the chosen path to create solids or surfaces.
Select extrusion path: Use an object selection method The following objects can be paths: ■
Lines
■
Circles
■
Arcs
■
Ellipses
■
Elliptical arcs
■
2D polylines
■
3D polylines
■
2D splines
■
3D splines
■
Edges of solids
■
Edges of surfaces
■
Helixes
NOTE You can select faces and edges on solids by pressing and holding CTRL, and then selecting these subobjects.
EXTRUDE | 615
The path should not lie on the same plane as the object, nor should the path have areas of high curvature. The extruded solid starts from the plane of the object and maintains its orientation relative to the path. If the path contains segments that are not tangent, the program extrudes the object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisecting the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the object should lie on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to match up. If the object is not on the miter plane, the object is rotated until it is on the miter plane. Objects with multiple loops are extruded so that all the loops appear on the same plane at the end section of the extruded solid.
Taper Angle Specify angle of taper for extrusion <0>: Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees, press ENTER, or specify a point If you specify a point for the taper angle rather than enter a value, you must pick a second point. The taper angle applied to the extrusion is the distance between the two specified points. Specify second point: Specify a point
Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. All selected objects and loops are tapered to the same value. Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion height. Individual loops of a region are always extruded to the same height. When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains constant, and the radius of the arc changes.
616 | Chapter 6 E Commands
F Commands
7
FIELD Quick Reference Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field. Menu: Insert ➤ Field Shortcut menu: Right-click while any text command is active, and click Insert Field. Command entry: field The Field dialog box on page 617 is displayed.
Field Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field. Menu: Insert ➤ Field Shortcut menu: Right-click while any text command is active, and click Insert Field.
617
Command entry: field Inserts a field in the drawing.
The options available in the Field dialog box change with the field category and field name. Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names (for example, Date & Time, Document, and Objects). Other includes DieselExpression, LispVariable, and SystemVariable. Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name to display the options available for that field. Field Value Displays the current value of the field, or displays an empty string (----) if the field value is invalid. The label for this item changes with the field name. For example, when Filename is selected in the Field Names list, the label is Filename and the value is the name of the current drawing file. The label is Property for object fields. Exception: when a date field is selected, the selected date format is displayed; for example, M/d/yyyy. Format List Lists options for display of the value of the field. For example, date fields can display the name of the day or not, and text strings can be uppercase, lowercase, first capital, or title case. The value displayed in the Fields dialog box reflects the format that you select. Field Expression Displays the expression that underlies the field. The field expression cannot be edited, but you can learn how fields are constructed by reading this area.
618 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Options for Sheet Set and Sheet View Fields The following additional options are available when sheet-set-related fields are selected: Sheet Set Specifies the name of the sheet set. Sheet Navigation Tree Displays a tree view of sheets or sheet views from the Sheet Set Manager, from which you can select an item for the field. Property Displays the properties available as fields for the item selected in the tree. Associate Hyperlink Adds a hyperlink to the field when it is created. You can use CTRL+click to jump to the sheet or view. This option is not available for the ViewportScale field. NOTE If you recreate the field, because the sheet is already in a sheet set, you should use a sheet set property field, not a placeholder field. Sheet set fields (fields that were selected from the sheet set category) behave differently than other types of fields. By default, other types of fields update automatically when you save the drawing or when you use REGEN on page 1248. In contrast, sheet set fields store the last values that were used, and they display these stored values if the information referenced by the sheet set field is not accessible. To update the value in a sheet set field, use UPDATEFIELD on page 1560 command. NOTE If the information referenced by sheet set field is not accessible, the value for the field will be displayed as “####.”
Options for BlockPlaceholder Fields BlockPlaceholder fields are only available for insertion in the Attribute Definition dialog box when the Block Editor on page 169 is open. The following additional options are available when the BlockPlaceholder field is selected: Block Name Displays the name of the current block definition. Temporary Value Displays the value for the placeholder field in the selected format. Block Reference Properties Displays a list of block reference properties for the current block definition.
Field Dialog Box | 619
Options for SheetSetPlaceholder Fields The following additional options are available when the SheetSetPlaceholder field is selected: Placeholder Type Displays a list of available placeholder fields. Temporary Value Displays the value for the placeholder field in the selected format. For example, with SheetSet Placeholder selected in the Field Names list, SheetTitle selected in the Placeholder Type list, and Uppercase selected in the Format list, Temporary Value displays SHEETTITLE. When the drawing is placed in a sheet set, this field displays the title of the sheet.
Options for Fields in the Objects Field Category The following additional options are available when object fields are selected: Named Object Type/Object Type When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the types of named objects in the drawing. When Object is selected, displays the type of object selected. Use the Select Object button to temporarily close the dialog box and select an object in the drawing. Property/Name When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the names of all the objects in the drawing of the selected type. When Object is selected in Field Names, lists the properties of the selected object that are available as fields. When a block with attributes is selected, the attribute names are displayed in the list of properties. Formula When Formula is selected in Field Names, provides a place for creating a formula to insert in text or in a table cell. Average/Sum/Count When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify table cells. The result is appended to the formula. Cell When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify a table cell. The cell address is appended to the formula. Precision Specifies precision for fields based on the selected format. Select Current Precision to use the current setting of the LUPREC system variable. Additional Format Displays the Additional Format dialog box on page 1484. Evaluate Updates the value in Preview when you have manually changed the text in Formula.
620 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Display Value for Block Reference Specifies that the object property fields in a block reference evaluate the properties of nested objects relative to the block reference's size and orientation within the drawing, not within the block definition.
FILL Quick Reference Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, two-dimensional solids, and wide polylines Command entry: fill (or 'fill for transparent use) Enter mode [ON on page 621/OFF on page 621] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER On Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be visible, its extrusion direction must be parallel to the current viewing direction, and hidden lines must not be suppressed.
Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are displayed and plotted. Changing Fill mode affects existing objects after the drawing is regenerated. The display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode setting.
FILL | 621
FILLET Quick Reference Rounds and fillets the edges of objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Fillet Command entry: fillet Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current Select first object on page 622 or [Undo on page 625/Polyline on page 625/Radius on page 625/Trim on page 625/Multiple on page 626]: Use an object selection method or enter an option In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines. The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead, enter a radius of zero.
First Object Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or selects the edge of a 3D solid to round or fillet the edge.
Select second object or shift-select to apply corner: Use an object selection method or hold down SHIFT and select an object to create a sharp corner
622 | Chapter 7 F Commands
If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the fillet arc. You can hold down SHIFT while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a value of 0. If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the fillet. More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. Select the objects close to where you want the endpoints of the fillet.
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.
FILLET | 623
If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the edges individually. Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r
Edge Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press ENTER.
If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner of a box, FILLET computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three incident fillets have the same radii.
Chain Changes from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges, called a chain selection. Select edge chain or <Edge/Radius>: Select an edge chain, enter e, or enter r Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge. For example, if you select an edge on the top of a 3D solid box, FILLET also selects the other tangential edges on the top.
Edge Switches to a single-edge selection mode. Radius Defines the radius of the rounded edge.
Radius Defines the radius of the rounded edge.
624 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER The previous prompt is displayed: Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select one or more edges, or enter c or r
Undo Reverses the previous action in the command.
Polyline Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet. Select 2D polyline: If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach the arc segment, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc.
Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc. Specify fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.
Trim Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints. Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Trim Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints. No Trim Does not trim the selected edges.
FILLET | 625
Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. FILLET displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command.
FILTER Quick Reference Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set Command entry: filter (or 'filter for transparent use) The Object Selection Filters dialog box on page 626 is displayed.
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: filter (or 'filter for transparent use) Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection.
626 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Filter Property List Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The current filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area.
Select Filter Adds filter properties to the current filter. Object Types and Logical Operators Lists object types that you can filter and logical operators (AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) for grouping the filter expressions. If you use logical operators, make sure that you pair and balance them correctly in the filter list. The number of operands you can enclose depends on the operation. Logical operators Starting operator
Encloses
Ending operator
Begin AND
One or more operands
End AND
Begin OR
One or more operands
End OR
Begin XOR
Two operands
End XOR
Begin NOT
One operand
End NOT
For example, the following filter selects all circles except the ones with a radius greater than or equal to 1.0: Object =Circle **Begin NOT Circle Radius >= 1.00 **End NOT X, Y, Z Parameters Define additional filter parameters depending on the object. For example, if you select Line Start, you can enter the X, Y, and Z coordinate values that you want to filter. In the filter parameters, you can use relative operators such as < (less than) or > (greater than). For example, the following filter selects all circles with center points greater than or equal to 1,1,0 and radii greater than or equal to 1: Object = Circle
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box | 627
Circle Center X >= 1.0000 Y >= 1.0000 Z >= 0.0000 Circle Radius >= 1.0000 Select Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified type in the drawing. Select the items to filter. For example, if you select the object type Color, Select displays a list of colors to choose for the filter. Add to List Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list. Filter properties that you add to the unnamed filter remain available during the current work session unless you manually delete them. Substitute Replaces the filter property selected in the filter property list with the one displayed in Select Filter. Add Selected Object Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list.
Edit Item Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. To edit a filter property, select it and choose Edit Item. Edit the filter property and choose Substitute. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property.
Delete Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter.
Clear List Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter.
Named Filters Displays, saves, and deletes filters. Current Displays saved filters. Select a filter list to make it current. The named filter and its list of properties are loaded from the default file, filter.nfl. Save As Saves a filter and its list of properties. The filter is saved in the filter.nfl file. Names can contain up to 18 characters. Delete Current Filter List Deletes a filter and all its properties from the default filter file.
628 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Apply Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt, where you create a selection set. The current filter is used on the objects you select.
FIND Quick Reference Finds, replaces, or zooms to specified text
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text. Menu: Edit ➤ Find Toolbar: Text Formatting Command entry: find Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Find. The Find and Replace dialog box on page 629 is displayed.
Find and Replace Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Text Formatting Command entry: find Menu: Edit ➤ Find Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Find. Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope and results of the search.
FIND | 629
Find What Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a text string, including any wild-card characters, or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list. For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the User’s Guide. Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text. Enter a string, or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list. Find Where Specifies whether to search the entire drawing, the current layout, or the currently-selected object. If an object is already selected, then Selected Objects is the default value. If no object is selected, then Entire Drawing is the default value. You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog box and create or modify the selection set. Select Objects Button Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select objects in your drawing. Press ENTER to return to the dialog box. When you select objects, Find Where displays Selected Objects by default. List Results Lists results in a table displaying the text location (model or paper space, for example), object type, and text string where the text was found. The resulting table can be sorted by column. Expand Find Options Button Displays options to define the type of objects and words that you want to find. Replace Replaces found text with the text that you enter in Replace With. Replace All Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. The Find Where setting controls whether to find and replace text in the entire drawing or text in the currently selected object or objects. Find/Find Next Finds the text that you enter in Find What. If you have not entered text in Find What, this option is not available. Found text is zoomed
630 | Chapter 7 F Commands
to or displayed in the List Results table. Once you find the first instance of the text, the Find option becomes Find Next, which you can use to find the next instance.
Search Options Defines the type of objects and words to be found. Match Case Includes the case of the text in Find What as part of the search criteria. Find Whole Words Only Finds only whole words that match the text in Find What. For example, if you select Find Whole Words Only and search for “Front Door,” FIND does not locate the text string “Front Doormat.” Use Wildcards Allows the use of wild-card characters in searches. For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the User’s Guide. Search XRefs Includes text in externally referenced files in search results. Search Blocks Includes text in blocks in search results. Ignore Hidden Items Ignores hidden items in search results. Hidden items include text on layers that are frozen or turned off, text in block attributes created in invisible mode, and text in visibility states within dynamic blocks. Match Diacritics (Latin-based languages) Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results. Match Half/Full Width Forms (East Asian Languages) Matches half- and full-width characters in search results.
Text Types Specifies the type of text objects you want to include in the search. By default, all options are selected. Block Attribute Value Includes block attribute text values in search results. Dimension/Leader Text Includes dimension and leader object text in search results. Text Includes text objects such as Text and MText in search results. Table Text Includes text found in AutoCAD table cells in search results. Hyperlink Description Includes text found in hyperlink descriptions in search results. Hyperlink Includes hyperlink URLs in search results.
Find and Replace Dialog Box | 631
FLATSHOT Quick Reference Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects in the current view
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Flatshot. Command entry: flatshot The Flatshot dialog box on page 632 is displayed.
Flatshot Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Flatshot. Command entry: flatshot Creates a 2D or “flattened” representation of all 3D objects in the current view. The resulting view is inserted as a block on the XY plane or saved as a file.
632 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Destination Controls where the flattened representation is created. Insert As New Block Specifies to insert the flattened representation as a block in the current drawing. Replace Existing Block Replaces an an existing block in the drawing with the newly created block. Select Block Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block you are relacing in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press ENTER to redisplay the Flatshot dialog box. Block Selected Indicates if a block has been selected. Export to a File Saves the block to an external file.
Foreground Lines Contains controls for setting the color and linetype of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view. Color Sets the color of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view. Linetype Sets the linetype of lines that are not obscured in the view.
Flatshot Dialog Box | 633
Obscured Lines Controls whether lines that are obscured in the drawing are displayed in the flattened view, and sets the color and linetype of these obscured lines. Show Controls whether obscured lines are shown in the flattened representation. When selected, the 2D flattened representation displays lines hidden by other objects. Color Sets the color of lines that lie behind geometry in the flattened view. Linetype Sets the linetype of lines that lie behind geometry in the flattened view. Create Creates the flattened view. Include Tangential Edges Creates silhouette edges for curved surfaces.
FOG Quick Reference Obsolete Command entry: fog The Render Environment dialog box on page 1269 is displayed. (RENDERENVIRONMENT command)
FREESPOT Quick Reference Creates a free spotlight, which is similar to a spotlight but without a specified target Command entry: freespot Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed:
634 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Enter an option to change [Name on page 635/Intensity on page 635/Status on page 636/Hotspot on page 635/Falloff on page 635/shadoW on page 637/Attenuation on page 638/Color on page 638/eXit on page 639] <eXit>: If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 635/Intensity factor on page 635/Photometry on page 636/Status on page 636/Hotspot on page 635/Falloff on page 635/shadoW on page 637/filterColor on page 638/eXit on page 639] <eXit>: NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility.
Name Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters. Enter light name:
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Enter intensity (0.00 - max float) <1.0000>:
Hotspot Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS and AUNITS. Enter hotspot angle (0.00-160.00) <45.0000>:
Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 50 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS and AUNITS. The falloff angle must be greater than or equal to the hotspot angle. Enter falloff angle (0.00-160.00) <50>:
FREESPOT | 635
Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Enter status [oN/oFf] :
Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Enter a photometric option to change [Intensity/Color/eXit] : Intensity Enter intensity (Cd) or enter an option [Flux/Illuminance] <1500.0000>: Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface. ■
Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr
■
Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance. Lm/m^2
■
Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2
Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value. Enter Flux (Lm) <18849.5556>: If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an illuminance value. Enter Illuminance ("Lx"|"Fc") or enter an option [Distance] <1500.0000>: The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance. Enter Distance <1.0000>: Color Enter color name or enter an option [?/Kelvin] : Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names.
636 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Enter color name(s) to list <*>: Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Enter Kelvin temperature <3600.0000>: Exit Exits the command.
Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Enter shadow settings [Off/Sharp/soFtmapped/softsAmpled] <Sharp>: Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Enter map size [64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096] <256>: Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Enter softness (1-10) <1>: Specifies the softness that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Enter an option to change [Shape/sAmples/Visible/eXit]<eXit> : Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Enter shape [Disk/Rect] : Specify the sample size by entering a. Enter Shadow Sample <16.0000>: Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v. Enter Shape Visibility [Yes/No]:
FREESPOT | 637
Attenuation Enter an option to change [attenuation Type/Use limits/attenuation start Limit/attenuation End limit/eXit]<eXit>: Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a spotlight, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay. Enter attenuation type [None/Inverse linear/inverse Squared] : ■
None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the spotlight are as bright as objects close to the light.
■
Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is half as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity.
■
Inverse Squared. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one sixteenth as strong.
Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not. Limits [oN/oFf] : Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. The default is 0. Specify start limit offset <1.0000>: NOTE Attenuation start limits and end limits are not supported by the OpenGL driver (wopengl9.hdi), but the Direct 3D driver (direct3d9.hdi) does support end limits for attenuation but does not support start limits. To identify your driver, enter 3dconfig, and click Manual Tune. Look at the selected Driver Name in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box. Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time. Specify end limit offset <10.0000>:
Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light.
638 | Chapter 7 F Commands
Enter true color (R,G,B) or enter an option [Index color/Hsl/colorBook]<255,255,255>: True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. Enter color name or number (1-255): HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Enter HSL color (H,S,L): Color Book Specifies a color from a color book. Enter Color Book name:
Exit Exits the command.
FREEWEB Quick Reference Creates a free weblight which is similar to a weblight but without a specified target Command entry: freeweb Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device Enter an option to change [Name on page 639/Intensity factor on page 640/Status on page 640/Photometry on page 640/weB on page 641/shadoW on page 641/filterColor on page 642/eXit on page 642] <eXit>: NOTE The LIGHTINGUNITS system variable must be set to a value other than 0 to create and use freeweb lights.
Name Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters. Enter light name:
FREEWEB | 639
Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Enter intensity (0.00 - max float) <1.0000>:
Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Enter status [oN/oFf]:
Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Enter a photometric option to change [Intensity/Color/eXit] : Intensity Enter intensity (Cd) or enter an option [Flux/Illuminance] <1500.0000>: Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface. ■
Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr
■
Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance. Lm/m^2
■
Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2
Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value. Enter Flux (Lm) <18849.5556>: If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an illuminance value. Enter Illuminance ("Lx"|"Fc") or enter an option [Distance] <1500.0000>:
640 | Chapter 7 F Commands
The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance. Enter Distance <1.0000>: Color Enter color name or enter an option [?/Kelvin] : Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter color name(s) to list <*> : Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Enter Kelvin temperature <3600.0000>: Exit Exits the command option.
Web Specifies the intensity for a light at points on a spherical grid. Enter a Web option to change [File/X/Y/Z/Exit] <Exit>: File Enter Web file <>: Specifies which web file to use to define the properties of the web. Web files have the file extension .ies. X Enter Web X rotation <0.0000>: Specifies the X rotation for the web. Y Enter Web Y rotation <0.0000>: Specifies the Y rotation for the web. Z Enter Web Z rotation <0.0000>: Specifies the Z rotation for the web. Exit Exits the command option.
Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Enter shadow settings [Off/Sharp/soFtmapped/softsAmpled] <Sharp>: Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance.
FREEWEB | 641
Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Enter map size [64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096] <256>: Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. Enter softness (1-10) <1>: Specifies the softness that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Enter an option to change [Shape/sAmples/Visible/eXit]<eXit> : Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Enter shape [Linear, Disk, Rect, Sphere, Cyl] <Sphere>: Specify the sample size by entering a. Enter Shadow Sample <16.0000>: Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v. Enter Shape Visibility [Yes/No]:
Filter Color Controls the color of the light. Enter true color (R,G,B) or enter an option [Index color/Hsl/colorBook]: True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. Enter color name or number (1-255): HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Enter HSL color (H,S,L) <0,0,100>: Color Book Specifies a color from a color book. Enter Color Book name:
Exit Exits the command.
642 | Chapter 7 F Commands
8
G Commands
GEOGRAPHICLOCATION Quick Reference Specifies the geographic location information for a drawing file.
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Time & Location panel ➤ Geographic Location. Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Command entry: geographiclocation This command displays either of the following dialog boxes: Define Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 644
Appears only if a geographic location does not exist, and the drawing does not contain a foreign coordinate system.
Location Already Exists Dialog Box on page 644
Appears if a geographic location exists, and the drawing does not contain a foreign coordinate system.
Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box on page 645
Appears if an alternate coordinate system is found.
643
Define Geographic Location Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Command entry: geographiclocation Defines a geographic location. Import a .kml or a .kmz file
Displays the Import a .kml or .kmz file dialog box.
Import the current location from Google Earth
Retrieves location information from a specific location in Google Earth. NOTE Google Earth should be installed and open with the location selected.
Enter the location values
Displays the Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 645, where you can enter the location information manually.
See also: ■
Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 645
Location Already Exists Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Command entry: geographiclocation Enables you to edit, redefine, or remove an existing location. Edit current geographic location
644 | Chapter 8 G Commands
Displays the Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 645, where you can edit the existing location information.
Redefine geographic location
Displays the Define Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 644, where you can redefine the geographic location.
Remove geographic location
Displays a confirmation dialog box before removing the geographic location.
Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Command entry: geographiclocation Provides an option to convert the alternate coordinate system to the LL84 coordinate system used by AutoCAD. Link Label
Description
Leave existing coordinate system
Does not convert the alternate coordinate system to the LL84 coordinate system.
Convert to AutoCAD’s coordinate system
Converts the alternate coordinate system to AutoCAD’s LL84 coordinate system.
Geographic Location Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Command entry: geographiclocation
Coordinate System Already Defined Dialog Box | 645
Sets the latitude, longitude, and north direction of a geographic location in
a drawing.
Latitude and Longitude Displays or sets latitude, longitude, and direction in decimal values. Decimal Lat / Long
Sets the format of the latitude and longitude representation in the drawing.
Use Map
Displays the Location Picker Dialog Box on page 649. Specifies a location by using the pointing device. The latitude and longitude values are updated when you select a location. If you enter latitude and longitude values, then the map displays the updated location.
646 | Chapter 8 G Commands
Latitude
Sets the latitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a location on the map. The valid range is -90 and +90 as a floating point number. (LATITUDE on page 1819 system variable).
North/South
Controls whether a positive value is north of the equator or a positive value is south of the equator.
Longitude
Displays the longitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a location on the map. The valid range is -180 to +180 as a floating point number. (LONGITUDE on page 1837 system variable).
East/West
Controls whether a positive value is west of the Prime Meridian or a positive value is east of the Prime Meridian.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone. Time zones are estimated by reference to the location. You can set the time zone directly. TIMEZONE on page 1931 (system variable).
Coordinates and Elevation Sets the values for the World Coordinate System (WCS), X,Y,Z, and the elevation. X
Sets the X component of the world coordinate system for the geographic location.
Y
Sets the Y component of the world coordinate system for the geographic location.
Geographic Location Dialog Box | 647
Z
Sets the Z component of the world coordinate system for the geographic location.
Pick Point
Specifies the X, Y, and Z values of the Geographic Location marker based on the World Coordinate System (WCS).
Elevation
Sets the relative height along the specified up-direction defined for a geographic location.
North Direction By default, north is the positive Y direction in the World Coordinate System (WCS). Angle
Specifies the angle from 0 for the north direction Valid values are 0-360.
Pick Point
Specifies the north angle based on the direction vector specified. A rubber band line appears denoting the north direction.
Interactive North Direction Preview
Specifies the north angle. The range is 0359.9.
Up Direction By default, the up direction is the positive Z-axis (0,0,+1). The Up direction and the north direction are always constrained such that they are perpendicular to each other. Up Direction
Sets the up direction.
Pick Point
Specifies the up direction (from the current WCS coordinate) based on the direction vector specified.
648 | Chapter 8 G Commands
Enabled only if the up direction is set to Custom.
Location Picker Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Command entry: geographiclocation Sets the latitude and longitude of the selected location. Map
Specifies a location on the map.
Region
Specifies a region of the world.
Nearest City
Specifies a city in the selected region.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone. Time zones are estimated by reference to the location. You can set the time zone directly. TIMEZONE on page 1931 (system variable).
Nearest Big City
Uses the latitude and longitude values for the nearest big city that you select.
See also: ■
Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 645
GOTOURL Quick Reference Opens the file or web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object
Location Picker Dialog Box | 649
Command entry: gotourl Select an object that has an attached hyperlink. The file or web page (URL) that is associated with the hyperlink opens.
GRADIENT Quick Reference Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Gradient.
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Gradient Command entry: gradient Opens the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 662 to the Gradient tab. A gradient fill creates a transition between shades of one color or betwen two colors.
GRAPHSCR Quick Reference Switches from the text window to the drawing area Command entry: graphscr (or 'graphscr for transparent use) GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can also press F2 to open or close the text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.
650 | Chapter 8 G Commands
GRID Quick Reference Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Grid Command entry: grid (or 'grid for transparent use) Specify grid spacing(X) on page 651 or [ON on page 651/OFF on page 651/Snap on page 651/Major on page 651/Adaptive on page 651/Limits on page 652/Follow on page 652/Aspect on page 652] <current>: Specify a value or enter an option Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval. On Turns on the grid using the current spacing.
Off Turns off the grid.
Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP command. Major Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed in any visual style except 2D Wireframe. (GRIDMAJOR system variable) Adaptive Controls the density of grid lines when zoomed in or out. Turn adaptive behavior on [Yes/No] : Enter YorN
GRID | 651
Limits the density of grid lines or dots when zoomed out. This setting is also controlled by the GRIDDISPLAY system variable. Allow subdivision below grid spacing [Yes/No] If turned on, generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines or dots when zoomed in. The frequency of these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major grid lines. Limits Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS command. Follow Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS. This setting is also controlled by the GRIDDISPLAY system variable. Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions. Specify the horizontal spacing(X) <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify the vertical spacing(Y) <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval rather than the drawing units. The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric.
GROUP Quick Reference Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups Command entry: group The Object Grouping dialog box on page 653is displayed. If you enter -group at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 657.
652 | Chapter 8 G Commands
Object Grouping Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: group Displays, identifies, names, and changes object groups.
Group Name Displays the names of existing groups.
Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0, no groups are selectable.
Group Identification Displays the name and description (if any) of the group selected in the Group Name list. Group Name Specifies the group name. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters.
Object Grouping Dialog Box | 653
Description Displays the description of the selected group, if there is one. Find Name Lists the groups to which an object belongs. Pick a member of a group: Select one object The Group Member List dialog box is displayed, showing the groups to which the object belongs. Highlight Shows the members of the selected group in the drawing area. Include Unnamed Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed. When this option is cleared, only named groups are displayed.
Create Group Specifies properties of new groups. New Creates a new group from the selected objects, using the name and description under Group Name and Description.
The group name is displayed in the Group Name list. Selectable Specifies that a new group is selectable. Unnamed Indicates that a new group is unnamed. A default name, *An, is assigned to unnamed groups. The n represents a number that increases with each new group.
Change Group Modifies existing groups. Remove Removes objects from the selected group. To use this option, clear the Selectable option. Remove objects: Use an object selection method The selected objects are removed from the group. The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed.
654 | Chapter 8 G Commands
If you remove all the group's objects, the group remains defined. You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option. NOTE When you remove objects from a group and then later add them back during the same drawing session, they are returned to their previous position in the numerical order of the group. Add Adds objects to the selected group. Select objects: Use an object selection method The selected objects are added to the group. The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed.
NOTE Group names are displayed in alphabetical order. Rename Renames the selected group to the name entered in Group Name under Group Identification. Re-Order Displays the Order Group dialog box on page 656, in which you can change the numerical order of objects within the selected group. Objects are numbered in the order in which you select them for inclusion in the group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. You can either change the numerical position of individual group members or ranges of group members or reverse the order of all members. The first object in a group is number 0, not number 1.
Object Grouping Dialog Box | 655
Description Updates the selected group's description to the name that you enter in Description. You can use up to 64 characters for a description name. Explode Deletes the definition of the selected group. The group's objects remain in the drawing. Selectable Specifies whether the group is selectable.
Order Group Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: group Reorders objects in groups.
Group Name Displays the names of all groups. Description Displays the description of the selected group. Remove from Position (0-n) Specifies the current position of the object to reorder. Enter New Position Number for the Object (0-n) Specifies the position to which the object moves. Number of Objects (1-n) Specifies the object number or range of numbers to reorder. Re-Order Changes the numerical order of objects as specified.
656 | Chapter 8 G Commands
Highlight Displays the members of the selected group in the drawing area, one by one, in the current group order. Reverse Order Reverses the order of all group members.
-GROUP Quick Reference If you enter -group at the command prompt, the following GROUP command prompts are displayed. Enter a group option [? on page 657/Order on page 657/Add on page 657/Remove on page 658/Explode on page 658/REName on page 658/Selectable on page 658/Create on page 658] : Enter an option or press ENTER
?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing. Enter group name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all groups
Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name list or enter ? to list all groups Enter position number of the object to reorder (0-n) or [Reverse order]: Enter a position number or enter r Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder. To reorder a range of objects, specify the first object's position number. Replace at position <0-n>: Enter the position number to which you want the object to move Number of objects to re-order <0-n>: Enter the number of objects to reorder Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group.
Add Adds objects to a group.
-GROUP | 657
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups Select objects to add to group... Select objects:
Remove Removes objects from a group. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups Select objects to remove from group... Remove objects: If you remove all the group's objects, the group remains defined. You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.
Explode Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component objects. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
Ungroup Removes the group name and the association of objects in the group.
Rename Assigns a new name to an existing group. Enter a group name to rename or [?]: Enter an existing group name or enter ? to list all groups Enter a new name for group or [?]: Enter a new name or enter ? to list all groups
Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups This group is current, do you want to change it [Yes/No]? : Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Create Creates a group.
658 | Chapter 8 G Commands
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters. Enter a group description: Enter up to 64 text characters or press ENTER Select objects:
-GROUP | 659
660
H Commands
9
HATCH Quick Reference Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch.
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Command entry: hatch The Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 662 is displayed. If you enter -hatch at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 675. NOTE By default, the program will not create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10,000 hatch segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and 10,000,000. You can choose from several methods to specify the boundaries of a hatch. ■
Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects.
■
Select objects that enclose an area.
661
■
Drag a hatch pattern into an enclosed area from a tool palette or DesignCenter.
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Command entry: hatch Defines the boundaries, pattern type, pattern properties, and other parameters for hatch and gradient fill objects. ■
Hatch tab on page 666
■
Gradient tab on page 669
■
More Options section on page 671
■
Add: Pick Points on page 663
■
Add: Select Objects on page 663
■
Recreate Boundary on page 665
■
Remove Boundaries on page 664
■
View Selections on page 665
■
Options on page 665
■
Inherit Properties on page 666
■
Preview on page 666
662 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Add: Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point. The dialog box closes temporarily, and you are prompted to pick a point. Pick internal point or [Select objects/remove Boundaries]: Click within the area to be hatched or filled, specify an option, enter u or undo to undo the last selection, or press ENTER to return to the dialog box
While picking internal points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several options. If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method you select in the More Options area of the dialog box.
Add: Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. The dialog box closes temporarily, and you are prompted to select objects. Select objects or [picK internal point/remove Boundaries]:Select objects that define the area to be hatched or filled, specify an option, enter u or undo to undo the last selection, or press ENTER to return to the dialog box
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 663
When you use the Select Objects option, HATCH does not detect interior objects automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.
Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or gradient fill.
Remove Boundaries Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added previously. When you click Remove Boundaries, the dialog box closes temporarily, and displays a command prompt. Select Objects or [Add boundaries]: Select objects to be removed from the boundary definition, specify an option, or press ENTER to return to the dialog box Select Objects Removes temporary boundary objects for hatching or filling as you select them.
664 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Add Boundaries Adds temporary boundary objects for hatching or filling as you select them.
Recreate Boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. When you click Recreate Boundary, the dialog box closes temporarily, and displays a command prompt. Enter type of boundary object [Region/Polyline] <current>: Enter r to create a region or p to create a polyline Reassociate hatch with new boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n
View Selections Temporarily closes the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is unavailable when no boundary has been defined.
Options Controls several commonly used hatch or fill options. Annotative Specifies that the hatch is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Associative Controls whether the hatch or fill is associative or nonassociative. A hatch or fill that is associative is updated when you modify its boundaries. (HPASSOC system variable) Create Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE system variable)
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 665
Draw Order Assigns the draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system variable)
Inherit Properties Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of a selected hatch object. HPINHERIT controls whether the hatch origin of the resulting hatch is determined by HPORIGIN or by the source object. After selecting the hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit, you can right-click in the drawing area and use the options on the shortcut menu to switch between the Select Objects and Pick Internal Point options to create boundaries. When you click Inherit Properties, the dialog box closes temporarily, and displays a command prompt. Select hatch object: Click within a hatched or filled area to select the hatch whose properties are to be used for the new hatch object
Preview Dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. Click in the drawing or press ESC to return to the dialog box. Right-click or press ENTER to accept the hatch or fill. This option is not available when you have not yet specified points or selected objects to define your boundaries.
More Options Expands the dialog box to display more options.
Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box) Quick Reference Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.
666 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Type and Pattern Specifies the type of hatch and the pattern. Type Sets the pattern type. User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path. You can control the angle and scale of any pattern. Predefined patterns are stored in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat files supplied with the product. Pattern Lists the available predefined patterns. The six most recently used predefined patterns appear at the top of the list. HATCH stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Predefined. [...] Button Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 674, in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to help you make a selection. Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 674. When the SOLID
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 667
pattern is selected, you can click the right arrow to display a list of colors or the Select Color dialog box on page 261. Custom Pattern Lists the available custom patterns. The six most recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list. The name of the selected pattern is stored in the HPNAME system variable. The Custom Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Custom. [...] Button Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 674, in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help you make a selection.
Angle and Scale Specifies an angle and a scale for the selected hatch pattern. Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS. HATCH stores the angle in the HPANG system variable. Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. HATCH stores the scale in the HPSCALE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined or Custom. Double For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines, creating a crosshatch. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined on the Hatch tab. (HPDOUBLE system variable) Relative to Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option, you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout. This option is available only from a layout. Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. HATCH stores the spacing in the HPSPACE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined. ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one of the available ISO patterns.
Hatch Origin Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches, such as brick patterns, need to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
668 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Use Current Origin Uses the setting stored in the HPORIGINMODE system variable. The origin is set to 0,0 by default. Specified Origin Specifies a new hatch origin. Click this option to make the following options available. Click to Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly. Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the boundary for the hatch object. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center. (HPORIGINMODE system variable) Store as Default Origin Stores the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable. Origin Preview Shows the current location of the origin.
Gradient Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box) Quick Reference Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 669
Color One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and lighter tints of one color. When One Color is selected, HATCH displays a color swatch with Browse button and a Shade and Tint slider. Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. When Two Color is selected, HATCH displays a color swatch with a Browse button for color 1 and for color 2. Color Swatch Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click the Browse button [...] to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261, where you can select an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color, true color, or color book color. The default color displayed is the current color in the drawing. Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.
670 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Gradient Patterns Displays nine fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear sweep, spherical, and parabolic.
Orientation Specifies the angle of the gradient and whether it is symmetrical. Centered Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option is not selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of a light source to the left of the object. Angle Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the current UCS. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch patterns.
More Options (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box) Quick Reference Controls the operation of islands and boundaries.
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 671
Islands Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost boundary. If no internal boundaries exist, specifying an island detection style has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it is often best to use the Normal style. Island Detection Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island. You can also set the Normal style by adding ,N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. You can also set the Outer style by adding ,O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. You can also set the Ignore style by adding ,I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries.
672 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Boundary Retention Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects, and determines the object type applied to those objects. Retain Boundaries Creates boundary objects from the temporary hatch boundaries and adds them to the drawing. Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. The resulting boundary object can be a region or a polyline object. This option is available only if Retain Boundaries is checked. For more information about regions, see “Create and Combine Areas (Regions)” in the User's Guide.
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary. By default, when you use the Add: Pick Point option to define a boundary, HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because HATCH examines fewer objects. Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set. Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected with New. If you have not created a boundary set with New, the Existing Set option is not available. New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set.
Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose the area with no gaps. Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary. Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored, and the boundary is treated as closed. (HPGAPTOL system variable)
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 673
Inherit Options When you create a hatch with Inherit Properties, these settings control the location of the hatch origin. Use Current Origin Uses the current hatch origin setting Use Source Hatch Origin Uses the hatch origin of the source hatch
Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Command entry: hatch Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns. The dialog box organizes patterns on four tabs with images arranged alphabetically on each tab. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK.
ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the product. ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with the product. Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped with the product.
674 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Custom Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the search path, which is set in the Options dialog box, Files tab. Preview Displays a preview image of the selected custom pattern.
-HATCH Quick Reference If you enter -hatch at the command prompt, the following HATCH command prompts are displayed. Specify internal point on page 675 or [Properties on page 675/Select objects on page 676/draW boundary on page 676/remove Boundaries on page 676/Advanced on page 677/DRaw order on page 681/Origin on page 681/ANnotative on page 681]: Specify a point or enter an option
Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point. If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method is specified.
Properties Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply. Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or custom pattern name, enter s, enter u, enter ?, or press ENTER Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch object. Specify a scale for the pattern <current>: Specify a scale or press ENTER Specify an angle for the pattern <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER ?—List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the acad.pat file. Pattern(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
-HATCH | 675
Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first HATCH command prompt, where you can define a boundary. User Defined Specifies a user-defined pattern. Enter u, followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch block. Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an angle for the pattern or press ENTER Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the distance between pattern lines or press ENTER Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines, or press ENTER
Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. Adds objects to the boundary definition. Select objects: Use an object selection method
Draw Boundary Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill. Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enteryto retain the polyline hatch boundary object or n to discard it after the area is hatched Specify start point: Specify the start point of the polyline boundary Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER These options are also available in the PLINE command. When you complete the polyline boundary, press ENTER. You can then create additional polyline boundaries, or press ENTER to twice to apply the hatch. Specify start point for new boundary or : Specify a point or press ENTER twice to apply the hatch
Remove Boundaries Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added previously. Select Objects or [Add boundaries]: Select objects to be removed from the boundary definition, enter an option, or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt Select Objects Removes objects from the boundary definition.
676 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition.
Advanced Sets the method used to create the hatch boundary. Enter an option [Boundary set/Retain boundary/Island detection/Style/Associativity/Gap tolerance/separate Hatches]: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects to be analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified internal point. Specify candidate set for boundary [New/Everything] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER New Creates a boundary set from a selection set you define. Select objects: Use an object selection method Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses everything visible in the drawing or in the current viewport.
Retain Boundary Specifies whether to add the temporary boundary objects to the drawing after hatching is completed. Retain derived boundaries? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Island Detection Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. Do you want island detection? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method. Enter type of ray casting [Nearest/+X/-X/+Y/-Y/Angle] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
-HATCH | 677
+X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
-X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
+Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
-Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
678 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Specify ray casting angle: Specify an angle
Style Specifies the method used to hatch objects within the outermost hatch boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the Normal style. Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Ignore IIgnores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. You can also set the Ignore style by adding ,I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. You can also set the Outer style by adding ,O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
-HATCH | 679
Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island. You can also set the Normal style by adding ,N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Associativity Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified. A new hatch pattern's associativity is set by the HPASSOC system variable. Changing the associativity setting here also changes the setting in the HPASSOC system variable. Do you want associativity? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose the area with no gaps. Specify a boundary gap tolerance value <0>: Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify in the gap tolerance are ignored, and the boundary is treated as closed.
680 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Separate Hatches Controls whether the command creates a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects when several separate closed boundaries are specified. Create separate hatches? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Draw Order Assigns the draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system variable) Enter draw order [do Not assign/send to Back/bring to Front/send beHind boundary/bring in front of bounDary] <send beHind boundary>: Enter an option, or press ENTER to accept the default and return to the previous prompt
Origin Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches, such as brick patterns, need to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin. [Use current origin/Set new origin/Default to boundary extents] <current>: Enter an option, or press ENTER to accept the default and return to the previous prompt Use current origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE system variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5. [Use current origin/Set new origin/bottom Left/bottom Right/top rIght/top lEft/Center] <current>: Enter an option, or press ENTER to accept the default and return to the previous prompt Set new origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly. Default to boundary extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center. Also can store the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable.
Annotative Specifies that the hatch is . Create annotative hatch [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
-HATCH | 681
HATCHEDIT Quick Reference Modifies an existing hatch or fill
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Hatch.
Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Hatch Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Hatch Edit. Command entry: hatchedit Select hatch object: Use an object selection method The Hatch Edit dialog box on page 682 is displayed. If you enter -hatchedit at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 684. You can modify hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch.
Hatch Edit Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Hatch.
Toolbar: Modify II Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Hatch Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hatch Edit. Command entry: hatchedit
682 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Modifies the characteristics of an existing hatch or fill. The Hatch Edit dialog box displays the current properties of the selected hatch or fill object. You can modify only the properties in the Hatch Edit dialog box that are available.
Hatch Tab Modifies the hatch pattern properties. For information about these options, see the Hatch tab on page 666 in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box. Gradient Tab Modifies the gradient fill properties. For information about these options, see the Gradient tab on page 669 in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box. More Options Modifies the Inherit Options setting that is associated with Inherit Properties. All other options are not available. For more information, see Inherit Properties in the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 662. Boundaries Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill.
Hatch Edit Dialog Box | 683
For more information, see the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 662. Options Makes hatch , removes hatch associativity, separates a single hatch object that has several separate boundaries into individual hatch objects, and changes hatch draw order. For more information, see the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 662. Inherit Properties Assigns the hatch or fill properties from another hatch object. For more information, see the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 662. Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the selected object with the specified properties.
-HATCHEDIT Quick Reference If you enter -hatchedit at the command prompt, the following HATCHEDIT command prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Enter hatch option [DIssassociate on page 684/Style on page 684/Properties on page 685/DRaw order on page 685/ADd boundaries on page 685/Remove boundaries on page 685/recreate Boundary on page 685/Associate on page 686/separate Hatches on page 686/ANnotative on page 686] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Disassociate Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch.
Style Changes the hatch style type. The following prompt is displayed: Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>: Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. You can also set the Ignore style by adding ,I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches or fills
684 | Chapter 9 H Commands
only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. You can also set the Outer style by adding ,O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island. You can also set the Normal style by adding ,N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Properties Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. For an explanation of setting pattern properties at the command prompt, see HATCH.
Draw Order Sets the draw order of the hatch. The following prompt is displayed: Enter draw order [do Not change/send to Back/bring to Front/send beHind boundary/bring in front of bounDary] <do Not change>: Enter an option Send to Back Sends the hatch in back of all other objects Bring to Front Brings the hatch in front of all other objects Send Behind Boundary Sends the hatch behind the hatch boundary Bring in Front of Boundary Brings the hatch in front of the hatch boundary
Add Boundaries Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by adding boundaries. For more information, see Add: Pick Points on page 663 or Add: Select Objects on page 663.
Remove Boundaries Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by removing boundaries. For more information, see Remove Boundaries on page 664.
Recreate Boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. For more information, see Recreate Boundary on page 665.
-HATCHEDIT | 685
Associate Specifies that the selected hatch pattern be associated with the specified boundary objects. Specify internal point or [Select Objects]: Click within a bounded area, enter an option, or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point. Associates the selected hatch with that boundary. Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. Associates the selected hatch with that boundary.
Separate Hatches Separates a single hatch object that has several separate boundaries into individual hatch objects.
Origin Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches, such as brick patterns, need to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin. [Use current origin/Set new origin/Default to boundary extents] <current>: Enter an option, or press ENTER to accept the default and return to the previous prompt Use current origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE system variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5. [Use current origin/Set new origin/bottom Left/bottom Right/top rIght/top lEft/Center] <current>: Enter an option, or press ENTER to accept the default and return to the previous prompt Set new origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly. Default to boundary extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center. Also can store the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable.
Annotative Specifies that the hatch is . Create annotative hatch [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
686 | Chapter 9 H Commands
HELIX Quick Reference Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Helix.
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Helix Command entry: helix Number of turns = 3 (default) Twist = CCW (default) Specify center point of base: Specify a point Specify base radius or [Diameter on page 687] <1.0000>: Specify a base radius, enter d to specify the diameter, or press ENTER to specify the default base radius value Specify top radius or [Diameter on page 688] <1.0000>: Specify a top radius, enter d to specify the diameter, or press ENTER to specify the default top radius value Specify helix height or [Axis endpoint on page 688/Turns on page 688/turn Height on page 688/tWist on page 689] <1.0000>: Specify a helix height, or enter an option Use a helix as a sweep path for the SWEEP command to create springs, threads, and circular stairways.
Initially, the default base radius is set to 1. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive or helix. The default value for the top radius is always the value of the base radius. The base radius and top radius cannot both be set to 0.
Diameter (Base) Specifies the diameter of the base of the helix.
HELIX | 687
Specify diameter <2.0000>: Specify a diameter or press ENTER to specify the default value Initially, the default base diameter is set to 2. During a drawing session, the default value for the base diameter is always the previously entered base diameter value.
Diameter (Top) Specifies the diameter of the top of the helix. Specify diameter <2.0000>: Specify a diameter or press ENTER to specify the default value The default value for the top diameter is always the value of the base diameter.
Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the helix axis. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the helix. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point
Turns Specifies the number of turns (revolutions) for the helix. The number of turns for a helix cannot exceed 500. Initially, the default value for the number of turns is three. During a drawing session, the default value for the number of turns is always the previously entered number of turns value. Enter number of turns: Enter a number
Turn Height Specifies the height of one complete turn within the helix. The number of turns in the helix will automatically update accordingly when a turn height value is specified. If the number of turns for the helix has been specified, you cannot enter a value for the turn height. Specify distance between turns <default>: Enter a number to specify the height for each turn in the helix
688 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Twist Specifies whether the helix is drawn in the clockwise (CW) or the counterclockwise (CCW) direction. The default value for the helix twist is CCW. Enter twist direction of helix [CW/CCW] : Specify a twist direction for the helix
HELP Quick Reference Displays Help
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Help ➤ Help Command entry: help or ? or press F1 (or 'help for transparent use) To display Help for a menu, open the menu, and then press F1. Pressing F1 or entering 'help while a command is active displays Help for that command. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box.
HIDE Quick Reference Regenerates a three-dimensional wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed
Toolbar: Render Menu: View ➤ Hide Command entry: hide When you use VPOINT, DVIEW, or VIEW to create a 3D view of your 2D drawing, a wireframe is displayed in the current viewport. All lines are present,
HELP | 689
including those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden lines from the screen. In a 3D drawing, HIDE starts VSCURRENT and sets the visual style to 3D Hidden in the current viewport. You can view all the settings for 3D Hidden in the Visual Styles Manager on page 1598. HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles, solids, traces, text, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness. If they are extruded, circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline segments are treated as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects whose layers have been turned off. In order to hide text created with DTEXT, MTEXT, or TEXT, the HIDETEXT system variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value.
When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines. The 3D Hidden visual style does not honor the setting of INTERSECTIONDISPLAY. If the DISPSILH system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with silhouette edges only. It won't show the internal edges produced by objects that have facets. If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when producing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of whether they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text objects are unaffected.
690 | Chapter 9 H Commands
HIDEPALETTES Quick Reference Hides currently displayed palettes (including the command line) Command entry: hidepalettes Hides all currently displayed palettes such as the Command Line, DesignCenter, and Properties. You can also use CTRL + SHIFT + H to hide the palettes.
HLSETTINGS Quick Reference Controls the display properties of models Command entry: hlsettings The Visual Styles Manager on page 1598 is displayed.
HYPERLINK Quick Reference Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink. Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. Command entry: hyperlink Select objects: Use an object selection method
HIDEPALETTES | 691
One of the following dialog boxes is displayed: ■
Insert Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that do not already contain hyperlinks) on page 692
■
Edit Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that already contain hyperlinks) on page 695
After you insert a hyperlink, the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move the cursor over the attached object. To open the hyperlink, right-click the selected object and choose Hyperlink. The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks. If you enter -hyperlink at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 696, including an option to define an area to associate with a hyperlink.
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. Command entry: hyperlink Attaches hyperlinks to graphical objects. Text to Display Specifies a description for the hyperlink. This is useful when the file name or URL is not helpful in identifying the contents of the linked file.
Existing File or Web Page Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box) Creates a hyperlink to an existing file or web page.
692 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Type the File or Web Page Name Specifies the file or web page to associate with the hyperlink. The file can be stored locally, on a network drive, or on an Internet or intranet location. Recent Files Displays a list of recently linked files, from which you can select one to link to. Browsed Pages Displays a list of recently browsed web pages, from which you can select one to link to. Inserted Links Displays a list of recently inserted hyperlinks, from which you can select one to link to. File Opens the Browse the Web - Select Hyperlink dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can navigate to the file that you want to associate with the hyperlink. Web Page Opens the browser, in which you can navigate to a web page that you want to associate with the hyperlink. Target Opens the Select Place in Document dialog box on page 696, in which you can select a named location in a drawing to link to. Path Displays the path to the file associated with the hyperlink. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is selected, only the file name is listed. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is cleared, the full path and the file name are listed. Use Relative Path for Hyperlink Sets a relative path for hyperlinks. If you select this option, the full path to the linked file is not stored with the hyperlink. The relative path is set to the value specified by the HYPERLINKBASE system variable or, if no value is specified for HYPERLINKBASE, to the current
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box | 693
drawing path. If this option is cleared, the full path to the associated file is stored with the hyperlink. Convert DWG Hyperlinks to DWF Specifies that the DWG hyperlink will convert to a DWF file hyperlink when you publish or plot the drawing to a DWF file.
View of This Drawing Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box) Specifies a named view in the current drawing to link to.
Select a View of This Displays an expandable tree view of the named views within the current drawing, from which you can select one to link to.
E-mail Address Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box) Specifies an email address to link to. When the hyperlink is executed, a new email is created using the default system email program.
694 | Chapter 9 H Commands
E-mail Address Specifies an email address. Subject Specifies a subject for the email. Recently Used E-mail Addresses Lists recently used email addresses, from which you can select one to use for the hyperlink.
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. Command entry: hyperlink Edits hyperlinks. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box is a modified version of the Insert Hyperlink dialog box on page 692, with one additional option. Remove Link Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects.
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box | 695
Select Place in Document Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. Command entry: hyperlink Navigates to a view or layout within a drawing. The named location that you select is the initial view that is restored when the hyperlink is executed. Select an Existing Place in the Document Provides an expandable tree view of the named locations within the linked drawing, from which you can select a named location to link to.
-HYPERLINK Quick Reference If you enter -hyperlink at the command prompt, the following HYPERLINK command prompts are displayed. The command prompt version of HYPERLINK inserts hyperlinks to areas or to selected objects and also removes hyperlinks. Enter an option [Remove on page 696/Insert on page 697] : Enter an option or pressENTER
Remove Removes the hyperlink from the selected objects. If a selection set does not exist, you are prompted to create one. Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing If the selection set contains more than one hyperlink, the hyperlinks that were found are listed at the command prompt. Enter number, hyperlink, or * for all: Enter the number or name of the hyperlink, or enter*to remove all hyperlinks in the selection set The number of removed hyperlinks is displayed at the command prompt.
696 | Chapter 9 H Commands
Insert Attaches a hyperlink to an object or an area. Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] : Select a method for attaching a hyperlink Area Defines a bounding rectangle and places it on a layer called URLLAYER. If this layer doesn't exist in the current drawing, it is created. NOTE To turn off the display of hyperlink bounding rectangles in the drawing area or in your drawing plots, you must freeze the URLLAYER layer. See “Use Layers to Manage Complexity” in the User's Guide. First corner: Specify the start point of the rectangle Other corner: Specify the end point of the rectangle Enter the path to the file you want associated with the hyperlink. Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to a local file or the complete URL to an Internet file, or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing Enter a named location for the hyperlink, such as a view in a drawing or a bookmark in a word processing file. Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location, or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one Enter description <none>: Enter a description, or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one Object Specifies graphical objects to attach the hyperlink to. Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing Enter the path to the file you want associated with the hyperlink. Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to a local file or the complete URL to an Internet file, or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing Enter a named location for the hyperlink, such as a view in a drawing or a bookmark in a word processing file. Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location, or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one Enter description <none>: Enter a descriptive name for the hyperlink, or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one
-HYPERLINK | 697
HYPERLINKOPTIONS Quick Reference Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor, tooltips, and shortcut menu Command entry: hyperlinkoptions Display hyperlink cursor, tooltip, and shortcut menu? [Yes/No] : NOTE Access to hyperlinks is not available if you choose No.
698 | Chapter 9 H Commands
I Commands
10
ID Quick Reference Displays the coordinate of a location
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ ID Point. Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ ID Point Command entry: id (or 'id for transparent use) Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point The UCS coordinate of location is displayed at the command prompt. ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point. If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object.
IMAGE Quick Reference Displays the External References palette
699
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Insert ➤ External References Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image ➤ External References. Command entry: image The External References palette on page 602 is displayed. If you enter -image at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 700.
-IMAGE Quick Reference If you enter -image at the command prompt, the following IMAGE command prompts are displayed. Enter image option [? on page 700/Detach on page 700/Path on page 701/Reload on page 701/Unload on page 701/Attach on page 701] : Enter an option or press ENTER
?—List Images Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. Images are listed in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT system variable. Images to list <*>: Enter * to list all images, or enter an image name
Detach Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and erases all occurrences of the image. Enter list of images to detach: Enter an image name, or enter *to detach all images
700 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Path Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular image. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file, rename the file, or replace an old image file with a new file; for instance, you can update image01.pcx and save it as image02.pcx. Enter list of images for path modification: Enter an image name, or enter * to list all images If you enter an asterisk (*), the following prompt is displayed: Old path: Lists the current path name for each image Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image
Reload Reloads the selected images, making that information available for display and plotting. Enter list of images to reload: Enter an image name, or enter * to reload all images Reloading... Reload image : loaded and relinked.
Unload Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed, thus improving performance. All information associated with the image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached image remains visible. Enter list of images to unload: Enter a loaded image name, or enter * to unload all images
Attach Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing. The Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. The file name without the extension is assigned as the image name. Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed. A valid image name is generated from the file
-IMAGE | 701
name and an underscore and number are appended to the name. The number changes as necessary to avoid duplicate image names. Image file name_1 created from file file name.bmp If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, the following prompts are displayed and the image is inserted as a copy: Image file name has already been loaded. Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition. Specify insertion point <0,0>: Specify an insertion point Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed instead of the dialog box: Enter image file name to attach : Enter an image name The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the default. To avoid errors when entering an image name, it is recommended that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows: imagename=path name\long file name.bmp or imagename="path name\long file name.bmp" If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, the program searches for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing, and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. The program searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of extension, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is found, the message “Image Not Found” is displayed and the prompt is repeated. To specify a long file name that does not conform to this program's naming rules, enter the name as follows: "imagename=filename" You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the imagename=filename convention at the command prompt. Enter a tilde (~) at the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press ESC after the dialog box opens, the Enter Image Name prompt is displayed.
702 | Chapter 10 I Commands
IMAGEADJUST Quick Reference Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image ➤ Adjust. Command entry: imageadjust Select image(s): Select one or more images The Image Adjust dialog box on page 703 is displayed. If you enter -imageadjust at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 705.
Image Adjust Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image ➤ Adjust. Command entry: imageadjust Controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness, contrast, and fade settings of the selected image. Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but does not change the image file itself.
IMAGEADJUST | 703
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right increases the value. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right increases the value. Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting, the background color for fade is white. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right increases the value. Image Preview Displays a preview of the selected image. The preview image updates dynamically to reflect changes to the brightness, contrast, and fade settings. Reset Resets values for brightness, contrast, and fade to default settings (50, 50, and 0, respectively).
704 | Chapter 10 I Commands
-IMAGEADJUST Quick Reference If you enter -imageadjust at the command prompt, the following IMAGEADJUST command prompts are displayed. With the command prompt version of IMAGEADJUST, you can select more than one image to adjust. Select image (s): Select one or more images Enter image option [Contrast on page 705/Fade on page 705/Brightness on page 705] : Enter c or f, or press ENTER to adjust brightness If you selected a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are the current property settings of the image selected. If you selected multiple images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50, 50, and 0, respectively. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Enter contrast value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting, the background color for fade is white. Enter fade value (0-100) <0>: Enter a value Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. Enter brightness value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value
IMAGEATTACH Quick Reference Attaches a new image to the current drawing
-IMAGEADJUST | 705
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Image.
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Insert ➤ Raster Image Reference Command entry: imageattach The Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Once you select an image file, the Image dialog box on page 706 is displayed. NOTE When Texture Compression is turned on, the amount of video memory required to open a drawing that contains attached images is decreased. Texture compression can reduce the amount of video memory necessary to display the drawing, but it can increase the time it takes to load the images the first time that they are accessed, and it can reduce the quality of the images when they are displayed in the viewport or plotted. To determine whether Texture Compression is turned on, enter 3dconfig, and click Manual Tune. Look at the Hardware Effects List in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box.
Image Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Image. Toolbar: Reference Menu: Insert ➤ Raster Image Reference Command entry: imageattach Locates, inserts, names, and defines the parameters and details of attached images.
706 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Name Identifies the image you have selected to attach, either from the Select Image File dialog box (an unattached image) or from the list of previously attached images. To add another instance of an image file that is already attached, select the image name from the list and click OK. Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). If Show Preview is selected, a preview of the selected file is displayed. Found In Displays the path where the image file was located. Saved Path Displays the path specified when the image file was attached to the current drawing.
Path Type Specifies one of three types of folder path information to save with an attached image: an absolute path, a relative path, and no path. For a complete description of each option, see “Set Paths to Referenced Drawings” in the User's Guide. Full Path Specifies the absolute path to the image file. Relative Path Specifies a relative path to the image file. No Path Specifies only the image file name. The image file should be located in the folder with the current drawing file.
Image Dialog Box | 707
Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected image. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion point is 0,0. Specify On-Screen Directs input to the command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and Z. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale Specifies the scale factor of the selected image. Specify On-Screen directs input to the command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1. If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the image does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image. If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value at the command prompt. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0.
Details Displays information about the selected image. Resolution Displays information about the vertical and horizontal resolution of the selected image. Current AutoCAD Unit Displays information about the default units of the selected image. The image is displayed at the default width and height in pixels.
708 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Image Size in Pixels Displays information about the width and height in pixels of the selected image. Image Size in Units Displays information about the default size in units of the selected image. The default value for unitless images is unitless. The image size is automatically converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height.
IMAGECLIP Quick Reference Uses clipping boundaries to define a subregion of an image object
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ References panel ➤ Clip Image.
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Image Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image ➤ Clip. Command entry: imageclip Select image to clip: Select an edge of an image Enter image clipping option [ON on page 709/OFF on page 709/Delete on page 710/New boundary on page 710] : Enter an option or press ENTER The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object.
On Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined boundary.
Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame. If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
IMAGECLIP | 709
Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image.
New Boundary Specifies a new clipping boundary. The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal, and consists only of straight line segments. When defining a clipping boundary, specify vertices within the image boundary. Self-intersecting vertices are valid. Rectangular is the default option. If you use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt, the point is interpreted as the first corner of a rectangle. Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] : Enter p or press ENTER Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point, or enter c or u You must specify at least three points to define a polygon. If the image already has a clipping boundary defined, the following prompt is displayed: Delete old boundary? [No/Yes] : Enter n or press ENTER If you choose Yes, the entire image is redrawn and the command continues; if you choose No, the command ends. Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners. The rectangle is always drawn parallel to the edges of the image. Specify first corner point: Specify a point Specify opposite corner point: Specify a point
IMAGEFRAME Quick Reference Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted
710 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image Frame Command entry: imageframe Enter image frame setting [0, 1, 2] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER NOTE Normally, when image frames are not displayed, you cannot select images. However, the IMAGECLIP command temporarily turns image frames on. 0 Setting Image frames are not displayed and not plotted. 1 Setting Image frames are both displayed and plotted. This setting is the default. 2 Setting Image frames are displayed but not plotted.
IMAGEQUALITY Quick Reference Controls the display quality of images
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Quality Command entry: imagequality Enter image quality setting [High/Draft] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the drawing. NOTE Images are always plotted using a high-quality setting. High Produces a high-quality display of the image. Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image.
IMAGEQUALITY | 711
IMPORT Quick Reference Imports files in various formats
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import.
Toolbar: Insert Command entry: import The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. In Files of Type, select the file format to import. In File Name, select the file name to import. The file is imported into the drawing. The following formats are available for import: ■
Metafile (*.wmf): Microsoft Windows® Metafile (see WMFIN on page 1637)
■
ACIS (*.sat): ACIS solid object file (see ACISIN on page 59)
■
3D Studio (*.3ds): 3D Studio file (see 3DSIN on page 49)
■
MicroStation DGN (*.dgn): MicroStation DGN file (see DGNIMPORT on page 416)
■
All DGN files (*.*): All DGN files (see DGNIMPORT on page 416)
For the WMF file type, selecting Options on the Tools menu in this dialog box displays the WMF In Options dialog box on page 1642. You can display this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS. If FILEDIA = 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter import file name: Enter path and file name
712 | Chapter 10 I Commands
IMPRESSION Quick Reference Gives a CAD drawing a hand-drawn look by exporting it for rendering in Autodesk Impression.
Toolbar: Standard: Menu: File menu ➤ Export to Impression Command entry: impression The Export to Impression dialog box on page 713 is displayed. NOTE Autodesk Impression availability is limited. Please check your local Autodesk website to see if Impression is available in your country.
Export to Impression Dialog Box Quick Reference Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Export to Impression panel
Toolbar: Standard: Menu: File ➤ Export to Impression Command entry: impression Specifies the settings for converting your CAD drawing to an illustration with a hand-drawn look.
IMPRESSION | 713
Export Options Sets the views and plot styles to export for rendering in Autodesk Impression. What to Export Specifies the portion of the drawing to export. Options include: ■
Display. Exports the current view.
■
Extents. Exports all geometry in the current view, including geometry that is not currently displayed in the drawing area.
■
Window. Exports the portion of the drawing area that you specify. To set the window, click the Window button. Then click two points or enter coordinate values. The window setting is retained until you change it.
■
Layouts. Exports all viewports and geometry displayed in the selected layout.
Plot Style Table Assignments (Pen Assignments) Assigns a plot style table to export into Autodesk Impression. You can select one of the following options: ■
CTB or STB file. Retains the color, lineweight, and linetype settings used in the plot style tables.
714 | Chapter 10 I Commands
■
None. Retains the lineweight and linetype of each exported layer or uses the Stroke Type setting.
Stroke Type Applies the stroke you select to all geometry exported to Impression. If you choose both a stroke and a plot style, the Impression illustration reflects the following combination: ■
The lineweight and linetype of the plot style.
■
The stroke color and type (such as pencil or marker) that you specify under Stroke Type.
If any other settings overlap, the plot style setting has priority.
Preview Displays the geometry to export for Impression rendering.
IMPRINT Quick Reference Imprints an edge on a 3D solid
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Imprint. Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Imprint Edges Command entry: imprint Imprints an object on the selected solid. The object to be imprinted must intersect one or more faces on the selected solid in order for imprinting to be successful. Imprinting is limited to the following objects: arcs, circles, lines, 2D and 3D polylines, ellipses, splines, regions, bodies, and 3D solids. Select a 3D solid: Select an object (1) Select an object to imprint: Select an object (2) Delete the source object : Enter y or press ENTER Select an object to imprint: Select an object or press ENTER
IMPRINT | 715
INSERT Quick Reference Inserts a block or a drawing into the current drawing
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert.
Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ Block Command entry: insert The Insert dialog box on page 717 is displayed. If you enter -insert at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 719. A good practice is to insert a block from a block library. A block library can be a drawing file that stores related block definitions or it can be a folder that contains related drawing files, each of which can be inserted as a block. With either method, blocks are standardized and accessible to multiple users. You can insert your own blocks or use the blocks provided in the DesignCenter or tool palettes.
716 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Insert Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert. Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ Block Command entry: insert Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert.
The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the default block for subsequent uses of INSERT. The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS.
Name Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block. Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or drawing file to insert. Path Specifies the path to the block. Preview Displays a preview of the specified block to insert. A lightning bolt icon in the lower-right corner of the preview indicates that the block is
dynamic. A
icon indicates that the block is .
Insert Dialog Box | 717
Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the block. Specify On-Screen Specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X, Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block. Specify On-Screen Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing device. X Sets the X scale factor. Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates. A value specified for X is also reflected in the Y and Z values.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS. Specify On-Screen Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device. Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.
Block Unit Displays information about the block units. Unit Specifies the INSUNITS value for the inserted block. Factor Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value of the block and the drawing units.
718 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Explode Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only. Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype.
-INSERT Quick Reference If you enter -insert at the command prompt, the following INSERT command prompts are displayed. Enter block name on page 719 or [? on page 720] : Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press ENTER Units: Conversion: Specify insertion point on page 720 or [Basepoint on page 721/Scale on page 721/X on page 721/Y on page 722/Z on page 722/Rotate on page 722]: Specify a point or enter an option
Block Name If you have inserted a block in the current drawing during the current editing session, the name of the last block inserted appears as the current block in the prompt. Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups. You can list unnamed groups by selecting Unnamed Groups in the Object Grouping dialog box on page 653. Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block Name prompt by following the listed examples. ■
Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk (*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block definition is not added to the drawing.
-INSERT | 719
■
Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name, INSERT searches the current drawing data for an existing block definition by that name. If no such block definition exists in the current drawing, INSERT searches the library path. If a file is found, the file name is used for the block name upon insertion of the block definition. The same block definition is used for subsequent insertions of that block. You can replace an existing block definition with an external file by entering the following at the Enter Block Name prompt: block name=file name
■
Updating a Block Definition: If you make changes to a block file that is inserted in your drawing and you want to change the existing block definition without creating a new block insertion, enter the following at the Specify Insertion Point prompt (following the Enter Block Name prompt): block name= If you enter = after the block name, the following prompt is displayed: Block "current" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] : Enter y, enter n, or press ENTER If you choose to redefine the block, the existing block definition is replaced with the new block definition. The drawing is regenerated, and the new definition is applied to all existing insertions of the block definition. Press ESC when prompted for the insertion point if you do not want to insert a new block into the drawing.
?—List Block Names Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing.
Insertion Point Specifies a location for the block or drawing. Specify scale factor or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER Scale Factor Sets the scale factor. Specify rotation angle <0>: All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The block or drawing is rotated by the specified angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation. Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box. The X and Y dimensions of the box become the X and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first corner.
720 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Specify rotation angle <0>: XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors. Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero value, enter c, or press ENTER ■
X Scale Factor: Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the block or drawing. Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale factor or press ENTER Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale factor or press ENTER Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
■
Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale. Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale factor or press ENTER Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Basepoint Temporarily drops the block in the drawing where it is currently positioned and allows you to specify a new base point for the block reference as it is dragged into position. This does not affect the actual base point defined for the block reference. Specify base point: Specify a base point for the block reference
Scale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the specified scale factor. Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>:
X Sets the X scale factor. Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point:
-INSERT | 721
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Y Sets the Y scale factor. Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>:
Z Sets the Z scale factor. Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>:
Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for the block. Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under Rotation match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point.
INSERTOBJ Quick Reference Inserts a linked or embedded object
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object.
Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ OLE Object Command entry: insertobj
722 | Chapter 10 I Commands
The Insert Object dialog box on page 723 is displayed.
Insert Object Dialog Box Quick Reference
Ribbon: Blocks & References tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object. Toolbar: Insert Menu: Insert ➤ OLE Object Command entry: insertobj Inserts a linked or embedded object. Options vary, depending on whether you select Create New or Create from File.
Create New Opens the application that's highlighted in the Object Type list so that you can create a new object to insert. Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and embedding. To create an object to embed, double-click an application to open it. On the application's File menu, the Save option is replaced with a new Update option. Choosing Update inserts the object into the drawing or updates it. Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the embedded information.
Create from File Specifies a file to link or embed. File Specifies the path and name of the file to be embedded or linked. Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you select a file to link or embed. Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding it. Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information.
Insert Object Dialog Box | 723
INTERFERE Quick Reference Highlights 3D solids that overlap
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Check Interference. Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Checking Command entry: interfere Select first set of objects or [Nested selection on page 725/Settings on page 725]: Use an object selection method or enter an option INTERFERE highlights 3D solids that overlap by creating a temporary composite 3D solid from the common volume of two or more solids. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. If you include the same 3D solid in both selection sets, INTERFERE considers the 3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set. Select second set of objects or [Nested selection on page 725/checK first set on page 725] : Use an object selection method, press ENTER to check for interferences, or enter n Pressing ENTER starts the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids and displays the Interference Checking dialog box on page 726. If you enter -interfere at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 727.
724 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Nested Selection Allows you to select individual solid objects that are nested in blocks and xrefs. Select nested objects or [eXit] <X>: Select nested objects or press ENTER to return to normal object selection
Settings The Interference Settings dialog box on page 725 is displayed.
Check The Interference Checking dialog box on page 726 is displayed.
Interference Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Command entry: interfere
Controls the display of interference objects.
Interference Objects Specifies the visual style and color for interference objects.
Interference Settings Dialog Box | 725
Visual Style Specifies the visual style for interference objects. (INTERFEREOBJVS) Color Specifies the color for interference objects. (INTERFERECOLOR) Highlight Interfering Pair Highlights the interfering pair of solids. Highlight Interference Highlights the interference objects created from the interfering pair.
Viewport Display Specifies the viewport display while checking for interferences. Visual Style Specifies the visual style for the viewport while checking for interferences. (INTERFEREVPVS)
Interference Checking Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Command entry: interfere Allows you to cycle through and zoom to interference objects. You can also specify whether or not to delete the interference objects when you close the
dialog box.
Interfering Objects Displays the number of interferences found between each set during the INTERFERE command. First Set Displays the number of objects selected in the first set.
726 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Second Set Displays the number of objects selected in the second set. Interfering Pairs Found Displays the number of interferences found among the selected objects.
Highlight Highlights interference objects while using Previous and Next to cycle through the objects. Previous Highlights the previous interference object. Next Highlights the next interference object. Zoom to Pair Zooms to interference objects while using Previous and Next.
Zoom Closes the dialog box and starts the ZOOM command.
Pan Closes the dialog box and starts the PAN command.
3D Orbit Closes the dialog box and starts the 3DORBIT command.
Delete Interference Objects Created on Close Deletes the interference objects when the dialog box is closed.
Close Closes the dialog box and deletes the interference objects if that option is selected.
-INTERFERE Quick Reference If you enter -interfere at the command prompt, the following INTERFERE command prompt are displayed.
-INTERFERE | 727
Check for interferences between 2 sets of objects or within 1 set of objects... Select first set of objects or [Nested selection on page 729]: Use an object selection method or enter an option Select second set of objects or [Nested selection on page 729/checK current] : Use an object selection method, enter n, or press ENTER to check for interferences INTERFERE highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of objects selected and the number of interfering pairs. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. If you include the same 3D solids in both selection sets, INTERFERE considers the 3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set. Create interference objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER to select the default option Entering y creates and highlights new 3D solids on the current layer that are the intersections of the interfering pairs of 3D solids. If there are more than two interfering 3D solids, it may not be clear which pairs are interfering if all the interfering 3D objects are highlighted at once. Zoom to pairs of interfering objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER to select the default option If there is more than one interfering pair, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option [Next pair/eXit] : Enter x or n, or press ENTER Entering n or pressing ENTER cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D solids. Entering x ends the command.
728 | Chapter 10 I Commands
Nested Selection Allows you to select individual solid objects that are nested in blocks and xrefs. Select nested objects or [eXit] <X>: Select nested objects or press ENTER to return to normal object selection
INTERSECT Quick Reference Creates a 3D solid or 2D region from their overlapping volume or area
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect.
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Intersect Command entry: intersect Select objects: Use an object selection method You can extrude 2D profiles and then intersect them to create a complex model efficiently. In AutoCAD LT, you can combine 2D regions to create more complex regions.
You can select only regions and solids for use with INTERSECT. INTERSECT calculates the overlapping area of two or more existing regions and the common volume of two or more existing solids.
INTERSECT | 729
The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. INTERSECT divides the selection set into subsets and tests for intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the solids in the selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions. The third subset contains the next region that is not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent coplanar regions, and so on until all regions belong to a subset.
ISOPLANE Quick Reference Specifies the current isometric plane Command entry: isoplane (or 'isoplane for transparent use) Enter isometric plane setting [Left on page 731/Top on page 731/Right on page 731] : Enter an option or press ENTER
730 | Chapter 10 I Commands
The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE. You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing CTRL+E or F5. Left
Selects the left-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Top
Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Right
Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.
ISOPLANE | 731
732
J Commands
11
JOGSECTION Quick Reference Adds a jogged segment to a section object Command entry: jogsection Select section object: Select a section object Specify a point on the section line to add jog: Pick a point on the section line A jog is created on the section line. The jogged segment is created at a 90 degree angle to the section line.
JOIN Quick Reference Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Join.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Join Command entry: join
733
Select source object: Select a line, polyline, arc, elliptical arc, spline, or helix Objects to be joined must be located in the same plane. Each type of object has additional restrictions, listed in the Help system. Depending on the source object selected, one of the following prompts is displayed:
Line Select lines to join to source: Select one or more lines and press ENTER The line objects must be collinear (lying on the same infinite line), but can have gaps between them.
Polyline Select objects to join to source: Select one or more objects and press ENTER The objects can be lines, polylines, or arcs. The objects cannot have gaps between them, and must lie on the same plane parallel to the UCS XY plane.
Arc Select arcs to join to source or [cLose]: Select one or more arcs and press ENTER, or enter L The arc objects must lie on the same imaginary circle, but can have gaps between them. The Close option converts the source arc into a circle. NOTE When joining two or more arcs, the arcs are joined counterclockwise beginning from the source object.
Elliptical Arc Select elliptical arcs to join to source or [cLose]: Select one or more elliptical arcs and press ENTER, or enter L The elliptical arcs must lie on the same ellipse, but can have gaps between them. The Close option closes the source ellipstical arc into a complete ellipse. NOTE When joining two or more elliptical arcs, the elliptical arcs are joined counterclockwise beginning from the source object.
734 | Chapter 11 J Commands
Spline Select splines or helixes to join to source: Select one or more splines or helixes and press ENTER The spline and helix objects must be contiguous (lying end-to-end). The resulting object is a single spline.
Helix Select splines or helixes to join to source: Select one or more splines or helixes and press ENTER The helix objects must be contiguous (lying end-to-end). The resulting object is a single spline.
JPGOUT Quick Reference Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format Command entry: jpgout The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. Select objects or : Press ENTER to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are displayed.
JPGOUT | 735
JUSTIFYTEXT Quick Reference Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Justify.
Toolbar: Text Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Justify. Command entry: justifytext Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish You can choose single line text objects, multiline text objects, leader text objects, and attribute objects. Enter a justification option [Left/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]<Existing>: Specify a location to serve as the new justification point The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT command. The justification point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point.
736 | Chapter 11 J Commands
L Commands
12
LAYCUR Quick Reference Changes the layer of selected objects to the current layer
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Change Objects to Current Layer
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Change to Current Layer Command entry: laycur Select objects to be changed to the current layer: Use an object selection methodand press ENTER when you are finished N object(s) changed to layer X (the current layer). If you find objects that were created on the wrong layer, you can quickly change them to be on the current layer.
737
LAYDEL Quick Reference Deletes all objects on a layer and purges the layer
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Delete. Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Delete Command entry: laydel Select object on layer to delete or [Name]: Select an object or enter n to display the Delete Layers dialog box If you enter -laydel at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 739.
Select Object on Layer to Delete Select an object on the layer you want to delete. Select object on layer to delete or [Name/Undo]: Select an object on a second layer or enter u
Name Displays the Delete Layers dialog box on page 738. This command also changes block definitions that use the layer to be deleted. Objects on that layer are also deleted from all block definitions and the affected blocks are redefined.
Delete Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Delete Command entry: laydel Displays layers available for deletion.
738 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Layers to Delete Displays a list of layers that you can delete. Press SHIFT or CTRL to select more than one layer. Layers that cannot be deleted include the current layer, layer 0, locked layers, and xref-dependent layers.
-LAYDEL Quick Reference If you enter -laydel at the command prompt, the following LAYDEL command prompts are displayed. Select object on layer to delete or [Name]: Select an object or enter n. Select object on layer to delete or [Name/Undo]: Select an object, enter n, or enter u
Select Object on Layer to Delete Select an object on the layer you want to delete. Select object on layer to delete or [Undo]: Select an object to delete or enter u
Name Select a layer to delete. Enter layer name or [?]: Enter a layer name or enter ? Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: * Enter a layer name or press ENTER to list all layers.
LAYER Quick Reference Manages layers and layer properties
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager
-LAYDEL | 739
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) The Layer Properties Manager on page 740 is displayed. If you enter -layer at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 757.
Use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties such as color and linetype. Objects on a layer normally assume the properties of that layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example, if an object’s color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color of that layer. If the object’s color is set to Red, the object displays as red, regardless of the color assigned to that layer. See also: ■
CLASSICLAYER on page 258
Layer Properties Manager Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties. You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, set property overrides for layout viewports, or add layer descriptions and apply changes in realtime. You do not need to click Ok or Apply to view property changes.
740 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Layer filters control which layers are displayed in the list and can also be used to make changes to more than one layer at a time. When switching space (model space to layout space or layout to viewport), the Layer Properties Manager is updated and displays the current state of the layer properties and filter selection in the current space.
New Property Filter Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box on page 750, where you can create a layer filter based on one or more properties of the layers.
New Group Filter Creates a layer filter that contains layers that you select and add to the filter.
Layer States Manager Displays the Layer States Manager on page 766, in which you can save the current property settings for layers in a named layer state and then restore those settings later.
New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1. The name is selected so that you can enter a new layer name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on). The new layer is created below the last currently selected layer.
New Layer Frozen VP In All Viewports Creates a new layer and freezes it in all existing layout viewports. This button is accessible from the Model tab or layout tabs.
Delete Layer Deletes selected layers. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers.
Layer Properties Manager | 741
Layers in a partially opened drawing are also considered referenced and cannot be deleted. NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards.
Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. Objects that you create are drawn on the current layer. (CLAYER system variable) Current Layer Displays the name of the current layer. Search for Layer Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter characters. This filter is not saved when you close the Layer Properties Manager. Status Line Shows the name of the current filter, the number of layers displayed in the list view, and the number of layers in the drawing. Invert Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the selected layer property filter. Indicate Layers in Use Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use. In a drawing with many layers, clear this option to improve performance. (SHOWLAYERUSAGE system variable)
Refresh Refreshes the layer usage information by scanning all the entities in the drawing.
Settings Displays the Layer Settings dialog box on page 755, in which you can set new layer notification settings, if layer filter changes are applied to the Layer toolbar, and change the background color for layer property overrides. Apply Applies changes that have been made to layers and filters but does not close the dialog box. The Layer Properties Manager has the following two panes: ■
Tree view on page 743
■
List view on page 745
742 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Tree View Displays a hierarchical list of layers and filters in the drawing. The top node, All, displays all layers in the drawing. Filters are displayed in alphabetical order. The All Used Layers filter is read-only. Expand a node to see nested filters. Double-click a property filter to open the Layer Filter Properties dialog box on page 750 and view the definition of the filter. The Hide/Show Layer Filters button controls the display of the Layer Filters pane of the Layer Properties Manager. When the Layer Filter pane is collapsed, the Layer Filter button is displayed adjacent to Layer Filter status text. The Layer Filter button gives you access to the filters when the full Layer Filter pane is closed. If there are xrefs attached to the drawing, an xref node displays the names of all the xrefs in the drawing and the layers in each xref. Layer filters defined in xref files are not displayed. If there are layers that contain property overrides, a Viewport Overrides node is automatically created and displays those layers and the properties that contain overrides. The Viewport Overrides filter displays only when the Layer Properties Manager is accessed from a layout tab. If there are new layers that have been added to the drawing since the layer list was last evaluated (depending on how the LAYERNOTIFY system variable is set), an Unreconciled New Layers filter is automatically created and displays new layers that need to be reconciled.
Tree View Shortcut Menu Provides commands for items selected in the tree view. Visibility Changes the visibility state of all the layers in the selected filter (or All or All Used Layers, if selected). ■
On: Objects on the layer are displayed, plotted, and regenerated and hide other objects when you use HIDE.
■
Off: Objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE. The drawing is not regenerated when you turn the layer on.
■
Thawed: Objects on the layer are displayed and plotted, and hide other objects when you use HIDE.
Layer Properties Manager | 743
■
Frozen: Objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE. The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer.
Lock Controls whether the objects on the layers in the selected filter can be modified. ■
Lock: None of the objects on the layer can be modified. You can still apply object snaps to objects on a locked layer and perform other operations that do not modify those objects.
■
Unlock: Objects on the layer can be modified.
Viewport In the current layout viewport, controls the VP Freeze setting of the layers in the selected layer filter. This option is not available for model space viewports. ■
Freeze: Sets VP Freeze for layers in the filter. In the current viewport, objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE. The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer.
■
Thaw: Clears VP Freeze for layers in the filter. In the current viewport, objects on the layer are displayed and plotted and hide other objects when you use HIDE. This option does not thaw layers that are set to Off or Frozen in the drawing.
Isolate Group Turns off all layers not in the selected filter. The layers that are visible are the layers in the filter. ■
All Viewports: In all viewports in a layout, sets VP Freeze for all layers that are not in the selected filter. In model space, turns off all layers that are not in the selected filter.
■
Active Viewport Only: In the current layout viewport, sets VP Freeze for all layers that are not in the selected filter. In model space, turns off all layers that are not in the selected filter.
New Properties Filter Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box on page 750, where you can create a new layer filter based on layer names and settings; for example, on or off, color, or linetype. New Group Filter Creates a new layer group filter named GROUP FILTER1 and adds it to the tree view. Enter a new name. Select the All filter or any other layer filter in the tree view to display layers in the list view, and then drag layers from the list view into the new layer group filter in the tree view.
744 | Chapter 12 L Commands
You can use standard selection methods. Hold down CTRL to select more than one layer name. Hold down SHIFT and select the first and last layer names in a sequence to select all layers in the sequence. Convert to Group Filter Converts the selected layer property filter to a layer group filter. Changing the properties of the layers in a layer group filter has no effect on the filter. Rename Renames the selected filter. Enter a new name. Delete Deletes the selected layer filter. You cannot delete the All, All Used Layers, or Xref filters. This option deletes the layer filter but not the layers in the filter. Properties Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box on page 750, where you can modify the definition of the selected layer property filter. This option is available only when a layer property filter is selected. Select Layers Temporarily closes the Layer Filter Properties dialog box so that you can select objects in the drawing. This option is available only when a layer group filter is selected. ■
Add: Adds the layers of the selected objects to the layer group filter that is selected in the tree view.
■
Replace: Replaces the layers of the selected layer group filter with the layers of the objects that are selected in the drawing.
List View Displays layers and layer filters and their properties and descriptions. If a layer filter is selected in the tree view, the list view displays only the layers in that layer filter. The All filter in the tree view displays all layers and layer filters in the drawing. When a layer property filter is selected and there are no layers that fit its definition, the list view is empty. To modify a property of a selected layer or of all layers in a selected filter, click the icon for that property. When a mixed icon or “Varies” is displayed for a layer filter, the property is not the same for all layers in the filter. Status Indicates the type of item: layer filter, layer in use, empty layer, or current layer. Name Displays the name of the layer or filter. Press F2 to enter a new name. On Turns the selected layers on and off. When a layer is on, it is visible and available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is invisible and not plotted, even if Plot is on.
Layer Properties Manager | 745
Freeze Freezes the selected layers in all viewports, including the Model tab. You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other operations; improve object selection performance; and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, plotted, hidden, rendered, or regenerated. Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. If you plan to switch visibility settings frequently, use the On/Off setting to avoid regenerating the drawing. You can freeze a layer in all viewports, in the current layout viewport, or in new layout viewports as they are created. Lock Locks and unlocks the selected layers. Objects on a locked layer cannot be modified. Color Changes the color associated with the selected layers. Clicking the color name displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261. Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected layers. Clicking the linetype name displays the Select Linetype dialog box on page 753. Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers. Clicking the lineweight name displays the Lineweight dialog box on page 754. Plot Style Changes the plot style associated with the selected layers. If you are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot change the plot style associated with a layer. Clicking the plot style displays the Select Plot Style dialog box on page 1143. Plot Controls whether the selected layers are plotted. If you turn off plotting for a layer, the objects on that layer are still displayed. Layers that are off or frozen are not plotted, regardless of the Plot setting. VP Freeze (available only from a layout tab) Freezes selected layers in the current layout viewport. You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports. VP Freeze is an override to the Thaw setting in the drawing. That is, you can freeze a layer in the current viewport if it's thawed in the drawing, but you can't thaw a layer in the current viewport if it's frozen or off in the drawing. A layer is not visible when it is set to Off or Frozen in the drawing. New VP Freeze Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports. For example, freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that layer in any newly created layout viewports but does not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in existing viewports. If you later create a viewport that requires dimensions, you can override the default setting by changing the current viewport setting.
746 | Chapter 12 L Commands
VP Color (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the color associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport. VP Linetype (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the linetype associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport. VP Lineweight (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the lineweight associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport. VP Plot Style (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the plot style associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport. Override settings are not visible in the viewport or plotted when the visual style in the drawing is set to Conceptual or Realistic. If you are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot set a plot style override. Description (Optional) Describes the layer or the layer filter.
List View Shortcut Menu Provides options for modifying the list and modifying selected layers and layer filters.
Column Label Shortcut Menu Column Names Lists all columns by name. Columns that are checked indicate they are displayed. Hidden column names are not checked. VP Freeze, VP Color, VP Linetype, VP Lineweight, and VP Plot Style are available only when a layout viewport is active. Customize Displays the Customize Layer Columns dialog box on page 756, where you can specify which columns are hidden or displayed. Maximize All Columns Maximizes all columns to the width of the column headers and the data content. This option is available on the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a column heading. Maximize Column Changes the width of the column to maximize display of the column content. This option is available on the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a column heading. Optimize all columns Changes the width of all columns to maximize display of the column content. This option is available on the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a column heading.
Layer Properties Manager | 747
Optimize column Changes the width of a column to maximize display of the column content. This option is available on the shortcut menu that is displayed when you right-click a column heading. Freeze column (or Unfreeze column) Freezes (or unfreezes) the column and any columns to the left. This option is available on the shortcut menu when you right-click a column heading. Restore All Columns to Defaults Restores all columns to their default display and width settings. This option is available on the shortcut menu when you right-click a column heading.
Layer Shortcut Menu Show Filter Tree Displays the tree view. Clear this option to hide the tree view. Show Filters in Layer List Displays filters at the top of the list view. The filters are listed in alphabetical order. Clear the check mark to display only layers in the list view. Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. (CLAYER system variable) New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1. You can edit this layer name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on). Rename Layer Renames the layer. Delete Layer Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. Change Description Adds a description or changes the text in the description for the selected layer or filter. The description for a filter is added to the filter and to all layers in the filter. Remove from Group Filter Removes the selected layers from the group layer filter that is selected in the tree view.
748 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Reconcile Layer Removes new layers from the Unreconciled New Layers filter. Available only when one or more unreconciled layers is selected. Remove Viewport Overrides For Removes a single override property or all property overrides on selected layers (or all layers) for the current viewport or all viewports. Different options display in a flyout menu depending on where the cursor is located when the shortcut menu is accessed. To remove a single property override, right-click the property override. This option is only available on the layout tab. New Layer Frozen in All Viewports Creates a new layer and freezes it in all existing layout viewports and new viewports. VP Freeze Layer in All Viewports Freezes the selected layer in all existing layout viewports and new viewports. VP Thaw Layer in All Viewports Thaws the selected layer in all existing layout viewports and new viewports. Select All Selects everything displayed in the list view. Clear All Removes selection from all items in the list view except the most recently selected layer or filter. Select All but Current Selects everything displayed in the list view except the current layer. Invert Selection Selects everything displayed in the list view except the items that are currently selected. Invert Layer Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the selected layer property filter. Layer Filters Displays a list of layer filters, including All and All Used Layers. Click a filter to apply it to the list view. Save Layer States Displays the dialog box on page 768, in which you save the layer state and layer property settings of all layers in a drawing. Restore Layer State Displays the Layer States Manager on page 766, in which you can select a named layer state to restore settings of all layers in the drawing. Restores only those layer state and property settings that were selected when the named layer state was saved. See also: ■
CLASSICLAYER on page 258
Layer Properties Manager | 749
Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Filters layers based on criteria you select. When a layer filter is selected in the tree view of the Layer Properties Manager on page 740, layers that match the filter criteria are displayed in the list view.
Filter Name Provides a space to enter a name for the layer properties filter.
Show Example Displays the examples of layer property filter definitions in “Layer Filter Examples”.
Filter Definition Displays the properties of layers. You can use one or more properties to define the filter. For example, you can define a filter that displays all layers that are either red or blue and in use. To include more than one color, linetype, or lineweight, duplicate the filter on the next line and select a different setting. Status Click the In Use icon or the Not In Use icon. Name Use wild-card characters to filter layer names. For example, enter *mech* to include all layers with the letters mech in the name. All the wild-card characters are listed in the table in Filter and Sort the List of Layers in the User's Guide. On Click the On or the Off icon. Freeze Click the Freeze or the Thaw icon. Lock Click the Lock or the Unlock icon. Color Click the [...] button to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261. Linetype Click the [...] button to display the Select Linetype dialog box on page 753.
750 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Lineweight Click the [...] button to display the Lineweight dialog box on page 754. Plot Style Click the [...] button to display the Select Plot Style dialog box on page 1143. Plot Click the Plot icon or the Do Not Plot icon. VP Freeze Click the Freeze icon or the Thaw icon. New VP Freeze Click the Freeze icon or the Thaw icon. VP Color Click the [...] button to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261. VP Linetype Click the [...] button to display the Select Linetype dialog box on page 753. VP Lineweight Click the [...] button to display the Lineweight dialog box on page 754. VP Plot Style Click the [...] button to display the Select Plot Style dialog box on page 1143.
Filter Preview Displays the results of the filter as you define it. The filter preview shows which layers will be displayed in the layer list in the Layer Properties Manager when you select this filter.
Layer Filter Examples Quick Reference Each example shows a layer filter definition that is set up in the Layer Filter Properties dialog box.
Example 1 The filter named “[ANNO]” displays layers that meet all of the following criteria: ■
Are in use
■
Have a name that contains the letters anno
Layer Filter Properties Dialog Box | 751
■
Are on
Example 2 The filter named “RYW” displays layers that meet all of the following criteria: ■
Are on
■
Are frozen
■
Are red or yellow or white
752 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Select Linetype Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.
Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing.
Select Linetype Dialog Box | 753
Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box on page 808, in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.
Lineweight Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Displays the lineweight values available. You can customize your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot Style Table Editor. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype” in the User's Guide.
Lineweights Displays the available lineweights to be applied. Available lineweights consist of fixed values that are most commonly used in drawings. Select a lineweight to apply it. Original Displays the previous lineweight. The default lineweight assigned when a layer is created is DEFAULT (which plots to a default value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm). (LWDEFAULT system variable) New Displays the new lineweight assigned to the layer.
754 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Layer Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use)
on the Layer Properties Manager on page 740 to display the Layer Click Settings dialog box on page 755. Controls when notification occurs for new layers and if layer filters are applied to the Layers toolbar; also controls the background color of viewport overrides in the Layer Properties Manager.
New Layer Notification Settings Controls the evaluation and notification of new layers based on LAYEREVAL setting in the DWG file. NOTE There should be no filter (Unreconciled Layer filter) displayed when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. If one is currently displayed, it will be turned off. You can set the unreconciled new layers filter active and select the layers in that filter. With the unreconciled layer selected, you can right-click and click Reconcile Layer. Evaluate New Layers Added to Drawing Checks for new layers that have been added to the drawing. (LAYEREVAL=0) Evaluate New Xref Layers Only Checks for new layers that have been added to attached xrefs. (LAYEREVAL=1) Evaluate All New Layers Checks for new layers that have been added to the drawing, including new layers added to attached xrefs. (LAYEREVAL=2) Notify when New Layers Are Present Turns on new layer notification. (LAYERNOTIFY=0) Open Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use the OPEN command. (LAYERNOTIFY=2) Attach/Reload Xrefs Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you are attaching or reloading xrefs. (LAYERNOTIFY=4) Restore Layer State Displays new layer notification when you are restoring layer states. (LAYERNOTIFY=8)
Layer Settings Dialog Box | 755
Save Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use the SAVE command. (LAYERNOTIFY=16) Insert Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use the INSERT command. (LAYERNOTIFY=32) Display Alert for Plot When New Layers are Present Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use the PLOT command. (LAYERNOTIFY=1)
Isolate Layer Settings Setting for layers not isolated: Lock and Fade Selects Lock and Fade as isolation method. Off Sets non-selected layers to Off. In paper space viewport use: Off Sets non-selected layers to Off (in paper space). VP Freeze Sets non-selected layers to Viewport Freeze (in paperspace).
Dialog Settings Apply Layer Filter to Layer Toolbar Controls the display of layers in the list of layers on the Layers toolbar and Layers panel on the ribbon by applying the current layer filter. Indicate Layers in Use Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use. In a drawing with many layers, clear this option to improve performance. Viewport Override Background Color Displays a list of colors and the Select Color dialog box on page 261, where you can select a background color for viewport overrides.
Customize Layer Columns Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Controls the display and order of columns in the Layer Properties Manager.
756 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Check the Column to Display Lists all columns that display depending on whether the Layer Properties Manager was accessed from Model space or a layout tab. Checked columns are displayed in the Layer Properties Manager. Move Up Moves the checked layer to the left in the Layer Properties Manager. Move Down Moves the checked layer to the right in the Layer Properties Manager. Select All Checks all columns in the list. Clear All Unchecks all columns in the list.
-LAYER Quick Reference If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, the following LAYER command prompts are displayed. Current layer: <"current"> Enter an option [? on page 758/Make on page 758/Set on page 758/New on page 758/Rename on page 759/ON on page 759/OFF on page 759/Color on page 759/Ltype on page 760/LWeight on page 760/MATerial on page 760/Plot on page
-LAYER | 757
761/PStyle on page 761/Freeze on page 761/Thaw on page 761/LOck on page 761/Unlock on page 762/stAte on page 762/Description on page 763/rEconcile on page 763]: NOTE The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.
?—List Layers Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states, color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally dependent layers. Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list, or press ENTER to list all layers
Make Creates a layer and makes it current. New objects are drawn on the current layer. Enter name for new layer (becomes the current layer) <current>: Enter a name or press ENTER If no layer exists for the name you enter, a new layer with that name is created. The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by default: color number 7, the CONTINUOUS linetype, and a lineweight of DEFAULT. If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on.
Set Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not already exist. If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on and made current. A frozen layer cannot be made current. Enter a layer name to make current or <select object>: Enter a name or press ENTER and select an object
New Creates layers. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated by commas. Enter name list for new layer(s):
758 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Rename Renames an existing layer. Enter old layer name: Enter old layer name and press ENTER Enter new layer name: Enter new name and press ENTER
On Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting. Enter name list of layer(s) to turn On:
Off Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting. Enter name list of layer(s) to turn Off or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press ENTER and select objects
Color Changes the color associated with a layer. Enter color name or number (1-255)[Truecolor/COlorbook]: Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255, enter t, or enter co True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for the selected object. Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as PANTONE® If you enter a color book name, the following prompt is displayed: Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book, such as PANTONE® 573 Enter name list of layer(s) for color current <current>: Enter a name or a list of names separated by commas, or press ENTER The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on. To assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the color with a minus sign (-).
-LAYER | 759
Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer. Enter a loaded linetype name or [?] : Enter a currently loaded linetype name, enter ?, or press ENTER If you enter a linetype or press ENTER, the following prompt is displayed: Enter name list of layer(s) for linetype "current" <current>: Enter a wild-card pattern, a name, or a list of names separated by commas, or press ENTER If you enter ? at the Enter a Loaded Linetype Name prompt, the following prompt is displayed: Enter linetype name(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern, or press ENTER to list all names in the drawing
Lweight Changes the lineweight associated with a layer. Enter lineweight (0.0mm-2.11mm): If you enter a valid lineweight, the current lineweight is set to the new value. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the nearest fixed lineweight value. If you would like to plot an object with a custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights. Enter name list of layers(s) for lineweight current <current>: Enter a name list or press ENTER The lineweight is assigned to the layer or layers.
Material Attaches a material to a layer. The material must be available in the drawing before it can be assigned to a layer. Enter material name or [?] : Enter the name of a material currently available in the drawing, enter ?, or press ENTER If you enter ?, the following prompt is displayed: Enter material name(s) to list <*>: Press ENTER to list all materials in the drawing Objects created on the layer are assigned the material.
760 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Plot Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is currently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted. Enter a plotting preference [Plot/No plot] : Enter an option or press ENTER Enter layer name(s) for this plot preference <current>: Enter a name list or press ENTER The plot setting is assigned to the layer or layers.
Pstyle Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1). See “Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects” in the User's Guide. Enter plot style or [?] : Enter a name, enter ? to list existing plot styles, or press ENTER If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, the following prompt is displayed: Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current <current>: Enter the names of the layers to use this plot style, or press ENTER to apply the style to the current layer only
Freeze Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration and plotting. Enter name list of layer(s) to freeze or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press ENTER and select objects
Thaw Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and plotting. Enter a name list of layer(s) to thaw:
Lock Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.
-LAYER | 761
Enter a name list of layer(s) to lock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press ENTER and select objects
Unlock Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers. Enter a name list of layer(s) to unlock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press ENTER and select objects
State Saves and restores the state and property settings of the layers in a drawing. Enter an option [?/Save/Restore/Edit/Name/Delete/Import/EXport]: ?—List Named Layer States Lists the named layer state (LAS) files in the support path for the drawing. Save Saves the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under a specified layer state name. When saving a layer state, you specify which layer settings are affected when the layer state is later restored. Enter new layer state name: Enter a name and press ENTER Enter states to change [On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/lineWeight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to save and then press ENTER Restore Restores the state and property settings of all layers to previously saved settings. Restores only those layer state and property settings that were selected when the layer state was saved. Enter name of layer state to restore or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer state. When the layer state is restored, the specified settings are used. Enter name of layer state to edit or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Enter states to change [On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/lineWeight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to change and then press ENTER Name Changes the name of a saved layer state. Enter name of layer state to rename or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Enter new layer state name:
762 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Delete Removes a saved layer state. Enter name of layer state to delete or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file, or layers states from a file (DWG, DWS, DWT) into the current drawing. Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file. Enter file name to import <current>: Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file. Enter name of layer state to export or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Export state to file name:
Description Sets the description property value of the existing layer. Enter layer description: Enter description of the current layer and press ENTER Enter name list of layer(s) to apply description: Enter name list of layers where the description will be applied and press ENTER A warning prompt is displayed when you enter a description to a layer with an existing description. Replace existing description(s)? [Yes/No]: Enter Y (to overwrite description) or N (to cancel)
Reconcile Sets the unreconciled property of an unreconciled layer. Enter name list of layer(s) to turn reconcile or [?]: Enter a single layer name or a list and press ENTER
? - Name List of Layers Displays a list of all unreconciled layers.
-LAYER | 763
LAYERCLOSE Quick Reference Closes Layer Properties Manager Command entry: layerclose Closes the Layer Properties Manager if it is open.
LAYERP Quick Reference Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Previous.
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Previous Command entry: layerp Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If settings are restored, a message is displayed: “Restored previous layer states.” When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent change using either the Layer control or the Layer Properties Manager. Every change you make to layer settings is tracked and can be undone by Layer Previous. LAYERP (Layer Previous) does not undo the following changes: ■
Renamed layers: If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer Previous restores the original properties but not the original name.
■
Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not restore it.
■
Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does not remove it.
764 | Chapter 12 L Commands
LAYERPMODE Quick Reference Turns the tracking of changes made to layer settings on and off Command entry: layerpmode Enter LAYERP mode [ON/OFF] : Enter on or off, or press ENTER When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.
LAYERSTATE Quick Reference Saves, restores, and manages named layer states
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Manage Layer States.
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Command entry: layerstate The Layer States Manager on page 766 is displayed. Saves the layer settings in a drawing as a named layer state. Named layer states can then be restored, edited, imported, and exported for use in other drawings.
LAYERPMODE | 765
Layer States Manager Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Manage Layer States.
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Command entry: layerstate Displays a list of saved layer states in the drawing. You can create, rename, edit, and delete layer states.
Layer States Lists the named layer states that have been saved in the drawing, the space in which they were saved (model space, layout, or xref), whether the layer list is the same as in the drawing, and an optional description. Don’t List Layer States in Xrefs Controls whether layer states in xrefs are displayed.
766 | Chapter 12 L Commands
New Displays the New Layer State to Save dialog box on page 768, where you can provide a name and a description for the new named layer state. Save Saves the selected named layer state. Edit Displays the Edit Layer State dialog box on page 769, where you can modify a selected named layer state. Rename Allows in-place editing of the layer state name. Delete Removes the selected named layer state. Import Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can load a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into the current drawing. Layer states in files (DWG, DWS, or DWT) can be imported. Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file. When a DWG, DWS, or DWT file is selected, the Select Layer States dialog box on page 770 is displayed where you can select layer states to import. Export Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can save the selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file. Restore Restores state and property settings of all layers in a drawing to their previously saved settings. Restores only those layer state and property settings that you specify with the check boxes. Close Closes the Layer States Manager and saves changes.
Restore Options Turn Off Layers Not Found in Layer State When a layer state is restored, turns off new layers for which settings were not saved so that the drawing looks the same way it did when the named layer state was saved. Apply Properties as Viewport Overrides Applies layer property overrides to the current viewport. This option is available when the Layer States Manager is accessed when a layout viewport is active.
More Options Controls the display of additional options in the Layer States Manager dialog box. ■
Layer Properties to Restore
Layer States Manager | 767
Layer Properties to Restore Specifies the layer state settings and layer properties that are to be restored when the selected named layer state is restored. When you save a layer state on the Model tab, the Visibility in Current VP check box is not available. Select All Selects all the settings. Clear All Removes selection from all the settings.
New Layer State to Save Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Command entry: layerstate Specifies a name and a description for the layer state defined in the Layer States Manager.
New Layer State Name Specifies a name for the new layer state to be saved. Description (Optional) Provides a description of the layer state that is displayed in the Layer States Manager.
768 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Edit Layer State Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Command entry: layerstate Modifies the selected layer state. Displays all the layers and their properties that are saved in the selected layer state except for viewport override properties.
Layer List Displays a list of layers in the selected layer state and their properties. Delete Removes the selected layers from the layer state. Add Displays the Select Layers to Add to Layer States dialog box on page 770, in which you can add layers from the current drawing that are not defined in the layer state. Delete Removes the selected layers from the layer state.
Edit Layer State Dialog Box | 769
Select Layers to Add to Layer State Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Command entry: layerstate Displays layers by name and includes descriptions that are not defined in the selected named layer state.
Multiple layers can be selected. Clicking OK displays the selected layers in the Edit Layer State dialog box on page 769. Layer List Displays layers by name and description.
Select Layer States Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Layers
770 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Command entry: layerstate Displays a list of layer states to be imported from a drawing file into the current drawing.
Check Layer States to Import Displays a list of layer states, the space (model tab or layout tab) in which the layer state was saved, and a description. The layer state names in the selected file (DWG, DWS, DWT) are compared to the layer state names in the current drawing. Duplicate layer state names are not checked by default. When a duplicate layer state name is checked, a prompt displays if you want to overwrite the existing layer state. NOTE If the layer state to be imported contains linetypes or plot styles that do not exist in the current drawing, they are imported from the DWG, DWS or DWT file.
LAYFRZ Quick Reference Freezes the layer of selected objects
LAYFRZ | 771
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Freeze.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Freeze Command entry: layfrz Current settings: Viewports=Vpfreeze, Block nesting level=Block (Default settings value) Select an object on a layer to be frozen on page 772 or [Settings on page 772/Undo on page 772]: Select an object or enter s or u Layer has been frozen.
Select an Object on a Layer to be Frozen Specifies the layer to be frozen. Layer “” has been frozen.
Settings Displays settings for viewports and block definitions. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]: Viewports Displays settings for viewports. In paper space viewport use [Freeze/Vpfreeze] : Enter f to freeze objects in all viewports or v to freeze an object in the current viewport only Block Selection Displays settings for block definitions. Enter Block Selection nesting level [Block/Entity/None] : Enter b, e, or n to set the default Block If a selected object is nested in a block, freezes the layer of that block. If a selected object is nested in an xref, freezes the layer of the object. Entity Freezes the layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an xref or a block. None If a block or an xref is selected, freezes the layer containing that block or xref.
Undo Cancels the previous layer selection.
772 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Objects on frozen layers are invisible. In large drawings, freezing unneeded layers speeds up operations involving display and regeneration. In a layout, you can freeze layers in individual layout viewports.
LAYISO Quick Reference Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Isolate.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Isolate Command entry: layiso Current setting: <current settings> Select objects on the layer(s) to be isolated or [Settings]: Select objects or enter s All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated.
Select Objects on the Layer(s) to be Isolated After selecting one or more objects, all layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are termed isolated. NOTE Locked layers are faded by default. You can specify the percent of the fading from the Lock option in this command. You can later change the value with the LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable. If you make changes to layers within a session and you want to restore the layers to the state they were in immediately before you entered the LAYISO command, use the LAYUNISO command.
LAYISO | 773
Settings Controls whether layers are turned off, frozen in the current layout viewports, or locked. Enter setting for layers not isolated [Off/Lock and fade] : Enter an option
Off Turns off or freezes all layers except the layers of the selected objects. In paper space viewport use [Vpfreeze/Off] : Enter an option Vpfreeze In a layout, freezes all but the selected layers in the current layout viewport only. Other layout viewports in the drawing are unchanged. If not in a layout, all other layers are turned off instead. Off Turns off all but the selected layers in all viewports.
Lock Locks all layers except the layers of the selected objects, and sets the fading for locked layers. Enter fade value (0-90) <50>: Enter a number for the percent dimming Select objects on the layer(s) to be isolated or [Settings]: Select objects or enter s
LAYLCK Quick Reference Locks the layer of a selected object
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Lock.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Lock Command entry: laylck
774 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Select an object on the layer to be locked: Using this command, you can prevent objects on a layer from being accidentally modified. You can also fade the objects on a locked layer using the LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable.
LAYMCH Quick Reference Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Match.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match Command entry: laymch Select objects to be changed: Select an object to change its layer Select object on destination layer on page 775 or [Name on page 775]: Select an object or enter n to open the Change to Layer dialog box If you enter -laymch at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 776.
Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer.
Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box on page 776. If you create an object on the wrong layer, you can change its layer to the one you want using LAYMCH.
LAYMCH | 775
Change to Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Change to Current Layer Command entry: laymch Displays a list of layers to choose as the destination layer. You can also create a new destination layer. Current Layer Displays the currently selected layer. Create a new layer name by entering a name. Destination Layer list Displays a list of layers in the drawing.
-LAYMCH Quick Reference If you enter -laymch at the command prompt, the following LAYMCH command prompts are displayed. Select objects to be changed: Select objects: Select an object to change its layer After you select the object(s) to change, the following prompt is displayed: Select object on destination layer on page 776 or [Name on page 776]: Select an object or enter n to enter a layer name
Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer. Select an object whose layer you want to match N object(s) changed to layer
Name Enter layer name: Enter the name of a layer you want the selected objects to match N object(s) changed to layer
776 | Chapter 12 L Commands
LAYMCUR Quick Reference Makes the layer of a selected object the current layer
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Make Objects’ Layer Current.
Toolbar: Layers Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current Command entry: laymcur Select object whose layer will become current: Select an object to make its layer current You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layer Properties Manager.
LAYMRG Quick Reference Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from the drawing
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Merge. Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Merge Command entry: laymrg Select object on layer to merge on page 778or [Name on page 778]: Select an object or enter n to select a layer in the Merge Layers dialog box After you selected the layer(s) to merge, the following prompt is displayed:
LAYMCUR | 777
Select object on target layer on page 778or [Name on page 778]: Select an object or enter n to select a layer in the Merge to Layer dialog box The layer you selected to merge into the target layer is deleted. If you enter -laymrg at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 779.
Select Object on Layer to Merge Select an object on the layer you want to merge. Selected layers: Select object on layer to merge or [Name/Undo]: Select an object, enter n to display the Merge Layers dialog box, or enter u
Name Displays the Merge Layers dialog box on page 778.
Select Object on Target Layer Select an object on the destination layer. Select object on the target layer or [Name]: Select an object, or enter n to display the Merge to Layer dialog box
Name Displays the Merge to Layer dialog box on page 779. You can reduce the number of layers in a drawing by merging them. Objects on merged layers are moved to the target layer, and the original layers are purged from the drawing.
Merge Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Merge Command entry: laymrg Merge Layer list Displays a list of layers to merge.
778 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Merge to Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Merge Command entry: laymrg Displays a list of layers onto which the selected layers or objects can be merged. Target Layer Displays the first layer in an alphabetical list of the layers in the current drawing. Target Layer list Displays an alphabetical list of the layers onto which you can merge the selected layers or objects.
-LAYMRG Quick Reference If you enter -laymrg at the command prompt, the following LAYMRG command prompts are displayed. Select object on layer to merge on page 779or [Name on page 779]: Select an object or enter n to select a layer from a list of layers After you selected the layer(s) to merge, the following prompt is displayed: Select object on target layer on page 780or [Name on page 780]: Select an object or enter n to select a target layer from a list of layers The layer you selected to merge into the target layer is deleted.
Select Object on Layer to Merge Select an object on the destination layer. Selected layers: Select object on layer to merge or [Name]: Select an object or enter n
Name Displays a list of layers, where you can select layers to merge. Select a layer to merge.
Merge to Layer Dialog Box | 779
Enter layer name or [?]: Enter a layer name or enter ? Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: * Enter a layer name or press ENTER to list all layers.
Select Object on Target Layer Select an object on the target layer. Selected layers: Select object on layer to merge or [Name]: Select an object, enter n to display a list of layers on
Name Displays a list of layers onto which you can merge the selected object or layer. Enter layer name or [?]: Enter a layer name or enter ? Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: * Enter a layer name or press ENTER to list all layers.
LAYOFF Quick Reference Turns off the layer of a selected object
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Off.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Off Command entry: layoff Current settings: Viewports= , Block nesting level= Select an object on the layer to be turned off on page 780or [Settings on page 781/Undo on page 781]: Select an object, enter s, or enter u
Select an Object on the Layer to be Turned Off Selects one or more objects whose layers you want to turn off.
780 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Settings Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]: Viewports Displays the Viewports setting types. Returns the following prompt: In paper space viewport use [Vpfreeze/Off] : Enter v to freeze the selected layer in the current viewport, or enter o to turn off selected layers in all viewports Vpfreeze In paper space, freezes the layer selected in the current viewport. Off In paper space, turns off selected layers in all viewports. Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can freeze layers of selected objects. Enter Block Selection nesting level [Block/Entity/None] : Enter b, e, or n to set the default option ■
Block: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested in a block, the layer containing that block is turned off. If a selected object is nested in an xref, the layer of the object is turned off.
■
Entity: Turns off layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an xref or a block.
■
None: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a block or an xref is selected, the layer containing that block or xref is turned off.
Undo Cancels the previous layer selection. Turning off the layer of a selected object makes that object invisible. This command is useful if you need an unobstructed view when working in a drawing or if you don’t want to plot details such as reference lines.
LAYOFF | 781
LAYON Quick Reference Turns on all layers in the drawing
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ On. Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Turn All Layers On Command entry: layon All layers in the drawing are turned on. All layers that were previously turned off are turned back on. Objects created on those layers become visible, unless the layers are also frozen.
LAYOUT Quick Reference Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs
Toolbar: Layouts Menu: Insert ➤ Layout Command entry: layout Enter layout option [Copy on page 782/Delete on page 782/New on page 783/Template on page 783/Rename on page 783/SAveas on page 783/Set on page 783/? on page 783] <set>: NOTE Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name. Copy Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new layout assumes the name of the copied layout with an incremental number in parentheses. The new tab is inserted before the copied layout tab. Enter name of layout to copy <current>: Enter layout name for copy <default>: Delete Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default. Enter name of layout to delete <current>:
782 | Chapter 12 L Commands
The Model tab cannot be deleted. To remove all the geometry from the Model tab, you must select all geometry and use the ERASE command. New Creates a new layout tab. Up to 255 layouts can be created in a single drawing. Enter name of new layout : Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab. Template Creates a new layout tab based on an existing layout in a template (DWT), drawing (DWG), or drawing interchange (DXF) file. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box on page 996 is displayed for selecting a DWT, DWG, or DXF file. After you select a file, the Insert Layouts dialog box is displayed, which lists the layouts saved in the selected file. After you select a layout, the layout and all objects from the specified template or drawing file are inserted into the current drawing. Rename Renames a layout. The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to rename. Enter layout to rename <current>: Enter new layout name <current>: Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab. Saveas Saves a layout as a drawing template(DWT) file without saving any unreferenced symbol table and block definition information. You can then use the template to create new layouts in your drawings without having to eliminate unnecessary information. See “Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings” in the User's Guide. Enter layout to save to template <current>: The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to save as a template. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the template file in which to save the layout. The default layout template directory is specified in the Options dialog box on page 1012. Set Makes a layout current. Enter layout to make current : ?—List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing.
LAYOUT | 783
LAYOUTWIZARD Quick Reference Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Create Layout Wizard Command entry: layoutwizard The Layout wizard on page 784 is displayed.
Layout Wizard Quick Reference Command entry: layoutwizard The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new layout. You can choose to create a new layout from scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout. Depending on which plotting device is currently configured, you can select a paper size from those available. You can select a predefined title block to apply to your new layout. The Preview area displays a preview image of the title block you select. When you've finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings, you can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within the new layout.
LAYTHW Quick Reference Thaws all layers in the drawing
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Thaw.
784 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Menu: Format ➤ Layer tools ➤ Thaw All Layers. Command entry: laythw All layers in the drawing are thawed. All layers that were previously frozen are unfrozen. Objects created on those layers become visible, unless the layers are also turned off or have been frozen in individual layout viewports. Layers that are frozen in individual layout viewports must by thawed layer by layer. NOTE LAYTHW does not thaw layers in a viewport. Use the VPLAYER on page 1607 command to thaw layers in a viewport.
LAYTRANS Quick Reference Changes a drawing's layers to layer standards you specify
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Layer Translator.
Toolbar: CAD Standards Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator Command entry: laytrans The Layer Translator on page 785 is displayed.
Layer Translator Quick Reference
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Layer Translator. Toolbar: CAD Standards Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator Command entry: laytrans
LAYTRANS | 785
In the Layer Translator, you specify the layers in the current drawing that you want to translate, and the layers to translate them to.
Translate From Specifies the layers to be translated in the current drawing. You can specify layers by selecting layers in the Translate From list or by supplying a selection filter.
The color of the icon preceding the layer name indicates whether or not the layer is referenced in the drawing. A dark icon indicates that the layer is referenced; a white icon indicates the layer is unreferenced. Unreferenced layers can be deleted from the drawing by right-clicking in the Translate From list and choosing Purge Layers. Selection Filter Specifies layers to be selected in the Translate From list, using a naming pattern that can include wild-cards. For a list of valid wild-cards, see the table in “Filter and Sort the List of Layers” in the User's Guide. The layers identified by the selection filter are selected in addition to any layers previously selected. Select Selects the layers specified in Selection Filter.
Map Maps the layers selected in Translate From to the layer selected in Translate To.
Map Same Maps all layers that have the same name in both lists.
Translate To Lists the layers you can translate the current drawing's layers to. Load Loads layers in the Translate To list using a drawing, drawing template, or standards file that you specify. If the specified file contains saved layer mappings, those mappings are applied to the layers in the Translate From list and are displayed in Layer Translation Mappings.
786 | Chapter 12 L Commands
You can load layers from more than one file. If you load a file that contains layers of the same name as layers already loaded, the original layers are retained and the duplicate layers are ignored. Similarly, if you load a file containing mappings that duplicate mappings already loaded, the original mappings are retained and the duplicates are ignored. New Defines a new layer to be shown in the Translate To list for translation. If you select a Translate To layer before choosing New, the selected layer's properties are used as defaults for the new layer. You cannot create a new layer with the same name as an existing layer.
Layer Translation Mappings Lists each layer to be translated and the properties to which the layer will be converted. You can select layers in this list and edit their properties using Edit. Edit Opens the Edit Layer dialog box on page 788, where you can edit the selected translation mapping. You can change the layer's linetype, color, and lineweight. If all drawings involved in translation use plot styles, you can also change the plot style for the mapping. Remove Removes the selected translation mapping from the Layer Translation Mappings list. Save Saves the current layer translation mappings to a file for later use. Layer mappings are saved in the DWG or DWS file format. You can replace an existing file or create a new file. The Layer Translator creates the referenced layers in the file and stores the layer mappings in each layer. All linetypes used by those layers are also copied into the file.
Settings Opens the Settings dialog box on page 788, where you can customize the process of layer translation.
Translate Starts layer translation of the layers you have mapped. If you have not saved the current layer translation mappings, you are prompted to save the mappings before translation begins.
Layer Translator | 787
Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: CAD Standards Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator Command entry: laytrans Controls the process of layer translation. Force Object Color to BYLAYER Specifies whether or not every object translated takes on the color assigned to its layer. If this option is selected, every object takes on the color of its layer. If this option is cleared, every object retains its original color. Force Object Linetype to BYLAYER Specifies whether or not every object translated takes on the linetype assigned to its layer. If this option is selected, every object takes on the linetype of its layer. If this option is cleared, every object retains its original linetype. Translate Objects in Blocks Specifies whether or not objects nested within blocks are translated. If this option is selected, nested objects in blocks are translated. If this option is cleared, nested objects in blocks are not translated. Write Transaction Log Specifies whether or not a log file detailing the results of translation is created. If this option is selected, a log file is created in the same folder as the translated drawing. The log file is assigned the same name as the translated drawing, with a .log file name extension. If the Write Transaction Log option is cleared, no log file is created. Show Layer Contents When Selected Specifies which layers to display in the drawing area. If this option is selected, only the layers selected in the Layer Translator dialog box are displayed in the drawing area. If this option is cleared, all layers in the drawing are displayed.
Edit/New Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: CAD Standards Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator
788 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Command entry: laytrans Sets or modifies layer properties. Name Specifies the layer name. Linetype Specifies the layer linetype. Color Specifies the layer color. Lineweight Specifies the layer lineweight. Plot Style Specifies the layer plot style. You can modify the plot style only if all drawings referenced by the Layer Translator use named plot styles.
LAYULK Quick Reference Unlocks the layer of a selected object
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unlock.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unlock Command entry: layulk When you move the cursor over objects on locked layers, the locked icon is displayed. Select an object on the layer to be unlocked: You can select an object on a locked layer and unlock that layer without specifying the name of the layer. Objects on unlocked layers can be selected and modified.
LAYULK | 789
LAYUNISO Quick Reference Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unisolate. Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unisolate Command entry: layuniso Reverses the effects of the previous LAYISO command. Any additional changes made to layer settings after you use the LAYISO command will be retained. LAYUNISO restores layers to the state they were in just before you entered the LAYISO command. Changes to layer settings after LAYISO is used are retained when you enter the LAYUNISO command. If LAYISO was not used, LAYUNISO does not restore any layers. NOTE You can also restore layers to their previous layer state by using the Layer Previous button on the Layers toolbar (or by entering LAYERP at the command prompt), as long as you have not made any changes to layer settings.
LAYVPI Quick Reference IFreezes selected layers in all layout viewports except the current viewport
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Isolate to Current Viewport. Menu: Click Format ➤ Layer tools ➤ Isolate Layer to Current Viewport. Command entry: layvpi Isolates the layer of a selected object in the current viewport by freezing the layer in all but the current viewport. You can choose to isolate all layouts or only the current layout. NOTE LAYVPI works only when TILEMODE is set to 0 and when two or more paper space viewports are defined.
790 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Current settings: Layouts= , Block nesting level= Select objects on the layer to be isolated in viewport on page 791 or [Settings on page 791/Undo on page 791]: Select objects or enter an option
Select Objects on the Layer to be Isolated in Viewport Selects an object whose layer you want to isolate in a viewport.
Settings Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]: Layouts Displays layout options for isolating layers. Isolate layers in all viewports except current for [All layouts/Current layout] Enter All Layouts or Current Layout ■
All Layouts: In all layouts, isolates layers of selected objects in all but the current viewport
■
Current Layout: In the current layout, isolates layers of selected objects in all but the current viewport. This option persists from session to session.
Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can freeze layers of selected objects. Enter Block Selection nesting level [Block/Entity/None] : Enter b, e, or n to set the default option ■
Block: Isolates the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested in a block, the layer containing that block is isolated. If a selected object is nested in an xref, the layer of the object is isolated.
■
Entity: Isolates layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an xref or a block.
■
None: Isolates the layers of selected objects. If a block or an xref is selected, the layer containing that block or xref is isolated.
Undo Cancels the previous layer selection. This command automates the process of using VP Freeze in the Layer Properties Manager. You select an object on each layer to be frozen in other layout viewports.
LAYVPI | 791
LAYWALK Quick Reference Displays objects on selected layers and hides objects on all other layers
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Walk.
Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Walk Command entry: laywalk The LayerWalk dialog box on page 792 is displayed. Displays a dialog box with a list of all layers in the drawing. For drawings with a large number of layers, you can filter the list of layers that are displayed in the dialog box.Use this command to review the objects on each layer and to purge unreferenced layers. By default, the effect is temporary and layers are restored when you close the dialog box.
LayerWalk Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Layers II Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Walk Command entry: laywalk Dynamically displays objects on layers that you select in the Layer list. The number of layers in the drawing are displayed in the dialog box title. You can change the current layer state when you exit, save layer states, and purge layers that are not referenced. You can use the LayerWalk dialog box in a paper space viewport to select layers to turn on and thaw in the layer table and the current viewport. Any layer that is not selected in the Layer list is frozen in the current viewport.
792 | Chapter 12 L Commands
You can change the display of one viewport without altering the display of another viewport.
Filter Turns an active filter on and off. When this check box is selected, the list displays only those layers that match the active filter. When this check box is cleared, the full list of layers is displayed. (This option is available only when there is an active filter.) To turn on an active filter, in the filter list, either enter a wildcard and press ENTER, or select a saved filter.
Layer List If a filter is active, displays a list of layers defined in that filter. If no filter is active, displays a list of layers in the drawing. Double-click a layer to set it to Always Show (an asterisk to the left of the layer is displayed). Right-click in the layer list to display more options. In the layer list, you can ■
Click a layer name to display the contents of a layer.
■
Double-click a layer name to turn the Always Show option on or off.
■
Press CTRL and click layers to select multiple layers.
■
Press SHIFT and click to select layers in a sequence.
■
Press either CTRL or SHIFT and double-click in the layer list to turn the Always Show option on or off.
■
Click and drag in the layer list to select multiple layers. For more options in the layer list, right-click to access the Layer List shortcut menu.
Layer List Shortcut Menu Options Displays a list of options for the layers selected in the Layer list. Hold Selection Turns on the Always Show option for selected layers. An asterisk (*) is displayed to the left of each layer held. Release Selection Turns off the Always Show option for selected layers. Release All Turns off the Always Show option for all layers. Select All Selects and displays all layers.
LayerWalk Dialog Box | 793
Clear All Clears all layers. Invert Selection Clears current layers and selects and displays all other layers. Select Unreferenced Selects all unreferenced layers. Use with the Purge button to remove unused layers. Save Layer State Saves the current selection of layers as a layer state that can be used by the Layer States Manager. Inspect Displays the number of layers in the drawing, the number of layers selected, and the number of objects on the selected layers. Copy as Filter Displays the name of the selected layer in the Filter text box. Can be used to create wildcards. Save Current Filter Saves the current filter so that it is available in the Filter list for reuse. Delete Current Filter Removes the current filter from the filter list.
Select Objects Selects objects and their layers.
Filter List Filters the layer list. Enter a wildcard and press ENTER to display and highlight only those layers whose names match the wildcard. Right-click to save and delete filters. The filter list displays saved filters only. For more information about wild-card characters, see the Wild-Card Characters section of Filter and Sort the List of Layers.
Purge When selected layers are not referenced, purges them from the drawing. For a list of layers that can be purged, right-click anywhere in the Layer list and click Select Unreferenced. In the Layer list, the unreferenced layers are highlighted. You can purge those layers.
Restore on Exit Returns layers to their previous state when you exit the dialog box. If the check box is cleared, any changes you made are saved.
794 | Chapter 12 L Commands
LEADER Quick Reference Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature Command entry: leader Specify leader start point: Specify next point: It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER on page 890 command to create leader objects. For more information about multileader objects, see Create and Modify Leaders. A leader line segment is drawn and prompts for points and options are displayed. Specify next point on page 795 or [Annotation on page 795/Format on page 797/Undo on page 797] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Point Specification Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt you for points and options. Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Annotation Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances, or a block. Enter first line of annotation text or : Enter text or press ENTER If you enter text at the Annotation prompt, the text is inserted at the end of the leader line. You are prompted for additional lines of text until you end the command by pressing ENTER twice. If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an annotation option [Tolerance/Copy/Block/None/Mtext] <Mtext>: Enter an option or press ENTER
LEADER | 795
Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog boxes (see TOLERANCE). You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog boxes. After you specify the geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.
Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied. Select an object to copy: The object is inserted and LEADER ends. The value of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system variable) determines where the text and multiline text objects are inserted. Blocks or feature control frames with geometric tolerances are attached to the end of the leader line. Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. The prompts are the same as for INSERT on page 716. The block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line, meaning that if the block moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. No hook line is displayed. Enter block name or [?]: Enter a block name or enter ? to list all blocks in the drawing
None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line. Mtext Creates text using the In-Place Text Editor on page 929 when you specify an insertion point and a second point for the text boundary. Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets (< >). Enclose format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]). For more information about adding a prefix or suffix, see “Control the Display of Dimension Units” in the User's Guide.
796 | Chapter 12 L Commands
The units settings and the current text style determine how the text is displayed. The multiline text is vertically centered and horizontally aligned according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line. The text is offset from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New, Modify, or Override Dimension Style dialog box on page 483. If the offset specified is negative, the multiline text is enclosed in a box as a basic dimension.
After you specify the text, LEADER ends.
Format Controls the way the leader is drawn and whether it has an arrowhead. Enter leader format option [Spline/STraight/Arrow/None] <Exit>: Enter an option or press ENTERto return to the previous prompt After each option, the Specify Next Point prompt is redisplayed.
Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the leader line are the control points, each of equal unit weight. Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments. Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line. None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point. Exit Exits the Format options.
Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. The previous prompt is displayed.
LEADER | 797
LENGTHEN Quick Reference Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen. Menu: Modify ➤ Lengthen Command entry: lengthen Select an object on page 798 or [DElta on page 798/Percent on page 799/Total on page 799/DYnamic on page 800]: Select one object or enter an option You can specify changes as a percentage, an increment, or as a final length or angle. LENGTHEN is an alternative to using TRIM or EXTEND.
Object Selection Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object. LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Current length: <current>, included angle: <current> Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object, enter an option, or press ENTER to end the command
Delta Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value trims it. Enter delta length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a, or press ENTER
Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
798 | Chapter 12 L Commands
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle. Enter delta angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Percent Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Enter percentage length <current>: Enter a positive nonzero value or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle. Specify total length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a positive nonzero value, enter a, or press ENTER
LENGTHEN | 799
Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc. Specify total angle <current>: Specify an angle or pressENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
800 | Chapter 12 L Commands
LIGHT Quick Reference Creates a light Command entry: light Enter light type [Point/Spot/Web/Targetpoint/Freespot/FreeweB/Distant] : Depending on the type of light you specify, the prompts that are displayed are identical to the prompts in the POINTLIGHT, SPOTLIGHT, WEBLIGHT, TARGETPOINT, FREESPOT, FREEWEB or DISTANTLIGHT command.
LIGHTLIST Quick Reference Displays the Lights in Model palette Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ List. Toolbar: Render Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ Light List Command entry: lightlist Opens the Lights in Model palette on page 801, which lists the lights in the drawing.
Lights in Model Palette Quick Reference Toolbar: Render Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ Light List Command entry: lightlist Lists the lights in the drawing. An icon in the Type column indicates the type of light: point light, spotlight, or distant light, and whether it is on or off.
LIGHT | 801
Select a light in the list to select it in the drawing. To sort the list, click the Type or Name column head. Delete Light or Delete Lights With one or more lights selected, right-click and click Delete Light or Delete Lights to remove the light from the drawing. You can also press DELETE. Properties With one or more lights selected, right-click and click Properties to display the Properties palette on page 1177, where you can change the properties of lights and turn them on and off. When a property is selected, the panel at the bottom displays a description of the property. You can also double-click to display the Properties palette.
LIGHTLISTCLOSE Quick Reference Closes the Lights in Model window Command entry: lightlistclose The Lights in Model window on page 801 closes.
LIMITS Quick Reference Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or layout tab Menu: Format ➤ Drawing Limits Command entry: limits (or 'limits for transparent use) Specify lower left corner on page 802 or [ON on page 803/OFF on page 803] <current>: Specify a point, enter on or off, or press ENTER Lower-Left Corner Specifies the lower-left corner for the grid limits. Specify upper right corner <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
802 | Chapter 12 L Commands
On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, you cannot enter points outside the grid limits. Because limits checking tests only points that you enter, portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits. Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits checking.
LINE Quick Reference Creates straight line segments
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Line Command entry: line Specify first point: Specify a point or press ENTER to continue on page 803 from the last drawn line or arc Specify next point or [Close on page 804/Undo on page 804]: Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn line.
LINE | 803
If the most recently drawn object is an arc, its endpoint defines the starting point of the line, and the line is drawn tangent to the arc.
Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment, which forms a closed loop of line segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two or more segments.
Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.
804 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them. With LINE, you can create a series of contiguous line segments. Each segment is a line object that can be edited separately.
LINETYPE Quick Reference Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use) The Linetype Manager on page 805 is displayed. If you enter -linetype at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 809.
Linetype Manager Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use) Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.
LINETYPE | 805
Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are referenced by objects. Invert Filter Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select. Linetypes that fit the inverse filter criteria are displayed in the linetype list.
Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box on page 808, in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and add them to the linetype list.
Current Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned to a particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE system variable stores the linetype name.
806 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Delete Deletes selected linetypes from the drawing. You can delete only unused linetypes. The BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and CONTINUOUS linetypes cannot be deleted. NOTE Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype definition remains stored in the acad.lin or acadiso.lin file and can be reloaded.
Show Details or Hide Details Controls whether the Details section of the Linetype Manager is displayed.
Current Linetype Displays the current linetype name.
List of Linetypes Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype list to display the shortcut menu. Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a linetype, select it and then click it again and enter a new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and xref-dependent linetypes cannot be renamed. The linetype name can include up to 255 characters. Linetype names can contain letters, digits, blank spaces, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_). Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=), question mark (?), asterisk (*), less-than and greater-than symbols (> <), forward and back slashes (/ \), vertical bar (|), quote ("), or back quote (`). Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes. Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be edited in the Details area.
Details Provides alternative access to properties and additional settings. Name Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited. The linetype name can include up to 255 characters. Linetype names can contain letters,
Linetype Manager | 807
digits, blank spaces, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_). Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=), question mark (?), asterisk (*), less-than and greater-than symbols (> <), forward and back slashes (/ \), vertical bar (|), quote ("), or back quote (`). Description Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited. Use Paper Space Units for Scaling Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when working with multiple viewports. (PSLTSCALE system variable) Global Scale Factor Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. (LTSCALE system variable) Current Object Scale Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor. (CELTSCALE system variable) ISO Pen Width Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor.
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use) Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file. The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.
808 | Chapter 12 L Commands
File Button Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box, in which you can select a different linetype (LIN) file. File Name Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another LIN file or click the File button to select a file from the Select Linetype File dialog box. Available Linetypes Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or clear all of the linetypes on the list, right-click and choose Select All or Clear All.
-LINETYPE Quick Reference If you enter -linetype at the command prompt, the following LINETYPE command prompts are displayed. Enter an option [? on page 809/Create on page 809/Load on page 810/Set on page 810]: ?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). After you select an LIN file, the linetypes available in the file are listed. Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file. Enter name of linetype to create: The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Specify the file to which you want the linetype added. Descriptive text: Enter optional descriptive text
-LINETYPE | 809
Enter a linetype description up to 47 characters long. The description can be a comment or a series of underscores, dots, dashes, and spaces to show a simple representation of the linetype pattern. Enter linetype pattern (on next line): A, Enter a pattern definition as a series of numbers separated by commas. Enter positive values to specify lengths of dashes, and enter negative values to specify lengths of spaces. Use a zero to represent a dot.
The “A” in the pattern definition prompt specifies the pattern alignment used at the ends of individual lines, circles, and arcs. Only A-type alignment is supported. With A-type alignment, lines and arcs are guaranteed to start and end with a dash. The A is automatically included in the definition. If you use a text editor to create a linetype, you must enter a at the beginning of the definition. After creating a linetype, you must load it to make it accessible. You cannot create complex linetypes with LINETYPE. For more information, see “Custom Linetypes” in the Customization Guide. Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes. Enter linetype(s) to load: Enter a name or a list of names separated by commas The Select Linetype File dialog box (a Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes on page 996standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter or select the file in which the linetype you want to load is stored. Set Sets the current linetype for objects that will be drawn subsequently. You can control the linetype of objects individually or by layer. Specifies linetype name or [?] <current>: Enter a linetype name, ? to list all loaded linetype names, bylayer, or byblock, or press ENTER The linetype you enter becomes the current linetype. All new objects are drawn with this linetype, regardless of the current layer. If the linetype you request is not loaded, the program searches for its definition in the acad.lin file. If the linetype is neither loaded nor in acad.lin, the program displays a message and returns you to the Command prompt. Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter bylayer, new objects inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn.
810 | Chapter 12 L Commands
If you enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a block. Whenever you insert that block, the objects inherit the linetype of the block.
LIST Quick Reference Displays property data for selected objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ List.
Toolbar: Inquiry Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ List Command entry: list Select objects: Use an object selection method The text window displays the object type, object layer, and X,Y,Z position relative to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model space or paper space. LIST reports color, linetype, and lineweight information if these items are not set to BYLAYER. The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. Z coordinate information defines the elevation. If the extrusion direction of the entry differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS, LIST also reports the extrusion direction in UCS coordinates. LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected. You can use LIST to display and then copy the properties of selected objects to a text file.
LIVESECTION Quick Reference Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object. Command entry: livesection
LIST | 811
Select section object: Select a section object Live sectioning is turned on for the selected section object. When turned on, the interior of 3D objects interesected by the section object are displayed.
LOAD Quick Reference Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command Command entry: load The Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list. You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; it is loaded automatically thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing.
LOFT Quick Reference Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Loft.
Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Loft Command entry: loft The cross sections can be either open or closed 2D objects such as circles, arcs, or splines.
812 | Chapter 12 L Commands
With the LOFT command, you can create a new solid or surface by specifying a series of cross sections. The cross sections define the profile (shape) of the resulting solid or surface. Cross sections (generally, curves or lines) can be open (for example, an arc) or closed (for example, a circle). LOFT draws a solid or surface in the space between the cross sections. You must specify at least two cross sections when you use the LOFT command.
You can use the following objects when creating a lofted solid or surface: Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sec- Used as a Loft Path Used as Guides tions Line
Line
Line
Arc
Arc
Arc
Elliptical arc
Elliptical arc
Elliptical arc
2D polyline
Spline
2D spline
2D spline
Helix
3D spline
Circle
Circle
2D polyline NOTE 2D polylines can be used as guides if they contain only 1 segment.
Ellipse
Ellipse
Points (first and last cross section only)
2D polyline
3D polyline
LOFT | 813
Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sec- Used as a Loft Path Used as Guides tions Region
3D polyline
Planar face of solid Planar surface Planar 3D face 2D solid Trace
With the Path option, you can select a single path curve to define the shape of the solid or surface. With the Guides option, you can select multiple curves to define the contours of the solid or surface. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the cross sections, guides, and path are automatically deleted when the solid or surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete these objects. You can select the cross sections before you start the command. Select cross sections in lofting order: Select open or closed curves in the order that the surface or solid will pass through Enter an option [Guides on page 814/Path on page 815/Cross sections only on page 816] : Press ENTER to use the selected cross sections, displaying the Loft Settings dialog box, or enter an option
Guides Specifies guide curves that control the shape of the lofted solid or surface. Guide curves are lines or curves that further define the form of the solid or surface by adding additional wireframe information to the object. You can use guide curves to control how points are matched up on corresponding cross sections to prevent undesired results, such as wrinkles in the resulting solid or surface.
814 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Each guide curve must meet the following criteria to work correctly: ■
Intersects each cross section
■
Starts on the first cross section
■
Ends on the last cross section
You can select any number of guide curves for the lofted surface or solid. Select guide curves: Select the guide curves for the lofted solid or surface, and then press ENTER
Path Specifies a single path for the lofted solid or surface.
The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections. Select path: Specify a single path for the lofted solid or surface
LOFT | 815
Cross Sections Only Displays the Loft Settings dialog box on page 816.
Loft Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Loft Command entry: loft Controls the contour of a lofted surface at its cross sections. Also allows you
to close the surface or solid.
Ruled Specifies that the solid or surface is ruled (straight) between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable)
816 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Smooth Fit Specifies that a smooth solid or surface is drawn between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the start and end cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable)
Normal to Controls the surface normal of the solid or surface where it passes through the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable) Start Cross Section Specifies that the surface normal is normal to the start cross section. End Cross Section Specifies that the surface normal is normal to the end cross section. Start and End Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to both the start and end cross sections. All Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to all cross sections.
Draft Angles Controls the draft angle and magnitude of the first and last cross sections of the lofted solid or surface. The draft angle is the beginning direction of the surface. 0 is defined as outward from the plane of the curve. (LOFTNORMALS system variable)
The following illustration shows the affect of using a different draft angle for the first and last cross sections of a lofted solid. The first cross section is assigned a draft angle of 45 degrees, while the last cross section is assigned a draft angle of 135 degrees.
Loft Settings Dialog Box | 817
Start Angle Specifies the draft angle for the start cross section. (LOFTANG1 system variable) Start Magnitude Controls the relative distance of the surface from the start cross section in the direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the next cross section. (LOFTMAG1 system variable) End Angle Specifies the draft angle for the end cross section. (LOFTANG2 system variable) End Magnitude Controls the relative distance of the surface from the end cross section in the direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the previous cross section. (LOFTMAG2 system variable)
Close Surface or Solid Closes and opens a surface or solid. When using this option, the cross sections should form a torus-shaped pattern so that the lofted surface or solid can form a closed tube. (LOFTPARAM system variable)
Preview Changes Applies the current settings to the lofted solid or surface and displays a preview in the drawing area.
818 | Chapter 12 L Commands
LOGFILEOFF Quick Reference Closes the text window log file opened by LOGFILEON Command entry: logfileoff The program stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file. You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS on page 1011 command. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab on page 1023 in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab on page 1013 to change the location of the log file. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
LOGFILEON Quick Reference Writes the text window contents to a file Command entry: logfileon The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the program or use the LOGFILEOFF command. You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS on page 1011 command. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab on page 1023 in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab on page 1013 to change the location of the log file. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
LOGFILEOFF | 819
LSEDIT Quick Reference Has no effect except to preserve the integrity of scripts Command entry: lsedit Obsolete command.
LSLIB Quick Reference Has no effect except to preserve the integrity of scripts Command entry: lslib Obsolete command.
LSNEW Quick Reference Has no effect except to preserve the integrity of scripts Command entry: lsnew Obsolete command.
LTSCALE Quick Reference Sets the global linetype scale factor Command entry: ltscale (or 'ltscale for transparent use) Enter new linetype scale factor <current>: Enter a positive real value or press ENTER
820 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing. Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to be regenerated.
LWEIGHT Quick Reference Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click LWT on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use) The Lineweight Settings dialog box on page 821 is displayed. If you enter -lweight at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 823.
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click LWT on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use) Sets the current lineweight, sets the lineweight units, controls the display and display scale of lineweights, and sets the DEFAULT lineweight value for layers. For a table of valid lineweights, see “Overview of Lineweights” in the User's Guide.
LWEIGHT | 821
Lineweights Displays the available lineweight values. Lineweight values consist of standard settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable, which has an initial value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers use the default setting. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space.
Current Lineweight Displays the current lineweight. To set the current lineweight, select a lineweight from the lineweight list and choose OK.
Units for Listing Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable. Millimeters (mm) Specifies lineweight values in millimeters. Inches (in.) Specifies lineweight values in inches.
Display Lineweight Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If this option is selected, lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space. You can also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable. Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if performance slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. This option does not affect how objects are plotted.
822 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Default Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. (LWDEFAULT system variable)
Adjust Display Scale Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab. On the Model tab, lineweights are displayed in pixels. Lineweights are displayed using a pixel width in proportion to the real-world unit value at which they plot. If you are using a high-resolution monitor, you can adjust the lineweight display scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects the current display scale. Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one pixel may increase regeneration time. If you want to optimize performance when working in the Model tab, set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether.
-LWEIGHT Quick Reference If you enter -lweight at the command prompt, the following LWEIGHT command prompts are displayed. Current lineweight: current Enter default lineweight on page 823 for new objects or [? on page 824]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter ? The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER, BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches. Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. Values are calculated in either inches or millimeters; millimeters are the default. If you enter a valid lineweight value, the current default lineweight is set to the new value. If you enter any other value, the default is set to the nearest valid value. To plot an object with a lineweight that is not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights. See Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype in the User's Guide. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable and has an
-LWEIGHT | 823
initial value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at a value of one pixel in model space. ?—List Lineweights Displays a list of valid lineweight values in the current lineweight units. NOTE If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format, the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the earlier format does not display lineweights.
824 | Chapter 12 L Commands
M Commands
13
MARKUP Quick Reference Displays the details of markups and allows you to change their status
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup.
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager Command entry: markup Opens the Markup Set Manager on page 825.
Markup Set Manager Quick Reference
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup. Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager Command entry: markup
825
Displays information about loaded markup sets and their status. You can show or hide markups and their originating drawing files in your drawing area. You can change the status of individual markups and add notes and comments to them.
Markup Set List Control The Markup Set List control displays the name of the markup set, or, if no markup sets are open, the Open option. The Markup Set List control provides the following options. Names of Open Markup Sets Lists all open markup sets, if any. A check is displayed next to the current markup set. The current markup set is the open markup set that is displayed in the Markup Set Manager window. Recent Displays a list of recently opened markup sets. Open Displays the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. When you click Open, the markups in the selected DWF or DWFx file are loaded into the Markup Set Manager.
Republish Markup DWF Provides options for republishing the marked-up DWF or DWFx file. If any sheets were added to the DWF or DWFx file in Autodesk® Design Review, those sheets will not be included in the republished DWF or DWFx file. Republish All Sheets Republishes all sheets in the marked-up DWF or DWFx file. Opens the Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select the previously published DWF or DWFx to overwrite it, or you can enter a new name for the DWF or DWFx file. When you click Select, the previously published DWF file is overwritten or a new DWF or DWFx file is created that contains any changes you made to the drawing file geometry and the status of the markups. Republish Markup Sheets Republishes only those sheets in the marked-up DWF or DWFx file that have associated markups. Opens the Select DWF File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select the previously published DWF or DWFx to overwrite it, or you can enter a new name for the DWF or DWFx file. When you click Select, the previously published DWF or DWFx file is overwritten or a new DWF or DWFx file is created that contains any changes you made to the drawing file geometry and the status of the markups.
826 | Chapter 13 M Commands
View Redline Geometry Displays or hides redline markup geometry in the drawing area. When this button is displayed as selected, redline markup geometry is displayed in the drawing area.
View DWG Geometry Displays or hides the originating drawing file in the drawing area. When this button is displayed as selected, the drawing file is displayed in the drawing area.
View DWF Geometry Displays or hides the DWF or DWFx file geometry in the drawing area. When this button is displayed as selected, the DWF or DWFx file geometry is displayed in the drawing area.
Markups Displays loaded markup sets. The top-level node in the tree view represents the currently loaded markup set. A drawing sheet node is displayed for each drawing sheet that has associated markups. Any sheets that were added to the DWF or DWFx file in Autodesk Design Review are listed in italics. Each markup is displayed as an individual node under its corresponding drawing sheet. The icon associated with each markup represents the status of the markup. You can double-click any of the markups in the tree view to view the associated drawing sheet in the drawing area. When you double-click either a sheet that was added in Autodesk Design Review or a markup for that sheet, that sheet in the DWF or DWFx file will open in the DWF file viewer. Markup Set Node Indicates the currently loaded markup set. Drawing Sheet Node Indicates a drawing sheet that has one or more associated markups. Only drawing sheets that have corresponding markups are displayed
Markup Set Manager | 827
in the tree view of the Markups area. You can double-click a drawing sheet node to open the originating drawing file for that drawing sheet. Indicates an individual markup that does not yet have an assigned status. This is the default status for new markups. Question Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of Question. When you open and view a markup, you can change the status to Question if you need additional information about the markup. For Review Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of For Review. When you implement a markup, you can change the status to For Review to indicate that the markup creator should review the changes to the drawing sheet and the status of the markup. Done Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of Done. When a markup has been implemented and reviewed, you can change the status to Done.
Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Markup Set Node) Right-clicking a markup set node in the Markups area displays the following shortcut menu options. Open Markup DWF Opens the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. When you click Open, the markups in the selected DWF or DWFx file are loaded into the Markup Set Manager. Close Markup DWF Closes the selected marked-up DWF or DWFx and removes it from the Markup Set Manager. Save Markup History Changes Saves changes to the status of markups and added comments to the marked-up DWF or DWFx file.
Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Drawing Sheet Node) Right-clicking a drawing sheet node in the Markups area displays the following shortcut menu options. Open Sheet Opens the originating drawing file for that drawing sheet and makes that layout the active layout in the drawing area. Republish All Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this dialog box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create a DWF or DWFx file.
828 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Republish Markup Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this dialog box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create a DWF or DWFx file. The DWF or DWFx file created contains changes you make to the drawing file geometry and the status of the markups.
Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Markup Node) Right-clicking an individual markup node in the Markups area displays the following shortcut menu options. Open Markup Opens the originating drawing file for the drawing sheet associated with the selected markup and makes that layout the active layout in the drawing area. The associated markup DWF or DWFx file is also opened as a read-only reference in the drawing area. Markup Status Displays a shortcut menu that provides a list of status options. A check mark precedes the currently assigned status for the selected markup. ■
: Indicates that the markup does not yet have an assigned status. This is the default status for new markups.
■
Question: After you open and view a markup, you can change its status to Question if you need additional information about the markup.
■
For Review: After you have implemented a markup, you can change the status to For Review to indicate that the markup creator should review the changes to the drawing sheet and the status of the markup.
■
Done: After a markup has been implemented and reviewed, you can change its status to Done.
Restore Initial Markup View If you panned or zoomed the selected markup, or rotated the view in model space, restores the original view of the selected markup. Republish All Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this dialog box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create a DWF or DWFx file. Republish Markup Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this dialog box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create a DWF or DWFx file. The DWF or DWFx file created contains changes you make to the drawing file geometry and the status of the markups.
Markup Set Manager | 829
Show All Sheets/Hide Non-Markup Sheets Displays all sheets in the marked-up DWF or DWFx file in the tree view of the Markup Set Manager, or hides the sheets that do not have associated markups.
Markup Details Provides information about the currently selected node (markup set, drawing sheet, or individual markup) in the Markups area. When an individual markup is selected in the Markups area, Markup Details displays the status of the markup. You can change the status. The Markup History area (in the lower portion of the Markup Details area) provides a noneditable history log of the selected markup in reverse chronological order. In the Notes area, just below the Markup History area, you can add notes and comments that are automatically saved with the markup. Preview Changes the Markup Details area to the Markup Preview area and displays a thumbnail image of the selected drawing sheet or markup. You can click the Details button to change the area back to the Markup Details area.
Details Changes the Markup Preview area to the Markup Details area, which provides information about the selected node in the Markups area. You can click the Preview button to change the area back to the Markup Preview area.
Markup Preview Displays a thumbnail preview of the currently selected drawing sheet or markup. Details Changes the Markup Preview area to the Markup Details area, which provides information about the selected node in the Markups area. You can click the Preview button to change the area back to the Markup Preview area.
830 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Preview Changes the Markup Details area to the Markup Preview area and displays a thumbnail image of the selected drawing sheet or markup. You can click the Details button to change the area back to the Markup Details area.
Markup Set Manager Settings The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the title bar. Move Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the dialog box. The dialog box does not dock. Size Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or a corner to make the smaller or larger. Close Closes the Markup Set Manager. Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor Markup Set Manager. If this option is selected, a window can be docked when you drag it over a docking area at the side of a drawing. A docked window adheres to the side of the application window and causes the drawing area to be resized. Selecting this option also makes Anchor Right and Anchor Left available. Anchor Right/ Anchor Left Attaches the Markup Set Manager to an anchor tab base at the right or left side of the drawing area. The palette rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored palette is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored palette cannot be set to stay open. Auto-hide Causes a floating palette to roll open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When this option is cleared, the palette stays open. Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box on page 1061.
MARKUPCLOSE Quick Reference Closes the Markup Set Manager
MARKUPCLOSE | 831
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager Command entry: markupclose The Markup Set Manager on page 825 window closes.
MASSPROP Quick Reference Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids
Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Mass Properties.
Toolbar: Inquiry Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties Command entry: massprop Select objects: Use an object selection method If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first selected region are accepted. MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window, and then asks if you want to write the mass properties to a text file. Write analysis to a file? : Enter y or n, or press ENTER If you enter y, MASSPROP prompts you to enter a file name. The default extension for the file is .mpr, but it is a text file that can be opened with any text editor. The properties that MASSPROP displays depend on whether the selected objects are regions on page 833, and whether the selected regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS), or solids on page 834. For a list of the parameters that control the MASSPROP units, see Calculations Based on the Current UCS on page 836.
832 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Regions The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for all regions.
Mass properties for all regions Mass property Description Area
The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions.
Perimeter
The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The perimeter of a solid is not calculated.
Bounding box
The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system, the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a rectangle that encloses the region. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the region.
Centroid
A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate is a 2D point. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate is a 3D point.
If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the additional properties shown in the following table are displayed.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description Moments of inertia
A value used when computing the distributed loads, such as fluid pressure on a plate, or when calculating the forces inside a bending or twisting beam. The formula for determining area moments of inertia is area_moments_of_inertia = area_of_interest * radius2 The area moments of inertia has units of distance to the fourth power.
MASSPROP | 833
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description Products of inertia
Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.
Radii of gyration
Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The formula for the radii of gyration is gyration_radii = (moments_of_ inertia/body_mass)1/2 Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.
Principal moments and X,Y,Z directions about centroid
Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere between the high and low values.
Solids The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for solids.
Mass properties for solids Mass property Description Mass
The measure of inertia of a body. Because a density of one is used, mass and volume have the same value.
Volume
The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses.
Bounding box
The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid.
834 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Mass properties for solids Mass property Description Centroid
A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids. A solid of uniform density is assumed.
Moments of inertia
The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis2 Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the distance squared.
Products of inertia
Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.
Radii of gyration
Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The formula for the radii of gyration is gyration_radii = (moments_of_inertia/body_mass)1/2 Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.
Principal moments and X,Y,Z directions about centroid
Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere between the high and low values.
MASSPROP | 835
Calculations Based on the Current UCS The following table shows the parameters that control the units in which mass properties are calculated.
Parameters that control MASSPROP units Parameter
Used to calculate
DENSITY
Mass of solids
LENGTH
Volume of solids
LENGTH*LENGTH
Area of regions and surface area of solids
LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH
Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and perimeter
DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH
Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and principal moments
MATCHCELL Quick Reference Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells Shortcut menu: With a table selected and a cell selected, right-click and click Match Cell. Command entry: matchcell Select source cell: Click inside a cell in a table whose properties you want to copy Select destination cell: Click inside table cells to copy properties from the source cell, and right-click or press ENTER or ESC to exit All the properties of the source cell are copied to the destination cells except for the cell type: text or block.
836 | Chapter 13 M Commands
MATCHPROP Quick Reference Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Match Properties.
Toolbar: Standard Menu: Modify ➤ Match Properties Command entry: matchprop or painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use) Select source object: Select the object whose properties you want to copy Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to copy properties to Destination Object(s) Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the properties of the source object. You can continue selecting destination objects, or press ENTER to apply the properties and end the command. Settings Displays the Property Settings dialog box on page 837, in which you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects. By default, in the Property Settings dialog box all object properties are selected for copying. The types of properties that can be applied include color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, and other specified properties.
Property Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Toolbar: Standard Menu: Modify ➤ Match Properties
MATCHPROP | 837
Command entry: matchprop or painter (or 'matchprop for transparent
use) Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source object to the destination objects. Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Linetype Scale Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Thickness Changes the thickness of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for arcs, attributes, circles, lines, points, 2D polylines, regions, text, and traces. Plot Style Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object. If you are working in color-dependent plot style mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), this option is unavailable. Available for all objects, except those with the Jitter edge modifier applied.
838 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Dimension In addition to basic object properties, changes the dimension style and properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for dimension, leader, and tolerance objects. Polyline In addition to basic object properties, changes the width and linetype generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source polyline. The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline. If the source polyline has variable width, the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline. Material In addition to basic object properties, changes the material applied to the object. If the source object does not have a material assigned and the destination object does, the material is removed from the destination object. Text In addition to basic object properties, changes the text style and properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for single-line and multiline text objects. Viewport In addition to basic object properties, changes the following properties of the destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off, display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot, snap, grid, and UCS icon visibility and location. The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the freeze/thaw state of the layers are not transferred to the destination object. Shadow Display In addition to basic object properties, changes the shadow display. The object can cast shadows, receive shadows, or both, or it can ignore shadows. Hatch In addition to basic object properties, changes the hatch properties (including its properties) of the destination object to that of the source object. To match the hatch origin, use Inherit Properties in HATCH or HATCHEDIT. Available only for hatch objects. Table In addition to basic object properties, changes the table style of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for table objects. Multileader In addition to basic object properties, changes the multileader style and properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for multileader objects.
Property Settings Dialog Box | 839
MATERIALATTACH Quick Reference Applies materials to objects by layer Command entry: materialattach The Material Attachment Options dialog box on page 840 is displayed.
Material Attachment Options Dialog Box Quick Reference Command entry: materialattach Associates materials with layers. All objects on the layer that have their Material property set to BYLAYER have the specified material applied. Materials List Lists all the materials in the drawing, both in use and not in use. Drag a material onto a layer in the Layers List to apply the material to that layer. Layers List Lists all layers in the drawing and in any external references applied to the drawing. When a material is applied to the layer, that material is displayed next to the layer. Use the Detach button to remove the material from the layer. NOTE If you change the association of a material to a layer in an xref, the change is not saved back to the xref drawing.
MATERIALMAP Quick Reference Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object
840 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Toolbar: Mapping, Render Command entry: materialmap Select an option [Box on page 841/Planar on page 841/Spherical on page 842/Cylindrical on page 842/copY mapping to on page 842/Reset mapping on page 842] <current>:
Box Select faces or objects: The selection set must include at least one of the following object types: 3D solid, 3D surface, face, or 2D object with thickness. Accept the mapping or [Move/Rotate/Fit to object/reseT/sWitch mapping mode]: Move Displays the Move grip tool to move the map. Rotate Displays the Rotate grip tool to rotate the map. Fit to Object Scales the Mapping Gizmo to the object's size Reset Resets the UV coordinates to the default for the map. Switch Mapping Mode Re-displays the main command prompt of options.[Box on page 841/Planar on page 841/Spherical on page 842/Cylindrical on page 842/copY mapping to on page 842/Reset mapping on page 842] <current>:
Planar Accept the mapping or [Move/Rotate/Fit to object/reseT/sWitch mapping mode]: Move Displays the Move grip tool to move the map. Rotate Displays the Rotate grip tool to rotate the map. Fit to Object Scales the Mapping Gizmo to the object's size Reset Resets the UV coordinates to the default for the map. Switch Mapping Mode Re-displays the main command prompt. [Box on page 841/Planar on page 841/Spherical on page 842/Cylindrical on page 842/copY mapping to on page 842/Reset mapping on page 842] <current>:
MATERIALMAP | 841
Cylindrical Accept the mapping or [Move/Rotate/Fit to object/reseT/sWitch mapping mode]: Move Displays the Move grip tool to move the map. Rotate Displays the Rotate grip tool to rotate the map. Fit to Object Scales the Mapping Gizmo to the object's size Reset Resets the UV coordinates to the default for the map. Switch Mapping Mode Re-displays the main command prompt. [Box on page 841/Planar on page 841/Spherical on page 842/Cylindrical on page 842/copY mapping to on page 842/Reset mapping on page 842] <current>:
Spherical Accept the mapping or [Move/Rotate/Fit to object/reseT/sWitch mapping mode]: Move Displays the Move grip tool to move the map. Rotate Displays the Rotate grip tool to rotate the map. Fit to Object Scales the Mapping Gizmo to the object's size Reset Resets the UV coordinates to the default for the map. Switch Mapping Mode Re-displays the main command prompt. [Box on page 841/Planar on page 841/Spherical on page 842/Cylindrical on page 842/copY mapping to on page 842/Reset mapping on page 842] <current>:
Copy Mapping To Select the objects to copy the mapping to: Applies mapping from the original object or face to the selected objects.
Reset Mapping Resets the UV coordinates to the default for the map.
842 | Chapter 13 M Commands
MATERIALS Quick Reference Manages, applies, and modifies materials
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials.
Toolbar: Render Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Command entry: materials The Materials window on page 843 is displayed. NOTE When Texture Compression is turned on, the amount of video memory required to open a drawing that contains materials with images is decreased. By using the effect it can reduce the amount of video memory necessary to display the drawing, but the downside to this effect is it may increase the time it takes to load the images the first time that they are accessed and there is a reduction in the quality of the images when they are displayed in the viewport or plotted. To identify if Texture Compression is enabled, enter 3dconfig, and click Manual Tune. Look at the Hardware Effects List in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box.
Materials Window Quick Reference Provides different panels of controls and settings to create, modify, and apply materials
Ribbon: Visualize tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials.
Toolbar: Render Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Command entry: materials
MATERIALS | 843
Applies and modifies materials. The Materials window consists of different panel sections including Available Materials in Drawing Panel on page 844,Material Editor on page 846, Maps on page 848, Advanced Lighting Override on page 866, Material Scaling & Tiling on page 867, and Material Offset & Preview on page 870.
Available Materials in Drawing Quick Reference Command entry: materials Displays swatches of the materials that are available in the drawing. The default material is named Global. Click a swatch to select a material. The settings for that material are displayed in the Material Editor panel, and the swatch is outlined in yellow to indicate selection. One button above the swatches and two groups of buttons below it provide the following options. In addition, there are options available only on the shortcut menu. Toggle Display Mode Switches the display of swatches from one swatch to rows of swatches. This button is located above the swatches in the upper-right corner. Swatch Geometry Controls the type of geometry displayed for the selected swatch: box, cylinder, or sphere. The geometry changes in other swatches as you select them. Checkered Underlay Off/On Displays a multicolored checkered underlay to help you visualize the degree of opacity of a material. Preview Swatch Lighting Model Changes the lighting model from a single light source to a backlight lighting model. The selection from the fly out list changes the selected material swatch. Create New Material Displays the Create New Material dialog box on page 875. After you enter a name, a new swatch is created to the right of the current swatch and the new swatch is selected. Purge from Drawing Removes the selected material from the drawing. The Global material and any material that is in use cannot be deleted. Indicate Materials in Use Updates the display of the in-use icon. Materials currently in use in the drawing display a drawing icon in the lower-right corner of the swatch.
844 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Apply Material to Objects Applies the currently selected material to selected objects and faces. Remove Materials from Selected Objects Detaches materials from the selected objects and faces. Select Objects with Material (Shortcut Menu Only) Selects all objects in the drawing to which the selected material is applied. Faces with materials applied explicitly are not selected. Edit Name and Description (Shortcut Menu Only) Opens the Edit Name and Description dialog box on page 875. Export to Active Tool Palette (Shortcut Menu Only) Creates a material tool for the selected material on the currently active tool palette. If the Tool Palettes window is closed, it opens. Copy (Shortcut Menu Only) Copies the selected material to the Clipboard. You can paste the material in the Tool Palettes window, or paste it back into the Available Materials panel as a copy. Paste (Shortcut Menu Only) Pastes from the Clipboard either a swatch from the Available Materials panel, or a material tool from the Tool Palettes window. Size (Shortcut Menu Only) Controls the size of the swatches when they are displayed in rows.
Nested Map Navigation Quick Reference Command entry: materials Displays the nesting map navigation of the selected material swatch. Nested maps within a parent map or material can be selected. The Nested Map Navigation provides lists and buttons to control the current level of the nested maps. Home to Material Settings Returns the display of nested map property settings back to the current basic material settings. Map name string Displays in bold only the current map channel level and texture map or procedural map that is being edited. If you are at the top of the map channel hierarchy, the material name is displayed. If you are at the
Materials Window | 845
nested levels, the string in the display depend on where you are at the current nested level. The display string will start with the Material name: current map channel - procedural Map | Sub-procedural map. For example: Material 1: Diffuse Map - Checker | Color 1 - Speckle | Color 2 | Noise. Custom drop-down tree control arrow Displays levels of nested maps by selecting the drop-down arrow. By selecting a nested map the controls for that nested map will be displayed. Up One Level to Parent Map Returns to the controls of the parent of the current sub-procedural map.
Material Editor Quick Reference Command entry: materials Edits the material selected in the Available Materials in Drawing panel. The name of the selected material is displayed following “Material Editor.” The configuration of the Material Editor changes depending on the type of material and template that is selected. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Type Specifies the type of material. Realistic and Realistic Metal are for materials based on physical qualities. Advanced and Advanced Metal are for materials with more options, including properties that you can use to create special effects; for example, simulated reflections. Template (Realistic and Realistic Metal Types) Lists the templates available for the material type selected. Color (Realistic and Realistic Metal Types) Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261, where you specify the diffuse color of the material. By Object (Realistic and Realistic Metal Types) Sets the color of the material based on the color of the object it is applied to. Ambient (Advanced and Advanced Metal Types) Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261, where you specify the color that appears on those faces lighted by ambient light alone.
846 | Chapter 13 M Commands
By Object (Advanced and Advanced Metal Types) Sets the color of the material based on the color of the object it is applied to. First Lock Icon (Advanced and Advanced Metal Types) When locked, the lock icon between Ambient and Diffuse sets the ambient color of the material to the diffuse color. Diffuse (Advanced and Advanced Metal Types) Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261, where you specify the diffuse color of the material. Diffuse color is the main color of the object. By Object (Advanced and Advanced Metal Types) Sets the color of the material based on the color of the object it is applied to. Second Lock Icon (Advanced Type Only) When locked, the lock icon between Diffuse and Specular sets the specular color of the material to the diffuse color. Specular (Advanced Type Only) Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261, where you specify the color of a highlight on a shiny material. The size of the highlight depends on the material's shininess. By Object (Advanced Type Only) Sets the color of the material based on the color of the object it is attached to. Shininess Sets the shininess of the material. The highlight on the face of a very shiny solid is smaller and brighter. A face that is less shiny reflects the light in more directions, creating a large, softer highlight. Opacity (Realistic and Advanced Types) Sets the opacity of the material. A completely opaque solid object does not allow the passage of light through its surface. An object with no opacity is transparent. Reflection (Advanced and Advanced Metal Types) Sets the reflectivity of the material. When set to 100, the material is fully reflective and the surrounding environment is reflected in the surface of any object to which the material is applied. Refraction Index (Realistic and Advanced Types) Sets the refraction index of the material. Controls how light is refracted through an object with a partially transparent material attached. For example, at 1.0, the refraction index of air, the object behind the transparent object is not distorted. At 1.5, the object is distorted greatly, as if it were seen through a glass marble. Translucency (Realistic and Advanced Types) Sets the translucency of the material. A translucent object transmits light, but light is also scattered within the object. The translucency value is a percentage: at 0.0, the material is not translucent; at 100.0, the material is as translucent as possible.
Materials Window | 847
Self-illumination When set to a value more than 0, makes the object appear to give off light, independent of the lights in the drawing. When self-illumination is selected luminance is unavailable. Luminance (Realistic Type only) Luminance is the value of light reflected off a surface. It is a measure of how bright or dark the surface is perceived. When selecting luminance the self-illumination is unavailable. Luminance is specified in real lighting units. Two Sided Material (Realistic type only) When selected positive and negative face normals are rendered. When clear, only positive face normals are rendered. This setting is disabled if Force Two-Sided is set to “ON” in the Manage Render Presets dialog box. (Create Custom Render Presets.)
Maps Quick Reference Command entry: materials Assigns a pattern or texture to a material’s diffuse color. The colors of the map replace the material’s diffuse color in the Material Editor. For the Realistic and Realistic Metal material types, the Maps section of the Material window is divided into three mapping channel sections:Diffuse Map, Opacity Map, and Bump Map. For the Advanced and Advanced Metal material types, the Maps section is divided into four mapping channel sections: Diffuse Map, Reflection Map, Opacity Map, and Bump Map. Within each map channel a map type of Texture Map or Procedural Maps can be selected. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel.
Diffuse Map Channel Quick Reference Command entry: materials Diffuse mapping provides a pattern of colors for the material.
848 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Diffuse Map Makes the Diffuse map active on a material and available to be rendered. Diffuse Map Slider Controls the blending of the image or procedural map with the assigned control properties for the material. Range = 0-100; Default = 100. When Texture Map is the map type, then no slider is displayed. Map Type Specifies the type of map. You can use Texture Map to select an image file (for example, a tile pattern) or choose the Checker, Gradient Ramp, Marble, Noise, Speckle, Tiles, Waves, or Wood map types. Select Image Displays the Select Image File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. After a file is selected, displays the name of the file is displayed. The following formats can be used as texture maps: ■
TGA (.tga)
■
BMP (.bmp, .rle, .dib)
■
PNG (.png)
■
JFIF (.jpg, .jpeg)
■
TIFF (.tif)
■
GIF (.gif)
■
PCX (.pcx)
Click for “Map Type” Settings This button appears once a Texture Map image is selected or procedural map type is selected. Displays the controls for the Map Property Settings on page 854 The map control settings vary depending on the procedural map type selection.
Delete Map Information from Material Removes the selected map information from the material.
Map Synchronize Toggle When enabled (the button will appear as connected) the settings and value changes of the map channel are pushed
Materials Window | 849
and synchronized to all map channels. When disabled (the button will appear as separated) the setting and value changes of the map channel are only relevant to the current map channel.
Preview Map Channel Procedural Results Displays the Diffuse Map Preview dialog box on page 875.
Reflection Map Channel Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls how reflective the material is. Reflection maps (also known as environment maps) simulate a scene reflected on the surface of a shiny object. Reflection Map Makes the Reflection map active on the material and available to be rendered. Reflection Map Slider Controls the reflection of the map with the assigned control properties for the material. The higher the value, the more reflective the material. Range = 0-100; Default = 0. When Texture Map is the map type selected then no slider is displayed. Map Type Specifies the type of map. You can use Texture Map to select an image file (for example, a tile pattern) or choose the Checker,Gradient Ramp,Marble, Noise, Speckle, Tiles, Waves or Wood map types. Select Image Displays the Select Image File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. After a file is selected, the name of the file is displayed. The following formats can be used as texture maps: ■
TGA (.tga)
■
BMP (.bmp, .rle, .dib)
■
PNG (.png)
■
JFIF (.jpg, .jpeg)
■
TIFF (.tif)
■
GIF (.gif)
850 | Chapter 13 M Commands
■
PCX (.pcx)
Click for “Map Type” Settings This button appears once a Texture Map image is selected or procedural map type is selected. Displays the controls for the Map Property Settings on page 854. The map control settings vary depending on the procedural map type selection.
Delete Map Information from Material Removes the selected map information from the material.
Map Synchronize Toggle When enabled the settings and value changes of the map channel are pushed and synchronized to all map channels. When disabled the setting and value changes of the map channel are only relevant to the current map channel.
Preview Map Channel Procedural Results Displays the Reflection Map Preview dialog box on page 875.
Opacity Map Channel Quick Reference Command entry: materials Defines which areas of the material should be transparent and which areas should not. Areas where the opacity map is applied appear transparent; other areas appear opaque. Areas of the material that are transparent still have a specular highlight (as though they were glass). If the texture is black and white the opacity will be transparent and opaque respectively. Opacity Map Makes the Opacity map active on the material and available to be rendered. Opacity Map Slider Controls solid appearance of the image or map. The lower the setting the more transparent the material is. The higher the setting the more solid the material is. Range = 0-100; Default = 100. When Texture Map is the map type, then no slider is displayed.
Materials Window | 851
Map Type Specifies the type of map. You can use Texture Map to select an image file (for example, a tile pattern) or choose the Checker, Gradient Ramp, Marble, Noise, Speckle, Tiles, Waves or Wood map types. Select Image Displays the Select Image File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. After a file is selected, the name of the file is displayed. The following formats can be used as texture maps: ■
TGA (.tga)
■
BMP (.bmp, .rle, .dib)
■
PNG (.png)
■
JFIF (.jpg, .jpeg)
■
TIFF (.tif)
■
GIF (.gif)
■
PCX (.pcx)
Click for “Map Type” Settings This button appears once a Texture Map image is selected or procedural map type is selected. Displays the controls for the Map Property Settings on page 854 The map control settings vary depending on the procedural map type selection.
Delete Map Information from Material Removes the selected map information from the material.
Map Synchronize Toggle When enabled the settings and value changes of the map channel are pushed and synchronized to all map channels. When disabled the setting and value changes of the map channel are only relevant to the current map channel.
Preview Map Channel Procedural Results Displays the Opacity Map Preview dialog box on page 875.
852 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Bump Map Channel Quick Reference Command entry: materials Bump mapping makes an object appear to have a bumpy or irregular surface.You can select an image file or Procedural Maps to use for bump mapping. Use bump maps when you want to take the smoothness off a surface, or to create an embossed look. Bump Map Makes the Bump map active on the material and available to be rendered. Bump Slider Controls the bumpiness of the texture. Range = -1000 to 1000; Default = 1000.0. When Texture Map is the map type selected, then no slider is displayed. Map Type Specifies the type of map. You can use Texture Map to select an image file (for example, a tile pattern) or choose the Checker, Gradient Ramp,Marble, Noise, Speckle, Tiles, Waves or Wood map types. Select Image Displays the Select Image File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box on page 996. After a file is selected, the name of the file is displayed. The following formats can be used as texture maps: ■
TGA (.tga)
■
BMP (.bmp, .rle, .dib)
■
PNG (.png)
■
JFIF (.jpg, .jpeg)
■
TIFF (.tif)
■
GIF (.gif)
■
PCX (.pcx)
Click for “Map Type” Settings This button appears once a Texture Map image is selected or procedural map type is selected. Displays the controls for the Map Property Settings on page 854 The map control settings vary depending on the procedural map type selection.
Materials Window | 853
Delete Map Information from Material Removes the selected map information from the material.
Map Synchronize Toggle When enabled the settings and value changes of the map channel are pushed and synchronized to all map channels. When disabled the setting and value changes of the map channel are only relevant or to the current map channel.
Preview Map Channel Procedural Results Displays the Bump Map Preview dialog box on page 875.
Map Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials For each map type there are different property settings. See each map type for specific settings: ■
Texture Map on page 855
■
Checker on page 855
■
Gradient Ramp on page 856
■
Marble on page 858
■
Noise on page 859
■
Speckle on page 861
■
Tiles on page 861
■
Waves on page 864
■
Wood on page 866
854 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Texture Map Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for Texture Map. Click for Texture Map Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the texture. This button appears once an image is selected for the Texture Map. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Texture Map Slider Controls the blending of the texture map with the assigned control properties for the material. Scaling & Tiling Provides settings on page 869 to adjust the scaling and tiling for the map. Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Checker Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Checker procedural map. Click for Checker Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Checker procedural map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Color 1 Provides the option of selecting a color or a sub-procedural map for one of the checkers. ■
Map Type. Specifies Texture Map, sub-procedural map type, or color. If Texture Map is selected, select an image. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural
Materials Window | 855
map is selected, select the Click for “map type” Settings button. If Solid color is selected then a color selection box appears. ■
Color. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
Swaps the Map Types Swaps the Map Types between Color 1 and Color 2. Color 2 Provides the option of selecting a color or a sub-procedural map for one of the checkers. ■
Map Type. Specifies Texture Map, sub-procedural map type, or color. If Texture Map is selected, select an image. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural map is selected, select the Click for “map type” Settings button. If Solid color is selected then a color selection box appears.
■
Color. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
Soften Adjusts the value in the amount of softness or blurring between the edge of the two colors or map types. Higher values blur more. A value of 0.0 indicates sharp edges. Range = 0 to 5.00; Default = 0. Scaling & Tiling Provides settings on page 869 to adjust the scaling and tiling for the map. Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Gradient Ramp Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Gradient Ramp procedural map. Click for Gradient Ramp Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Gradient Ramp procedural map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel.
856 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Gradient Type Specifies the type of shade from one color to another. The following Gradient types are available. These affect the entire gradient. ■
4 Corner. An asymmetrical linear transition of colors.
■
Box. A box.
■
Diagonal. A linear diagonal transition of colors.
■
Lighting. Based on the light intensity value. No light=far left; brightest light=far right.
■
Linear. A smooth, linear transition of colors.
■
Mapped. Lets you assign a map to use as the gradient. Enables the Source Map controls for specifying the map and turning it on and off.
■
Normal. Based on the angle between the vector from the camera to the object and the surface normal vector at the sample point. The leftmost node of the gradient is 0 degrees; the rightmost node is 90 degrees.
■
Pong. A diagonal sweep that repeats in the middle.
■
Radial. A radial transition of colors.
■
Spiral. A smooth, circular transition of colors.
■
Sweep. A linear sweep transition of colors.
■
Tartan. A plaid.
Interpolation Specifies the type of calculation for the intermediate values. The following Interpolation types are available. These affect the entire gradient. NOTE Gradients are ordered from left to right. The "next" node is to the right of the current node; the "previous" node is to the left. ■
Custom. Sets an individual interpolation type for each node. Under Current Node select the interpolation type.
■
Ease In. Weighted more toward the next node than the current node.
■
Ease In Out. Weighted more toward the current node than the next node.
■
Ease Out. Weighted more toward the previous node than the next node.
■
Linear. Constant from one node to the next. (Default.)
■
Solid. No interpolation. Transitions are a sharp line.
Materials Window | 857
Gradient Bar Presents an editable representation of the gradient being created. The effect of the gradient moves from left (start point) to right (end point). Noise Creates random perturbation of a surface based on the interaction of two colors or materials. ■
Noise Type. Displays the different methods to create the perturbations: Regular, Fractal or Turbulence.
■
Amount. When nonzero, a random noise effect is applied to the gradient, based on the interaction of the gradient ramp colors (and maps, if present). The higher this value, the greater the effect. Range=0 to 1.
■
Size. Sets the scale of the noise function. Smaller values give smaller chunks of noise.
■
Phase. Controls the speed of the animation of the noise function. A 3D noise function is used for the noise; the first two parameters are U and V and the third is phase.
■
Levels. Sets the number of fractal iterations or turbulence (as a continuous function).
Noise Threshold When the noise value is above the Low threshold and below the High threshold, the dynamic range is stretched to fill 0 to 1. This causes a smaller discontinuity at the threshold transition and produces less potential aliasing.. ■
High. Sets the high threshold.
■
Low. Sets the low threshold.
■
Smooth Sets the high threshold.
Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Marble Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Marble procedural map.
858 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Click for Marble Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Marble procedural map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Stone color Specifies the color of the stone. Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261. Swaps the Colors Swaps the colors between the Stone and Vein color. Vein color Specifies the vein color of the marble. Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261. Vein spacing Sets the space between veins. Range = 0-100; Default = 1.00. Vein width Sets the width of the veins. Range = 0-100; Default = 1.00. Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Noise Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Noise procedural map. Click for Noise Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Noise procedural map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Noise Type Creates random perturbation of a surface based on the interaction of two colors. Regular. Generates plain noise. Basically the same as fractal noise with levels setting at 1. When the noise type is set to Regular, the Levels spinner is inactive (because Regular is not a fractal function). Fractal. Generates noise using a fractal algorithm. The Levels option sets the number of iterations for fractal noise.
Materials Window | 859
Turbulence. Generates fractal noise with an absolute value function applied to it to make fault lines. Note that the noise amount must be greater than 0 to see any effects of turbulence. Size. Sets the scale of the noise function. Smaller values give smaller chunks of noise. Color 1 Provides the option of selecting a color or a sub-procedural map for one of the checkers. ■
Map Type. Specifies Texture Map, sub-procedural map type, or color. If Texture Map is selected, select an image. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural map is selected, select the Click for “map type” Settings button. If Solid color is selected then a color selection box appears.
■
Color. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
Swaps the Map Types Swaps the map types between Color 1 and Color 2. Color 2 Provides the option of selecting a color or a sub-procedural map for one of the checkers. ■
Map Type. Specifies Texture Map, sub-procedural map type, or color. If Texture Map is selected, select an image. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural map is selected, select the Click for “map type” Settings button. If Solid color is selected then a color selection box appears
■
Color. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
Noise threshold Specifies a noise threshold. the settings are: ■
Low. Sets the low threshold. Range = 0 to 1; Default = 0.
■
High. Sets the high threshold. Range = 0 to 1; Default = 1.
■
Level. Determines how much fractal energy is used for the Fractal and Turbulence noise functions. You can set the exact amount of turbulence you want and also animate the number of fractal levels. Default = 3.
■
Phase. Controls the appearance of the noise. Use this option to vary the appearances of different objects that use the noise map.
Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
860 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Speckle Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Speckle procedural map. Click for Speckle Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Speckle procedural Map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Color 1 Specifies a color for the speckle. Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261. Swaps the Colors Swaps the colors between Color 1 and Color 2. Color 2 Specifies a second color for the speckle. Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 261. Size Adjusts the size of the speckles. Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Tiles Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Tiles procedural map. Click for Tiles Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Tiles procedural map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel.
Materials Window | 861
Pattern type Determines either a preset or custom tile pattern. Preset patterns typically disable most or all of the stacking layout and row/column edit controls. ■
Custom Tile.
■
Running Bond.
■
Common Flemish Bond.
■
English Bond.
■
1/2 Running Bond.
■
Stack Bond.
■
Fine Running Bond.
■
Fine Stack Bond.
Random seed Randomly applies patterns of color variation to the tiles. Does not require any other setting to generate completely different patterns. Tiles Setup Provides the following options for mapping with Tiles: ■
Map type. Specifies Texture Map, sub-procedural map type, or color. If Texture Map is selected, select an image. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural map is selected, select the Click for “map type” Settings button. If Solid color is selected then a color selection box appears.
■
Select Image. If Texture Map is selected as the map type, specifies the image to use.
■
Color. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
■
Go to ‘map type” Settings. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural map is selected, displays the property settings.
■
Horizontal count. Controls the number of tiles in a row. Default = 4.
■
Vertical count. Controls the number of tiles in a column. Default = 4.
■
Color variance. Controls the color variation of the tiles. Default = 0.05.
■
Fade variance. Controls the fading variation of the tiles.
Swaps the Map Types Swaps the map types between the Tiles and the Grout.
862 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Grout setup Controls the appearance of the grout. ■
Map type. Specifies Texture Map, sub-procedural map type, or color. If Texture Map is selected, select an image. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural map is selected, select the Click for “map type” Settings button. If Solid color is selected then a color selection box appears.
■
Select Image. If Texture Map is selected as the map type, specifies the image to use.
■
Color. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
■
Go to ‘map type” Settings. If Texture Map or a sub-procedural map is selected, displays the property settings.
■
Horizontal gap. Controls the horizontal size of the grout between the tiles. This value is locked by default to the vertical gap, so that both values change as you edit one or the other. Range = 0 to 100; Default = 0.50.
■
Vertical gap. Controls the vertical size of the grout between the tiles. This value is locked by default to the horizontal gap, so that both values changes as you edit one or the other. Range = 0 to 100; Default = 0.50.
■
Lock. Locks and unlocks the horizontal and vertical grout gaps.
■
Rough. Controls the roughness of the edges of the mortar. Range = 0 to 200; Default = 0.
Stacking Layout Specifies the controls when Custom Tiles is selected. ■
Line shift. Shifts every second row of tiles a distance of one unit. Range = 0 to 100; Default = 0.50.
■
Random shift. Randomly shifts all rows of tiles a distance of one unit. Range = 0 to 100; Default = 0.
Row Modify For Custom Tiles, creates a custom pattern for rows based upon the values of Per Row and Change settings. Default = Off. ■
Selection box. Turns the settings for Grout Row Modify on and off.
■
Per row. Specifies which rows to change. When Per Row equals 0, no rows change. When Per Row equals 1, every row changes. When Per Row is a value greater than 1, the change appears every N rows: a value of 2 changes every second row, a value of three changes every third row, and so on. Range = 0 to 5. Default = 1.
Materials Window | 863
■
Change. Changes the width of tiles in the affected rows. A value of 1.0 is the default tile width. Values greater than 1.0 increase the width of tiles, and values less than 1.0 decrease it. Range = 0.0 to 5.0. A value of 0 is a special case: when the change value is 0.0, no tiles appear in that row and the underlying material shows through. Default = 1.
Column Modify For Custom Tiles, creates a custom pattern for columns based upon the values of Per Column and Change settings. Default = Off. ■
Selection box. Turns the settings for Grout Column Modify on and off.
■
Per column. Specifies which columns to change. When Per Column equals 0, no columns change. When Per Column equals 1, every column changes. When Per Column is a value greater than 1, the change appears every N columns: a value of 2 changes every second column, a value of three changes every third column, and so on. Range = 0 to 50. Default = 1.
■
Change. Changes the height of tiles in the affected rows. A value of 1.0 is the default tile width. Values greater than 1.0 increase the height of tiles, and values less than 1.0 decrease it. Range = 0.0 to 5.0. A value of 0 is a special case: when the change value is 0.0, no tiles appear in that column and the underlying material shows through. Default = 1.
Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the scaling and tiling for the map. Scaling & Tiling Provides settings on page 869 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Waves Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Waves. procedural map. Click for Waves Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Waves procedural Map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel.
864 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Color 1 Specifies a color for Waves. The Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. Swaps the Colors Swaps the colors between Color 1 and Color 2. Color 2 Specifies a second color for Waves. The Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. Distribution Specifies the distribution of the waves. 3D distributes the wave centers on the surface on an imaginary sphere, affecting all sides of a 3D object. 2D distributes the wave in circles centered on the XY plane, which is more appropriate for flat water surfaces such as oceans and lakes. Number of waves Specifies how many wave sets are used in the pattern. Wave sets are groups of radially symmetrical waves that originate from randomly computed points along the surface of an imaginary sphere inside the object (a circle, in the case of 2D wave distribution). For calm water, set this to a low number. Use a high number for choppy water. Range = 1 to 50; Default = 3. Wave radius Specifies the radius of the imaginary sphere (3D distribution) or circle (2D distribution) whose surface is the origin of each wave set. A large radius produces large circular wave patterns, while a small radius produces dense, smaller waves. Default = 1000. Len Min Defines the minimum interval for each wave center. If values are close together, the waves appear more regular; if they are farther apart, the waves are less regular. Default = 50. Len Max Defines the maximum interval for each wave center. If values are close together, the waves appear more regular; if they are farther apart, the waves are less regular. Default = 50. Amplitude Specifies the amplitudes of the waves. The 3D setting distributes the wave centers on the surface on an imaginary sphere, affecting all sides of a 3D object. The 2D setting distributes the wave in circles centered on the XY plane, which is more appropriate for flat water surfaces such as oceans and lakes. Range = 0 to 10000; default = 1. Phase Shifts the wave pattern. Range = 0 to 1000; Default = 0. Random seed Provides a seed number to generate the water pattern. The pattern changes with each seed. Range = 0 to 65535; default = 30159. Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Materials Window | 865
Wood Property Settings Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the property settings for the Wood procedural map. Click for Wood Settings Displays a window with property settings to adjust the appearance of the Wood procedural map. The Nested Map Navigation on page 845 displays the current nested map level. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Color 1 Specifies a color for the wood. The Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. Swaps the Colors Swaps the colors between Color 1 and Color 2. Color 2 Specifies a second color the wood. The Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. Radial noise Sets the relative randomness of the radial noise pattern on a plane perpendicular to the grain on the wood. Range = 0 to 100; Default 1.00. Axial noise Sets the relative randomness of the axial noise pattern on a plane parallel with the grain on the wood. Range = 0 to 100; Default 1.00. Grain thickness Sets the relative thickness of the color bands that make up the grain on the wood. Range = 0 to 100; Default 0.50. Offset & Preview Provides settings on page 872 to adjust the material offset and preview for the map.
Advanced Lighting Override Quick Reference Command entry: materials Sets parameters to affect the rendering of a material when it is lit by indirect illumination from global illumination and/or final gather. The advanced lighting override provides controls to change the properties of the material
866 | Chapter 13 M Commands
to affect the rendered scene. This control is only available on Realistic & Realistic Metal material types. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Color Bleed Scale Slider Increases or decreases the saturation of reflected color. Range = 0.0 to 1000; Default = 100. Indirect Bump Scale Slider Scales the effect of the base material’s Bump map in areas lit by indirect light. When this value is zero, no bump mapping is done for indirect light. Increasing the scale increases the bump effect under indirect lighting. This value does not affect the Bump amount in areas where the base material is lit directly. Range 0 to 1000; Default = 100. Reflectance Scale Slider Increases or decreases the amount of energy the material reflects. Reflectance is the percentage of diffuse light energy that is reflected from a material. Range = 0 to 1000; Default = 100. Transmittance Scale Slider Increases or decreases the amount of energy the material transmits.Transmittance is the amount of light energy transmitted through a material. A completely opaque material has 0% transmittance. Range = 0 to 1000; Default = 100.
Material Scaling & Tiling Quick Reference Command entry: materials Specifies scaling and tiling of maps on materials. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Scale units Specifies the units to use in scaling. ■
None. Specifies a fixed scale.
■
Fit to Gizmo. Fits the image to the face or object.
■
Units. Specifies the type of units to scale in real-world units (Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, Kilometers, Inches, Feet, Survey Feet, Miles, or Yards).
Materials Window | 867
U Tile Adjusts the tiling of the image along the U axis. Selecting None, Tile, and Mirror specifies the type of tiling for the material in the U axis. The preview is updated as you change the value. ■
None. Controls the map to not be tiled within the material; just one tile will appear across the object it is applied to.
■
Tile. Controls the map to be tiled within the material. This affects real-world scale.
■
Mirror. Controls the map to be tiled, but each tile will be a mirror of the adjacent one.
UVW coordinates are similar to XYZ coordinates, but they refer to the image and move with it when it moves or rotates. U Tile Spinner Adjusts, for U Tile selections of Tile and Mirror, the value in the tiling amount on the U axis for the image. Range = 1 to 500. When the values are adjusted through the spinner, the U Tile trackbar is updated to reflect the amount and is displayed in the interactive preview in the Material Offset & Preview section. V Tile Adjusts the tiling of the image along the V axis. Selecting None, Tile, and Mirror specifies the type of tiling for the material in the V axis. The preview is updated as you change the value. ■
None. Controls the map to not be tiled within the material; just one tile will appear across the object it is applied to.
■
Tile. Controls the map to be tiled within the material. This affects real-world scale.
■
Mirror. Controls the map to be tiled, but each tile will be a mirror of the adjacent one.
UVW coordinates are similar to XYZ coordinates, but they refer to the image and move with it when it moves or rotates. V Tile Spinner Adjusts, for V Tile selections of Tile and Mirror, the value of the tiling amount on the V axis for the image. Range = 1 to 500. When the values are adjusted through the spinner, the V Tile trackbar is updated to reflect the amount and is displayed in the interactive preview in the Material Offset & Preview section. Lock Aspect Ratio Locks the shape of the map. The original U Tile and V Tile values are based on the aspect ratio of the map. The greater of the two is assigned a value of 1, and the other is assigned a value that maintains the
868 | Chapter 13 M Commands
ratio. When the length or width value is changed, the other value changes as needed to maintain the shape.
Material Scaling & Tiling for Sub-procedural Maps Quick Reference Command entry: materials Specifies scaling and tiling for sub-procedural maps on materials. This functionality is only available on Texture map and 2D sub-procedural maps (Checker, Gradient Ramp and Tiles). This control is not available on 3D sub-procedural maps (Noise, Speckle, Marble, Wood and Wave). Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Map Synchronize When enabled the settings and value changes of the map channel are pushed and synchronized to all map channels. When disabled the setting and value changes of the map channel are only relevant or to the current map channel. This control is available within the sub-procedural material Scaling & Tiling control. It is not available in the main material window. Scale units Specifies the units to use in scaling.: ■
None. Specifies a fixed scale.
■
Fit to Gizmo. Fits the image to the face or object.
U Tile Adjusts the tiling of the image along the U axis. Selecting None, Tile, and Mirror specifies the type of tiling for the material in the U axis. The preview is updated as you change the value. ■
None. Controls the map to not be tiled within the material; just one tile will appear across the object it is applied to.
■
Tile. Controls the map to be tiled within the material. This affects real-world scale.
■
Mirror. Controls the map to be tiled, but each tile will be a mirror of the adjacent one.
UVW coordinates are similar to XYZ coordinates, but they refer to the image and move with it when it moves or rotates.
Materials Window | 869
U Tile Spinner Adjusts, for U Tile selections of Tile and Mirror, the value in the tiling amount on the U axis. Range = 1 to 500. When the values are adjusted through the spinner, the U Tile trackbar is updated to reflect the amount and is displayed in the interactive preview in the Material Offset & Preview section. V Tile Adjusts the tiling of the image along the V axis. Selecting None, Tile, and Mirror specifies the type of tiling for the material in the V axis. The preview is updated as you change the value. ■
None. Controls the map to not be tiled within the material; just one tile will appear across the object it is applied to.
■
Tile. Controls the map to be tiled within the material. This affects real-world scale.
■
Mirror. Controls the map to be tiled, but each tile will be a mirror of the adjacent one.
UVW coordinates are similar to XYZ coordinates, but they refer to the image and move with it when it moves or rotates. V Tile Spinner Adjusts, for V Tile selections of Tile and Mirror, the value of the tiling amount on the V axis. Range = 1 to 500. When the values are adjusted through the spinner, the V Tile trackbar is updated to reflect the amount and is displayed in the interactive preview in the Material Offset & Preview section. Lock Aspect Ratio Locks the shape of the map. The original U Tile and V Tile values are based on the aspect ratio of the map. The greater of the two is assigned a value of 1, and the other is assigned a value that maintains the ratio. When the length or width value is changed, the other value changes as needed to maintain the shape.
Material Offset & Preview Quick Reference Command entry: materials Specifies the offset and preview properties of maps on materials. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel.
870 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Auto-regen Specifies that any changes in a material are reflected in the interactive swatch (preview) right away. When cleared, any changes made to the map channel are not reflected in the interactive swatch. Update Updates the interactive swatch preview. Preview size Zooms in or out of the preview. Preview Displays a preview of the map on the face or object that updates as you change settings. Click and drag inside the square to adjust the U and V offsets. When Scale is selected, the square represents a 1-unit by 1-unit tile. If Units is set to None, the unit is whatever the units are in the drawing. When Fit to Gizmo is selected, the square represents the tile to be stretched to fit the face of the object. U Tile Slider Adjusts the tiling of the map along the U axis. The preview is updated as you change the value. The slider is only available on Texture Map and 2D procedurals (Checker, Gradient Ramp and Tiles). The slider is not available on 3D procedurals (Noise, Speckle, Marble, Waves or Wood).. V Tile Slider Adjusts the tiling of the map along the V axis. The preview is updated as you change the value. The slider is only available on Texture Map and 2D procedurals (Checker, Gradient Ramp and Tiles). The slider is not available on 3D procedurals (Noise, Speckle, Marble, Waves or Wood). Lock Locks the shape of the map. When the length or width value is changed, the other value changes as needed to maintain the shape. The lock is only available on Texture Map and 2D procedurals (Checker, Gradient Ramp and Tiles). The lock is not available on 3D procedurals (Noise, Speckle, Marble, Waves or Wood). U offset Moves the starting point of the map along the U axis. You can set this value interactively by moving the square inside the preview. V offset Moves the starting point of the map along the V axis. You can set this value interactively by moving the square inside the preview. Rotation Rotates the map around the W axis of the UVW coordinate system. Rotation is not available for spherical and cylindrical mapping. Use MATERIALMAP to display the mapping gizmo that can rotate box, planar, spherical and cylindrical maps.
Materials Window | 871
Material Offset & Preview for Sub-procedural Maps Quick Reference Command entry: materials Specifies the Offset & Preview properties of maps on materials. Collapse/Expand Display Panel Collapses (up arrows) and expands (down arrows) the display panel. Map Synchronize Toggle Button When enabled the settings and value changes of the map channel are pushed and synchronized to all map channels. When disabled the setting and value changes of the map channel are only relevant or to the current map channel. Auto-regen Specifies that any changes in a material are reflected in the interactive swatch (preview) right away. When cleared, any changes made to the map channel are not reflected the interactive swatch. Update Updates the interactive swatch preview. Preview size Zooms in or out of the preview. Preview Displays a preview of the map on the face or object that updates as you change settings. Click and drag inside the square to adjust the U and V offsets. If Scale units is set to None in Scaling & Tiling, the unit is whatever the units are in the drawing. The preview square represents a 1-unit by 1-unit tile. When Fit to Gizmo is selected, the preview square represents the tile to be stretched to fit the face of the object. U Tile Slider Adjusts the tiling of the map along the U axis. The preview is updated as you change the value The slider is only available on Texture Map and 2D procedurals (Checker, Gradient Ramp and Tiles). The slider is not available on 3D procedurals (Noise, Speckle, Marble, Waves or Wood). V Tile Slider Adjusts the tiling of the map along the V axis. The preview is updated as you change the value. The slider is only available on Texture Map and 2D procedurals (Checker, Gradient Ramp and Tiles). The slider is not available on 3D procedurals (Noise, Speckle, Marble, Waves or Wood). Lock Locks the shape of the map. When the length or width value is changed, the other value changes as needed to maintain the shape. The lock is only available on Texture Map and 2D procedurals (Checker, Gradient Ramp and
872 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Tiles). The Lock is not available on 3D procedurals (Noise, Speckle, Marble, Waves or Wood). U offset Moves the starting point of the map along the U axis. You can set this value interactively by moving the square inside the preview. V offset Moves the starting point of the map along the V axis. You can set this value interactively by moving the square inside the preview. Rotation Rotates the map around the W axis of the UVW coordinate system. Rotation is not available for spherical and cylindrical mapping. Use MATERIALMAP to display the mapping gizmo that can rotate box, planar, spherical and cylindrical maps.
Materials Tool Palette Quick Reference Command entry: materials Displays swatches of the materials that are available in the drawing. The default material is named Global. Click a swatch to select a material. The settings for that material are displayed in the Material Editor panel, and the swatch is outlined in yellow to indicate selection. One button above the swatches and two groups of buttons below it provide the following options. In addition, there are options available only on the shortcut menu. Toggle Display Mode Switches the display of swatches from one swatch to rows of swatches. This button is located above the swatches in the upper right corner. Swatch Geometry Controls the type of geometry displayed for the selected swatch: box, cylinder, or sphere. The geometry changes in other swatches as you select them. Checkered Underlay Off/On Displays a multicolored checkered underlay to help you visualize the degree of opacity of a material. Preview Swatch Lighting Model Changes the lighting model from a single light source to a backlight lighting model. The selection from the flyout changes the selected material swatch. Create New Material Displays the Create New Material dialog box on page 875. After you enter a name, a new swatch is created to the right of the current swatch and the new swatch is selected.
Materials Tool Palette | 873
Purge from Drawing Removes the selected material from the drawing. The Global material and any material that is in use cannot be deleted. Indicate Materials in Use Updates the display of the in-use icon. Materials currently in use in the drawing display a drawing icon in the lower-right corner of the swatch. Apply Material to Objects Applies the currently selected material to objects and faces. Remove Materials from Selected Objects Detaches materials from the selected objects and faces. Select Objects with Material (Shortcut Menu Only) Selects all objects in the drawing to which the selected material is applied. Faces with materials applied explicitly are not selected. Edit Name and Description (Shortcut Menu Only) Opens the Edit Name and Description dialog box on page 875. Export to Active Tool Palette (Shortcut Menu Only) Creates a material tool for the selected material on the currently active tool palette. If the Tool Palettes window is closed, it opens. Copy (Shortcut Menu Only) Copies the selected material to the Clipboard. You can paste the material in the Tool Palettes window, or paste it back into the Available Materials panel as a copy. Paste (Shortcut Menu Only) Pastes from the Clipboard either a swatch from the Available Materials panel, or a material tool from the Tool Palettes window. Size (Shortcut Menu Only) Controls the size of the swatches when they are displayed in rows.
Material Tool Property Editor Quick Reference Command entry: materials Controls the properties of the selected material tool. The properties displayed here are described in the Material Editor section of the Materials window on page 843. A few properties, such as swatch geometry and checkered underlay, are not available in the Material Tool Property Editor.
874 | Chapter 13 M Commands
When you edit a material tool, only the tool itself is affected. If the material is being used in the drawing and you want to apply the changes, use the material tool to reapply the changed material to the objects. To make the changed material available in the drawing, apply it to objects in the drawing or copy it to the Materials window. Unlike the Properties palette, the Material Tool Property Editor must be closed before you can continue working in the drawing.
Create New Material and Edit Name and Description Dialog Boxes Quick Reference Command entry: materials Names materials and provides space for a description. Name Names the material. Description Provides an optional description for the material.
Map Preview Dialog Boxes Quick Reference Command entry: materials Provides a larger more detailed view of the selected map channel. The preview window can remain open while making changes to the map property settings. The settings can be previewed as they are made at the current map level or any other level. The preview is a 2D representation of the texture. Auto-regen Specifies that the preview swatch is updated automatically when changes are made to the material settings. Update Specifies that changes to the preview can be done manually. If Auto-regen is clear, and when changes are made to the map property settings, the Update button becomes active.
Create New Material and Edit Name and Description Dialog Boxes | 875
MATERIALSCLOSE Quick Reference Closes the Materials window Command entry: materialsclose The Materials window on page 843 closes.
MEASURE Quick Reference Places point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Measure Command entry: measure Select object to measure: Specify length of segment on page 876 or [Block on page 877]: Specify a distance or enter b The points or blocks drawn by MEASURE are placed in the Previous selection set, so you can choose them all by entering p at the next Select Objects prompt. You can use the Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to the point objects. You can then remove the points by entering erase previous. The markers are placed in the user coordinate system (UCS) of the object being measured (except for 3D polylines in the current UCS). Markers are always placed on the object, regardless of the elevation settings. If you use point objects for the markers, you can make the points easier to see by changing their appearance with the PDMODE system variable. Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object. Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one drawn). Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle. If the snap rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of the circle starts to the right of center, on its circumference.
876 | Chapter 13 M Commands
The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit distances along a polyline, with the PDMODE system variable set to 35.
Block Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object. Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing Align block with object? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press ENTER If you enter y, the block is rotated about its insertion point so that its horizontal lines are aligned with, and drawn tangent to, the object being measured. If you enter n, the block is always inserted with a 0 rotation angle. Specify length of segment: After you specify the segment length, the block is inserted at the specified interval. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included.
MENU Quick Reference Loads a customization file Command entry: menu
MENU | 877
The Select Customization File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Enter or select a customization file name. When you press ENTER or choose Open, the named file is loaded. A customization file is an XML-based file containing the menus, toolbars, workspaces, and other interface elements that you can customize. You can create a customized menu file and use MENU or CUI to load the file. NOTE The Legacy Menu File (MNS) and Legacy Menu Template (MNU) files used in past releases have been replaced with just one file type, the XML-based CUI file.
MENULOAD Quick Reference Obsolete Command entry: menuload The Load/Unload Customizations dialog box on page 305 is displayed. (CUILOAD on page 304 command) NOTE The Legacy Menu File (MNS) and Legacy Menu Template (MNU) files used in past releases have been replaced with just one file type, the XML-based CUI file.
MENUUNLOAD Quick Reference Obsolete Command entry: menuunload The Load/Unload Customizations dialog box on page 305 is displayed. (CUIUNLOAD on page 305 command)
878 | Chapter 13 M Commands
NOTE The Legacy Menu File (MNS) and Legacy Menu Template (MNU) files used in past releases have been replaced with just one file type, the XML-based CUI file.
MINSERT Quick Reference Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array Command entry: minsert Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name, enter ? to list the currently defined blocks in the drawing, or enter ~ to display the Select Drawing File dialog box NOTE You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the block's objects during insertion, as you can with INSERT on page 716. Specify insertion point on page 879 or [Scale on page 881/X on page 881/Y on page 882/Z on page 882/Rotate on page 883/PScale on page 884/PX on page 884/PY on page 885/PZ on page 885/PRotate on page 885]: Specify a point or enter an option Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options, respond to the prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation. Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded. You cannot use MINSERT with blocks.
Insertion Point Specifies a location for the blocks. Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors. Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotation angle <0>:
MINSERT | 879
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite corner. Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors. Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor If you enter c, you specify a corner point. The specified point and the block insertion point determine the X and Y scale factors. Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotation angle <0>:
880 | Chapter 13 M Commands
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
Scale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the specified scale factor. Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
X Sets the X scale factor. Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>:
MINSERT | 881
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
Y Sets the Y scale factor. Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
Z Sets the Z scale factor. Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>:
882 | Chapter 13 M Commands
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array. Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option or press ENTER X Scale Factor Sets the X scale factor. Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance Corner Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the block insertion point. Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed:
MINSERT | 883
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance XYZ Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero value, enter c, or press ENTER You can determine the X and Y scale factors by entering a scale factor value or by specifying a corner point. If you specify a corner point, the specified point and the block insertion point determine the X and Y scale factors for the block. Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row, the following prompt is displayed: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, the following prompt is displayed: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
PScale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate.
PX Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point:
884 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate.
PY Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate.
PZ Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate.
PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position. Specify preview rotation angle: Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate.
MINSERT | 885
MIRROR Quick Reference Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Mirror Command entry: mirror Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point
The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are mirrored. For mirroring in 3D, this line defines a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line. Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects.
No Places the mirrored image into the drawing and retains the original objects.
886 | Chapter 13 M Commands
You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror them across a specified line to create the other half.
NOTE By default, when you mirror a text object, the direction of the text is not changed. Set the MIRRTEXT system variable to 1 if you do want the text to be reversed.
MIRROR3D Quick Reference Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects about a plane Command entry: mirror3d It is recommended that you use the grip tools available through the 3DMOVE and 3DROTATE commands to manipulate 3D objects. For more information about using grip tools, see Use Grip Tools to Modify Objects. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object on page 887/Last on page 888/Zaxis on page 888/View on page 888/XY/YZ/ZX on page 889/3points on page 889] <3points>: Enter an option, specify a point, or press ENTER
Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the mirroring plane. Select a circle, arc, or 2D-polyline segment:
MIRROR3D | 887
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press ENTER, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained.
Last Mirrors the selected objects about the last defined mirroring plane. Delete source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press ENTER, the reflected object are placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained. Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and a point normal to the plane. Specify point on mirror plane: Specify a point (1) Specify point on Z-axis (normal) of mirror plane: Specify a point (2) Delete source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press ENTER, the reflected object are placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained.
View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of the current viewport through a point.
888 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Specify point on view plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point or press ENTER Delete source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press ENTER, the reflected object are placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained. XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard planes (XY, YZ, or ZX) through a specified point. Specify point on (XY, YZ, ZX) plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press ENTER, the reflected object are placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained. 3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you select this option by specifying a point, the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt is not displayed. Specify first point on mirror plane: Enter a point (1) Specify second point on mirror plane: Enter a point (2) Specify third point on mirror plane: Enter a point (3) Delete source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press ENTER, the reflected object are placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained.
MIRROR3D | 889
MLEADER Quick Reference Creates a multileader object
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader.
Toolbar: Multileader Menu: Dimension ➤ Multileader Command entry: mleader A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block. Multileaders can be created arrowhead first on page 890, leader landing first on page 890, or content first on page 891. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that specified style. Specify leader arrowhead location or [leader Landing first on page 890/Content first on page 891/Options on page 891]
Arrowhead First Specifies a location for the arrowhead of the multileader object. Point Selection Sets placement of the leader landing for the new multileader object. Specify leader landing location: If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the multileader object.
Leader Landing First Specifies a location for the landing line of the multileader object. If the multileader object you previously drew was landing first, then subsequent multileaders are created landing first until otherwise specified. Point Selection Sets placement of the arrowhead for the new multileader object. Specify leader arrowhead location:
890 | Chapter 13 M Commands
If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the multileader line.
Content First Specifies a location for the text or block associated with the multileader object. If the multileader object you previously drew was content first, then subsequent multileader objects are created content first until otherwise specified. Point Selection Sets placement for the text box for the text label associated with the multileader object. When you finish entering your text, click OK or click outside the text box. You can also choose to place the multileader object with the leader first as outlined above. If you choose End at this point, then no landing line is associated with the mleader object.
Options Specifies options for placing the multileader object. Enter an option [Leader type/leader lAnding/Content type/Maxpoints/First angle/Second angle/eXit options]: Leader Type Specifies the type of leader line to use Enter an option [Type/Landing]: Type Specifies a straight, spline, or no leader line. Select a leader type [Straight/sPline/None]: Landing Changes the distance of the horizontal landing line Use landing [Yes/No]: If you choose No at this point, then no landing line is associated with the multileader object. Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be used Enter a content type [Block/None]: Block Specifies a block within your drawing to associate with the new multileader. Enter block name: None Specifies no content type. Maxpoints Specifies a maximum number of points for the new leader line.
MLEADER | 891
Enter the maximum points for leader line or <none.: First Angle Constrains the angle of the first point in the new leader line. Enter first angle constraint or <none>: Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line. Enter second angle constraint or <none>: Exit Options Returns you to the first MLEADER command prompt.
MLEADERALIGN Quick Reference Organizes selected multileaders along a specified line
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Align.
Toolbar: Multileader Command entry: mleaderalign Select multileaders: After multileaders have been selected, specify the multileader all others are aligned to. Select multileader to align to or [Options]:
Options Specifies options for aligning the selected multileaders. Enter an option [Distribute on page 892/make leader segments Parallel on page 892/specify Spacing on page 892/Use current on page 892]: Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points. Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader segments in the selected multileaders are parallel. Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of selected multileaders. Use Current Uses the current spacing between multileader content.
892 | Chapter 13 M Commands
MLEADERCOLLECT Quick Reference Organizes selected multileaders containing blocks as content into a group attached to a single leader line
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Collect.
Toolbar: Multileader Command entry: mleadercollect Select multileaders: After you select multileaders, you can specify their placement in the drawing. Specify collected multileader location or [Vertical/Horizontal/Wrap]: Specify Location Specifies the point for placing the multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection. Vertical Places the multileader collection in a vertical orientation. Horizontal Places the multileader collection in a horizontal orientation. Wrap Specifies a width for a wrapped multileader collection. Specify wrap width or [Number]: Number specifies a maximum number of blocks per row in the multileader collection.
MLEADEREDIT Quick Reference Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Add Leader.
Toolbar: Multileader
MLEADERCOLLECT | 893
Command entry: mleaderedit Select a multileader: After you select a multileader, you can add or remove leader lines. Select an option [Add leader/Remove leader]: Add Leader Adds a leader line to the selected multileader object. The new leader line is added to the left or right of the selected multileader, depending on the location of the cursor. Specify leader arrowhead location: If there are more than 2 leader points in the specified multileader style, you are prompted to specify another point. Specify next point: Remove Leader Removes a leader line from the selected multileader object. Specify leaders to remove:
MLEADERSTYLE Quick Reference Creates and modifies multileader styles
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style.
Toolbar: Multileader Toolbar: Styles Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Command entry: mleaderstyle The Multileader Style Manager on page 895 is displayed.
894 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Multileader Style Manager Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Style. Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style
Toolbar: Multileader, Styles Command entry: mleaderstyle Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader styles.
The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content.
Current Multileader Style Displays the name of the multileader style that is applied to multileaders you create. The default multileader style is STANDARD.
Styles Displays a list of multileader styles. The current style is highlighted.
Multileader Style Manager | 895
List Controls the contents of the Styles list. Click All Styles to display all multileader styles available in the drawing. Click Styles In Use to display only the multileader styles that are referenced by multileaders in the current drawing.
Preview Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list.
Set Current Sets the multileader style selected in the Styles list as the current style. All new multileaders are created using this multileader style.
New Displays the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can define new multileader styles.
Modify Displays the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can modify multileader styles.
Delete Deletes the multileader style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being used in the drawing cannot be deleted.
Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Multileader Toolbar: Styles Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Command entry: mleaderstyle Modifies an existing multileader style.
896 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Leader Format Tab General Controls the general appearance of the multileader. Type Determines the type of leader line. You can choose a straight leader, a spline, or no leader line. Color Determines the color of the leader line. Linetype Determines the linetype of the leader line. Lineweight Determines the lineweight of the leader line.
Arrowhead Controls the appearance of the multileader arrowheads. Symbol Sets the arrowhead symbol for the multileader. Size Displays and sets the size of arrowheads.
Leader Break Controls the settings used when adding a dimension break to a multileader.
Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 897
Break Size Displays and sets the break size used for the DIMBREAK command when the multileader is selected.
Leader Structure Tab Constraints Controls the constraints of the multileader. Maximum Leader Points Specifies a maximum number of points for the leader line. First Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the first point in the leader line. Second Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the second point in the multileader landing line.
Landing Settings Controls the landing settings of the multileader. Automatically Include Landing Attaches a horizontal landing line to the multileader content. Set Landing Distance Determines the fixed distance for the multileader landing line.
Scale Controls the scaling of the multileader. Annotative Specifies that the multileader is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. When the multileader is not annotative, the following options are available. Scale Multileaders to Layout Determines a scaling factor for the multileader based on the scaling in the model space and paper space viewports. Specify Scale Specifies the scale for the multileader.
Content Tab Multileader Type Determines whether the multileader contains text or a block. When the multileader contains MTEXT, the following options are available.
898 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Text Options Controls the appearance of the text for the multileader. Default Text Sets default text for the multileader content. The [...] button launches the MTEXT In Place Editor. Text Style Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text styles are displayed. To load or create a text style, see the STYLE command on page 1437. Text Angle Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text. Text Color Specifies the color of the multileader text. Text Height Specifies the height of the multileader text. Always Left Justify Specifies that the multileader text is always left justified. Frame Text Check Box Frames the multileader text content with a text box.
Leader Connection Controls the leader connection settings of the multileader. Left Attachment Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the left of the leader. Right Attachment Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the right of the leader. Landing Gap Specifies the distance between the landing line and the multileader text. When the multileader contains a block, the following options are available.
Block Options Controls the properties of block content in a multileader object. Source block Specifies the block used for multileader content. Attachment Specifies the way the block is attached to the multileader object. You can attach the block by specifying the insertion point of the block or the center point of the block. Color Specifies the color of the multileader block content. ByBlock is selected by default. The Block color control in the MLEADERSTYLE Content tab only takes effect if the object color included in the block is set to ByBlock.
Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 899
Preview Displays a preview image of the style being modified.
Learn About Multiline Styles Click the link or information icon to learn more about multileaders and multileader styles.
Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Multileader Toolbar: Styles Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Command entry: mleaderstyle Specifies a name for the new multileader style and specifies the existing multileader style on which the new multileader style will be based.
New Style Name Names the new multileader style. Start With Specifies an existing multileader style whose settings are the default for the new multileader style. Annotative Specifies that the multileader object is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Continue Displays the Multileader Style Manager on page 895, in which you define the new multileader style.
900 | Chapter 13 M Commands
MLEDIT Quick Reference Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multiline Command entry: mledit The Multiline Edit Tools dialog box on page 901is displayed. If you enter -mledit at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 909.
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multiline Command entry: mledit Modifies multiline objects. The dialog box displays tools with sample images in four columns. The first column controls multilines that cross, the second controls multilines that form a tee, the third controls corner joints and vertices, and the fourth controls breaks in multilines.
Closed Cross Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines.
Select first mline: Select the foreground multiline Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline The closed-cross intersection is completed and the following prompt is displayed: Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed.
MLEDIT | 901
Undo Undoes the closed-cross intersection. The Select First Mline prompt is displayed.
Open Cross Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. Breaks are inserted in all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second multiline.
Select first mline: Select a multiline Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline The open-cross intersection is completed, and the following prompt is displayed: Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed.
Undo Undoes the open-cross intersection. The Select First Mline prompt is displayed.
902 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Merged Cross Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in which you select the multilines is not important.
Select first mline: Select a multiline Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline The merged-cross intersection is completed, and the following prompt is displayed: Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed.
Undo Undoes the merged-cross intersection. The Select First Mline prompt is displayed.
Closed Tee Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline.
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline The closed-tee intersection is completed, and the following prompt is displayed: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box | 903
First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed.
Undo Undoes the closed-tee intersection. The Select First Mline prompt is displayed.
Open Tee Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline.
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline The open-tee intersection is completed, and the following prompt is displayed: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed.
Undo Undoes the open-tee intersection. The Select First Mline prompt is displayed.
904 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Merged Tee Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines.The multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline.
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline The merged-tee intersection is completed, and the following prompt is displayed: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed.
Undo Undoes the merged-tee intersection. The Select First Mline prompt is displayed.
Corner Joint Creates a corner joint between multilines. The multilines are trimmed or extended to their intersection.
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline: Select the second half of the corner The corner joint is completed, and the following prompt is displayed: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box | 905
First Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Second Mline prompt is displayed.
Undo Undoes the corner joint. The Select First Mline prompt is displayed.
Add Vertex Adds a vertex to a multiline.
Select mline: Select a multiline A vertex is added at the selected point, and the following prompt is displayed: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is displayed again.
Undo Removes the added vertex. The Select Mline prompt is displayed.
Delete Vertex Deletes a vertex from a multiline.
906 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Select mline: Select a multiline The vertex nearest to the selected point is deleted, and the following prompt is displayed: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is displayed again.
Undo Restores the deleted vertex. The Select Mline prompt is displayed.
Cut Single Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline.
Select mline: Select a multiline The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point, and the following prompt is displayed: Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline The element is cut, and the following prompt is displayed: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is displayed again.
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box | 907
Undo Undoes the cut. The Select Mline prompt is displayed.
Cut All Creates a visual break through the entire multiline.
Select mline: Select a multiline The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point, and the following prompt is displayed: Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline All elements of the multiline are cut, and the following prompt is displayed: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is displayed again.
Undo Undoes the cut. The Select Mline prompt is displayed.
Weld All Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut.
908 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Select mline: Select a multiline The selection point on the multiline is used as the start of the weld, and the following prompt is displayed: Select second point: Specify the end of the weld on the multiline The multiline is welded, and the following prompt is displayed: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is displayed again.
Undo Undoes the weld. The Select Mline prompt is displayed again.
-MLEDIT Quick Reference If you enter -mledit at the command prompt, the following MLEDIT command prompts are displayed. For more information about these command prompt options, see the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box. on page 901
CC Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines.
OC Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. Breaks are inserted in all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second multiline.
-MLEDIT | 909
MC Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in which you select the multilines is not important.
CT Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline.
OT Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline.
MT Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines.The multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline.
CJ Creates a corner joint between multilines. The multilines are trimmed or extended to their intersection.
AV Adds a vertex to a multiline.
DV Deletes a vertex from a multiline.
CS Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline.
CA Creates a visual break through the entire multiline.
WA Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut.
910 | Chapter 13 M Commands
MLINE Quick Reference Creates multiple parallel lines Menu: Draw ➤ Multiline Command entry: mline Current settings: Justification = current, Scale = current, Style = current Specify start point on page 911 or [Justification on page 912/Scale on page 912/STyle on page 913]: Specify a point or enter an option
Start Point Specifies the next vertex of the multiline. Specify next point: Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u If you create a multiline with two or more segments, the prompt includes the Close option. Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to prompt for points.
Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline. The previous prompt is displayed. Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments.
MLINE | 911
Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify. Enter justification type [Top/Zero/Bottom] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points.
Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of 0.0 is at the specified points.
Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line with the most negative offset is at the specified points.
Scale Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype scale. Enter mline scale <current>: Enter a scale or press ENTER The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line—the smallest
912 | Chapter 13 M Commands
on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0 collapses the multiline into a single line. For information about the multiline style definition, see MLSTYLE.
Style Specifies a style to use for the multiline. See “Draw Multiline Objects” in the User's Guide, and see MLSTYLE. Enter mline style name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that's defined in a multiline library (MLN) file you've created. ?—List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles.
MLSTYLE Quick Reference Creates, modifies, and manages multiline styles Menu: Format ➤ Multiline Style Command entry: mlstyle Displays the Multiline Style dialog box on page 913.
Multiline Style Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Multiline Style Command entry: mlstyle Creates, modifies, saves, and loads multiline styles. The multiline style controls the number of elements and the properties of each element. MLSTYLE also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline.
MLSTYLE | 913
Current Multiline Style Displays the name of the current multiline style to be used for subsequently created multilines. Styles Displays a list of multiline styles that are loaded in the drawing. The list of multiline styles can include externally referenced multiline styles that is, multiline styles that exist in an externally referenced drawing (xref). Externally referenced multiline style names use the same syntax as other externally dependent nongraphical objects. See “Overview of Referenced Drawings (Xrefs)” in the User's Guide. Description Displays the description of the selected multiline style. Preview Of Displays the name and an image of the selected multiline style. Set Current Sets the current multiline style for subsequently created multilines. Select a name from the Styles list and choose Set Current. NOTE You cannot make a multiline style from an xref the current style. New Displays the Create New Multiline Style dialog box on page 915, in which you can create a new multiline style. Modify Displays the Modify Multiline Style dialog box on page 916, in which you can modify a selected multiline style. You cannot modify the default STANDARD multiline style.
914 | Chapter 13 M Commands
NOTE You cannot edit the element and multiline properties of the STANDARD multiline style or any multiline style that is being used in the drawing. To edit an existing multiline style, you must do so before you draw any multilines that use the style. Rename Renames the currently selected multiline style. You cannot rename the STANDARD multiline style. Delete Removes the currently selected multiline style from the Styles list. It does not delete the style from the MLN file. You cannot delete the STANDARD multiline style, the current multiline style, or a multiline style that is in use. Load Displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box on page 919, in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN file. Save Saves or copies a multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file. If you specify an MLN file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased. The default file name is acad.mln.
Create New Multiline Style Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Multiline Style Command entry: mlstyle Names the new multiline style and specifies the multiline style from which to start the new one.
New Style Name Names a new multiline style. The element and multiline properties are unavailable until you enter a new name and click Continue. Start With Determines the multiline style from which to start the new one. To save time, choose a multiline style that is similar to the one that you want to create.
Create New Multiline Style Dialog Box | 915
Continue Displays the New Multiline Style dialog box on page 916.
New, Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Multiline Style Command entry: mlstyle Sets the properties and elements for a new multiline style, or changes them for an existing multiline style.
Description Adds a description to a multiline style. You can enter up to 255 characters, including spaces.
Caps Controls the start and end caps of the multiline. Line Displays a line segment across each end of the multiline.
916 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Outer Arc Displays an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline.
Inner Arcs Displays an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there's an odd number of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example, if there are six elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4. If there are seven elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element 4 is left unconnected.
Angle Specifies the angle of the end caps.
New, Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes | 917
Fill Controls the background fill of the multiline. Fill Color Sets the background fill color of the multiline. When you choose Select Color, the Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed.
Display Joints Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment. A joint is also known as a miter.
Elements Sets element properties, such as the offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing multiline elements. Offset Color Ltype Displays all the elements in the current multiline style. Each element in the style is defined by its offset from the middle of the multiline, its color, and its linetype. Elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets. Add Adds a new element to the multiline style. Not available until color or linetype has been selected for a multiline style other than STANDARD. Delete Deletes an element from the multiline style.
918 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Offset Specifies the offset for each element in the multiline style.
Color Displays and sets the color for elements in the multiline style. When you choose Select Color, the Select Color dialog box on page 261 is displayed. Linetype Displays and sets the linetype for elements in the multiline style. When you choose Linetype, the Select Linetype Properties dialog box is displayed, which lists loaded linetypes. To load a new linetype, click Load. The Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box on page 808 is displayed.
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Format ➤ Multiline Style Command entry: mlstyle Loads a multiline style from an MLN file. The default file name is acad.mln. If acad.mln does not exist, or if it exists but cannot be found, click File to specify another file or file location.
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box | 919
File Displays a standard file selection dialog box on page 996 in which you can locate and select another multiline library file. List Lists the multiline styles available in the current multiline library file. To load another multiline style, select a style from the list and click OK.
MODEL Quick Reference Switches from a layout tab to the Model tab Command entry: model On the Model tab, you can create drawings in model space. The Model tab automatically sets the TILEMODE system variable to 1, and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing. Once you've completed your drawing, you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot. For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or between the Model tab and a layout tab, use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable to control how the display list is updated.
MOVE Quick Reference Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.
Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Move Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Move. Command entry: move Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
920 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Specify base point or [Displacement]: Specify a base point or enter d Specify second point or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the objects move 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position. Use coordinates, grid snaps, object snaps, and other tools to move objects with precision.
Displacement Specify displacement : Enter coordinates to represent a vector The coordinate values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction.
MREDO Quick Reference Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands Toolbar: Standard Command entry: mredo Enter Number of Actions on page 921 number of actions or [All on page 921/Last on page 921]: Specify an option, enter a positive number, or press ENTER Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions. All Reverses all previous actions. Last Reverses only the last action.
MREDO | 921
MSLIDE Quick Reference Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout Command entry: mslide The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996) is displayed. Enter a file name or select a slide (SLD) file from the list. A slide file is a raster image of a viewport. In model space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the current viewport only. In paper space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the paper space display, including all viewports and their contents. Off-screen portions of the drawing, or layers that are off or frozen, are not included in the slide. Use the VSLIDE command to view slides, or the SLIDELIB on page 1991 utility to create a slide library. When you view slides of images shaded with the SHADE command in a larger window or at a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when creating slides.
MSPACE Quick Reference Switches from paper space to a model space viewport Command entry: mspace Commands operate in either model space or paper space. You use model space (the Model tab) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space (a layout tab) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting. When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace at the command prompt to make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space in that viewport within the layout. You can switch to model space by
922 | Chapter 13 M Commands
double-clicking a viewport, and you can switch to paper space by double-clicking an area of paper space.
MTEDIT Quick Reference Edits multiline text
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Edit. Command entry: mtedit Select an MTEXT object: The In-Place Text Editor on page 929is displayed.
MTEXT Quick Reference Creates a multiline text object
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text.
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Pointing device: Double-click a multiline text object. Command entry: mtext Current text style: <current> Text height: <current> Annotative: <current> Specify first corner: Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width/Columns]: You can create several paragraphs of text as a single multiline text (mtext) object. With the built-in editor, you can format the text appearance, columns, and boundaries.
MTEDIT | 923
After you specify the point for the opposite corner when the ribbon is active, the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab on page 924 displays. If the ribbon is not active, the in-place text editor on page 929 is displayed. If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the In-Place Text editor and displays additional command prompts on page 945.
MTEXT Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Creates or modifies multiline text objects.
Style Panel Style
Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The Standard text style is active by default
Annotative
Turns on or off for the current mtext object.
Text Height
Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed height, the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline text object can contain characters of various heights.
Formatting Panel Bold
Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.
924 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Italic
Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.
Underline
Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text.
Overline
Turns overline on and off for new or selected text.
Font
Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. TrueType fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts.
Color
Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text.
Oblique Angle
Determines the forward or backward slant of the text. The angle represents the offset from 90 degrees. Entering a value between 85 and 85 makes the text oblique. A positive obliquing angle slants text to the right. A negative obliquing angle slants text to the left.
Tracking
Decreases or increases the space between the selected characters. The 1.0 setting is normal spacing. Set to more than 1.0 to increase spacing, and set to less than 1.0 to decrease spacing.
Width Factor
Widens or narrows the selected characters. The 1.0 setting represents the normal width of the letter in this font. You can increase the width (for example, use a width factor of 2 to double the width) or decrease the width (for example, use a width factor of 0.5 for half the width).
Paragraph Panel MText Justification
Displays the MText Justification menu with nine alignment options available. Top Left is the default.
Paragraph
Displays the Paragraph dialog box. See the Paragraph dialog box on page 937 for a list of the options.
MTEXT Ribbon Contextual Tab | 925
Line Spacing
Displays suggested line spacing options or the Paragraph dialog box. Line spacing is set in the current or selected paragraph. NOTE Line spacing is the distance between the bottom of the upper line and the top of the lower line of text in a multiple line paragraph. The predefined options are: ■
1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, or 2.5x: Sets the line spacing at .5x increments in multiline text.
■
More: Displays the Paragraph dialog box, which provides additional options.
■
Clear Paragraph Spacing: Removes line spacing settings from the selected or current paragraph. The paragraph defaults to the mtext space setting.
Additional options in the Paragraph dialog box: ■
Exact: Defines the space with an arbitrary unit value the user specifies. Changing text height will not affect line spacing.
■
Multiple: Instead of assigning a value to line spacing, you specify spacing according to text height. When text height is not consistent in one line, the line space will be determined by the largest text height value in that line.
■
At least: Takes both the user specified arbitrary value and the text height to determine spacing. If text height is smaller than the arbitrary value the line space is determined by the user specified value. If the text height is larger, the line spacing is equal to the text height value.
NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in AutoCAD 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide.
Numbering
Displays the bullet and numbering menu. Displays options for creating lists. (Not available for table cells.) The list is indented to align with the first selected paragraph. ■
Off: When selected, removes letters, numbers, and bullets from selected text that has list formatting applied. Indentation is not changed.
926 | Chapter 13 M Commands
■
Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods for the items in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double letters.
■
Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with periods for the items in the list.
■
Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items in the list.
■
Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting. If the selected items are in the middle of a list, unselected items below them also become part of the new list.
■
Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items continue the sequence.
■
Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).
■
Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only when the space after the letter, number, or bullet character was created by TAB, not SPACEBAR. This option is selected by default.
■
Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list formatting is applied to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list. Text that meets the following criteria is considered to be a list. The line begins with (1) one or more letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by (2) punctuation after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing TAB, and (4) some text before the line is ended by ENTER or SHIFT+ENTER.
When you clear the check mark, any list formatting in the multiline text object is removed and the items are converted to plain text. Allow Auto-list is turned off, and all the Bullets and Lists options are unavailable except Allow Bullets and Lists.
MTEXT Ribbon Contextual Tab | 927
Left, Center, Right, Justified and Distributed
Sets the justification and alignment for the left, center, or right text boundaries of the current or selected paragraph. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included and affect the justification of a line.
Insert Panel Symbol
Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. You can also insert symbols manually. See Symbols and Special Characters on page 949. Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their control code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character Map dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system. Select a character and click Select to place it in the Characters to Copy box. When you have selected all the characters that you want to use, click Copy to close the dialog box. In the editor, right-click and click Paste. Symbols are not supported in vertical text.
Insert Field
Displays the Field dialog box on page 617, where you can select a field to insert in the text. When the dialog box closes, the current value of the field is displayed in the text.
Columns
Displays the column flyout menu, which provides three column options: No Columns, Static Columns, and Dynamic columns. See Columns menu on page 938.
Options Panel Find and Replace
Displays the Find and Replace dialog box on page 941.
Spell Check
Determines whether As-You-Type spell checking is on or off. This option is on by default.
Undo
Undoes actions in the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Z.
928 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Redo
Redoes actions in the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Y.
Ruler
Displays a ruler at the top of the editor. Drag the arrows at the end of the ruler to change the width of the mtext object. Also displays height and column grips when column mode is active. You can also select tabs from the ruler. Clicking the Tab Selection button changes tab styles from left, center, right, and decimal. Once you make your selection, you adjust the corresponding tab in the ruler or in the Paragraph dialog box.
Options
Displays a list of additional text options. See Additional Text Options on page 935.
Close Panel Close
Ends the MTEXT command and closes the MTEXT ribbon contextual tab.
In-Place Text Editor Quick Reference
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Creates or modifies single or multiline text objects. You can import or paste text from other files to use in multiline text, set tabs, adjust paragraph and line spacing and alignment, and create and modify columns.
In-Place Text Editor | 929
The In-Place Text Editor includes a Text Formatting Toolbar on page 930, a Paragraph Dialog Box on page 937, a Columns Menu on page 938, and an Editor Settings on page 936. When a table cell is selected for editing, the In-Place Text Editor displays column letters and row numbers.
Text Formatting Toolbar Controls the text style for a multiline text object and character and paragraph formatting for selected text. NOTE Text that you paste from other word processing applications such as Microsoft Word will retain most of its formatting. With the options in Paste Special, you can strip out paragraph formatting such as paragraph-based alignment or character formatting from the pasted text. Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The current style is saved in the TEXTSTYLE system variable. Character formatting for font, height, and bold or italic attributes is overridden if you apply a new style to an existing multiline text object. Stacking, underlining, and color attributes are retained in characters to which a new style is applied. Styles that have backward or upside-down effects are not applied. If a style defined with a vertical effect is applied to an SHX font, the text is displayed horizontally in the In-Place Text Editor. Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. TrueType fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts
930 | Chapter 13 M Commands
are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. A sample drawing (TrueType.dwg) showing each font is provided in the sample directory. Annotative Turns on or off for the current mtext object. Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed height, the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline text object can contain characters of various heights. Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Italic Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Underline Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text. Overline Turns overline on and off for new or selected text. Undo Undoes actions in the In-Place Text Editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Z. Redo Redoes actions in the In-Place Text Editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Y. Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right. By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values. Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottom-right aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar are top-left aligned. Text Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text. You can assign text the color associated with the layer it is on (BYLAYER) or the color of the block it is contained in (BYBLOCK). You can also select one of the colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
In-Place Text Editor | 931
Ruler Displays a ruler at the top of the editor. Drag the arrows at the end of the ruler to change the width of the mtext object. Also displays height and column grips when column mode is active. You can also select tabs from the ruler. Clicking the Tab Selection button changes tab styles from left, center, right, and decimal. Once you make your selection, you adjust the corresponding tab in the ruler or in the Paragraph dialog box. OK Closes the editor and saves any changes that you made. Options Displays a list of additional text options. See Additional Text Options on page 935. Columns Displays the column flyout menu, which provides three column options: No Columns, Static Columns, and Dynamic columns. See Columns menu on page 938. MText Justification Displays the MText Justification menu with nine alignment options available. Top Left is the default. Paragraph Displays the Paragraph dialog box. See the Paragraph dialog box on page 937 for a list of the options. Left, Center, Right, Justified and Distributed Sets the justification and alignment for the left, center, or right text boundaries of the current or selected paragraph. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included and affect the justification of a line. Line Spacing Displays suggested line spacing options or the Paragraph dialog box. Line spacing is set in the current or selected paragraph. NOTE Line spacing is the distance between the bottom of the upper line and the top of the lower line of text in a multiple line paragraph. The predefined options are: ■
1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, or 2.5x: Sets the line spacing at .5x increments in multiline text.
■
More: Displays the Paragraph dialog box, which provides additional options.
■
Clear Paragraph Spacing: Removes line spacing settings from the selected or current paragraph. The paragraph defaults to the mtext space setting.
Additional options in the Paragraph dialog box: ■
Exact: Defines the space with an arbitrary unit value the user specifies. Changing text height will not affect line spacing.
932 | Chapter 13 M Commands
■
Multiple: Instead of assigning a value to line spacing, you specify spacing according to text height. When text height is not consistent in one line, the line space will be determined by the largest text height value in that line.
■
At least: Takes both the user specified arbitrary value and the text height to determine spacing. If text height is smaller than the arbitrary value the line space is determined by the user specified value. If the text height is larger, the line spacing is equal to the text height value.
NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in releases before AutoCAD 2008. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases. Numbering Displays the bullet and numbering menu. Displays options for creating lists. (Not available for table cells.) The list is indented to align with the first selected paragraph. ■
Off: When selected, removes letters, numbers, and bullets from selected text that has list formatting applied. Indentation is not changed.
■
Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods for the items in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double letters.
■
Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with periods for the items in the list.
■
Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items in the list.
■
Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting. If the selected items are in the middle of a list, unselected items below them also become part of the new list.
■
Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items continue the sequence.
■
Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).
■
Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only when the space after
In-Place Text Editor | 933
the letter, number, or bullet character was created by TAB, not SPACEBAR. This option is selected by default. ■
Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list formatting is applied to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list. Text that meets the following criteria is considered to be a list. The line begins with (1) one or more letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by (2) punctuation after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing TAB, and (4) some text before the line is ended by ENTER or SHIFT+ENTER. When you clear the check mark, any list formatting in the multiline text object is removed and the items are converted to plain text. Allow Auto-list is turned off, and all the Bullets and Lists options are unavailable except Allow Bullets and Lists.
Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box on page 617, where you can select a field to insert in the text. When the dialog box closes, the current value of the field is displayed in the text. Uppercase Changes the selected text to uppercase. Lowercase Changes the selected text to lowercase. Symbol Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. You can also insert symbols manually. See Symbols and Special Characters on page 949. Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their control code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character Map dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system. Select a character and click Select to place it in the Characters to Copy box. When you have selected all the characters that you want to use, click Copy to close the dialog box. In the editor, right-click and click Paste. Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Oblique Angle Determines the forward or backward slant of the text. The angle represents the offset from 90 degrees. Entering a value between -85 and 85 makes the text oblique. A positive obliquing angle slants text to the right. A negative obliquing angle slants text to the left. Tracking Decreases or increases the space between the selected characters. The 1.0 setting is normal spacing. Set to more than 1.0 to increase spacing, and set to less than 1.0 to decrease spacing. Width Factor Widens or narrows the selected characters. The 1.0 setting represents the normal width of the letter in this font. You can increase the
934 | Chapter 13 M Commands
width (for example, use a width factor of 2 to double the width) or decrease the width (for example, use a width factor of 0.5 for half the width).
Additional Text Options Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box. Symbol Displays a list of available symbols. You can also select a Non-breaking space and open the Character Map for additional symbols. Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996). Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF format. Imported text retains its original character formatting and style properties, but you can edit and format the imported text in the editor. After you select a text file to import, you can replace either selected text or all text, or append the inserted text to text selected within the text boundary. The file size for imported text is limited to 32 KB. The editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER. When black characters are inserted and the background color is black, the editor automatically changes to white or the current color. NOTE A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet imported into a drawing is truncated at 72 rows unless the spreadsheet was created in Microsoft Office 2002 with Service Pack 2 installed. The same limitation applies when the drawing that contains the OLE object is opened on a system with an earlier version of Microsoft Office installed; the spreadsheet is truncated. Paragraph Alignment Sets alignment for the multiline text object. You can choose to align your text to the left, center, or right. Left is the default setting. You can justify your text, or align the first and last characters of your text with the margins of your mtext box, or center each line of text within the margins of your mtext box. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Paragraph Displays options for paragraph formatting. See the Paragraph dialog box on page 937. Bullets and Lists Displays the options for numbering lists. Columns Displays options for columns. See the Columns menu on page 938. Find and Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box on page 941. Change Case Changes the case of selected text. Options are Uppercase and Lowercase.
In-Place Text Editor | 935
AutoCAPS Converts all new and imported text to uppercase. AutoCAPS does not affect existing text. To change the case of existing text, select the text and right-click. Click Change Case. Character Set Displays a menu of code pages. Select a code page to apply it to the selected text. Combine Paragraphs Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph and replaces each paragraph return with a space. Remove Formatting Removes character formatting for selected characters, paragraph formatting for a selected paragraph, or all formatting from a selected paragraph. Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box on page 940. (Not available for table cells.) Editor Settings Displays a list of options for the Text Formatting toolbar. See Editor Settings on page 936 for more information. Learn About MText Displays the New Features Workshop, which contains an overview of the MText feature.
Editor Settings Provides options for changing the behavior of the Text Formatting toolbar and provides additional editing options. Options are specific to the Editor Settings menu and are not available elsewhere on the Text Formatting toolbar. NOTE Some options may not be available depending on what you are editing. Always Display As WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Controls display of the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it. When unchecked, text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. This option is unchecked by default. When this option is checked, the MTEXTFIXED on page 1847 system variable will be set to 0. Otherwise, MTEXTFIXED will be set to 2. Show Toolbar Controls display of the Text Formatting toolbar. To restore display of the toolbar, right-click in the editor and click Option ➤ Show Toolbar. Show Options Expands the Text Formatting toolbar to show more options. Show Rulers Controls the display of the ruler.
936 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Opaque Background When selected, makes the background of the editor opaque. By default, the editor is transparent. (Not available for table cells.) Check Spelling Determines whether As-You-Type spell checking is on or off. This option is on by default. Check Spelling Settings Displays the Check Spelling Settings dialog box on page 1410, where you can specify text options that will be checked for spelling errors within your drawing. Dictionaries Displays the Dictionaries dialog box on page 1411, where you can change the dictionary that is checked against any found misspelled words. Text Highlight Color Displays the AutoCAD generic Select Color dialog box. Specifies the highlight color when text is selected.
Paragraph Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Sets indentation for paragraphs and the first lines of paragraphs. Specifies tab stops, indents, controls paragraph alignment, paragraph spacing, and paragraph line spacing. Tab Displays tab setting options, including adding and removing tabs. Options include setting left, center, right, and decimal tabs. You can also set tabs from the Tab selection button on the In-Place Editor’s ruler. Decimal style Sets the decimal style based on current user locale. Options include setting the decimal style as period, comma, and space. This setting is preserved with the drawing even if the locale setting is changed. Left Indent Sets the indent value for the first line or hanging indent to the selected or current paragraphs. Right Indent Applies the indent to the entire selected or current paragraph. Paragraph Alignment Sets the alignment properties for the current or selected paragraphs. Paragraph Spacing Specifies the spacing before or after the current or selected paragraphs. The distance between two paragraphs is determined by the total
Paragraph Dialog Box | 937
of the after paragraph spacing value of the upper paragraph and the before paragraph spacing value of the lower paragraph. Paragraph Line Spacing Sets the spacing between individual lines in the current or selected paragraphs. NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in AutoCAD 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide. Toolbar: Draw
Columns Menu Quick Reference Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Allows you to format an mtext object into multiple columns. You can specify column and gutter width, height, and number of columns. You can edit column width and height with grip-editing. To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating and manipulating columns – static mode or dynamic mode.
The following options are available from the Columns menu: No Columns Specifies no columns for the current mtext object. Dynamic Columns Sets dynamic columns mode to the current mtext object. Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affects text flow and text flow causes columns to be added or removed. Auto height or Manual height options are available. Static Columns Sets static columns mode to the current mtext object. You can specify the total width and height of the mtext object, and the number
938 | Chapter 13 M Commands
of columns. All the columns share the same height and are aligned at both sides. Insert Column Break Alt+Enter Inserts a manual column break. This is disabled when you select No Columns. Column Settings Displays Column Settings dialog box.
Column Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Displays options for setting up columns such as the type, number of columns, height, and width, and gutter size.
Column Type Displays choices for the type of columns you want to create. Column Number Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static Columns. Height Displays mtext height when Auto Height with Dynamic or Static Columns is selected. Width Displays and specifies control column and gutter width values. The gutter value is five times the default mtext text height. Also displays the total width value of the mtext object. When Dynamic Columns is selected, this is read-only. Toolbar: Draw
Column Settings Dialog Box | 939
Background Mask Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Controls using an opaque background behind multiline text.
Use Background Mask Puts an opaque background behind the text. NOTE When you apply a background mask to mtext multiple columns only the column areas will be masked. The space between the columns commonly referred to as gutters will be unmasked.
Border Offset Factor Specifies the margin around the text for the opaque background. The value is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object. A factor of 1.5 extends the background by 0.5 times the text height.
Fill Color Specifies the color for the background. Use Background Drawing Color Provides a background that is the same color as the background of the drawing. Color Specifies a color for the opaque background. You can select one of the colors in the list or click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box on page 261.
940 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Find and Replace Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text. Find What Provides a space for you to type the text you want to find. Replace With Provides a space for you to type the text you want to replace the text you typed in Find What. Find Next Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What. Replace Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Match Whole Word Only Finds only whole words specified in Find What. Text that is part of another word is ignored. When this option is cleared, a match is found for text strings, whether they are single words or parts of other words. Match Case Finds only text with uppercase and lowercase characters as specified in Find What. The case of all characters in the text string must match the case of the text in Find What. When this option is cleared, a match is found for specified text strings regardless of case.
Find and Replace Dialog Box | 941
Stack Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text. To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Properties on the shortcut menu. You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text.
Text Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction. Upper Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a stacked fraction. Lower Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a stacked fraction.
Appearance Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction.
Style Specifies a style format for stacked text: horizontal fraction, diagonal fraction, tolerance, and decimal.
942 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Fraction (Horizontal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a horizontal line. Fraction (Diagonal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a diagonal line. NOTE Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do not support diagonal fractions. If a multiline text object contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release. If a single multiline text object contains both horizontal and diagonal fractions, all fractions are converted to diagonal fractions when the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release. Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number. There is no line between the numbers. Decimal A variation of the Tolerance style that aligns the decimal point of both the upper and lower numbers of selected text.
Position Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All stacked text in an object uses the same alignment. Top Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text line. Center Centers the fraction vertically at the center of the text line. Bottom Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline.
Text Size Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current text style (from 25 to 125 percent). Default text size is 70 percent.
Defaults Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to the current stacked text.
AutoStack Button Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box on page 944. AutoStack only stacks numeric characters immediately before and after the carat, slash, and pound
Stack Properties Dialog Box | 943
characters. To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that includes spaces, select the text and choose the Stack button.
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference
Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Command entry: mtext Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters.
Enable AutoStacking Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat, slash, or pound character. For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric character or space, the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal fraction. Remove Leading Blank Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction. This option is available only when AutoStacking is turned on. Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction when AutoStack is on. Convert It to a Horizontal Fraction Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction when AutoStack is on. NOTE Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound character is always converted to a diagonal fraction, and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance format.
944 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Don't Show This Dialog Again; Always Use These Settings Suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box. The current property settings are used for all stacked text. When this option is cleared, the AutoStack Properties dialog box is automatically displayed if you type two numbers separated by a slash, carat, or pound sign followed by a space or nonnumeric character. NOTE To display the AutoStack Properties dialog box when you have suppressed automatic display, select stacked text, right-click, and click Properties on the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack.
-MTEXT Quick Reference If you enter -mtext at the command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the In-Place Text Editor and displays additional command prompts. Current text style: <current> Text height: <current> Annotative: <current> Specify first corner: Specify opposite corner on page 945 or [Height on page 945/Justify on page 946/Line spacing on page 947/Rotation on page 948/Style on page 948/Width on page 949/Columns on page 949]:
Opposite Corner As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow.
Height Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters. Specify height <current>: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or press ENTER The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not . Specify paper text height <current>: Specify a height, or press ENTER The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is annotative. The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise, it is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. Character height is
-MTEXT | 945
calculated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value stored in TEXTSIZE.
Justify Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in relation to the text boundary. The current justification (Top Left, by default) is applied to new text. The text is justified within the specified rectangle based on the justification setting and one of nine justification points on the rectangle. The justification point is based on the first point used to specify the rectangle. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Text flow controls whether text is aligned from the middle, the top, or the bottom of the paragraph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] :
Justify options Option
Meaning
TL
Top Left
TC
Top Center
TR
Top Right
ML
Middle Left
MC
Middle Center
MR
Middle Right
BL
Bottom Left
BC
Bottom Center
BR
Bottom Right
The following illustrations show each justification option.
946 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Line Spacing Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text. NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap. Enter line spacing type [At least/Exactly] <current>: At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line. When At Least is selected, lines of text with taller characters have added space between lines. Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>: ■
Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing.
-MTEXT | 947
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You enter the spacing increment as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x. ■
Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. Valid values must be between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).
Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text height of the object or text style. Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>: ■
Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter a spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x.
■
Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. Valid values must be between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary. Specify rotation angle <current>: Specify a point or enter a value If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the rotation angle is determined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point. The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of the text boundary.
Style Specifies the text style to use for multiline text. Enter style name or [?] <current>: Style Name Specifies a text style name. Text styles can be defined and saved using the STYLE command. ?—List Styles Lists text style names and characteristics.
948 | Chapter 13 M Commands
The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of the text boundary.
Width Specifies the width of the text boundary. Specify width: Specify a point or enter a value If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text boundary. If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing ENTER. To end the command, press ENTER at the MTEXT prompt.
Columns Specifies the column options for an mtext object. Enter column type: Specify a column option Static Specifies the total column width, the number of columns, the gutter width (the space between the columns), and the height of columns. Dynamic Specifies column width, gutter width and column height. Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affect text flow and text flow causes columns to be added or removed. No columns Sets no column mode to current mtext object.
Symbols and Special Characters Quick Reference You can enter the following special characters and symbols by entering a control code or a Unicode string. Or in the In-Place Text Editor, click Symbol on the expanded toolbar.
Symbols and Special Characters | 949
NOTE Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Unicode strings and control codes Control Codes
Unicode Strings Result
%%d
\U+00B0
Degree symbol (°)
%%p
\U+00B1
Tolerance symbol ( )
%%c
\U+2205 Diameter symbol (
)
To insert the following text symbols, click Symbol on the expanded Text Formatting toolbar or enter the appropriate Unicode string: Text symbols and Unicode strings Name
Symbol
Unicode String
Almost equal
\U+2248
Angle
\U+2220
Boundary line
\U+E100
Centerline
\U+2104
Delta
\U+0394
Electrical phase
\U+0278
950 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Text symbols and Unicode strings Name
Symbol
Unicode String
Flow line
\U+E101
Identity
\U+2261
Initial length
\U+E200
Monument line
\U+E102
Not equal
\U+2260
Ohm
\U+2126
Omega
\U+03A9
Plate/property line
\U+214A
Subscript 2
\U+2082
Squared
\U+00B2
Cubed
\U+00B3
Symbols and Special Characters | 951
These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX fonts: ■
Simplex*
■
Romans*
■
gdt*
■
amgdt*
■
Isocp
■
Isocp2
■
Isocp3
■
Isoct
■
Isoct2
■
Isoct3
■
Isocpeur (TTF only)*
■
Isocpeur italic (TTF only)
■
Isocteur (TTF only)
■
Isocteur italic (TTF only)
* These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length dimensions.
MULTIPLE Quick Reference cRepeats the next command until canceled Command entry: multiple Enter command name to repeat: The command that you enter is repeated until you press ESC. Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified each time.
952 | Chapter 13 M Commands
MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes. NOTE You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the AutoLISP® command function.
MVIEW Quick Reference Creates and controls layout viewports Menu: View ➤ Viewports ➤ 1 Viewport, 2 Viewports, 3 Viewports, Command entry: mview Specify corner of viewport on page 953 or [ON on page 953/OFF on page 953/Fit on page 954/Shadeplot on page 954/Lock on page 954/Object on page 954/Polygonal on page 955/Restore on page 955/LAyer on page 955/2 on page 956/3 on page 956/4 on page 957] : Enter an option or specify a point In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64 viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Objects in model space are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank. Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active.
Corner of Viewport Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport. Specify opposite corner:
On Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in model space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off to make another one active. Select objects: Select one or more viewports
Off Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed in an inactive viewport.
MVIEW | 953
Select objects: Select one or more viewports
Fit Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the printable area. When the paper background and printable area are turned off, the viewport fills the display.
Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted. Shade plot? [As displayed/all visual styles/all render presets] : Enter a shade plot option As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is displayed. All Visual Styles Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified visual style. All visual styles in the drawing are listed as options whether in use or not. All Render Presets Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified render preset. All render presets are listed as options. Select objects: Select one or more viewports
Lock Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed when working in model space. Viewport View Locking [ON/OFF]: Enter on or off Select objects: Select one or more viewports
Object Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a viewport. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three
954 | Chapter 13 M Commands
vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain an arc as well as line segments. Select object to clip viewport: Select an object
Polygonal Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. The prompts are similar to those displayed when you specify a polygonal clip boundary for external references (xrefs), but you can specify arcs when you create a polygonal viewport boundary. Specify start point: Specify a point Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport. [Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo/Endpoint of arc] <Endpoint>: Enter an option or press ENTER For a description of the options for creating arc segments, see the Arc option in PLINE. Close Closes the boundary. If you press ENTER after specifying at least three points, the boundary is closed automatically. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment. Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal viewport.
Restore Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command. Enter viewport configuration name or [?] <*ACTIVE>: Enter ?, enter a name, or press ENTER Specify first corner or [Fit] : Specify a point or press ENTER First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
Layer Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer properties.
MVIEW | 955
Reset viewport layer property overrides back to global properties [Y/N]?: Enter Y to remove all layer property overrides Select viewports: Select a single or multiple viewports and press ENTER
2 Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal size. Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical] : Enter h or press ENTER Specify first corner or [Fit] : Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
3 Divides the specified area into three viewports. Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical/Above/Below/Left/: Enter an option or press ENTER The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed. Specify first corner or [Fit] : Specify a point or press ENTER
956 | Chapter 13 M Commands
First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
4 Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size. Specify first corner or [Fit] : Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; he viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
MVSETUP Quick Reference Sets up the specifications of a drawing Command entry: mvsetup
MVSETUP | 957
When you enter mvsetup, the command prompts displayed depend on whether you are on the Model tab (model space) on page 958 or on a layout tab (paper space) on page 959. On the Model tab, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size at the command prompt using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide, a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits. On a layout tab, you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block. You can specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the layout and the drawing on the Model tab. The Model tab is most useful for plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border. To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plotting, you can also use the Page Setup dialog box, which is automatically displayed when you select a layout in a new drawing session.
MVSETUP on the Model Tab Quick Reference When the TILEMODE system variable is on (the default), the following prompt is displayed: Enable paper space? [No/Yes] : Enter n or press ENTER Pressing ENTER turns off TILEMODE and proceeds as described in the following section, MVSETUP on a Layout Tab on page 959 Entering n displays the following prompt: Enter units type [Scientific/Decimal/Engineering/Architectural/Metric]: Enter an option A list of available units and prompts for the scale factor and paper size are displayed. Enter the scale factor: Enter a value Enter the paper width: Enter a value Enter the paper height: Enter a value A bounding box is drawn and the command ends.
958 | Chapter 13 M Commands
MVSETUP on a Layout Tab Quick Reference When the TILEMODE system variable is off, or when you enter y or press ENTER at the Enable Paper Space prompt, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option [Align on page 959/Create on page 960/Scale viewports on page 962/Options on page 962/Title block on page 963/Undo on page 965]: Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command
Align Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another viewport. The current viewport is the viewport that the other point moves to. Enter an option [Angled/Horizontal/Vertical alignment/Rotate view/Undo]: Enter an option Angled Pans the view in a viewport in a specified direction. Specify base point: Specify a point Specify point in viewport to be panned: Specify a point in the viewport to be panned The next two prompts specify the distance and angle from the base point to the second point. Specify the distance and angle to the new alignment point in the current viewport where you specified the base point. Specify distance from base point: Specify a distance Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle Horizontal Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns horizontally with a base point in another viewport. This option should be used only if the two viewports are oriented horizontally. Otherwise, the view might be panned outside the limits of the viewport. Specify base point: Specify a point Specify point in viewport to be panned: Specify a point in the viewport to be panned Vertical Alignment Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns vertically with a base point in another viewport. This option should be used only if the two viewports are oriented vertically. Otherwise, the view might be panned outside the limits of the viewport.
MVSETUP on a Layout Tab | 959
Specify base point: Specify a point Specify point in viewport to be panned: Specify a point in the viewport to be panned Rotate View Rotates the view in a viewport about a base point. Specify base point in the viewport with the view to be rotated: Specify a point Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
Create Creates viewports. Enter an option [Delete objects/Create viewports/Undo] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Delete Objects Deletes existing viewports. Select the objects to delete... Select objects: Select the viewports to delete and pressENTER
Create Viewports Displays options for creating viewports. Available layout options: 0: None 1: Single 2: Std. Engineering 3: Array of Viewports Enter layout number to load or [Redisplay]: Enter an option number (0-3), or enter r to redisplay the list of viewport layout options Layout Number to Load Controls creation of viewports. Entering 0 or pressing ENTER creates no viewports. Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is determined by the following prompts. Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s): Specify a point for the first corner Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner
960 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Entering 2 creates four viewports by dividing a specified area into quadrants. You are prompted for the area to be divided and the distance between the viewports. Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s): Specify a point for the first corner Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner Specify distance between viewports in X direction <0.0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in the table.
Standard engineering viewports Quadrant
View
Upper-left
Top (XY plane of UCS)
Upper-right
SE isometric view
Lower-left
Front (XZ plane of UCS)
Lower-right
Right side (YZ plane of UCS)
Entering 3 defines a matrix of viewports along the X and Y axes. Specifying points at the next two prompts defines the rectangular area of the drawing that contains the viewport configuration. If you have inserted a title block, the Specify First Corner prompt also includes an option for selecting a default area. Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s): Specify a point for the first corner Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner Enter number of viewports in X direction <1>: Enter the number of viewports to place along the X axis Enter number of viewports in Y direction <1>: Enter the number of viewports to place along the Y axis If you enter more than one viewport in each direction, the following prompts are displayed:
MVSETUP on a Layout Tab | 961
Specify distance between viewports in X direction <0.0>: Specify a distance Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>: Specify a distance The array of viewports is inserted into the defined area. Redisplay Redisplays the list of viewport layout options.
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
Scale Viewports Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports. The zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports. Select the viewports to scale... Select objects:Select the viewports to scale If you select only one viewport, the next prompt is skipped. Set zoom scale factors for viewports. Interactively/: Enter i or press ENTER Enter the number of paper space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Interactively Selects one viewport at a time and displays the following prompts for each: Enter the number of paper space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER For example, for an engineering drawing at a scale of 1:4, or quarter scale, enter 1 for paper space units and 4 for model space units. Uniform Sets the same scale factor for all viewports. Number of paper space units. <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Number of model space units. <1.0>: Enter a value or pressENTER
Options Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing. Enter an option [Layer/LImits/Units/Xref] <exit>: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt Layer Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block.
962 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Enter layer name for title block or [. (for current layer)]: Enter an existing or a new layer name, enter a period (.) for the current layer, or press ENTER Limits Specifies whether to reset the grid limits to the drawing extents after a title block has been inserted. Set drawing limits? [Yes/No] : Enter y or press ENTER Units Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are translated to inch or millimeter paper units. Enter paper space units type [Feet/Inches/MEters/Millimeters] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally referenced. Enter title block placement method [Xref attach/Insert] <current>: Enter x, enter i, or press ENTER
Title Block Prepares paper space, orients the drawing by setting the origin, and creates a drawing border and a title block. Enter title block option [Delete objects/Origin/Undo/Insert] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Delete Objects Deletes objects from paper space. Select the objects to delete . . . Select objects: Use an object selection method
Origin Relocates the origin point for this sheet. Specify new origin point for this sheet: Specify a point
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
Insert Displays title block options. Available title blocks:...
MVSETUP on a Layout Tab | 963
0: None 1: ISO A4 Size(mm) 2: ISO A3 Size(mm) 3: ISO A2 Size(mm) 4: ISO A1 Size(mm) 5: ISO A0 Size(mm) 6: ANSI-V Size(in) 7: ANSI-A Size(in) 8: ANSI-B Size(in) 9: ANSI-C Size(in) 10: ANSI-D Size(in) 11: ANSI-E Size(in) 12: Arch/Engineering (24 x 36in) 13: Generic D size Sheet (24 x 36in) Enter number of title block to load or [Add/Delete/Redisplay]: Enter an option number (0 through 13) or enter an option Title Block to Load Inserts a border and a title block. Entering 0 or pressing ENTER inserts no border. Entering 1 through 13 creates a standard border of the appropriate size. The list includes ANSI and DIN/ISO standard sheets. Add Adds title block options to the list. Selecting this option prompts you to enter the title block description to be displayed in the list and the name of a drawing to insert. Enter title block description: Enter a description Enter drawing name to insert (without extension): Enter a file name Define default usable area? [Yes/No] : Enter n or press ENTER Pressing ENTER displays the following prompts: Specify lower-left corner: Specify a point Specify upper-right corner: Specify a point A line similar to the following example is added after the last entry in the mvsetup.dfs default file: A/E (24 x 18in),arch-b.dwg,(1.12 0.99 0.00),(18.63 17.02 0.00),in
The last field of the line specifies whether the title block has been created in inches or in millimeters. The units field allows title blocks created in either unit system to be changed by setting the unit type using the Options option. You can also add title blocks that have variable attributes. Delete Removes entries from the list. Enter number of entry to delete from list: Enter the number of the entry to delete Redisplay Redisplays the list of title block options.
964 | Chapter 13 M Commands
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
MVSETUP on a Layout Tab | 965
966
N Commands
14
NAVVCUBE Quick Reference Controls the visibility and display properties of the ViewCube
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ View panel ➤ Toggle ViewCube. Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ ViewCube ➤ On Command entry: navvcube The ViewCube provides feedback about the orientation of the model in the current viewport. Enter an option [ON on page 967/OFF on page 967/Settings on page 967] : Enter an option and press ENTER On Displays the ViewCube. Off Turns off the display of the ViewCube. Settings Displays the ViewCube Settings dialog box on page 968, in which you can control the appearance, visibility, and location of the ViewCube.
967
ViewCube Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ ViewCube ➤ Settings Command entry: navvcube Controls the visibility and display properties of the ViewCube.
968 | Chapter 14 N Commands
ViewCube Settings Dialog Box | 969
Display On-screen Position Specifies which corner of a viewport the ViewCube should be displayed in. (NAVVCUBELOCATION system variable) ViewCube Size Controls the display size of the ViewCube. (NAVVCUBESIZE system variable) Inactive Opacity Determines the opacity level of the ViewCube when it is inactive. (NAVVCUBEOPACITY system variable) Preview Thumbnail Displays a real-time preview of the ViewCube based on the current settings. Show UCS Menu Controls the display of the UCS drop-down menu below the ViewCube.
When Dragging on the ViewCube Snap to Closest View Specifies if the current view is adjusted to the closest preset view when changing the view by dragging the ViewCube.
When Clicking on the ViewCube Zoom to Extents After View Change Specifies if the model is forced to fit the current viewport after a view change. Use View Transitions When Switching Views Controls the use of smooth view transitions when switching between views. Orient ViewCube to Current UCS Orients the ViewCube based on the current UCS or WCS of the model. (NAVVCUBEORIENT system variable)
Keep Scene Upright Specifies whether the viewpoint of the model can be turned upside-down or not.
Show Compass Below the ViewCube Controls whether the compass is displayed below the ViewCube. The North direction indicated on the compass is the value defined by the NORTHDIRECTION system variable.
970 | Chapter 14 N Commands
Restore Defaults Applies the default settings for the ViewCube.
NAVSMOTION Quick Reference Displays the ShowMotion interface Menu: View ➤ ShowMotion Command entry: navsmotion Displays the ShowMotion interface where you can navigate a drawing by selecting a named view.
NAVSMOTIONCLOSE Quick Reference Closes the ShowMotion interface Menu: View ➤ ShowMotion Command entry: navsmotionclose Closes the ShowMotion interface where you can navigate a drawing by selecting a named view.
NAVSWHEEL Quick Reference Displays the SteeringWheels
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ View panel ➤ SteeringWheels.
NAVSMOTION | 971
Menu: View ➤ SteeringWheels Command entry: navswheel The NAVSWHEEL command displays the wheel as defined by the NAVSWHEELMODE system variable. Right-click over a wheel and click SteeringWheels Settings to access the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box on page 972 where you control the display of the SteeringWheels.
SteeringWheels Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: View ➤ SteeringWheels Command entry: navswheel Controls the display of the SteeringWheels.
Big Wheels Preview Thumbnail Displays a real-time preview of the big wheels based on the current settings. Wheel Size Sets the display size of the big wheels. (NAVSWHEELSIZEBIG system variable) Wheel Opacity Determines the opacity level of the big wheels. (NAVSWHEELOPACITYBIG system variable)
Mini Wheels Preview Thumbnail Displays a real-time preview of the mini wheels based on the current settings. Wheel Size Sets the display size of the mini wheels. (NAVSWHEELSIZEMINI system variable) Wheel Opacity Determines the opacity level of the mini wheels. (NAVSWHEELOPACITYMINI system variable)
Display Show Tool Messages Controls the display of messages for the active tool.
972 | Chapter 14 N Commands
Show Tooltips Controls the display of tooltips for the wedges and buttons on a wheel. Show the Pinned Wheel at Startup Specifies if the wheel is initially pinned when first activated or follows the cursor. If pinned, the First Contact balloon is displayed when the wheel is first activated.
Walk Tool Constrain Walk Angle to Ground Plane Controls if you can adjust the current view along the Z direction or not when using the Walk tool. Walk Speed Sets the movement speed for the Walk tool.
Zoom Tool Enable Single Click Incremental Zoom Controls if single clicking over the Zoom tool on the Full Navigation wheel causes the magnification of the current view to increase by 25 percent.
Invert Vertical Axis for Look Tool Determines the direction you drag the mouse in to move the source and target points of the current view up or down when using the Look tool.
Maintain Up Direction for Orbit Tool Specifies whether the viewpoint of the model can be turned upside-down or not when using the Orbit tool.
Use Selection Sensitivity for Orbit Tool Specifies if the objects selected before a wheel is displayed are used to define the pivot point for the Orbit tool.
Rewind Thumbnail Controls when thumbnails are generated for view changes that are made without using a wheel. The generated thumbnails are used for the Rewind tool. (CAPTURETHUMBNAILS system variable) Never Specifies that no preview thumbnails are generated when a view change occurs outside the SteeringWheels.
SteeringWheels Settings Dialog Box | 973
On Demand When the Bracket is Moved Over an Empty Frame Generates preview thumbnails on demand for the Rewind tool when the bracket is positioned over an empty frame. Automatically When a View Change Occurs Automatically generates preview thumbnails after each view change occurs.
Restore Defaults Applies the default settings for SteeringWheels.
NETLOAD Quick Reference Loads a .NET application Command entry: netload The Choose .NET Assembly dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box on page 996, is displayed. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), NETLOAD displays the following command prompt: Assembly file name: Enter a file name and press ENTER.
NEW Quick Reference Creates a new drawing Menu: File ➤ New Command entry: new The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the STARTUP system variable. ■
1: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog box on page 975.
974 | Chapter 14 N Commands
■
0: NEW displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996).
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a command prompt is displayed on page 982. If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is displayed regardless of the Startup setting.
Create New Drawing Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: File ➤ New Command entry: new Defines the settings for a new drawing. Start from Scratch creates a new drawing using either imperial or metric default settings. Use a Template creates a new drawing using the settings defined in a drawing template you select. Use a Wizard creates a new drawing using the settings you specify in either the Quick or Advanced wizard. (The first option, Open a Drawing, is not available from the NEW command. To open an existing drawing, use OPEN.)
Start from Scratch
Starts an empty drawing using default imperial or metric settings (MEASUREINIT system variable). You can change the measurement system for a given drawing by using the MEASUREMENT system variable. The Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that is started from scratch.
Create New Drawing Dialog Box | 975
Imperial Starts a new drawing based on the imperial measurement system. The default drawing boundary (the grid limits) is 12 by 9 inches. Metric Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system. The default drawing boundary (the grid limits) is 429 by 297 millimeters. Tip Displays a description of the selected measurement setting.
Use a Template
Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file. Template drawings store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers, dimension styles, and views. Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing files by the .dwt file extension. They are normally kept in the template directory. Several template drawings are included with this program. You can make additional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file names to .dwt. See “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing” in the User's Guide.
976 | Chapter 14 N Commands
Select a Template Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing template file location, which is specified in the Options dialog box on page 1012. Select a file to use as a starting point for your new drawing. Preview Displays a preview image of the selected file. Browse Displays the Select a Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996), where you can access template files that are not available in the Select a Template list. Template Description Displays a description of the selected template. If you create your own template, you can use the Template Options dialog box on page 1310to specify the text that you want to display here. See the SAVEAS command.
Use a Wizard
Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide. You can choose from two wizards: Quick Setup and Advanced Setup.
Create New Drawing Dialog Box | 977
Quick Setup Displays the Quick Setup wizard on page 978, in which you can specify the units and area for your new drawing. The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale. Advanced Setup Displays the Advanced Setup wizard on page 980, in which you can specify the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area for your new drawing. The Advanced Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale. Wizard Description Displays a description of the selected wizard.
Quick Setup Wizard Quick Reference Toolbar: Standard Menu: File ➤ New Command entry: new Defines the units and area of your drawing.
978 | Chapter 14 N Commands
The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified.
Units Indicates the format in which you enter and in which the program displays coordinates and measurements. Several formats are available. Two of them, Engineering and Architectural, have a specific base unit (inches) assigned to them. You can select from other measurement styles that can represent any convenient unit of measurement. NOTE You control the precision (the number of decimal places displayed in all measurements) by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command. The default precision used by Quick Setup is four (0.0000). Decimal Displays measurements in decimal notation. Engineering Displays measurements in feet and decimal inches. Architectural Displays measurements in feet, inches, and fractional inches. Fractional Displays measurements in mixed-number (integer and fractional) notation. Scientific Displays measurements in scientific notation (numbers expressed in the form of the product of a decimal number between 0 and 10 and a power of 10).
Quick Setup Wizard | 979
Area Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command, this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off with the LIMITS command.
Advanced Setup Wizard Quick Reference Toolbar: Standard Menu: File ➤ New Command entry: new Defines the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area of your new drawing.
The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure, Angle Direction, and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next to navigate between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified. You can later change units, angle, angle measure, and angle direction using the UNITS command, and you can change area using the LIMITS command.
980 | Chapter 14 N Commands
Units Indicates the unit format and precision. The unit format is the format in which you enter and in which the program displays coordinates and measurements. The Units page of the Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats. See Units on page 979 for more information. The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional size for displaying linear measurements.
Angle Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which the program displays angles. Decimal Degrees Displays partial degrees as decimals. Deg/Min/Sec Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds. Grads Displays angles as grads. Radians Displays angles as radians. Surveyor Displays angles in surveyor's units.
Angle Measure Indicates the direction of the 0 angle for the entry of angles. When you enter an angle value, the angle is measured either counter-clockwise or clockwise from the compass direction that you select on this page. You control the counterclockwise/clockwise direction on the Angle Direction page. East Specifies the compass direction east as the 0 angle. North Specifies the compass direction north as the 0 angle. West Specifies the compass direction west as the 0 angle. South Specifies the compass direction south as the 0 angle. Other Specifies a direction other than east, north, west, or south. Enter a specific compass angle to treat as the 0 angle.
Angle Direction Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which the program displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise.
Advanced Setup Wizard | 981
Area Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command, this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off with the LIMITS command.
NEW Command Prompt Quick Reference If you turned off the display of the Create New Drawing dialog box, or if FILEDIA is set to 0, NEW displays the following prompt: Enter template file name or [. (for none)] <current>: Enter a name, enter a period (.), or press ENTER Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 996).
NEWSHEETSET Quick Reference Creates a new sheet set Menu: File ➤ New Sheet Set Command entry: newsheetset The Create Sheet Set wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new sheet set. You can choose to create a new sheet set from existing drawings, or use an existing sheet set as a template on which to base your new sheet set.
982 | Chapter 14 N Commands
NEWSHOT Quick Reference Creates a named view with motion that is played back when viewed with ShowMotion. Menu: View ➤ Named Views Command entry: newshot Displays the New view / Shot Properties dialog box on page 1576 with the Shot Properties tab on page 1581 active.
NEWVIEW Quick Reference Creates a named view with no motion. Menu: View ➤ Named Views Command entry: newview Displays the New view / Shot Properties dialog box on page 1576 with the View Properties tab on page 1578 active.
NEWSHOT | 983
984
O Commands
15
OBJECTSCALE Quick Reference Adds or deletes supported scales for objects
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales. Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Command entry: objectscale (or 'objectscale for transparent use) Shortcut menu: With an annotative object selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales. If you enter objectscale, you are prompted to select annotative objects. Select annotative objects: Use an ‘b selection method The Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box on page 986 is displayed. If you enter -objectscale at the command prompt, options are displayed at the command prompt on page 987.
985
Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box Quick Reference Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales.
Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Command entry: objectscale (or 'objectscale for transparent use) Shortcut menu: With an annotative object selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales. Adds or deletes supported scales for the selected object.
Object Scale List Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object. Scale in Units (Unlabeled) Displays the scale (in units) of the named scale selected in the Object Scale List. List all scales for selected objects Specifies that all scales supported by the selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List. List scales common to all selected objects only Specifies that only the supported scales that are common to all selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List. Add Displays the Add Scales to Object Dialog Box on page 987. Delete Removes the selected scale from the scale list. NOTE The current scale or scales referenced by objects or views cannot be deleted.
986 | Chapter 15 O Commands
Add Scales to Object Dialog Box Quick Reference Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Command entry: objectscale (or 'objectscale for transparent use) Shortcut menu: With an annotative object selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales. Adds a new scale to the selected object.
Scale List Displays the list of scales that can be added to the selected annotative object. Multiple scales can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting the scales. Use the SCALELISTEDIT on page 1316 command to add custom scales to this list.
-OBJECTSCALE Quick Reference If you enter -objectscale at the command prompt, the following OBJECTSCALE command prompts are displayed. Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method Enter an option [Add/Delete] : Enter a or d or press ENTER